FM 7-10 ( Rifle Company Infantry Regiment ) - CIE Hub

_NCf SjFIEDDEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY FIELD MANUALRIFLE COMPANYINFANTRYREGIMENTREGDED UNCLASSIFIED ayAnJQRITYOF DOD DIR. 5200. 1 RDEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY OCTOBER 1949RE )l UNCLASSIFIED

FIELD MANUALFM 7-10C 1RIFLE COMPANY, INFANTRY REGIMENTCHA-NGES1 DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMYNo. 1 | WASHINGTON 25, D. C., 16 October 1950FM 7-10, 3 October 1949, is changed as follows:24. THE ADVANCE PARTYThe advance party ' 'I paces between men.Reinforcements to the advance party may include attached60-mm mortars, 57-mm rifles, machine guns,and tanks. Observers from the * * * the advanceparty.143. DUTIES OF PLATOON HEADQUARTERS PER-SONNELa. (Superseded.) The platoon leader is responsiblefor the training, discipline, control, and tacticalemployment of his platoon. He recommends the useof his platoon to the company commander and controlsits actions through appropriate orders to hissections. He goes where he best can influence theaction of his platoon. However, since the 57-mmrifle and 60-mm mortar squads usually. operate withthe rifle platoons, he acts principally as an advisorto the company commander and rifle platoon leaderson the tactical employment of the weapons platoon.He also supervises the resupply of ammunition byvehicle and hand carry to those weapons of his pla-AGO 1248D-Oct.900066SO--50

NUCASSIIEDtoon which are with the rifle platoons. When elementsof the 57-mm rifle section or 60-mm mortarsection are in general support, or in direct supportof assault rifle platoons, he supervises their employment.* * * * * * *144. DUTIES OF SECTION AND SQUAD LEADERSThe section and squad leaders train and lead themen in their units. They deploy their unit accordingto the platoon, section, or squad mission.: * * * * * *b. The 60-mmn Mortar Section.(1) (Superseded.) When the section occupiesa section position, the section leader assignsgeneral locations and targets or target areasfor his squads; controls the displacementof weapons and supply of ammunition; andcontrols the fire of the squads. When asquad is in direct support of or attached toa rifle platoon, he assists in its ammunitionsupply. He goes where he can best controlthe most appropriate portion of his section.When the section is divided, he will usuallyaccompany the rifle unit receiving the greatestamount of support, or he may accompanyany one of his squads, according to the tac--tical situation. He must always keep incontact with the weapons platoon leader.(2) (Superseded.) The squad leader moves hissquad to its position area, selects and supervisesthe preparation and occupation oftU W2LASSI FEDAGO 1248D

145. CONTROLexact firing positions, and uses his ammunitionbearers to supply ammunition. Whenthe squad is in direct support of, or attachedto a rifle platoon, the squad leader supervisesthe employment of the squad and controls,observes, and adjusts its fire. Whena squad, as part of the mortar section, is ingeneral support of the company, the squadleader either supervises the operation of hissquad, or acts as an observer for the section.* * * * * *b. (Superseded.) In attack, the 57-mm rifle sectionand the 60-mm mortar section may be used ingeneral support of the company to increase the flexibilityof fires and to insure continuity of supportingfires during the displacement. However, because oflimitations of terrain and difficulty in maintainingcontrol, squads of both the 57-mm rifle section andthe 60-mm mortar section usually are placed in directsupport of, or are attached to, the assault rifle platoons.When a squad of the weapons platoon isattached to a rifle platoon, it comes under the commandof the rifle platoon leader. The weapons platoonleader and the section leaders 'aid the rifleplatoon leaders in supplying the squads attached torifle platoons.c. (Superseded.) In defense, 57-mm rifle squadsare usually placed in direct support of the rifle platoonsand occupy positions within platoon defenseareas. When sectors of fire and observation are notAGO 1248D3LASI

limited, the most effective fire and control in defensesituations are obtained by employing the 60-mmmortars in a section position under company control.Then the firing positions normally are in the vicinityof the support platoon. When limited sectors offire and observation from a section position preventcoverage of the company front, the 60-mm mortarsection may be divided, and one or more mortarsplaced within each front-line platoon area.146. CONDUCT OF FIRE* * * * , *b. (Superseded.) The 60-mm mortar squads aregiven definite targets. Planned mortar fires in theattack consist of concentrations. A concentration isthe fire of one or more mortars delivered at a locatedor suspected target. These concentrations cover anarea 50 yards in diameter. In devising a plan offires to support a particular attack, concentrationsmay be planned in advance to be fired on call asneeded. When a 60-mm mortar squad is operatingwith an assault rifle platoon, the squad leader designatesthe targets and conducts the fire of his squadas required by the supported rifle platoon. Thenumber and type of targets and target areas arelimited to those that one squad can effectively engage.When the 60-mm mortar section is in general support,squads are assigned and engage targets or targetareas as directed by the section leader.147. OBSERVATION* * * * *b. (Superseded.) Observation for the squads ofthe 60-mm mortar section is obtained by the use of4 _ AGO 1248D

squad or section observation posts. A suitable observationpost is the chief requirement for a mortarposition; hence, the observation post is selected first.A mortar position that is within 100 yards of theobservation post is preferable. However, if themortar position cannot be located this close to theobservation post, the observation post should be locatedwithin 100 yards of the mortar-target line. Ineither case, this allows the observer to make adjustmentsas though he were on the mortar-target line.When the observation post is more than 100 yardsfrom the mortar-target line the mortar should bemoved to another position to correct this situation.When the terrain or the situation prevents the observationpost being within 100 yards of the mortartargetline, the observer adjusts along the observertargetline (target-grid method) or he attempts tovisualize the mortar-target line and adjust with respectto it. The observation post should give observationover the supported units' zone of action,provide cover and concealment and have a coveredroute of approach. When a mortar squad is operatingwith a rifle platoon, the squad leader establisheshis observation post where he can watch the action ofthe rifle platoon, and observe and adjust fire on targetsin the platoon zone of action. Communicationbetween the mortar squad leader and the rifle platoonleader is by voice, signal, or radio. Communicationbetween the mortar squad leader and his squad is byvoice, signal, or may be by sound-powered telephone.When the mortar squads are in general support ofthe company, their fires are controlled by the sectionAGO 1248D 5

leader from a section observation post that providesobservation of the company zone of action. Communicationbetween the section leader-observer andthe mortar squad leaders at the mortar positions isby voice, signal, sound-powered telephone, or radio.148. AMMUNITION SUPPLYa. (Superseded.) Three of the four 1/4-ton weaponscarriers assigned to the company may be used totransport weapons and ammunition. These threevehicles normally carry identical mixed loads ofammunition. They operate from the company ammunitionsupply point. Two weapons carriers normallysupply the assault platoons and their attachedelements with all types of ammunition. The thirdweapons carrier may be available to supply the 60-mmmortar section and the 57-mm rifle section when theyare employed in general support.b. (Superseded.) In the assembly area or in theattack position, the weapons and the initial ammunitionsupply for the 57-mm rifle section and 60-mmmortar section are usually unloaded from the platoonweapons carriers for hand carry in the attack. Indefense situations, the weapons and the initial supplyof ammunition are unloaded at the firing position.Ammunition is resupplied by ammunitionbearers who return to a company supply point andhand carry the ammunition forward to the firingposition. Often ammunition can be delivered by vehicleto the vicinity of the firing position.e. (Delete.)6 * *1248D6 _ AGO 124SD

152. APPROACH MARCHThe company commander * * * the rifleunits. A 60-mm mortar squad and a 57-mm riflesquad accompany the advance party of the supportcompany of the advance guard.155. TROOP LEADING PROCEDURE* * *b. The weapons platoon * * * of the platoon.Unless the company commander has specified theoff-carrier position for the weapons, the platoonleader selects this position while on reconnaissance.c. (Superseded.) When elements of the weaponsplatoon are attached to rifle platoons, each sectionleader supervises the attachment of his squads. Forsquads not attached, he selects position areas, assignstargets or sectors of fire, and provides for ammunitionsupply.d. (Superseded.) When the 60-mm mortars arein general support, the 60-mm mortar section leader,after receiving the platoon leader's order, goes aheadof his section to the position area. He notes the locationof the front-line troops and his targets ortarget areas. When he has selected the general locationfor his weapons and cover positions, he movesthe squads and their weapons from the off-carrierposition to the firing positions.156. TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT* * * * * *b. (Superseded.) In attack, the 60-mm mortarsquads are usually placed in direct support of, or at-AGo 1245D D 7

tached to, the assault rifle platoons. A squad notallocated to an assault rifle platoon may be keptunder company control ill general support and usedwith the support platoon when it is employed. Whenobservation and fire from one position area can coverthe entire company zone up to and including theinitial objective, the 60-mm mortar section may beemployed as a unit in general support of the company.During the attack, the mortars fire, on call, at targetsholding up the advance of the assault platoons. Eachmortar usually displaces when its fires no longercan give close support. After the objective is captured,the mortar squads protect the reorganizationof the company, and aid in breaking up hostile counterattackswith their fires.157. SELECTION OF FIRING POSITIONS* * * * * * *b. Desirable characteristics for 60-mm mortar firingpositions include-* * i * * * *(4) Dispersion between mortars occupying asection position to prevent two mortarpositions from being hit by one enemy shell.Dispersion is limited by voice or visualcontrol.(6) (Added.) Close proximity to a suitable observationpost (preferably located so thatthe mortar position is within 100 yards ofthe observation post).8 R~U~lrr~R AGO 1248D

159. ORDERS* * * * * *c. Each squad leader * * * the first target.Squad leaders of the 57-mm rifle squads and 60-mmmortar squads attached to rifle platoons get theirorders from the rifle platoon leader.160. MOVEMENT INTO FIRING POSITIONSa. The weapons, ammnnition, and accessories ofthe 57-min rifle section and the 60-mm mortar sectionare moved by weapons carrier from the assemblyarea to the attack position, if practicable. Otherwise,the weapons * * " covered and concealed.When not resupplying ammunition, ammunitionbearers remain under cover near the firing position.b. (Superseded.) Since 60-mn mortars normallyare fired from defilade, they usually move by vehiclefrom the assembly area to an off-carrier position locatedas close to the position area as the situationpermits. The weapons, accessories, and initial supplyof ammunition are unloaded and hand-carriedto exact firing positions selected by the squad leaders.The squad leaders supervise the preparation and occupationof the firing position. Ammunition bearersare dispersed near the firing position when'not resupplyingammunition.161. SUPPORTING FIRES DURING THE ATTACK* * ** *b. (Superseded.) The squads of the 60-mm mortarsection do not normally participate in prepara-AGO 1248DO

tory firing unless the fires of other supporting weaponsare insufficient. Targets may be assigned to beengaged on call. When a mortar squad is in directsupport of, or attached to, an assault rifle platoon,the squad occupies an initial firing position near theline of departure where it can cover the platoon zone.The squad engages targets as requested or directedby the rifle platoon leader. When the fires of themortar squad endanger the rifle platoon as it nearsthe target area, the fires are lifted to more distanttargets or shifted to targets located on the flanks.Mortar squads, in general support of the company,fire at suitable targ as directed by the companycommander, the weapmor platoon leader, or the sectionleader. During the assault, the fires are deliveredat appropriate targets to the flanks or beyondthe objective.162. DISPLACEMENT* * * * * * *e. (Superseded.) The 60-mm mortar section andsquad leaders continuously make plans for displacement.They closely observe the progress of the assaultrifle platoons, and anticipate the need to displacein order to furnish adequate fire support. Newpositions and covered routes thereto are selected byvisual and personal reconnaissance. A displacementis made as rapidly as possible. When a squad is operatingwith a rifle platoon, the supported platoonleader may direct the displacement. Often the squadleader, on his own initiative, displaces his squad whenadequate fire support is no longer possible from the10 _ AGO 1248D

old position or more effective fire support can be deliveredfrom a new position. WVhen squads are ingeneral support of the company, they displace bysquad echelon, one or two at a time, under supervisionof the section leader. If possible, weapons and ammunitionare moved by vehicle; however, when thereis no other choice, they are moved by hand-carry,163. REORGANIZATIONa. (Superseded.) As soon as the hostile positionis captured, or the attack is halted for any reason,weapons are placed in positions which protect thefront and flanks of the assault rifle platoons againsta counterattack. Squads in direct support of, orattached to, the assault rifle platoons occupy positionsin the platoon areas. Squads in general supportof the company are placed to cover the mostlikely avenues of approach in the company zone ofaction (fig. 43). The mortars are registered immediatelyand concentrations are recorded.* * * * *; *165. SELECTION OF POSITIONS* * : * * *c. When sectors of * * the support platoon.-* * * * * *168. POSITION OF LEADERS* * * **c. Squad Leaders.* : * * * * *AGO 124SD 11

(2) (Superseded.) When a mortar squad is indirect support of, or attached to, a frontlinerifle platoon, the squad leader supervisesthe employment of the squad and controls,observes, and adjusts its fires. Whenthe mortar squads are in a section positionin general support of the company, themortar squad leaders assist in fire control.210. NIGHT ATTACK FORMATION* * * *b. (Superseded.) A rifle company may make anight attack alone or as one of the assault companiesof a battalion attack. In either case, its assault isusually made with all three rifle platoons abreast inorder to obtain maximum fire power and shock action.However, when a support is held out, it movesas directed by the company commander. It mayfollow closely the assault echelon or it may be leftin rear of the line of departure to be brought forwardby guides or on a signal. It may have the missionof mopping up or giving normal support. If nosupport is held out, one is designated immediatelyafter the objective is captured.230. ASSIGNMENT OF CROSSING MEANSa. If the company is in the battalion assault echelon,enough assault or storm boats or other crossingcraft are provided to move the entire company withattachments in one trip (fig. 52).12 AGO 124SD

4 'h l .. . I./. ,'4 ' 4/ r ) ,, ' , ;-.... RIVERBOAT BOAT ._ BOAT BOATNO 4 NO S NO 2 NO IRIFLE RIFLE_ WP9I RIFLESQ UAD SQUAD SQUAD -57-MM - S7-MM PLAT LDR PLAT SOT -RAGO 1248D R SD MR ANASST PLATSOTAGO12SD1AGO 1248D) I lll 13

140ENEMYBOAT GROUP BOAT GROUP BOAT GROUPNO 3 NO 2 NO IRIFLE PLATUN7-MM SQUADRIFLE PLATOON RIFLEPLATOON57-MM SQUAD O 5-MM so[[ l\; ,. . ' HO 4+"TNLAOON (-) · L 'I, ,,, : t_ -, ~ ATTACHMENTS HV WPNS CoNO II Go I\ AOIVIDED INTO BOATGROUPS AND SUBDIVIDEDINTO BOAT TEAMS PRIORTO LEAVING ASSEMBLYAREALEGENDI ASSAULT BOAT WITH CREWBOAT GROUPFROMFigure 52. (Superseded.) Movement to a river, showing attackposition and a typical organization of boat groups.14 AGO 1248D

. Tactical unity within * * * is as follows:(1) Leading zwave. Assault platoons (with attachments)and forward observers from the81-mm mortar p]atoon.* * * * *232. FORMATION FOR THE CROSSING(Superseded)The rifle company usually crosses with the threerifle platoons abreast, each reinforced with a 57-mmrifle squad. Company aid men are attached to eachplatoon. The remainder of the weapons platoon,the company command group, and all attachmentsto the company normally cross in the second wave.Immediately after crossing, the squads of the 60-mmmortar section are usually placed in direct supportof, or attached to, assault-rifle platoons.243. PLANS* * ** * * uo. Supporting Fires. (Superseded.) Because ofcontrol, coordination, and observation difficulties,weapons, such as heavy machine guns, 57-mm and75-mm rifles, 60-mm mortars, and tanks, frequentlyare attached to the assault rifle platoons. Effectiveuse of tanks depends primarily on the visibility inthe woods and the presence of roads and trails. Inthis type of combat, tanks are protected closely byfoot elements. Limited observation and the presenceof tree masks reduce the effectiveness of close supportby artillery. Consequently, the use of 60-mm and81-mm mortars from open spaces in the woods assumesadded importance.* 1 * _ * *AGO 1245D W ED 15

·eo4-soSOUND POWERED TELEPHONEONTYPE RIFLE COMPANY WIRE NET WITH MORTARSATTACHED TO RIFLE PLATOONS4o .4.60MORTARS IN GENERAL SUPPORTFigure 71. (SuTyperifle company wire net.16 R RS SUPPORTAG SGENERLmGO 12o48D16 R E Al[ImI-

404. CONDUCT OF THE ATTACKf. (Superseded.) As in any attack, supportingweapons give continuous close support to the assaultechelon. They also are prepared to fire on dangerousapproaches into the flanks and rear. Artilleryand 81-mm mortar observers move with the companyAGO 1248D 1245D3·P I 17

to coordinate and adjust the fires requested by thecompany commander. The 60-mm mortar squadsusually accompany the assault platoons. To simplifycontrol during the landing, the reorganization,and the initial attack, battalion supporting weaponsmay be attached to the company for these periods,and company supporting weapons may be attachedto assault platoons.* * * * * * *APPENDIX VITRAINING PROGRAM* * * * * *1. GENERAL(Superseded)Section II. SQUAD PHASEThe training program for the rifle squad is outlinedin paragraph 2, this section. A program isnot outlined for the other squads of the company(weapons, 57-mm rifle, and 60-mm mortar) becausethey ordinarily are not used as independent units.The rocket launcher team and the light machinegun team of the weapons squad usually operatewith elements of the rifle platoon and on divergentmissions; the 57-mm rifle squad and the 60-mm mortarsquad ordinarily are placed in direct support ofor attached to a rifle platoon. In the squad phase,these elements are given training which preparesthem to operate efficiently during the platoon phase.18 1 Caaa248D

This training includes as much of the following asis applicable to the various squads:a. Selection, occupation, and organization of positionsin normal terrain, in woods, and in towins.b. Preparation of range cards.c. Establishment of observation posts.d. Use of communication.e. Ammunition supply.f. Displacement.g. Night occupation of positions.h. Night movement.1. GENERALSection III. PLATOON PHASE** * * :*:b. (Superseded.) The squads of the 60-mm mortarsection train with the rifle platoons in theirnormal role of direct support or attachment. Atraining program for the 60-mm mortar section isoutlined in paragraph 3, this section. Of its totaltime (64 hours), 32 hours are allotted to the sectionfor independent training, and 32 hours are allottedfor combined training with. rifle platoons. Thesquads of the 60-nmm mortar section function in directsupport of rifle platoons or are attached to rifle platoonsduring specified field exercises.[AG 300.7 (29 Se1 50)]AGO 1248D l9 1.

BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF TIIE ARMY:OFFICIAL:EDWARD F. WITSELLMajor General, USAThe Adjutant GeneralJ. LAWTON COLLINSChief of Staff,United States ArmyDISTRIBUTION:Tech Svc (2); Arm &. Svc Bd (1); AA Comd(2); OS Maj Comd (2); MDW (2); A (20);CHQ (2); D (10) except 17 (2) ; B (2); R 7,71 (10) ; Bn 7, 71 (5) ; C 7, 71 (3) ; Sch (10)except USMA (50); PMS&T (1); Tng Cen(3); T/O & E 7-17N (10); 7-37N (10).For explanation of distribution formula, see SP,310-90-1.20 AGO 124SDU. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1950

UNCLASSIREDREccurity Infortmy jlFIELD MANUALFM 7-10C 3RIFLE COMPANY, INFANTRY REGIMENTCHANGES DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMYNo. 3 I WASHINGTON 25, D. C., 3 December 1952FM 7-10, 3 October 1949, is changed as follows:The term "reserve squad" or "reserve platoon" issubstituted for the term "support squad" or "supportplatoon" throughout this manual in all instances inwhich the term is used as a designation for one ofthe rifle squads or rifle platoons of the rifle company.4. ORGANIZATION(Superseded)a. The rifle company (T/O&E 7-17) is the basicinfantry fighting unit with tactical, administrative,and supply functions. Its organization (fig. 1) ischaracterized by its triangular structure. There arethree identical rifle platoons which can be employedin different combinations to find and fix, to maneuver,and to close with the enemy and destroy or capturehim. In addition to these three elements, there is aweapons platoon which furnishes close fire supportto the rifle platoons and a company headquarters.b. The company headquarters is organized forcombat into a command group and an administrativegroup. The command group consists of the companycommander, executive officer, first sergeant,company clerk, communications sergeant, radio op-TAGO 1814C-Dec.200482°-52,O-1UNCLASSIFRED

I llLe c urity infio onerators, messengers, and an orderly. The administrativegroup consists of a warrant officer administrator,mess personnel, supply sergeant, and an armorer.Filler personnel are distributed as needed.9. TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT(Superseded)a. Upon receiving the battalion order, the rifle companycommander makes his own plan. This planis based upon his mission, his evaluation of the enemy,and a detailed study of the terrain from a map, onthe ground and, when practicable, from the air.Critical terrain features such as ridges and highground are seized at the earliest opportunity andutilized to further the operation. Frontal attacksare avoided whenever possible. As a general concept,a commander must seize the dominant terrainif he expects to impose his will on the enemy.b. Attacks to secure dominating terrain shouldgenerally be made along the ridge lines running intothe dominating position rather than up the drawsor ravines leading into the position. By attackingup the ridge lines, the attacker gains successivelyhigher ground for observation and for the locationof his fire support units.c. Zones of action or sectors indicated by boundariesbetween units must be established in such amaimer as to favor maneuver and to insure that thedominating terrain or other key feature, such as asmall village, lies within the boundaries of a singleunit.2 l vTAGO 181iC

RE _1- Security I 1Mfd. The company commander coordinates the actionsof his platoons, and plans the fires of his organicand attached weapons. He requests fires from othersupporting weapons to assist the advance of hismaneuvering elements and to destroy the enemy inhis zone of action or area of responsibility. Henotifies the battalion commander of major decisionsand frequently reports his company location andprogress.11. COMPANY HEADQUARTERSa. Conmmand Group.* * * * *(7) (Rescinded)(8) (Superseded) The company messengers aretrained to install, operate, and maintain allitems of communication equipment in thecompany. They must be capable of operatingswitchboards and serving as linemen.One messenger drives a company headquartersvehicle, one is stationed at the companycommand post, and one operates from thebattalion command post.(9) (Superseded) The orderly drives the companycommander's vehicle and is alsotrained to operate company communicationequipment.* * * * *TAGO 1814Cfl''s-L4%aE

AR•D--Seourity InfWiron14. GENERALc. (Added) During all ground movement in thecombat zone, the company should be prepared forenemy ground and air action. The disposition of acolumn often decides the outcome of an engagement.37. ASSEMBLY AREASe. In the assembly area, individuals and units usenatural cover and concealment for protectionfrom aerial and ground observation. Individualsuse existing holes or ditches, or they dig slittrenches. The primary activity * * * rationsare issued. (See fig. 7).38. ATTACK POSITIONS(Superseded)a. The attack position is the last covered and concealedposition occupied by the assault units beforecrossing the line of departure. The assault companycommander selects the attack position after the battalioncommander prescribes the line of departure.He bases his selection on the terrain and the plan ofattack. When the need for special coordinationmakes it necessary, the battalion commander, ratherthan the company commander, may select the attackposition. In addition to providing cover from smallarms fire and concealment from both ground andaerial observation, the attack position should facilitatethe movement to the line of departure and, where4 WIND TAGO 1814C

lgll9-security Infiy ujlapossible, be large enough to accommodate the entirecompany in the initial formation which the companycommander intends to adopt for the attack. Assaultplatoon attack positions and the initial position of thereserve platoon are located within this area and aredesignated by the company commander in generalterms to conform to his plan of maneuver. The exactlocation of each platoon within the designated areais selected by the platoon leader.b. Attack positions are occupied for the minimumtime required for deployment, coordination, and lastminute preparations for the attack. When the situationand the terrain permit, vehicles may be broughtforward to the attack position with any requiredheavy equipment or weapons, However, vehiclesshould remain in the assembly area, initially, if theirmovement forward will jeopardize secrecy. Themovement forward to the attack position by the assaultelements may be under either battalion orcompany control.47. SNIPING(Superseded)a. Snipers are specially trained riflemen, who areexpert marksmen as well as expert infantrymen.Their mission is to kill key enemy personnel, weakenthe enemy's resistance and morale, and assist intelligenceagencies by timely reports of enemy activities.For data on the equipment and training of snipers,see FM 21-75.b. The unit commander may employ the snipers inhis unit as a group, in pairs, or individually.TAGO 1814C 5

AbCR D--Securit lJ~WnvwgSnipers may continue sniping and intelligence tasksduring darkness when they are equipped with electronicnight firing and viewing equipment.c. Snipers are best used in pairs, especially whenoperating from a stationary post. Thus they areable to alternate as killer and observer. When largesectors must be covered and frequent movement isnecessary, it may be more practical for snipers tooperate singly. Firing positions should be selectedthat take advantage of available cover and concealmentwith particular attention to fields of fire. Theroutes to these positions must be considered in relationto the visibility at the time the routes will beused. Snipers engage such profitable targets asenemy officers and noncommissioned officers, observers,snipers, weapons crews, and communication personnel.Targets will be most plentiful when theenemy relaxes his guard, such as at dawn, at dusk,on moonlight nights, and at mealtimes.d. In the attack, snipers normally operate as membersof their organic squads, but at times it may bedesirable for the company commander or platoonleader to use them singly or in pairs. They may beused to the rear of or on the flanks of the assaultrifle platoons. When so employed, they seek anyappropriate target which is holding up the attack.In the assault phase, snipers select such targets askey personnel, pillbox or bunker embrasures, andweapons crews. During reorganization they occupypositions from which they can kill the leaders ofthe enemy counterattack.6 TAGO 1814C

_iijD-sSecurijrite. In the defense, snipers normally occupy preparedand camouflaged positions and operate in pairsas stationary observers and snipers. When observationis restricted or large areas of responsibility areassigned, it may be more desirable for them to operateas mobile snipers. In such cases, they usually operatesingly.f. When snipers are operating under companycontrol, their positions and activities are coordinatedwith the rifle platoon leader in whose area they operate.Snipers operating under company. controlare assigned definite sectors of responsibility, withthe size of the .sector depending upon the unit frontage,the presence of dangerous avenues of approach,likely enemy observation posts and firing positions,and suitable sniper positions. In retrograde movements,snipers remain on the position as long as possibleto cover the withdrawal of their unit.g. Snipers may accompany patrols whenever itis considered necessary by the unit commander.Normally they are used for the protection of thepatrol. The snipers operate within the patrol formation,and in the event the enemy engages thepatrol, the snipers assist the patrol in breaking contactby moving away from the vicinity of the patroland taking the enemy under fire, thus allowing thepatrol to continue with its mission. The snipers rejointhe patrol as soon as the resistance is neutralized.h. Because of his special training and the observationafforded by his firing position, the sniper canmake a valuable contribution to intelligence agencies.He can also call for and adjust other fires onTAGO 1814C 7

%LFTlW--Security 11profitable targets. Intelligence officers should assistin the briefing of snipers prior to their movementinto position, and it may be appropriate at timesto interrogate them after they are relieved. However,the primary mission of the sniper is to killthe enemy, and his use as an intelligence agent issecondary.61. GENERALBefore the attack * * and enemy fire. Menuse existing holes or ditches or they dig slit trenches.67. DUTIES OF SQUAD MEMBERS* * * * *b. The r/flemen move * * them by fire.The squad sniper acts as a rifleman in the squadunless he is given a special sniping mission.73. REORGANIZATIONAs soon as * * * the platoon objective. Thesquad leader checks his squad for casualties, the conditionof weapons, and the status of ammunition.He redesignates key * * * continuing the attack.79. SELECTION OF FIRING POSITIONS* * * * *c. (Added) The squad sniper may function as amember of his squad or of a special sniping teamunder the control of a platoon leader or the companycommander. In the absence of special instructions,t8 TAGO 1814C

t clul~lCSecurity 1nratifothe squad leader employs the sniper in the samemanner as the other riflemen.79.1 CONCEALMENT(Added)a. Each firing position (including alternate andsupplementary positions) must be concealed andcamouflaged by the individuals occupying the position.For additional information, see FM 5-20 andFM 5-20A. The squad leader must supervise hismen closely to make sure that unnecessary noiseor movement does not disclose their position. Takethe following actions to facilitate concealment:(1) Stay within shadowed areas whenever possible.(2) Utilize branches and leaves to break up theoutline of individuals, weapons, and equipment.(3) Break up solid areas of color and blendthem with the natural surroundings.(4) Conceal mess gear, range cards, and allother light-colored or glittering objects.Darken faces and hands to avoid detectionby enemy snipers.(5) Hide fresh earth uncovered while diggingfoxholes and weapon emplacements.Change the regular outline of foxholes andemplacements by camouflaging them withnatural material.b. Enforce strict camouflage discipline at all timesto make sure that positions remain concealed. Giveparticular attention to the following:-AGO 1814C 9TAGO 1814C 200482°-52-2

-- IU$E Security NW(1) Use existing paths and roads if possible.If it becomes necessary to move acrosscountry, remove or conceal all evidence ofthe movement.(2) Fresh earth and refuse should be buried orhidden. Constant supervision by squadleaders is necessary to make sure thatrefuse, such as ration and ammunition containers,does not disclose the location of theposition.(3) The over-all appearance of the groundshould not be changed.82. CONDUCT OF THE DEFENSE* * * * *d. When the attacking * * * of the tanks.Men resume their firing positions as soon as thetanks pass, and they fire on approaching foot troops.Maximum effort is * * * from the tanks.84. ORGANIZATION(Superseded)The weapons squad consists of two light machinegun teams under the command of a squad leader.Each team consists of a gunner, an assistant gunner,and two ammunition bearers.85. DUTIES OF LEADERSa. The weapons squad leader * * * from theplatoon leader. The rocket launcher * $ *which it operates.* * * * *10 TAGO 1814C

_jiiS ecurity I93. GENERALBefore the attack * * observation and fire.Men use holes and ditches or dig slit trenches. Whenan enemy * * leader's attack order.98. TARGETSa. Appropriate targets for the light machine gunare crew-served weapons, small groups of enemy,pillbox embrasures, and lightly armored vehicles.Enemy whose general * * * machine gun fire.In built-up areas, light machine guns are usedagainst definitely located targets in buildings andto deny the use of streets to the enemy.* * * * *110. ORGANIZATION(Superseded)The organization of the rifle platoon, like the riflecompany, is characterized by its triangular structure'It has three identical rifle squads and, in addition,there is a weapons squad and a platoon headquarters.The platoon is commanded by a lieutenant(platoon leader) who is assisted by a platoon sergeant,an assistant platoon sergeant, and two messengers.A rocket launcher team of four men is alsoin the platoon headquarters and an aid man is normallyattached. The organization of the platoon isdesigned for maximum efficiency in fixing the enemyby fire, closing with him by maneuver, and killingor capturing him by a combination of fire, maneuver,and shock action.TAoO 1814C - I1

_(gJl) - 3-Securit, M124. TROOP LEADING PROCEDURE* * * * *c. Reconnaissance.* * * * *(5) Avenues of approach. Studies the terrain* * * of the platoon. He avoidsa route which prematurely masks direct firesupporting weapons but strives to select anapproach along a dominant terrain feature(ridge, high ground). Determineswhich avenues * * * provides bettercover.d. Estimate of the Situation.* * * * *(2) Decides upon his method of attack whichwill include how, when, and where he willemploy his fire support, his maneuveringforce and his reserve.* * * *125. METHOD OF ATTACKa. (Superseded)(1) In any attack the first thing the platoonhas to do, unless it is already in close contactwith the enemy, is to find the enemy andto pin him down or fix him in position. Oneelement of the platoon must find and fixthe enemy in place and hold his attention sothat a second element can maneuver againsthim. While this is being done, the maneu-12 TAGO 1814C

_(Jij -SSecu urlver can be against one or the other flank ofthe enemy; or, if the enemy is widely dispersed,the platoon leader may decide tohit him in the middle. Usually, however,this maneuver should be around one flankor the other. A reserve squad is designatedfor the purpose of exploiting the maneuveror to drive home the attack. Each squadis given a specific mission and is committedat the proper time by the platoon leader tofurther the attack of the platoon. Theplatoon leader must be prepared at all timesto counter any unexpected enemy action.(2) The platoon advances from the line of departureto the assault position by fire andmaneuver. In addition to the heavy indirectfires furnished by the artillery andmortars, the platoon is supported by its ownweapons and by many others. These includethe 57-mm rifles from the weaponsplatoon, the machine guns and 75-mm riflesfrom the heavy weapons company, and attimes the fires of a tank platoon.* * * * *f. Timely coordination of * * * in infantrycombat. The termination of supporting fires is indicatedto the riflemen of the assault echelon by avisual signal fired by the assault squads or by thesupporting unit. Squads not already * * * endangerfriendly troops.TAGO 1814C 13

126. ORDERS(Fig. 36.)a. The platoon leader * * * includes thefollowing:· $ * * *(3) Line or area * * * on the objective.The platoon leader may also include specialinstructions to the sniper teamsordered by the company commander tooperate in his area.* * * * *128. CONDUCT OF THE ATTACKa. The principles outlined * * * and moverapidly. When the assault elements are within assaultingdistance of the objective, the supportingfires are lifted on call by the platoon leader, or thecompany or battalion commander. Then the advance* * * direct-fire weapons.* * * * *c. Advance Against Short-Range Firesa(2) Specific targets holding up the advance arepointed out to the leaders of supportingweapons units, accompanying forward observers,the snipers, and to the companycommander. At the same * * * theother elements· * . * * *14 i _ TAGO 1814C

lg-llll be-Seouri ~129. ASSAULT* * * *b. As the supporting * * * and recoillessrifles. Snipers will select targets such as key personnel,pillbox or bunker embrasures, and weaponscrews. Snipers should operate to the rear orflanks of the assault rifle platoon. Ammunition isused * * * the next objective.130. REORGANIZATIONa. The platoon leader's * * * their assignedlocations. Snipers are placed in a position thatwill enable them to kill the key enemy personnelleading a counterattack. The platoon leader* * * meet enemy resistance.* * * * *135. FRONTAGE AND DEPTH* * * * *c. (Superseded) Platoons should endeavor toachieve maximum depth possible to add strength tothe position and aid in limiting penetrations. Supplementarypositions are usually necessary in orderto provide all around defense. Therefore, dependenton the terrain and any need for supplementary positions,the depth of the platoon area may vary from50 to 200 yards.TAGO 1814C

a~,137. FIRE PLANii JLecu mcrity ]NIqARIWa. The rifle platoon leader * * * of his area.He also procures a map or overlay which showsmortar and artillery concentrations by positionsand designating numbers. When time and * * *of the platoon.* * * * *139. ORGANIZATION OF GROUNDa. The organization of * * * permit effectivefire. The company order states the sequence andtime limit in which the tasks are done. Thissequence is-* * * * *140. CONDUCT OF THE DEFENSE* * * * *d. It usually is * * * local security elements.Once contact is gained, movement within theposition at night is held to the minimum.181. SUPPORTING FIRES(App. IV.)* * * * *f. (Added) Close Air Support. The infantryregimental and battalion commanders, with forwardair controllers, will include the use of close air support,if available, in the fire support plan. Weatherlimitations may deny a commander the use of airsupport even though it is available and included inthe planning. The control of air strikes is accom-16 I' TAGO 1814C

!our! --- Seurittl lllllplished by the ward air controller. Because theforward air controller is normally located in, or incommunication with, the battalion or regimental firesupport coordination center, he may be assisted inthe control of air strikes by artillery forward observerswith front line rifle companies. For detailspertaining to close air support, see section VI,appendix IV.185. ORDERSa. The company commander * * * companyorder includes-* * * * *(3) Specific instructions for each assault rifleplatoon, for the weapons platoon, for attachedelements, and for snipers.* * * * *199. COMMITTING THE RESERVE(Superseded)When the battalion commander decides to committhe reserve company and it is impractical forhim to assign a line of departure, he will prescribe anarea from which the reserve company is to launch itsattack and have the company commander select andreport a line of departure. The battalion commanderalso prescribes the objective, a tentative time ofattack, the direction or zone of attack, and anychanges in the battalion plan of fire support. He coordinatesother elements of the battalion so that thereserve will not have to wait in the area of departureonce it has arrived there, and so that its attack coin-TAGO 1814C 200482°-- 17

Mpm surity lpcides with the effort that is to be made by the remainderof the battalion. When the reserve arrivesin the forward area, the company commander reportsthat fact to the battalion commander and preparesto launch the attack.206. RECONNAISSANCE FOR A NIGHT ATTACK(Superseded)Daylight reconnaissance by all leaders is highlydesirable before all night operations, and is essentialfor a night attack against a well-organized defensiveposition. It is supplemented by reconnaissance patrolsduring darkness, and by the study of maps andaerial photographsa To preserve secrecy, it may benecessary to limit reconnaissance212. NIGHT ATTACK POSITIONSThe last minute * * * in an attack position.This position is usually selected by the assaultcompany commander during his daylight reconnaissancebut may be designated by the battalioncommander if the need for coordination with otherfriendly forces in the area dictates this procedure.The attack position * * * and preservesecrecy.214. ROUTES TO OBJECTIVE(Superseded)Routes to the objective are carefully selected. Thecommander weighs the advantage of ease of controlgained by selecting a route which follows easily18 TAGO 1814C

.Seurity Irecogni(roads, fence4 streamlines,and similar terrain features) against the disadvantagesof the possibility that the enemy's locationsand prearranged fires cover these landmarks or otherobvious routes of approach.230. ASSIGNMENT OF CROSSING MEANS* * * * *b. Tactical unity within * * * is as follows:(1) (Superseded) Leading wave. Assaultplatoons (with attachments).(2) (Superseded) Second wave. Company commandgroup, weapons platoon (less detachments),support platoon (if any), attachmentsfrom the heavy weapons company;and artillery, heavy mortar company, and81-mm mortar platoon forward observers.236. SUPPORT OF CROSSINGa. Air, artillery, heavy * * * the far side.The commander's order may include the organizationand tactical employment of special sniperteams. Snipers may be employed either as agroup, in teams, or individually. They shouldoccupy their positions prior to the crossing and,upon completion of the crossing, rejoin theirunits.TAGO 1814C 19

l~llSe'uriyurity241. GENERAe* * * * $'b. (Superseded) When woods are attacked frontally,the attack consists of three phases:(1) Attack of and reorganization within thenear edge.(2) Advance through the woods.(3) Exit from the far edge.244. CONDUCT OF ATTACKa. Seizure of the * * * any other attack.While the reorganization in the near edge of thewoods takes place, the company commander issuesany necessary additional instructions for the advancethrough the woods. The company starts* * * on an azimuth.* * * * *251. ORGANIZATION FOR A SUPPORTED NIGHT RAIDThe company commander * * * with automaticweapons. Snipers, if equipped with nightviewing and firing devices, should be employedwith the assault party. Support parties normally* * * of the company.263. GENERALd. The size of * * * a large group. On theother hand, units as large as a rifle company may bedirected to infiltrate through the enemy lines and20 TAGO 1814C

attack the rear of the hostile position. A coordinatedfrontal assault by another unit may be usedin this type of operation.* * * * *273. RIFLE COMPANY DEFENSE ORDERg. Priority of construction and time limit inwhich tasks are to be completed.* * * * *n, (Added) Patrol plan.276. BOUNDARIESThe battalion commander * * * responsibility,or depth. Boundaries must be establishedso as to favor the defense and to insure thatcritical terrain features (ridges, high ground)and avenues of approach are the responsibilityof a single unit.279. LOCATION OF FRONT-LINE PLATOONThe width of * * * blocks that approach, Toprovide sniper coverage for the entire area, snipersare assigned definite sectors of responsibility.The size of the sector depends on the frontagecovered by a unit, the presence of dangerous avenuesof approach, terrain suitable for enemy observationposts and suitable sniper positions.Snipers select positions which provide best availablecover and concealment, and they pay specialattention to fields of fire. The routes to these4.l ~~ t21rTAGO 1814C 200482-5 ---- 4

our!positions must be considered in relation to theconditions of visibility that will prevail whenthese routes are used.280. DISPOSITION OF RESERVE PLATOONa. The primarymisson * * * the battle position.Snipers of the reserve platoon may be detachedfrom their squads and employed as teamswithin the battle position.* * * * *284. COMMAND POSTThe company command * * * battalion commandpost. The command post is so organizedthat it will function as a coordination center withor without the presence of the commanding officer.285. ORGANIZATION OF GROUNDa. The 'organization of * * * and facilitiesavailable. The battalion order gives the sequenceand time limit in which the tasks are executed.These may include-* · * * *c. Organization of exposed * * * postponeduntil darkness. Overhead cover is constructed forfoxholes and emplacements for protection againstenemy fire and friendly close-in artillery andmortar fires.22 TAGO 1814C

R289. CONDUCT OF DEFENSEsourecura. As the enemy * * * the outpost positionsThe snipers employed with the general and combatoutposts remain on position as long as practicable,covering the withdrawal of these outpostsinto the battle position.* $ * $ *c. When the massed * * * the battalion commander.Snipers can often prepare and camouflageadequate primary and secondary positionsfrom which they can operate to prevent removalof obstacles in front of the main line of resistanceand to kill the leaders in the enemy attack.* * * * *e. When the attacking * * * crushing actionof the tanks. They resume their firing positions assoon as the tanks pass and fire on the rear of thetanks. Defenders also fire * * * other attackingtanks.* * * * *A. The conduct of a night defense resembles thatof a day defense except that it is characterized bymore close-in fighting and less movement withinthe position. It can be * * * locating thesetargets.290. RELIEFa. If the defense is prolonged or if units on thebattle position have suffered heavy casualties,periodic relief of units in the line may be made. Thefront-line * * * executed at night.·* * *TAGO 1814C 23

312. DEFENSE IN WOODSDefense in woods * ** * infiltratetheposition.A distinct advantage can be gained when snipersare employed in woods. Because of their specializedtraining they can deny to the enemy theuse of certain areas, disrupt his communications,and act as observers335. COVERING FORCE FOR NIGHT WITHDRAWALa. The strength and * * * forward rifle companies.Snipers, if equipped with the night viewingand firing devices, operate in the same manneras for a daylight withdrawal (par. 342d). As soonas * * battalion rear area.342. DAYLIGHT WITHDRAWALd. Supporting weapons in * * * platoons forthe withdrawal. Snipers are employed in thesame manner as described in defensive operations(par. 279). Because their accurate fires can beutilized to cover the withdrawal of a unit froma position, they remain on the position as longas possible. Their principal targets are enemyofficers and noncommissioned officers leading theattack.343. DELAYING ACTION IN SUCCESSIVE POSITIONSSince a delay * * * with automatic weapons.Because of their ability to deliver accuratefire, snipers may to an advantage in de-24 TAGO 1814C- il~i '

laying actions. They are employed in much thesame manner as for a daylight withdrawal (par.,342d).346. COMMUNICATION PERSONNEL* * * * *c. The comrvuication noncommissioned officer* * * in the company. He transmits informationcontained in extracts of current communicationorders; for example, signal operation instructions(SOI) and standing signal instructions (SSI).He makes recommendations * * * pertainingto communication 4d. Rescindede. The radiotelephone operators operate and maintainthe man-packed radio sets in the company.Their training includes * * * to the company.* * * * *g. The orderly and other men designated by thecompany commander are trained to install, operate,and maintain the company communication system.These men are * * * packed radio sets.347. EQUIPMENT* * * * *b. (Superseded) Radio equipment includes lowpoweredportable voice sets. Two types are issued;one type is hand-carried and the other is man-packed.Man-packed radios have a range of three to fivemiles. Hand-carried radios have a range of approximately1 mile. Both radios are frequency-modulatedTAGO 1814C 25

_Fdurity_n(f-rm) and will net with radios mounted in all tanks.Frequencies (channels) on the man-packed radioscan be changed by the operator.* * * * *348. MEANS OF COMMUNICATIONa, The company commander directs the use of communicationavailable to the company. Flexibility ofcommunication is achieved by using as many ofthe means of communication as are applicableso that if one means of communication fails, thecompany can effectively use other means. Thesuccess or failure of a unit often depends on itsability to communicate.b. Wire communication depends on the time availableto install and recover the wire. (See fig. 71.)In fast-moving * * * be recovered quickly.In an attack on a limited objective, wire is oftenlaid forward as the unit advances. In defensivesituations * * * control of units.c. Radio is limited only by the characteristics ofthe sets, such as range, frequency, security restrictions,and interference from static, jamming, or terrainobstacles. (See fig. 72.) Radio is an * * *on operator training.* * * * *349. COMMUNICATION COORDINATIONThe company communication * * * battalioncommunication plan. A man-packed radio (PRC-10) is netted with the battalion command net. In26 a _ TAGO 1814C

iiLvlleourlqomodefensive situations and in attack situations, whencircumstances permit, the battalion communicationplatoon installs wire from the battalion commandpost to the company command post.350. COMMUNICATION ORDERSThe rifle company commander's order contains instructionsfor communication. Frequently, such instructionsrefer to the company SOP or indicatethe location of the company commander or his commandpost. Other instructions relative * * *by pyrotechnic signal. In the attack, instructionsare given for pyrotechnic signals for prearrangedfires, lifting of supporting fires, location of units,and for capture of objectives. Platoon leaders acquaint* * * a higher commander.371. ROLE OF THE AIRBORNE RIFLE COMPANYThe airborne rifle company is trained and equippedto enter combat by parachute or assault transport.It normally uses * * * of a battalion.373. EQUIPMENT* * * * *c. The weapons carriers of the company can bedelivered by parachute or assault transport. Theymay accompany * * * of captured transportation.* * * * *TAGO 1814C 27

uri*Go ,*ESt nOS0U"o POWERTELEPMWlEMORTARS IN CNERAL SUPPORTFigure 71. (Superseded) Type rifle company wire nets.28 TAGO 1814C

IlllmO'-S-:ecuTy inIAmlllg llsob60 601 ?X1 a./co I TELEPOETELEPHONEMORTARS ATTACHEDTO PLATOONSFigure 71-Continued.TAGO 1814C 29

EL Se0 u rity InfMOOO0*0ARTY FOBSRR ) J/RAD1O SETSPC- lPRC ORGANIC TOARTY TOOPERATE IN,\;CCPR CP > TO CONTROLELEMENTSTKs pRC OF WEAPONSMORTARMY ACFTPC PLATOONAS REQUIREDUTIIITVIN CO NETUTILITYFigure 72. (Superseded) T'pe rifle company radio net.30 TAGO 1814C

_ Securit --375. SUPPORTING ARMS AND WEAPONSa. Artillery. Light artillery landed by parachuteor assault transport accompanies or closely followsthe assault landing of the infantry troops. Forwardobservers land * * * reorganization after landing.$ * * *c. Tanks. Although the airborne regiment has noorganic tank units, it is normal to attach tank unitsfrom one of the airborne division's two tank battalionsfor sustained combat. The attachment ofthese units makes the airborne regiment equivalentto the infantry regiment in tank strength. Tankreinforcements usually join the airborne regimentwhen it contacts friendly forces after its airborneassault landing. Tanks attached to * * * prescribedin FM 17-32.* * * * *379. BATTALION COMMANDER'S ORDERSi. Rescinded.380. ORGANIZATION FOR THE ATTACK* * * * *b. The assault echelon of the company consistsof the troops and equipment initially landed by parachuteor assault transport to seize the company objective.The entire airborne rifle company, with itsorganic weapons and transportation, can enter com-TAGO 1814C 31

~~/NIrlSecurity iM lbat by parachute or assault transport; however, itmay be necessary to leave some personnel and equipmentbehind during the assault landing.381. RECONNAISSANCEa. The company commander's * * * his attackplans:(1) Nature of the drop zone, or landing zone iflanding in assault transport aircraft.* * * * *383. BRIEFINGb. Platoon leaders brief * * * the companybriefing. All troops are * * * the companymission.* * * * *388. LOADING PERSONNELa. The movement from * * aircraft parkingarea. Upon arrival at the aircraft parking area,groups move to their assigned airplanes and prepareto load.* * * * *e. The following principles * * * for airborneoperations:(1) Enough men ride in each assault aircraftto unlash and unload the aircraft atthe destination. This prevents confusion·* * recovery of equipment.* * * * 132 TAO0 1814C

in -- Security390. AIR MOVEMENT TABLE$ * * * *b. Pathfinder serials precede * * * operatenavigational aids. Parachute serials normally precedetransport serials. This permits the * * *the pilot's signal.391. ASSAULT LANDINGc. (Superseded) When a company lands by assaulttransport, it usually lands on a single landingzone as part of the battalion. The time requiredfor landing the company depends on the aircrafttype, altitude, number, speed and formation, the skillof the pilots, the terrain, and the landing characteristicsof the aircraft. The ground dispersion of theaircraft inside a landing zone depends on the numberof aircraft, the obstacles to landing, the landingcharacteristics of the aircraft, and the skill of theirpilots.d. (Superseded) Upon landing, personnel in theaircraft promptly unload all equipment and supplies.e. (Superseded) When the company enters combatby parachute, weapons carriers may land by assaultaircraft. When this is the case, they may land onthe drop zone used by the company and battalionafterthe drop zone is cleared of personnel and equipmentthat would obstruct assault aircraft landings.The weapons carriers may land in separate landingzones under the control of the regimental or highercommander.TAGO 1814C 33

-Security1396. IDENTIFICATION OF PERSONNEL AND EQUIP-MENTPositive, rapid, identification * * * identifythe contents. Assault transports may be marked toidentify the type of equipment they carry and theunit to which the equipment belongs. The airbornedivision * * * tothe enemy,397. ASSEMBLYa. Using assembly aids * * * respective assemblyareas. Parachutists may also move directlyto their unit assembly area without assemblingon the drop zone.b. (Superseded) Troops landed by assault transportpromptly unload and move by aircraft loadsdirectly to their assembly areas. There they areorganized into tactical units under their own officers.They pass to regimental or higher unit control assoon as the situation permits.APPENDIX IRIFLE COMPANY ORDERS FOR ATTACKAND DEFENSESection I. ATTACK5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL MATTERS(Superseded)Information or instructions to includea.A reference to the signal annex if issued withthe operation orr or, if no al annex is issued,34 TAGO 1814C

RE --llSecurity 1111a reference to the index to the SOI currently in effect.This subparagraph will also include general instructionson the employment of signal communication(wire, radio, messenger, sound, and visual).b. The location of battalion and company commandposts; the tentative subsequent locations ofthe company commander during the attack; and theaxis of signal communication.c. The location and time of opening advance messagecenters, march control points, or other placesto which messages may be sent.Section II. DEFENSE5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL MATTERS(Superseded)Information or instructions to includea.A reference to the signal annex if issued withthe operation order, or, if no signal annex is issued,a reference to the index to the SOI currently in effect.This subparagraph will also include general instructionson the employment of signal communication(wire, radio, messenger, sound, and visual).b. The location of battalion, company, and platooncommand posts, and alternate locations.TAGO 1814C 35

_iNE -Security Il!v nAPPENDIX IV3. COMBAT CONTROLSUPPORTING FIRESSection I. GENERALa. GeneralSupport. Supportingunitsare * * *provide maximum support. The heavy weaponscompany is considered to be in general support whenits fires are controlled by the battalion commander,the heavy tank and heavy mortar companies by theregimental commander, the tank battalion and thebattalions of the division artillery by the divisioncommander.* s * * *1. MISSIONSection VI. CLOSE AIR SUPPORT(Added)The mission of close air support units is to giveclose support to ground units by attacking targetswhich cannot be effectively engaged by other means,and by augmenting the fires of other supportingweapons.2. CONTROLa. Forward Air Controller. Normally, a tacticalair control party (TACP) works with an infantrybattalion. The TACP consists of a forward aircontroller (FAC who isa combat-experienced36 TAGO 1814C

WEED-Securityi.fighter pilot, his enlisted assistants, and equipment.This team is organized to direct, by visual methods,close air support strikes in the vicinity of forwardground elements. It is a highly mobile element havingair-to-ground communication to direct aircraftto targets, and point-to-point communcations withthe tactical air control center or pertinent tacticalair direction centers and the division air liaisonofficer. At times a forward air controller may beairborne to facilitate control and direction of airstrikes. Under these conditions the controller isreferred to as a tactical air coordinator.b. Functions. Functions of the TACP are to-(1) Direct offensive air support aircraft totargets in the vicinity of friendly positionsand to direct visual reconnaissance ofspecified areas.(2) Receive information from reconnaissanceor other aircraft for transmission to interestedground force elements.(3) Report the observed results of an air striketo the tactical air control center or to thedivision air liaison officer and to thesupported unit.(4) Advise the immediate ground commanderand his staff on matters pertaining to tacticalair operations.(5) Assist in making known the location offriendly front line units.c. Employment. The forward air controllernormally works in the battalion or regimental FSCC.Frequently it will be necessary for him to accompanyTAGO 1814C _ 37

_jvlJ~lr i security Infsyiia command group to a forward vantage point or observationpost; wherever he may be located he shouldhave ready access to both infantry and artillery communicationssuch as those found in the FSCC orat an observation post. Through artillery communications,the forward air controller can frequentlyutilize the assistance of the artillery forward observerin marking targets with artillery fire or otherwisedirecting the aircraft to the target.3. TARGETSa. The selection of targets for tactical air strikesis governed by such factors as-(1) Availability of tactical aircraft for closesupport missions.(2) Availability and capabilities of other supportingweapons.(3) Over-all effect to be realized from destructionor neutralization of the target.(4) The capability of available air weapons.(5) The potential accuracy of available airweapons.(6) Probable air losses compared to expectedresults.(7) Accuracy of intelligence concerning natureand location of target.b. Typical close air support targets are--(1) Gun positions.(2) Vehicles, including armor.(3) Command posts.(4) Concentration of troops.(5) Strongly defended positions.38 A L~6 TAGO 1814C

lntliaI Security__Juii i(6) Pill boxes.(7) Defended road blocks.(8) Targets which artillery may not be able toengage effectively.4. METHODS OF MARKING TARGETSClose air support targets located between the bombline and friendly troops must be properly identifiedto the striking aircraft prior to attack. The forwardair controller normally accomplishes the target identificationand control for these strikes. He must coordinatewith, advise, and receive assistance fromground elements. He should work closely with theartillery liaison officer. A forward air controllermay identify a target for aircraft through anyone or a combination of the methods indicated below.a. Reference to grids or coordinates on large scalemaps or photographic mosaics.b. Reference to nearby landmarks or terrain featuresreadily discernible to the aircraft pilot.c. Establish reference points with smoke shells,such as artillery, mortar, grenade, recoilless rifle,and rocket. Colored smoke is preferable.d. Use of tracers from small arms fire.e. Use of illuminating shells; for example, artillery,mortar, and naval.f. Use of searchlights.g. Use of pyrotechnics.h. Use of colored panels and other markings toassist navigation of attacking aircraft in the targetarea and to identify friendly positions.TAGO 1814C 39

(BijjrS ecurity ,ku ii. Verbal description of the target radioed througha forward air controller to the aircraft.j. Adjustment of dry-run air attacks to guide thepilot to the target.k. Radio communication from friendly unit toArmy light aircraft which can in turn lead attackingaircraft to the target.1. Use of electronic equipment (radio homing devices,beacons, etc.).m. Use of any one or a combination of the abovemethods to control a tactical air coordinator who inturn, leads attacking aircraft to the target. Thetactical air coordinator should be provided a meansfor marking targets, such as smoke grenades.5. REQUESTSa. Requests for close air support normally are submittedthrough air-ground operations system channels.Since this system does not include personnelat company level, requests are forwarded by the companycommander to the battalion S3 or the battalionassistant S3 should he be designated the battalion S3(Air). In the event infantry communcations are inoperative,requests may be submitted through theartillery forward observer, utilizing his artillerycommunications.b. Requests for offensive air support from a riflecompany commander should include the followinginformation:(1) Exact target location.40 b _TAGO 1814C

I5iED-Security Inform'ln(2) Target description, including sufficient detailto permit selection of appropriatearmament.(3) Results desired.(4) Location of nearest friendly troops withrespect to the target.(5) Time over target.(6) Tactical significance.[AG 300.7 (11 Oct 52)]TAGO 1814C 41

REo-ecurity InfI_BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF THE ARMY:OFFICIAL:WM E. BERGINMajor General, USA,The Adjutant GeneralJ. LAWTON COLLINS,Chief of Staff, United States ArmyDISTRIBMTION:Active Army:Tech Svc (1); Tech Svc Bd (1); AA Comd(2); OS Maj Comd (10) except FECOM(200); Base Comd (2); MDW (2); LogComd (2); A (10); CHQ. (2); Div (10)except 17 (2); Brig (2); Regt 7 (5); Bn7 (5); Co 7, 57 (3); Sch (10); USMA (50);PMS&T (1); RTC (3); Mil Mis (1); Arma(1); Mil Dist (3); T/O&E's, 7-17N (10);7-37N (10).NG: Same as Active Army.ORC: Same as Active Army.For explanation of distribution formula, seeSR 310-90-1.42 R ·TAGO 1814CGOV. UOYERNMENT PahITING OFFICE, 1252

R1D-S ecurity InformatiopWARNING NOTICESAuthority for release of this document to a foreigngovernment must be secured from the Assistant Chiefof Staff, G-2, Department of the Army.When this document is released to a foreign government;it is released subject to the following conditions:This information is furnished with the understandingthat it will not be released to another nation withoutspecific approval of the United States of America, Departmentof the Army; that it will not be used for otherthan military purposes; tjq* ndiividual or corporationrights originating in tlihe:'f ,iation whether patentedor not will be respected.-j l;' t the information willbe afforded substantiallyT e degree of securityas afforded by the UnitedStates bf America, Departmentof the Army.This document contains information affecting thenational defense of the United States within the meaningof the Espionage Laws, Title 18, U. S. C., sections 793and 794. The transmission or the revelation of itscontents in any manner to an unauthorized person Isprohibited by law.RE i

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMYFIELD MANUALFM 7-10This manual supersedes FM 7-10, 18 March 1944, including C .,16 January 1945; and C 2. 5 September 1946; and DA TC 5, 1948RIFLE COMPANY,INFANTRY REGIMENTDEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY · OCTOBER, z949United States Government Printing OfficeWashington: 1949

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMYWASHINGTON 25, D. C., 3 October, 1949FM 7-10 is published for the information andguidance of all concerned.[AG 300.7 (13 Jun 49)]BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF THE ARMY:J. LAWTON COLLINSChief of Staff, United States ArmyOFFICIAL:EDWARD F. WITSELLMajor GeneralThe Adjutant GeneralDISTRIBUTION:Tech Sv (2); Arm & Sv Bd (1); OS MajComd (2) ;MDW (2); A (ZI) (20), (Overseas)(5); CHQ (2); D (10) except 17(2); B (2); R 7, 71 (10); Bn 7, 71 (5);C 7, 71 (3); USMA (50); Sch (10);PMS&T (1); Tng Ctr (3) ; T/O & E 7-17N(10); 7-37N (10); SPECIAL DISTRI-BUTION.For explanation of distribution formula, seeSR 310-90-1.

CONTENTSParagraph PageCHAPTER 1. GENERAL .......... 1- 13 1CHAPTER 2. TACTICAL MOVEMENTS.Section . General . ..... 14 15II. Movement to contact. .. 15- 19 15III. Foot marches ...... 20- 28 20IV. Motor marches ...... 29- 34 29V. Movement to contact duringdarkness ....... 35- 36 32VI. Assembly areas and attackpositions ....... 37- 39 35CHAPTER 3. RIFLE SQUAD.Section 1. General .......... 40- 50 41II. Movement to contact .... 51- 60 45III. Preparation for the attack. 61- 68 61IV. Attack ..... ....... 69- 76 72V. Defense .......... 77- 83 85CHAPTER 4. WEAPONS SQUAD.Section I. General ....... 84- 90 94II. Movement to contact .... 91- 92 96III. Preparation for the attack . 93- 99 97IV. Attack ... 100-103 102V. Defense .......... 104-109 105CHAPTER 5. RIFLE PLATOON.Section 1. General .......... 110-115 110II. Movement to contact .... 116-121 112III. Preparation for the attack. 122-126 118IV. Attack ........... 127-131 131V. Defense .......... 132-141 141iii

ParagraphLPageCHAPTER 6. WEAPONS PLATOON.Section 1. General .......... 142-150 154II. Movement to contact .. . 151-152 160III. Preparation for the attack. 153-159 161IV. Attack .......... . 160-163 170V. Defense .......... 164-170 174CHAPTER 7. RIFLE COMPANY, OFFENSIVE COMBAT.Section 1. Preparation for the attack. 171-173 184II. Method of attack ..... . 174-187 188III. Attack........... 188-194 205IV. Reserve rifle company in theattack .......... 195-199 214V. Night attack . ...... . 200-225 217VI. Attack of a river line.. 226-240 234VII. Attack in woods ...... 241-244 245VIII. Raids . .......... 245-262 250IX. Infiltration ....... . 263-265 257X. Other offensive operations. 266 262CHAPTER 8. RIFLE COMPANY, DEFENSIVE COMBAT.Section I. General .......... 267-269 263II. Front-line rifle company.. 270-293 268III. Reserve rifle company. . . 294-307 295IV. Other defensive operations . 308-316 302V. Security missions ...... 317-327 311VI. Retrograde movements . . 328-344 324CHAPTER 9. COMMUNICATION .... . 345-350 336CHAPTER 10. ADMINISTRATION.Section I. Personnel administration 351 34411. Supply .......... 352-360 345III. Medical service ..... . 361-365 353IV. Motor maintenance . ... 366-368 355CHAPTER 11. AIRBORNE RIFLE COMPANY.Section I. General . .......... 369-377 357II. Preparations for theairborne attack ..... 378-388 363iv

Paragraph PageqIII. Air movement, landing,and reorganization . . . 389-402 373IV. Accomplishment of groundmission ......... 403-410 381APPENDIX I.RIFLE COMPANY ORDERS FORATTACK AND DEFENSE ......... 388II. COMBAT FORMATIONS ......... 393III. SIGNALS ................ 413IV. SUPPORTING FIRES ........... 419V. WEAPONS EMPLACEMENTS ....... 433VI. TRAINING PROGRAM .......... 451VII. FIELD EXERCISES ............ 471VIII. REFERENCES .............. 534INDEX ........................ 538V

RESTRICTEDThis manual supersedes FM 7-10, 18 March 1944, includingC 1, 16 Janua)y 1945, and C 2, 5 September 1946; andDA TC 5, 1948CHAPTER 1GENERAL1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE. a. This manual is a guideto the tactical employment of the rifle companyand its elements. It covers organization, weapons,individual duties, movement to contact, offensiveaction, defensive action, retrograde movements,operations under special terrain conditions, supplyevacuation, maintenance, and communication.Chapter 11, which pertains to the airborne riflecompany, is included as an additional guide forthe airborne rifle company commander.b. The procedures described in this manual arebased on normal conditions. They represent thebest methods of accomplishing the mission. Inbattle, ideal conditions do not exist. Battlefieldconfusion and the lack of adequate time for planningand carrying out plans require positive leadership,initiative, and flexibility by leaders.2. MISSION. The mission of the rifle company inthe attack is to close with the enemy and destroyor capture him. The mission of the rifle companyRESTRICTED

in defense is to repel the enemy assault by fire orclose combat.3. CHARACTERISTICS OF INFANTRY. a. The infantryessentially is an arm of close combat. Itfights by combining fire, maneuver, and shock action.By fire, it inflicts losses on the enemy andneutralizes his combat power; by maneuver, itcloses with the enemy and makes its fire more effective;by shock action, it completes the destructionof the enemy in close combat.b. Infantry is capable of limited independentaction by the use of its own weapons. Its offensivepower decreases when its freedom of maneuver islimited or when it is opposed by an organized defense.Under these conditions or against a forceof combined arms, infantry fire power is reinforcedby the support of artillery, tanks, and otherarms. The defensive power of infantry reaches itsmaximum when it occupies an organized defensiveposition or when the enemy's freedom of maneuveris limited.c. Infantry maneuvers on difficult ground bymoving in small, inconspicuous formations and bytaking advantage of covered routes of approachand small irregularities in the terrain. By skilleduse of the terrain, infantry units achieve maximumfire effect, conserve personnel, conceal movement,and permit the maneuver of their reserve.4. ORGANIZATION. The rifle company is the basicinfantry unit with tactical, administrative, andsupply functions. It consists of a company head-2

quarters, three rifle platoons, and one weaponsplatoon (see fig. 1). (For details of organizationand equipment, see the current Table of Organizationand Equipment 7-17.)a. The company headquarters consists of a commandgroup and an administrative group. Thepersonnel of these groups help the company commanderperform his tactical, administrative, andsupply duties.b. The rifle platoon consists of a platoon headquarters,three rifle squads, and one weaponssquad.c. The weapons platoon consists of a platoonheadquarters, one 60-mm mortar section, and one57-mm rifle section.5. INDIVIDUAL WEAPONS. Individual weapons ofthe company are the rifle, bayonet, carbine, pistol,hand grenades, and rifle grenades. (For descriptionand characteristics of these weapons see FM's23-5, 23-7, 23-25, 23-30, and 23-35.)a. Rifle. The rifle is the principal individualweapon. Because of its range, ease of operation,and light weight, it is well adapted for use in alltypes of infantry combat. These characteristicsenable a rifleman or a group of riflemen to deliverquickly a large volume of accurate fire on a desiredtarget within range.b. Sniper's rifle. One rifle equipped with a telescopicsight is furnished each rifle squad. It is usedby the sniper.c. Bayonet. The bayonet is a weapon of close combat.Skill in its use, acquired by training, gives

00U)-ib.zw 0Uy)-' 0LL~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-1 Z,·~~~~~~~~~~~~~~cIL J(L ~~0(Lww-j0U) ~~~~~U) ~U)3jZo 2·040it- 40 w~~~~~o~~~IL ~~~~WU)woa- 4 Id Id40~~~IdZ 0Z0 40,ULL<

the infantryman confidence in his ability to closewith the enemy.d. Carbine. The carbine can fire in greater volumeand more accurately than the pistol. Its effectiverange is 300 yards. It is used to protect themen of crew-served weapons and others who arearmed with it.e. Pistol. The automatic pistol is used for individualdefense by men not armed with the rifle orcarbine. It is effective at ranges less than 50 yards.f. Hand grenades. The fragmentation hand grenadeis used against enemy personnel, particularlythose manning crew-served weapons, who are protectedfrom rifle fire and are within the minimumrange of the high-angle rifle grenade.g. Rifle grenades. Rifle grenades, propelled by therifle or carbine from a launcher attached to it, aremore accurate than hand grenades and have alonger range. Rifle grenades are effective againstarmored vehicles, emplacements, buildings, andpersonnel. Fragmentation hand grenades becomerifle grenades when used with the launcher.6. CREW-SERVED WEAPONS. Rifle company crewservedweapons are the 57-mm rifle, the 60-mmmortar, the light machine gun, the caliber .50machine gun, the automatic rifle, and the rocketlauncher. (For their description and characteristics,see FM's 23-15, 23-32, 23-55, 23-65, 23-80,and 23-85.)a. The 57-nmml rifle is used in close support ofrifle units for direct fire against definitely locatedpoint targets. It has a maximum range of 4,3405

yards, but it seldom is used at ranges greater than800 yards against moving targets and 1,900 yardsagainst stationary point targets. Its cartridge HE,AT (high explosive, antitank) penetrates approximately3 inches of armor.b. The 60-mnm mortar is used for close-in supportof rifle units. It may be used against area targets.Its maximum range is 1,985 yards. Becauseof dispersion, it rarely engages point targets moredistant than 1,000 yards.c. The light machine gun is used to supplementrifle fires by placing short, concentrated bursts offire upon known or suspected enemy groups ofmen.d. The caliber .50 machine gun is mounted on avehicle and is used against enemy personnel, vehicles,and low-flying aircraft (see par: 12). Thecaliber .50 machine gun fires ball, armor piercingincendiary (API), tracer, and armor piercing(AP) ammunition. The machine gun can bemounted on a tripod and fired as a ground weapon.e. The automatic rifle provides the rifle squadwith an easily controlled and maneuverable weaponcapable of a large volume of fire. It is usedagainst ground targets in a manner similar to thelight machine gun. Its light weight permits theautomatic rifleman to maintain the same rate ofadvance as the riflemen.f. The rocket launchers and high explosive rocketsare used primarily against armored vehicles;secondary targets include crew-served weapons,pillbox enbrasures, and groups of men.6

7. TYPES OF POSITIONS FOR CREW-SERVED WEAP-ONS. a. Firing positions. The 57-mm rifle, the 60-mmmortar, the light machine gun, and the rocketlauncher occupy firing positions to cover assignedsectors of fire or target areas. These firing positionsare classified as primary, alternate, and supplementary.(1) A primary firing position offers the bestconditions for the accomplishment of theassigned mission.(2) An alternate firing position is used forfiring on primary targets when the primaryfiring position cannot be defendedor is unsuitable for carrying out the assignedmission.(3) A supplementary firing position is usedfor firing on secondary targets whichcannot be reached from the primary oralternate firing positions.b. Cover positions. Whenever possible, leaders selectcover positions providing defilade and concealmentfor men and weapons not actively fightingthe enemy.c. Off-carrier position. The off-carrier position isthe point at which the weapons and the initial supplyof ammunition of the weapons platoon are removedfrom the carrier for hand carry to the firingor cover position. The off-carrier position providesdefilade and concealment for men and carriers, andit is as close to the firing position as possible.8. TRANSPORTATION. The organic transportationof the rifle company consists of four 1/4-ton trucks,7

four l/ 4 -ton trailers, one 21/z-ton truck, and one 1-ton trailer. One 1/4-ton truck is used by the companycommander for command and reconnaissance.Another is used during the movement phaseto transport the weapons and extra ammunitionof the weapons squads of the rifle platoons. Thisvehicle also is used for supply of ammunition to therifle platoons, or for evacuation. One 21/ 2 -tontruck (with I-ton trailer) is used as a companygeneral utility vehicle. Two 1/ 4 -ton trucks areassigned to the weapons platoon to transport itsweapons and ammunition.9. TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT. The rifle company operatesaccording to the battalion commander'splan. The company commander bases his planon his mission, and coordinates the actions ofhis platoons and the fire of all weapons at his disposal.The rifle company may be assigned to theassault echelon or to the battalion reserve. Whenthe company is acting alone, the company commanderuses his company according to his mission,and he makes more decisions on his own initiativethan he does when operating with the battalion.He notifies his commander promptly of major decisionsand frequently reports his company's locationand progress.10. DUTIES OF THE COMPANY COMMANDER. a.The company commander commands his company.By his character and skill, he gives positive leadershipto his command and maintains its discipline,welfare, and contentment. He actively supervisesthe training of all elements of his company and in-8

sures proper administration and the procurementand maintenance of equipment. To assist him incarrying out these responsibilities, he makes fulluse of the company's chain of command. In assigningduties to his leaders, he considers their individualcapabilities and personalities. In his leaders,he develops a high degree of initiative andpersonal responsibility-building his company intoa well-coordinated team.b. He continually estimates the situation, havingin mind all practicable courses of action. Bydirective, or by recommendation to his commander,he initiates action on any matter pertaining to hiscompany, and follows this action through by vigorousexecution of the most simple effective course,until his mission is accomplished.c. To accomplish his mission, he uses all meansat his command and requests additional meanswhenever they can be well used in his area of responsibility.Without awaiting orders, he coordinateswith any other unit or agency.d. In the battle area, he uses observation, patrols,liaison, and personal reconnaissance to maintainsecurity and prepare for future operations.He assigns definite missions to his leaders, andkeeps informed of their actions in order to giveassistance when needed and to insure the successof his plan. He goes where he can bestcontrol the action of his company as a whole, yet atcritical times he is personally present where hecan best influence the action. He alone is responsibleto his commander for all that his company doesor fails to do.9

11. COMPANY HEADQUARTERS. a. Command group.(1) The company commander uses the commandgroup to assist him in the controlof his company.(2) The executive officer keeps abreast of thetactical situation and performs dutiesassigned to him by the company commander.He assumes command of thecompany if the company commander becomesa casualty. He takes charge of thecommand post and maintains communicationwith the platoons and with thecompany and battalion commanders. Henotifies appropriate commanders of thechange in the command post location. Hecontrols the movement of vehicles withinthe company area and supervises the supplyof ammunition to the platoons.(3) The first sergeant assists the companycommander by executing any assignedduties. His duties may vary from administrativeand supply matters to commandinga platoon. Ordinarily he assists theexecutive officer and represents him duringhis temporary absence from the commandpost.(4) The company clerk is the chief assistantto the first sergeant.(5) The communication sergeant is trainedin the use and maintenance of communicationequipment in the company, and hetrains his men to operate this equipment.He establishes the company communica-10

tion system and receives and dispatchesmessengers.(6) The radio operators operate the two companyradios which are in the battalion net(one at the company command post andone with the company commander), andthey receive and transmit messages toand from the company commander.(7) The bugler is the chief assistant to thecommunication sergeant. He operatesthe company switchboard.(8) The company messengers are alternateradio operators, linemen, and switchboardoperators. One messenger accompaniesthe company commander anddrives his vehicle; one is stationed at thecompany command post; and one operatesfrom the battalion command post.(9) The orderlies perform duties assigned tothem by the company commander. Onemay be used as a radio operator, switchboardoperator, lineman, or messenger.The other orderly, a member of the administrativegroup, assists supply personnel.b. Administrative group. For a discussion of theduties of the administrative group, see paragraph352.12. ANTIAIRCRAFT SECURITY. In defense againstan enemy air attack, the rifle company usually relieson passive means of defense, such as dispersion,concealment, camouflage, and the use of cover.853696 0--49 2 11

(See fig. 2.) The success of such means dependson an adequate warning system, closely coordinatedwith the general aircraft warning system ofthe area. In some situations, a rifle company maybe permitted to fire at positively identified enemyaircraft. The caliber .50 machine gun is the company'smost effective weapon for this purpose;however, all small arms may be used.13. ANTITANK DEFENSE. a. The rifle company defendsitself against tanks by using antitank weaponsto destroy the tanks and obstacles. Timelywarning is the key factor in defense against a tankattack; maximum means of communication areused to alert all men of the company. Antitankweapons in the rifle company include antitank andwhite phosphorous (WP) rifle grenades, rocketlaunchers, and 57-mm rifles. Additional meanswhich may be provided by higher commanders includetanks, 75-mm rifles, and antitank mines. Inclose combat with enemy tanks, white phosphorousgrenades, particularly white phosphorous riflegrenades, are extremely effective in denying observationto tank crews and in the psychologicaleffect upon these crews.b. Individual passive means of defense againsttanks include the use of all natural obstacles suchas streams, stumps, large trees, boulders, andswampy or marshy ground. In static situations,fox holes may be dug. When attacked by tanks,defending riflemen continue to fire on enemy infantryuntil forced to take cover to protect themselvesand their weapons from the crushing action12

Figure 2. The company defends against aircraft by theuse of dispersion, concealment, camouflage, andcover.13

of the tanks. When enemy infantry is not present,small-arms fire is directed against tank vision slitsand tank crews operating with open hatches.14

CHAPTER 2TACTICAL MOVEMENTSSection I. GENERAL14. GENERAL. a. For doctrines governing troopmovements, see FM 100-5. For details of marchhygiene, see FM 21-10.b. Tactical movements consist of-(1) Movement to contact.(2) Relocation of troops according to operationalplans. (The principles and techniqueof movement, as outlined in thischapter, are applicable to movements involvingthe relocation of troops.).(3) Retrograde movement (see pars. 328 to344).Section II. MOVEMENT TO CONTACT15. DEFI N ITION. Movement to contact is the groundmovement in a theater of operations just beforecombat to place troops in a position to close withthe enemy. It does not include troop movement byair or by sea when security during the movementis provided by the Air Force or by the Navy.16. CLASSIFICATION. Movements to contact are

uncovered or covered. An uncovered movement tocontact is one made when little or no security isprovided by friendly forces. It ends when directground contact with the enemy is gained. A coveredmovement to contact is one made behind securityforces. It is used to move a unit to an assignedlocation to relieve or reinforce troops alreadyin contact with the enemy. It ends when thelocation is occupied.17. PHASES. a. Movement to contact normally isconducted in three phases--(1) First phase (contact remote)--enemy directground action is remote.(2) Second phase (contact improbable)-enemydirect ground action is improbable.(3) Third phase (contact imminent)--enemydirect ground action is imminent.b. These phases may or may not follow this sequence;the phase depends on the commander'sestimate of the situation. The commander makesa continuous estimate of the situation in order toadequately dispose the units of his column at theproper time and place to meet the enemy situation.The passage from one phase to another is madewhen the commander decides that the enemy isclose enough to increase his readiness for action.18. FORMATIONS. a. Route column. During the contactremote phase of movement to contact, administrativeconsiderations govern and the movementis made in route column. In route Column, the companynormally moves by rail or motor. Route col-16

umn ends when the commander decides that hemust group his units tactically before continuingthe movement.b. Tactical column. During the contact improbablephase of movement to contact, both tactical andadministrative considerations govern, and themovement is made in tactical column. Units aregrouped tactically to permit the prompt use ofcombat formations or the orderly occupation ofand departure from an assembly area. The companymoves as a unit, either by foot or motor.Within the company, the grouping depends on theprobable future mission of the company. (For example,elements of the weapons platoon may movewith the rifle elements which they support.) Tacticalcolumn ends when the company deploys orwhen it occupies an assembly area.c. Approach march. During the contact imminentphase of movement to contact, tactical considerationsgovern and the movement is made in the approachmarch. Elements whose contact with theenemy is imminent are deployed in a suitable tacticalformation. Other elements continue in tacticalcolumn, and they in turn move in the approachmarch when their contact with the enemy is imminent.Any deployed formation, including deploymentin depth, may be used. For example, the leadingcompany of an advance guard battalion normallyuses the deployed formation described inparagraph 22. Such a formation varies accordingto the strength of the screening force, the terrain,the enemy disposition and sttength, and other existingconditions. The approach march ends when17

contact is made with the enemy or when an attackposition is occupied.19. CONTROL. a. Control of the company duringmovement to contact depends primarily on communication.All of the company's communication facilitiesare used to the maximum, consistent withsecurity, to assist in maintaining this control.b. March objectives and phase lines assist thecommander in controlling his unit. A march objectiveis a recognizable place toward which themarch of a single column is directed. Frequently,high ground, road junctions, streams, and similarfeatures identify usable march objectives. A phaseline is a line generally perpendicular to the directionof advance. It usually passes through themarch objectives of several columns marchingabreast. When a phase line is reached, commandersreport the fact to the next higher commander.Columns usually continue to the next phase line;however, they may be directed not to go beyond agiven phase line until a specified time or until theoccurrence of a particular event. Thus the phaseline is a means of control and coordination. (Seefig. 3.)c. Phase lines for the company ordinarily areprescribed by the battalion commander. Distancesbetween phase lines depend on the type of movement,the terrain, the visibility, and the imminenceof enemy contact. The company usually reportsits progress periodically.18

MARCHOBJECTIVE YI/OMARCH -\ I PHASE LINEOBJECTIVEC *5PHASE LINE*4MARCHMARCHMAtH~~~R~CH / MACH X PHASE LINEOBJt(ECTIVE BI OBJECTIVEX ) #3PHASE LINEM RCH > PHASE LINECTIVE A- \\Figure 3. March objectives and phase lines help controlthe column during movement.19

Section III. FOOT MARCHES20. GENERAL. During a foot march, the companymay form a part of the main body, it may act assecurity for a larger unit, or it may move as anindependent unit.21. THE COMPANY AS PART OF THE MAIN BODY.a. The movement is in tactical column. The companyusually marches in a column of two's, one fileon each side of the road, and maintains its tacticalunity. The company's officers and noncommissionedofficers-enforce march discipline. The leadingcompany maintains the rate of march prescribedby the battalion commander; other companiesmaintain their position in the column. Ordinarilythe company commander is at the head ofhis company; however, he goes wherever his presenceis required.b. Company motor vehicles march in separateserials under regimental or battalion control.When under regimental control, the serials usuallymove by bounds in rear of the regimental footcolumn; when under battalion control, the serialsusually move by bounds in rear of the battalionfoot elements.c. The march ends upon arrival in the assemblyarea or attack position; however, the companymay be forced to go directly into the attack fromthe tactical column.22. THE COMPANY AS THE SUPPORT OF AN AD-VANCE GUARD BATTALION. a. The mission of a20

company as the support of an advance guard battalionis to prevent unnecessary delay of the battallionand to protect the battalion against surpriseand enemy ground action from the front.For details concerning the company as the supportof a rear guard battalion, see paragraph 327.b. The support company usually is reinforced bytanks, machine guns, 75-mm rifles, and 81-mmmortars. A tank platoon (rarely a section) may beattached; machine gun and 75-mm rifle sections orplatoons normally are attached. The 81-mm mortarplatoon usually is placed in direct support ofthe company, and a mortar observer moves withthe advance party. Reconnaissance elements ofengineers, artillery forward observers, heavymortar observers, and elements of the battalionpioneer and ammunition platoon march with thesupport.c. The advance guard battalion, less the support,constitute the advance guard reserve. The supportmarches in three groups ahead of the advanceguard reserve. From rear to front, these groupsare: the support proper, the advance party, andthe point. (See fig. 4.) The support commandersends forward an advance party, which seldom exceedsa platoon in strength. The advance partysends forward a point, usually a squad. Distancesbetween elements of the advance guard vary accordingto the situation, the terrain, and the visibility.These distances are great enough to alloweach succeeding element to deploy without seriousinterference from the enemy when contact is made.However, the distances are not great enough to21.

prevent each element from rapidly assisting theelement in front of it.SECURITY AND RECONNAISSANCEELEMENTS OF HIGHERCOMMANDERS3 TO5 MILESPOINT200 YARDSI _ADVANCE400 YARDSSUPPORT PROPER500 YARDSINITIAL POINTNT,--RJ 534RESERVEASSEMBLY AREA:MAIN BODY FOLLOWSRESERVE AT PRESCRIBEDDISTANCEFigure .An initial advance guard formation.22

d. Average road spaces and distances betweenelements of an advance guard in a daylight marchare approximately as follows:AverageElement StrengthAverage distance toroad space next succeedinyards ing element inyards, daylightPoint ....... Squad ....... 50 200Advance party.. Platoon (less one 75 400squad).Support proper . Rifle company 150 500(less oneplatoon).At night or under conditions of poor visibility, distancesmay be considerably less; in open country,distances may be greater.23. THE SUPPORT PROPER. The support proper usuallyconsists of a reinforced rifle company less theplatoon sent forward as the advance party. Contactwith the advance party is maintained by radioand by connecting files sent forward from the supportproper. The support proper usually marchesin two single-file columns, one on each side of theroad, with approximately two paces between men.The support commander ordinarily marches at thehead of the support proper; however, he goeswherever his presence is required. He rapidly'informs the advance guard commander of anychanges in the situation.23

24. THE ADVANCE PARTY. The advance party consistsof one rifle platoon, reinforced, less one squadsent forward as the point. Contact is maintainedwith the point by radio and by connecting files sentforward by the advance party. The advance partyusually marches in two single-file columns, one oneach side of the road, with approximately fivepaces between men. Reinforcements to the advanceparty may include attached 57-mm rifles,machine guns, and tanks. Observers from the artillery,heavy mortars, and 81-mm mortars maymarch with the advance party. The advance partycommander usually marches at the head of theadvance party.25. THE POINT. The point consists of one riflesquad, which normally is not reinforced. It is theleading element of the advance guard. The pointmarches in two single-file columns, one on eachside of the road, with at least ten paces betweenmen. (See fig. 5.)26. ACTION OF THE SUPPORT. a. Conduct. Unlessotherwise ordered, the support company attackswithout hesitation to drive off the enemy or envelophis position. The point immediately deploysand attacks the resistance. The advance party platoonleader joins the point squad leader. Aftermaking a rapid reconnaissance and an estimate ofthe situation, the platoon leader commits the advanceparty if the point cannot overcome the resistance.The support company commander comesforward and, through similar action, when the24

SQUAD LEADER A XAUTOMATIC RIFLEMANASSISTANT SQUAD LEADERCONNECTING FILESHEAD OF ADVANCE PARTY0Figure 5. Disposition of the point of an advance party.25

situation warrants, commits the support. Wheneverpossible, the advance party and support attackby a quick envelopment rather than by frontalattack. If the support is unable to reduce the enemy'sresistance, it immobilizes him by fire andlocates his flanks. If the enemy withdraws or isdestroyed without requiring the advance guardreserve to fight, the support company promptlyresumes its advance.b. Security. The commander of each element ofthe support company always is responsible for theclose-in security of his command. The securityused depends on the mission, the terrain, and theexpected enemy action.(1) Frontal security may be provided by elementsof the intelligence and reconnaissanceplatoon or by motorized detachmentsfrom the advance guard. The supportcommander usually receives informationfrom these advanced elementsthrough the advance guard commander.(2) Flank security for the point and the advanceparty normally is limited to observationto the flanks. When possible, protectionup to 500 yards is provided bymotorized flank guards from the supportproper. Flank guards are sent to pointswhich allow observation of the support orwhich provide concealment for hostile recohnaissanceor harassing detachments.If the terrain is such that vehicles cannotmove cross country, the flank guardsleave their vehicles on the road and go on26

foot to selected observation points on theflanks. When the support proper passes,the flank guards move rapidly by vehicleto the head of the column.(3) During halts, the support establishes itsown security. Each element promptlyposts observers to the front and flanks toprevent enemy forces from approachingundetected.27. THE COMPANY AS ADVANCE GUARD OF A BAT-TALION MARCHING ALONE. When a battalion conductsan independent march, the battalion commanderdesignates one rifle company as the advanceguard company. The mission, formation,and operation of this advance guard company resemblethose of a rifle company designated as thesupport of an advance guard battalion.28. THE COMPANY AS FLANK GUARD OF A LARGERFORCE. a. The mission of a flank guard companyis to protect the main body from hostile groundobservation and surprise ground attack from theflank. In the event of an attack from the flank, thismission requires action which permits the uninterruptedpassage of the main body from the area orgives the main body time to deploy.b. The flank guard company may be reinforcedby elements of the regimental intelligence and reconnaissanceplatoon, the tank company, the heavyweapons company, and the engineers. Forwardobservers from the heavy mortar company andartillery also may accompany the flank guard853696 0--49 ,3 27

company. Ordinarily the flank guard company hasspecial materiel such as antitank mines, demolitions,and means for constructing obstacles.c. The formation used by the flank guard companydepends on the terrain, the availability ofparallel routes, the expected enemy action, and themethod of travel. When the flank guard companymarches on foot, its formation usually resemblesthat used by a company acting as the support ofan advance guard battalion. (See par. 22.) Thecompany commander maintains a centrally locatedreserve which he uses to influence the action whenevernecessary. Because of the difficulty in keepingup with the main body, flank guard companiesusually are motorized.d. Movement is made either by maintaining arate of march equal to that of the main body or byoccupying successive objectives. Close liaison withthe main body is maintained by patrols and radio.e. Depending on the terrain and the expectedenemy action, the flank guard company may marchparallel to the main column or it may occupy aseries of defensive positions on the flank. Whenthe flank guard company maintains a rate of marchequal to that of the main body, it operates like thesupport company of an advance guard battalion.When occupying a series of defensive positions, itcovers routes of expected enemy approach until themain body passes. It may construct road blocksand obstacles along ridges, stream lines, and defiles.In this type of operation, the flank guard ispartially motorized and occupies its positions by aseries of leap-frog movements. A flank guard com-28

pany maintains ground security measures similarto an advance guard support company. (See par.22.)Section IV. MOTOR MARCHES29. GENERAL. When moving by motor, the companymay form part of the main body, may act asa security force of a larger unit, or it may moveas an independent unit. When it acts as a securityforce of a larger unit, it may be detailed as an advanceor flank guard or a motorized detachment.30. THE COMPANY AS PART OF THE MAIN BODYOF A LARGER FORCE. In tactical column when movingby vehicle as part of the main body, the riflecompany conducts its march according to ordersand standing operating procedure. The vehiclesnormally move with the company. Caliber .50 machineguns are mounted for antiaircraft protection,and each vehicle maintains an air guard. Additionalantitank protection normally is providedby elements of the regimental tank company.31. THE COMPANY AS SUPPORT OF THE ADVANCEGUARD BATTALION. For missions and composition,see paragraph 22.a. The reinforced rifle company, as the motorizedsupport of the advance guard battalion, usuallyis preceded by the regimental intelligence andreconnaissance platoon or reconnaissance elementsof higher commanders. These reconnaissance elementshave the mission of finding the enemy and29

are followed by the support at enough distance (3miles or more) to allow the support to detruck anddeploy.b. The support sends forward an advance party(reinforced rifle platoon), which precedes the supportproper by approximately 5 minutes. The advanceparty does not send forward a point as itdoes on a foot march. However, the company commandermaintains contact with the advance reconnaissanceelements by patrols and radio.c. The methods of control and operation are similarto those used by a company on foot (see par.22). Because of the rapid rate of movement, closeliaison between column elements is maintained toprevent closing up at unexpected halts. Distancebetween vehicles and elements within the supportdepends on the visibility, the terrain, and the expectedenemy action.32. THE COMPANY AS ADVANCE GUARD OF A BAT-TALION MARCHING ALONE. The mission, formation,composition, and operation of a motorized advanceguard company resemble those of the supportof a motorized advance guard battalion. (Seepar. 31.)33. THE COMPANY AS FLANK GUARD OF A LARGERFORCE. a. When the larger force is motorized, themission and organization of a motorized flankguard of a larger motorized force resemble thoseof a flank guard company on foot. (See par. 28.)This flank guard company moves on a suitable parallelroute in a formation similar to that of a supportof a motorized advance guard battalion.30

. When the larger force is on foot, the missionand composition of the motorized flank guard companyresemble those of a flank company on foot.The formation is a series of motorized detachments.The control, as for a flank guard on foot,is as described in paragraph 28. The motorizedflank guard company operates by having each motorizeddetachment block an avenue of expectedenemy approach. Since roads are the best route ofapproach, they are given priority. The occulpationof these flank positions normally is made in advanceof the march of the main body. Engineersare used to help construct road blocks and obstacles.When the tail of the main column passes aparticular flank position, the motorized detachmentoccupying that position leapfrogs to anotherposition. In case of an enemy attack, the mainbody commander is notified and the flank guarddelays the advance of the enemy until the mainbody deploys, or passes a designated point. Themotorized flank guard company commander normallymaintains a central reserve, located to reinforceany detachment as the need arises.34. THE COMPANY AS A MOTORIZED DETACH-MENT. a. The rifle company detailed as a motorizeddetachment has the mission of reconnoiteringthe route of advance and protecting the main body.The company may be reinforced by elements ofthe regimental intelligence and reconnaissance platoon,the tank company, the battalion heavy weaponscompany, engineers, communication and medi-31

cal personnel, and forward observers from theheavy mortar company and the artillery.b. The formation used depends on the terrainand the expected enemy action. Elements are arrangedin the column in the order of their expecteduse. This arrangement allows immediate actionwhen small enemy detachments are met, and itassists in the rapid development of the enemy positionwhen resistance is deliberate. Control ismaintained by the assignment of successive marchobjectives and phase lines. Radio is the principalmeans of communication within the motorized detachmentsand with the main body commander.c. The motorized detachment operates ahead ofthe advance guard at a distance prescribed by themain body commander. Advances are made bybounds from one terrain feature to the next. Asmall element, covered by the other elements ofthe detachment, moves rapidly to a selected terrainfeature. After the small element reaches the terrainfeature, it is followed by the remainder of thedetachment. If corps or division reconnaissanceelements are operating to the front of the motorizeddetachment, the motorized detachment maintainsliaision with them. A motorized detachmentmaintains ground security similar to the supportof an advance guard. (See par. 22.)Section V. MOVEMENT TO CONTACT DURINGDARKNESS35. UNCOVERED MOVEMENT DURING DARKNESS.a. General. Although an uncovered movement tocontact normally is made in daylight, it may be32

necessary or desirable in some situations to makethe movement or continue it during darkness. Themovement may occur during a period of enemy airsuperiority or during an envelopment, exploitation,or pursuit. To preserve secrecy, to seize terrainby surprise, or to deny the enemy the time toorganize delaying positions, a company may beordered to begin or continue its movement, eitheron foot or in vehicles, during darkness.b. March rate. On good roads, the march rate forfoot troops approximates that of the day rate ofmarch under the same conditions. On poor roads,on dark nights, or in unfavorable weather, the rateof march may be reduced considerably. If themovement is made by vehicles, the speed is reducedgreatly.c. Formations. The formation used for an uncoveredmovement to-contact at night depends on enemyinformation, the method of travel, the visibility,and the terrain. Usually a compact column isused, and the distance between elements is lessthan in a daylight move.d. Control.(1) Measures are taken to maintain directionand control at night. The loss of directionmay split a column into severalparts, or it may result in loss of secrecyor in failure to reach the march objectivebefore daylight. It may cause the companyto fail to accomplish its mission.(2) If time and the situation permit, a reconnaissanceof the route is made duringdaylight. If a daylight reconnaissance is33

impossible, the company commandermakes a thorough map reconnaissance topick out march objectives and any otherdefinite terrain feature which assists inmaintaining direction during a nightmarch.(3) During the march, leaders closely checkmarch discipline, maintenance of contact,control, and direction. Routes aremarked carefully and guides are postedby leading elements to assist successiveelements. Company elements are wellclosed up, and the distances between menare greatly reduced.(4) During movement on a dark night, specialmeans of identification may be used toprevent men from becoming lost. Forinstance, each man can tie a white handkerchiefor undershirt on the rear of hisbelt to guide the man to his rear.e. Secrecy. In an uncovered movement to contactat night, secrecy is of paramount importance.Measures for preserving secrecy during an uncoverednight march include-(1) Prohibiting smoking.(2) Prohibiting the use of lights.(3) Holding noises to a minimum.(4) Maintaining radio silence until enemycontact is made.(5) Refraining from firing upon hostile aircraft.f. Security.(1) Particular attention is paid to security34

during an uncovered movement to contactat night. Factors determining thestrength of the security elements in-clude-(a) Imminence of the enemy.(b) Strength and type of screening force(if any) and the distance it is operatingahead of the company.(c) Terrain.(d) Company mission.(2) Ordinarily, the rifle company sends outsecurity elements to the front and flanks.These security detachments prevent theenemy from ambushing or surprising thecolumn.36. COVERED MOVEMENT DURING DARKNESS. a.When made at night, the covered movement to contactis conducted like that used in daylight. Nightmovements are made when enemy air superiorityor artillery prevents daylight movements, or whenit is desirable to relocate troops during darkness tomaintain secrecy.b. A covered movement during darkness usuallyis preceded by a daylight reconnaissance of theroute. Guides are posted to keep the column onthe route. The rate of march, formations, controlmeasures, and secrecy measures resemble thosediscussed in paragraph 35.Section VI. ASSEMBLY AREAS AND ATTACKPOSITIONS37. ASSEMBLY AREAS. a. Assembly areas are loca-35

tions where the elements of a command are assembledpreparatory to further tactical action. Ifpossible, assembly areas are located within easymarching time (approximately 1 hour) of theattack position.b. Desirable characteristics of an assembly areainclude-(1) Concealment from hostile air and groundobservation.(2) Cover from direct fire.(3) Enough space for the proper dispersal ofall organic and attached or supportingelements of the unit.(4) More than one good route of entrance andexit.(5) Turn-arounds and hard standing for vehicles.(6) Natural obstacles for protection againsta tank attack.c. The battalion commander assigns the companyan assembly area within the battalion assemblyarea. He selects it after considering the probablefuture use of the company. The companycommander similarly assigns platoon assemblyareas. (See fig. 6.)d. To avoid confusion and to prevent delayingother units, the company commander designates anoncommissioned officer and guides to accompanythe battalion quartering party. The noncommissionedofficer is responsible for suballotting thearea to platoons and posting guides to lead them totheir respective areas.e. In the assembly area, individuals and units36

zFE w3EwuU w!Iii~~~w.- zOI-.Iw-iio9wIInIwwP:w3W ~ ol :WSaA -oov- 009cU 2~~~~~~~~~~~UC37w ~ In3

establish and maintain camouflage and security.The primary activity in the assembly area is thepreparation for tactical action. Reconnaissance,detailed plans, and coordination are made as completeas possible, and attack orders usually areissued while the troops are in the assembly area.Equipment not needed for combat is collected andstacked. Necessary vehicles join their units.Troops are given the maximum rest consistentwith adequate briefing and preparation for thecontemplated operation. Combat loads of ammunitionand rations are issued. (See fig. 7.)38. ATTACK POSITIONS. a. The company attackposition is the last covered and concealed positionoccupied by the company before crossing the lineof departure. Within the company position are theassault platoon attack positions and the supportplatoon location. Based on the plan of attack andthe terrain, the company is assigned an attack positionby the battalion commander. The companycommander designates platoon attack positionswithin the company position.b. The selection of an attack position is basedon the expected use of the unit; its selection aidsthe movement to the line of departure. The desiredcharacteristics of an attack position resemblethose of an assembly area. Cover from enemysmall-arms fire is available.c. The primary activity in the attack position isthe final preparation and coordination for theattack. When the situation permits vehicles to bebrought forward to the attack position, special38

Aw~~~~'Csii~ : iiW~~~r 41< X'~h0Cg IU.:If tc-~''~~- 39 -39t

heavy equipment for certain types of operations isgiven to the troops in this position. The attackposition is occupied for a minimum time before theattack. The movement may be made under battalionor company control. Particular attention isgiven to the maintenance of secrecy during themovement to the attack position.39. SECURITY. When the company occupies a portionof the battalion assembly area, security measuresare coordinated by the battalion commander.Security measures depend on the length of timethe area is to be occupied, the expected enemyaction, the security provided by forces to the front,the terrain, and the weapons and equipment available.Security measures may vary from the establishmentof observation posts (when adequate securityis provided by forces to the front) to anelaborate perimeter defense including all weapons(when inadequate security is provided by forces tothe front and a strong enemy attack is possible).For antiaircraft security and antitank defense, seeparagraphs 12 and 13.40

CHAPTER 3RIFLE SQUADSection I. GENERAL40. ORGANIZATION. The rifle squad consists of asquad leader, an assistant squad leader, an automaticrifle team (automatic rifleman and assistantautomatic rifleman), and five riflemen.41. DUTIES OF LEADERS. a. The squad leader is responsiblefor the discipline, training, control, andconduct of his squad. His squad is trained to useand care for its weapons and equipment, to moveand fight efficiently as individuals, and to functioneffectively as part of -the fighting team.b. The assistant squad leader performs dutiesassigned by the squad leader and takes commandof the squad in his absence. The assistant squadleader usually controls the automatic rifle team.42. TARGET DESIGNATION. Battlefield targets generallyare not clear. Point targets and area targetsare designated with accuracy and simplicity by firecommands or by other means, such as firing tracerrounds.43. FIRE CONTROL. Fire control is the ability ofthe squad leader to open fire when desired, adjust41

the fire of his squad upon the target, shift the fireof all or part of the squad from one target to another,regulate the rate of fire, and cease firingwhen he wishes. The squad leader designates thetarget and gives the command for opening fire. Hecontrols the fire by oral orders and signals and byrequiring men of the squad to transmit his ordersalong the front of the squad. He concentrates thefire of the squad on the assigned target. At times,the squad leader moves from man to man and personallydirects their fire to make sure that all menfire. On orders of the platoon leader or on his owninitiative, he shifts the fire of all or part of hissquad to new targets. Even though the exact targetis not definite, a volume of fire helps closingwith the enemy and saves lives. Squad leaders exertstrong leadership to produce and maintain thisvolume of fire, especially in the final stages of theattack.44. FIRE DISCIPLINE. Fire discipline in the riflesquad is achieved through training in the use ofweapons and the exact execution of orders. It requiresskill in sight setting, aiming, and triggersqueeze; close attention to the squad leader; andchange in the rate of fire on the squad leader'sorder or signal.45. FIRE DISTRIBUTION. a. Each man fires his firstshot on the part of the target corresponding to hisposition in the squad (fig. 8). (The term "target"refers to definitely located enemy or to the areawhere the enemy is believed to be located.) Hethen distributes his fire to the right and left of his42

'I.~~~~~~~Itss0 or,n 4r$~~~~~~~~~~~44aa~~~~~~~~~~853ara 049 .853698 0-49------4 43

first shot, covering that part of the target wherehe can deliver accurate fire without changing hisposition. The part of the target which one mancan cover is limited by the range and the positionof the firer. Often each man can cover the entiretarget with accurate fire; he does this wheneverpossible.b. The automatic rifleman distributes his fireover the entire target or on any target which bestsupports the advance of the squad. The automaticrifleman fires rapid single shots or bursts of twoor three rounds; he does not fire longer burstsunless he can deliver enfilade fire on a profitabletarget or unless the target is at very close range.c. The squad leader controls the squad fire sothat the entire target is kept under fire. If newytargets appear, he changes the fire distribution asnecessary.d. All men are trained to estimate ranges. Thislets the squad place surprise fire on a target.Ranges can be determined by tracer or by sightingshots when the strike of bullets can be observed;however, this method often causes loss of surprise.46. FIRE AND MANEUVER. Infantry fights by fireand maneuver. One element fires while anotherelement moves under the cover of this fire, makingthe maximum use of cover. One man may engagethe enemy by fire while another moves to a newfiring position closer to the enemy. A part of thesquad may cover by fire the movement of the remainderof the squad to new firing positions. Therifle squad may move as a unit to assault the hos-44

tile position while other rifle elements and supportingweapons fire at the enemy to limit hismovement and neutralize his fires.47. SNIPING. Snipers shoot enemy who exposethemselves. By eliminating enemy leaders andharassing their troops, sniping weakens enemymorale. Snipers are expert riflemen, and they aremost effective in defensive situations. (See FM21-75.) Sniping is not confined to specially trainedand selected men; all riflemen act as snipers wheneverthe occasion demands.48. AMMUNITION SUPPLY. Each member of thesquad carries an initial supply of ammunition forhis individual weapon. Hand grenades and extraammunition are issued when needed. When necessary,the squad leader requests ammunition fromthe platoon leader, and he sees that his squad collectsammunition from casualties. The squad leaderis responsible that ammunition (including grenades)is not discarded by men of his squad,either on the march or after contact is made.49. ANTIAIRCRAFT SECURITY. For antiaircraft security,see paragraph 12.50. ANTITANK DEFENSE. Antitank defense is coveredin paragraph 13. Antitank grenadiers areplaced to provide close-in antitank defense for thesquad.Section II. MOVEMENT TO CONTACT51. GENERAL. During the movement to contact,45

the rifle squad generally marches as a part of theplatoon. During foot marches, the squad usuallyuses a march column formation which consists ofa column of files on each side of the road. (Seeapp. II.) This formation provides maximum speedand control, and it is used to move the squad fromone location to another behind friendly front lines.Reconnaissance and security missions which maybe assigned to a rifle squad during the approachmarch include the point of an advance guard, aflank guard, or a march outpost.52. POINT OF AN ADVANCE GUARD. a. The point isa rifle squad sent forward by the advance partyto act as security. Motorized reconnaissance andsecurity elements from larger units may precedethe point.b. The point of an advance guard moves alongthe route of advance and protects the column fromenemy near the route of march. The point precedesthe advance party by a distance varyingwith the terrain; however, it is usually within 200yards. The point marches in a diamond formationor in a column of two's with one file on each sideof the road, and there is a minimum of 10 pacesbetween men (fig. 9). The leading two or threeriflemen increase this distance to about 20 paces.Either of these formations provides adequate controlby the squad leader, reduces the danger fromenemy small-arms fire, and permits prompt fire actiontoward the front or either flank. The squadleader goes where his presence is required, but heis usually just in rear of his leading riflemen. The46

assistant squad leader marches at the rear of thepoint.= E:ALE L_.47one file on each 8ide of the road and at least 10paces between men.

c. The point fires on all hostile elements withinrange. Observed enemy beyond effective rifle rangeare reported by the signal ENEMY IN SIGHT(fig. 10). The point continues to advance untilwithin effective range and then it opens fire and attacks(fig. 11). Rapid, aggressive fire and maneuverby the point may drive off small enemy groups.It also may force a large enemy group to commit itselfand disclose its locations, thus aiding the useof the advance party. When unable to drive off theenemy, the point holds its position and covers theaction of the advance party. The point observestoward the front and flanks but makes no physicalflank reconnaissance. Except to open fire, thepoint stops only on the order of the advance partycommander. When the column halts, the pointsends out security to protect itself against a surpriseattack.53. CONNECTING FILES. A connecting file is oneor two men placed between units on the march tomaintain contact between the units. It is furnishedby the larger unit to keep contact withthe smaller unit. The number of connecting filesplaced between units depends on the interval betweenunits, the terrain, and the visibility. Connectingfiles pass forward all orders, messages,and signals received from the unit sending them(fig. 12). They halt only on orders or signals fromthat unit, or when the smaller unit halts. The signalENEMY IN SIGHT and special signals previouslyagreed upon are passed back to the largerunit. If a connecting file consists of one man, he48

_~- _ ~ ii..-' 0*Figure 10. The point signals back ENEMY IN SIGHTwhen the enemy is sighted but is beyond effectiverange.49

V· :· ::NiXt r :il.§1\-· Bei 0: ERid : naa\ t1! \ 4r>000 j 5 0 0 \ "a0f0 i t t t XW L 20~ ~ 8d e : · > |t H z ci~,'~ ~':i ~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Qo~~~~~~~~ Vm ~~~50

'AIN-IFPARTY.Figure 12. Connecting files pass forward all orders, nmessages,and signals received from the unit sendingthem.51

looks alternately to the rear and to the front forsignals. To overcome the difficulty of one mankeeping both forward and rear elements in view,a two-man connecting file ordinarily is used. Oneman watches the larger unit for signals, the otherwatches the smaller unit, and they remain withinspeaking distance of each other.54. FLANK GUARD. a. A rifle squad often is usedas a motorized flank guard to protect a unit onthe march. (See par. 26.) The flank guard occupiespositions to prevent the enemy from firingon the column within midrange (400-600 yards).It checks areas likely to conceal hostile troops orobservers. When the squad remains for a time atone locality, the leader provides for all-aroundsecurity by selecting one or more firing positionsfor each man. The squad usually posts two ormore men as observers and for local security; oneman is designated to watch for signals from theparent unit. The remainder of the squad remainsunder cover, prepared to move immediately intofiring positions. (See fig. 13.)b. Enemy are reported by signal or messengerand, if within effective range, they immediatelyare attacked by fire. If the enemy is beyond effectiverange, the squad leader acts according. tohis orders or on his own initiative in the absenceof orders. Contact with the squad is maintainedby the commander of the unit sending it out.55. MARCH OUTPOST. When a squad acts as amarch outpost during a halt and is assigned an52

timei fil' 0I - 1 ,4 4 'Ba53!e%:xo~5

area of security, the squad leader places his mento observe the assigned area. (See fig. 14.)LAEAUOATIDER ANDANCMESSENGERFigure 14. All-around security is established during a halt.54

56. FORMATIONS. When the platoon leaves thetactical column to take up the approach march,the squad marches with the platoon. Squad formationsused during the approach march and theattack are squad column, squad diamond, and asskirmishers (see app. II). The initial formationusually is prescribed by the platoon leader; thereafter,the squad leader changes his formation tomeet changes in the situation and the terrain.a. Squad column usually is the best formationfor movement in woods, fog, smoke, and darkness,when control is the governing factor. It also isused for moving along narrow trails and throughdefiles. The squad column is controlled easily; itgives observation in all directions and permits immediateaction toward the flanks. (See fig. 15.)b. Squad diamond is used for situations whichrequire readiness for action in any direction; forexample, when a squad is acting alone, or wherea squad is the leading element of the platoon. Itis an excellent formation to use when contact isimminent, since this formation provides good control,all-around security, flexibility, and dispersion.(See fig. 16.)c. As skirmishers is an initial fighting formation,it generally is used after contact with theenemy is gained, but before the squad leader completeshis reconnaissance to determine the mostfavorable location for the automatic rifle. Thisformation provides flexibility and lets the squadleader carefully place the automatic rifle team.As soon as the squad leader determines the bestlocation for the automatic rifle, he directs the55

L-- ; " OF >yLEAALRSISTANTW~~~~~_rASESlTANTFigure 15. The squad column is easy to control.56

: mss~~~-.-16XFigure 16. T h e squad diamond all-aroudsecuri--t=yprovidesk--iu-~~~~~~.i · :·---::::::: ;:::i:te .ASS AN 5Figure 16S.The squad diamond provides all-around security.57

squad to form as skirmishers, AR right (left).After the automatic rifle team is committed, allsquad weapons fire to the front. This formationis used primarily during the assault. It is good fordashing across open areas, particularly in areasexposed to enemy fire. (See fig. 17.)57. PASSING THROUGH LONG-RANGE FIRE. Whenthe enemy covers a zone across the line of advancewith long-range machine guni or artillery fire, thesquad disperses and the entire squad rushes acrossthis fire-swept area in a single bound. This actionis taken by the squad leader upon his own initiativeor when directed by his platoon leader. Troopsdo not stop until they pass through the areacovered by fire; this is particularly importantwhen crossing crests or passing through defiles.The squad leader leads his squad across the areaand re-forms it beyond the area.58. POSITION AND DUTIES OF LEADERS. Duringthe approach march, the squad leader is where hebest can control his squad. He studies the groundto the front to choose the best route of movementfor the squad. He varies his squad disposition accordingto the circumstances. He maintains theprescribed direction, yet .makes minor detours touse better routes. (See fig. 18.) The assistantsquad leader usually is in rear of the squad to superviseits advance.59. SECURITY. When a squad is in the approachmarch, it protects itself by using the correct for-58

I::?'"l '?:-ii'ii¥ ::iiiiii ':- i'... i " " , ?--3,, !,:.i . ::i..';.... 059

mation, by observation, and by dispersion. Oftenit is necessary to check dangerous localities. Thisis done by sending out security elements._---_ POSSIBLE ENEMYMACHINE GUN EMPLACEMENT - ...........COVER AND CONCEALMENTFOR MY MEN -- -WATCH THAT CRESTSR EUIY.-r _ _S==_S ;e'R. -. : ,~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.... i -.. ,:,'''.'ij.E_-..., -E.E.E- . i D.._ ::#;j'''9" E'.,tg:;: gEE-Efi:: Amp: ilk :g:-:-: he::::::: i: CEDE:-: i >: i: :: .>:; : ::::t::ggg::-: ..f'..E i i::::i::g:An-'- 'iiiSijjiicg. --'i..... ..--Figure 18. The squad leader studies the ground and selectshis squad's route.60. ACTION WHEN CONTACT IS ESTABLISHED. a.When the point squad is fired upon, the riflemenimmediately move into firing position and returnthe fire. (See fig. 19.) The squad leader makes aquick reconnaissance, decides upon the best po-60

sition for the automatic rifle team, and tells theassistant squad leader to move it to the selectedposition. Particularly at close range, instant firefrom rifles (white phosphorous, antitank, andfragmentation rifle grenades, as well as ball ammunition)and, from the automatic rifle, often destroysor neutralizes the enemy element whichdiscloses its position by fire. When the enemystrength prevents such a quick local success, thesquad leader builds up fire superiority and moveshis squad forward, using fire and maneuver. Theplatoon leader may use this squad for a frontalattack while he maneuvers with the remainder ofthe platoon.b. When a squad is protected from enemy smallarms,fire, the squad leader may move his squadto a firing position where he can flank or surprisethe enemy. He uses the fires of supporting weaponsand the cover and concealment provided by theterrain, and he moves his squad as close to theenemy as possible before opening fire. When thereis a covered route to the position, the squad leaderadvances the squad as a unit, using a column ordiamond formation. He issues his fire order undercover. The men creep or crawl to their firing positionsand, when all are in position, they delivera surprise volume of accurate fire. Then, accordingto the platoon's plan of attack, the squad movesinto the assault.Section III. PREPARATION FOR THE ATTACK61. GENERAL Before the attack, a squad may haltin a covered area selected by the platoon leader.61

: i : all~~~~~~~~~~~Qi:::::~k w BOX~~~~:,:,T:,_ts ~ r ~ ~ AS -S ANT- 9 SQUAD LEADER,Figure 19. When the point squad is fired on, the riflemenimmediately move into firing positions and returnthe fire.62

This area usually is part of a company or battalionassembly area. Immediately on arrival in thisarea, the squad leader disperses his men. Hechecks the condition of his squad to make surethat the weapons are in working condition, thateach man has the required amount of ammunitionand rations, and that all special equipment is issued.He uses the natural cover and concealmentto protect his squad from aerial and ground observationand enemy fire. Men use existing holesor ditches and, in many situations, they dig slittrenches.62. PLATOON LEADER'S ORDER. The platoon leaderstates whether the squad will be initially in theassault or in support. If the squad is in the assault,it is given a definite part of the platoonobjective to capture and a zone of action or a directionof attack. The zone of action is given byassigning the squad a particular part of the lineof departure. The time of attack or the signal forthe attack is stated. (See par. 126.)63. TROOP LEADING PROCEDURE. While the squadis in the assembly area or moving to the attackposition, the squad leader goes forward to receivethe platoon leader's attack order. After receivingthe attack order the squad leader makes his reconnaissance,which often is an observation madefrom the point where he receives the attack order.He studies the terrain-paying particular attentionto his route to the line of departure, positionsfor his automatic rifle, and known or possible63

enemy positions. During this reconnaissance heplans his attack-deciding upon the formation, thespecific route to the objective, and actions requiredto accomplish his mission.64. METHOD OF ATTACK. a. In general, attacks byrifle units consist of two successive phases: first,the advance from the line of departure to the assaultposition; and second, the advance from theassault position to the objective.64(1) The line of departure is the line fromwhich the attack starts. It may be theline along which the squad is in contactwith the enemy or the line held by otherfriendly troops. Physically, it may be aroad, a stream, the crest of a hill, theedge of a woods, or a similar terrainfeature. The squad crosses the line ofdeparture as a part of the platoon. (Seepar. 177.)(2) The objective is a terrain feature whichusually is part of the platoon objective.It may be a portion of a hill, woods, orvillage. The distance from the line ofdeparture to the objective may vary from300 or 400 yards to 1,000 yards.(3) The assault position is located betweenthe line of departure and the objective.At this position, many of the supportingfires (direct and indirect) which coverthe forward movement of the squad arelifted, and the squad uses its own maxi-

mum fire power for the final assault ofthe enemy position. The distance fromthe assault position to the objective variesfrom 100 to 150 yards, depending onhow close the squad can move to its ownsupporting fires without suffering casualtiesfrom these fires. The assault positionmay be in front of or to the flank(rarely to the rear) of the objective. Thedetermining factors are the enemy dispositionand the location of covered andconcealed routes of approach in the vicinityof the objective. There is no delayor hesitation at the assault position.The timing of the lifting of supportingfires is coordinated closely by higher commanderswith the movement of the assaultechelon; this permits the uninterruptedmovement through the assaultposition. (See pars. 71 and 72.)b. Squad attack as part of the platoon. The riflesquad most often attacks as a part of the platoonwhich attacks frontally as an interior unit. Underthese conditions, the squad moves forward in theplatoon formation. The advance consists of a rapidmovement under the cover of heavy supportingfires to the assault position where the squad deploysas skirmishers for the assault. When theplatoon advances with one platoon element coveringby fire the movement of another platoon element,the rifle squad may attack frontally or itmay form all or part of the platoon's maneuveringelement. If the squad attacks frontally, it advances65

y fire and maneuver as a unit to cover the forwardmovement of the remainder of the platoon.Whenever possible, the squad advances to the assaultposition itself where it joins in the assault.If the squad is used as part or all of the maneuveringelement of the platoon, it maneuvers as a unitunder covering fires of other elements. The squadthen uses any available covered route to the assaultposition, preferable at the flank or rear ofthe objective. (See par. 125.)c. Squad attack on an independent mission. The squadmay attack frontally by fire and maneuver whenon an independent mission; for example, a combatpatrol or the point of an advance guard. Ifthe terrain permits, part of the'squad executes afrontal attack to hold the enemy in position andneutralizes his fires while the remainder of thesquad advances by a covered route to a positionwhere it assaults the enemy's flank or rear. However,since the rifle squad seldom fights at maximumstrength, this method rarely is used becausereduced strength in the squad makes ineffectiveeither or both the frontal attack element and themaneuver element.65. POSITION AND DUTIES OF THE SQUAD LEADER.a. During the attack, the primary duty of the squadleader is to direct his squad in advancing andplacing effective fire on the enemy. To do this, hemakes the maximum use of his automatic rifleteam, thus supporting the advance of other menof the squad. He enforces fire discipline, takinga position from which he best can control his men66

and observe the effect of their fire. In selectinghis position, he considers the need for maintainingcontact with the platoon leader. At times, becauseof battle noise and confusion, he moves from manto man, giving instructions. He fires only in anemergency or when he considers that his fire poweror example outweighs the need for close controlof his squad.b. When the squad leader personally cannotmaintain effective control over the fire of thesquad as a whole, he may retain control over apart and temporarily give control of the remainderto the assistant squad leader. The squad leaderalso-(1) Directs the fire of his squad to positionswhere enemy troops are known or believedto be located.(2) Looks ahead for new firing positions forhis squad, and he is constantly on thealert to advance his squad toward theenemy.(3) Seeks a position for his automatic riflemanto fire on any target blocking thesquad's advance; this position shouldpermit automatic rifle fire across the entirefront, where practicable.(4) Maintains contact with the platoon leaderor assigns this duty to the assistant squadleader, and he keeps the men of his squadinformed of the situation of adjacent andsupporting units.(5) Maintains dispersion, yet prevents hismen from scattering beyond control. He67

prevents several men from bunching behindcover suitable for only one man;isolated trees, stumps, bushes, or otherwell-defined objects are avoided.(6) Observes units on his flanks and makes aprompt report to the platoon leader wheneverwide gaps occur (see fig. 20).(7) Attacks important or dangerous targetswithout orders, when necessary.(8) Resists, by fire, sudden attacks from theflanks. In the event of an enemy tankattack, he uses antitank and white phosphorousgrenades to disable the tanks.(9) Joins the nearest troops, if his squad isseparated from the platoon, and takesorders from the leader of these troops.At the first favorable opportunity, he rejoinshis platoon.66. POSITION AND DUTIES OF ASSISTANT SQUADLEADER. The assistant squad leader's position isnot fixed; he takes the position where he best canassist the squad leader. He may be ordered to placethe automatic rifle team in position and control itsfire. He assists in enforcing fire discipline, supervisingammunition supply, and maintaining contactwith the platoon leader. He replaces the squadleader in the squad leader's absence.67. DUTIES OF SQUAD MEMBERS. a. The automaticrifleman and his assistant function as a team. Theautomatic rifleman selects the exact position wherehe best can cover the target. The team is alert for68

FAM~F ~nnlltid li IL·tsrl2~4Y X. 0 II a6x0 LJ

surprise targets, particularly automatic weapons.It maintains eye contact with the squad leader orhis assistant to fire at new targets rapidly. (Seefig. 21.)b. The riflemen move forward in the attack, asordered by the squad leader, and remain alert forinstructions. They pass on instructions from thesquad leader to other riflemen. When some men ofthe squad are advancing, the remaining men coverthem by fire.68. ORDERS. The squad leader gives his attack orderto all men of his squad. When his men cannotsee their route of advance before the attackstarts, the squad leader supplements his orderwith a sketch showing the important terrain features.Orders are clear and definite so that all menin the squad understand the squad's mission andthe plan for accomplishing the mission. The squadleader's order includesa.Information of the enemy and friendly forces,including the location and proposed action ofadjacent squads.b. Mission of the squad and the plan for accomplishingit.c. Duties of squad members to include instructionsfor the reorganization on the objective.d. Administrative details, including ammunitionsupply and the location of the battalion aid station.e. Prearranged signals.70f. Location of squad and platoon leaders.

%--= ~iI I'j "t71

Section IV. ATTACK69. MOVEMENT ACROSS THE LINE OF DEPARTURE.The squad, as a part of the platoon, moves fromthe attack position to the line of departure. Beforeleaving the attack position, the squad leaderchecks to see that each man is in his assigned placeand ready to move forward at the prescribed time.On a signal, the squad crosses the line of departurein an appropriate formation (par. 56),and it does not deploy further until it is necessaryto fire on the enemy. (See fig. 22.)70. CONDUCT OF THE ATTACK. After crossingthe line of departure, the squad moves to the assaultposition as rapidly as the situation permits.Unnecessary halts are avoided since the longer thesquad is exposed to enemy fires the more casualtiesit is likely to receive. The squad advances ina formation which allows speed and control underconditions of terrain and enemy fires.a. Maximum use of supporting fires. When attackingas a part of a larger force, the squad is supportedby the heavy fires of higher units. These fires, includingsmoke, tend to neutralize the enemy, andthey let the assault elements move rapidly to theassault position. The neutralization is most effectiveduring the initial stages of the attack. Byusing these fires, the squad often can advance bya quick forward movement to the assault positionwith few, if any, casualties. Conversely, halts oreven hesitation give the enemy time to recoverfrom the shock of the fires and allow him to bring72

THERE'S THE -DE ATTACK MAY BE~WE AH ACK ATELET'S GOI - 0630!EATTACK PROMTH MASILY ATTACK BE LAUNCHTED TERRAION A PRFEATURNGE ISMARKS OUTSLE QUAD AE _ DEPARTSUe'USED AS A LINE (AREAI OFFigure 22. ]Alovem.e7!t across the line of d(lep(arit7re.73

down defensive fires, thus increasing the probabilityof casualties.b. Use of cover and concealment. During movementfrom the line of departure to the assault position,the squad usually is limited to a route prescribedby the platoon leader. However, most terrain hassome irregularities which provide cover fromenemy fire and growths which give some concealmentfrom enemy observation. Even in open terrain,the well-trained rifleman can locate and uselimited cover such as that furnished by slight depressionsor rises. By using the available coverand concealment, the squad obtains some protection,fromhostile fire.c. Hostile fire.(1) Mortar and artillery concentrations andlong-range machine gun fires often canbe bypassed. Concentrations at times areso small that the squad can pass quicklyto either side without too much turningaway from its prescribed route of advance.Long-range machine gun fireoften can be bypassed by using folds ofthe ground after making a quick studyof the fire pattern, particularly when theenemy's observation is obscured by haze,fog, dust, or smoke.(2) In some situations, enemy fire is receivedwhich cannot be neutralized by smallarms, and it prevents the squad from ad,vancing by its own fire. Often this enemyfire cannot be bypassed. Under these conditionsand when the effectiveness of74

the enemy's fire would result in excessivecasualties, the squad halts under coveruntil supporting fires or the action ofadjacent units permit the advance to beresumed. However, the squad leader doesnot halt when receiving light indirect orlong-range direct fires. To accomplish hismission at the least possible cost in lives,he quickly moves his squad forwardthrough the fire-swept area. He bearsin mind that usually a rapid movementthrough such fire costs far less in casualtiesthan does indecision and uselesshalting.d. Fire and maneuver.(1) At times, the squad receives short-rangedirect fires from the enemy before itreaches the assault position. When receivingeffective small-arms fire, all menof the squad instantly saturate theenemy with rifle and automatic rifle fire.When the enemy is within range, riflegrenades are effective in destroying,blinding, or otherwise neutralizing hisgun crews. The squad's fire power oftenbeats down the enemy element which disclosesits position.(2) When the immediate application of thesquad's maximum fire power fails to destroythe enemy, the squad advances byfire and maneuver. The squad leader firstestablishes fire superiority. Fire superiorityis gained and maintained by keep-853696 0-49 -- 75

ing the enemy under heavy and accuratefire so that his fire is ineffective. Untilsupporting weapons or other units maintainfire superiority without assistancefrom the squad, enough men of the squadfire to maintain fire superiority. Herethe automatic rifle can do much to producethe desired effect. Meanwhile, othermen of the squad move forward, take upfiring positions closer to the enemy, andthey cover by fire the forward movementof the remaining men. When the squadleader advances with additional men, hegives the remaining men to the assistantsquad leader. The assistant squad leadermoves those men on the squad leader'sorders. By this combination of fire andmaneuver, the squad advances to the assaultposition. (See fig. 23.)e. Taking advantage of enemy's distraction. The squadleader looks for opportunities of taking advantageof any distraction of the enemy by.a friendly unit.Frequently, such distraction results from successby an adjacent friendly unit. At other times, afteran enemy element has stopped the squad, it turnsits attention and fire toward others of friendlytroops. In either case, the leader of the haltedsquad takes advantage of the enemy's preoccupationto resume his advance energetically.71. ASSAULT. a. The final phase of an attack isthe assault. In preparation for the assault, thesquad works its way up to the objective by keep-76

IFigure 2t. The squad attacks by 'use of fi're and mwneurver.77

ing as close as possible to the supporting fires,taking maximum advantage of the shock effect ofthese fires on the enemy (fig. 24). When themen reach the assault position (par. 64) and thesupporting fires are lifted, they start the assaultand close rapidly, delivering assault fire on theobjective until it is captured.b. The squad is deployed as skirmishers. Theriflemen and the automatic rifle team take up thefire. The assistant automatic rifleman does notfire but assists the automatic rifleman. The squadleader and assistant squad leader seldom fire buttake positions several paces in rear of the squadto enforce the continuity of fires and-to control thealinement of the men.72. ASSAULT FIRE. a. Assault fire is the violent andheavy fire by assault elements as they close onthe enemy at close range. The men fire from thehip or shoulder, walking forward steadily andrapidly as the terrain permits. Each man fires atleast one shot every two or three paces. He holdshis fire in the general direction of his advance,shooting at every little rise in the ground, bush,tree, or point which possibly might conceal anenemy. (See fig. 25.)b. Assault fire is characterized by violence andvolume rather than by accuracy. Its purpose isnot only to kill and wound the enemy but also toterrify and demoralize him. It keeps the enemydeep in his hole where the shock effect of thesupporting fires put him-hugging the ground78

Siii:::::::, ;iiiLa8liiiiiiNllxBFYgiil n .·:iiXnBiii:r:::,Lij3jl.sct,''''!t iia lil79

?i -i80'A· i a'4 ' ! ~ >?1'svXt1, , a 780

with his weapon idle-or it forces him into a hurriedand disorderly retreat.c. The squad does not stop on the near edge ofthe objective but drives rapidly to the far edgeor to the squad's part of the objective. The enemyis given no time to recover from the shock of theassault. In addition to rifle fires, hand and riflegrenades are used to blind and destroy stubbornpockets of resistance in the direct path of theadvance.73. REORGANIZATION. As soon as the hostile positionis captured, the men move into position torepel an enemy counterattack. The squad defendsits assigned part of the platoon objective. Whenthe position is occupied to repel a counterattack,the squad leader checks his squad for casualties,the condition of weapons, and the status of ammunition.He redesignates key men, redistributesammunition, and reports his strength and requirementsfor weapons and ammunition. Reconnaissanceis continued and, after receiving instructionsfrom the platoon leader, the squad leader issuesorders for continuing the attack.74. FLANK PATROL. Throughout the various attacksituations, a rifle squad may be sent out as aflank patrol. Such a patrol is given a specific missionto accomplish and, on completion of the mission,it rejoins its unit.75. CONNECTING GROUP. A connecting group isany group used to maintain contact betweenforces. It moves and operates so that it knows the81

location of the near flank of the unit with whichit is maintaining contact. The primary missionof a connecting group is to tell the parent commanderthe location and situation of the unit withwhich it maintains contact. As secondary missions,it tells the commander of the contacted unitof the parent unit's situation and covers gaps betweenunits by resisting any hostile penetration.If the adjacent unit falls behind, an immediatereport is made to the parent commander (see fig.26). The connecting group may consist of smallpatrols to cover a wide interval and maintain contactwith both units. If contact with the adjacentunit is lost, the fact is reported at once and, unlessordered to return, the connecting group firesonly for self-protection or to give warning of aflank attack.76. SUPPORT SQUAD. a. Before the attack, thesquad leader of a support squad tells his men thesituation and the proposed action of the platoon.He advances his squad on order of the platoonleader or the platoon sergeant, keeping his squadunder cover and preventing it from merging withthe assault squads. During the attack, the squadleader keeps abreast of the situation and makestentative plans for the probable use of his squad(see fig. 27).b. If ordered to attack the flank of a definitelylocated hostile position, the squad leader selects anassault position for the attack and the best coveredroute of approach to it. He then moves thesquad to the position and attacks by opening sur-82

00.0J~~~~~~~~~~~F~~~~:r IL00 . .L~~~~~~~~~~.83o83

SQUAD FORWARD /RTHROUGH THOSE WOODSON THE RIGHTSUPPORT SQUADFigure 27. The leader of the support squad makes tentativeplans for the probable use of his squad.84

prise fire and assaulting from an unexpected direction.(See fig. 28.)c. When directed to reinforce the assault squads,the support squad leader shows his squad the positionsof the enemy and the assault squads. Hepoints out the part of the line to be reinforced,then moves his squad there in a formation to fitthe terrain and the enemy fire.Section V. DEFENSE77. GENERAL. The rifle squad is used as a part ofthe rifle platoon in the organization and defenseof the platoon defense area. The platoon leadercoordinates the use of the rifle squad with adjacentsquads within and"adjacent to the platoon defensearea and also with supporting weapons. The platoondefense order assigns the exact squad areasto be organized, the general trace of the line to beoccupied, specific sectors of fire, and the generallocation and principal direction of fire for the automaticrifles of each squad.78. MISSION. The mission of the rifle squad as apart of a front-line platoon is to defend its assignedpart of the platoon defense area by fire andby close combat. The rifle squad, with the supportof other fires, stops the enemy by fire in front ofthe main line of resistance and repels him by closecombat if he reaches it. Squad elements protect'supporting weapons within the platoon defensearea and exchange mutual fire support with adjacentunits. When necessary, the squad (or ele-85

lil11: ,:I::,' ~.U'Ic4Wd'.1'ii I I· 0N~ -,1/ 1/ ~~~ A,, :~·/\ /· ~./////i%86

ments of it) moves to supplementary positions toprotect the flanks or rear of the platoon defensearea.79. SELECTION OF FIRING POSITIONS. a. Primaryand alternate position areas for the automaticrifleman are selected by the platoon leader. A positionarea for the automatic rifleman is selectedto cover the major part of the squad sector of fireor a specific approach. Supplementary positionsare selected when the flanks and rear of the defensearea cannot be protected from primary oralternate positions. Exact positions for the automaticrifleman are selected by the squad leader.b. Positions for the riflemen are selected so thatadjacent individual sectors of fire overlap anduse the best available fields of fire. The intervalbetween fox holes may be from 5 to 20 yards. Inopen terrain, single fox holes may be as much as10 yards apart and double fox holes, as much as20 yards apart. In close terrain, the interval maybe reduced to 5 yards between single fox holes and10 yards between double fox holes. The choice betweensingle or double fox holes is limited bysuch factors as morale, fields of fire, and unitstrength. The double fox hole provides continualobservation and gives increased individual moraleand, therefore, it is used whenever conditions permit.The squad leader selects primary individualpositions so that each man can cover the desiredsector of fire. Supplementary positions to protectthe flanks and rear are designated if required.(See fig. 29.)87

80. SQUAD DEFENSE ORDER. On receiving the platoondefense order, the squad leader makes a re-SUPPLEMENTARY POSITIONSW AR AND ASSISTANTDe ALTERNATE POSITION FOR AR0 ASSISTANT SQUAD LEADER ANDONE RIFLEMANC- SINGLE FOXHOLE FOR RIFLEMANmT DOUBLE FOXHOLE FOR TWO RIFLEMENSQUAD LEADERFigure 29. Rifle squad defense area.connaissance of his assigned area and notes thelocation of adjacent squads with which he coordinatesand any supporting weapons which he88

protects. He then issues his order to the squad.When practicable, the squad defense order is givenon the position to be organized. The defense orderfollows the outline indicated for the squad attackorder (par. 68) with additional instructions toincludea.Primary position and sector of fire for eachman of the squad.b. Alternate positions and principal directionof fire for the automatic rifleman.c. Organization of the ground, including thetype of emplacements (app. V), other constructions,and work priority.81. ORGANIZATION OF THE POSITION. After issuingthe squad defense order, the squad leadermoves his men directly to their firing positions.The automatic rifle is mounted temporarily tocover its assigned sector, and a sentinel is posted.Before construction work is started, the squadleader has each man lie down at the place his foxhole will be dug, and has him personally verifythe observation and sector of fire permitted byeach position. The squad leader verifies that sectorsof fire are overlapping within and on theflanks of the squad. Work then is started on theposition, and the squad leaders' responsibilitiesduring. the preparation of the position includea.Supervising the clearing of fields of fire.b. Locating the initial ammunition supply andselecting supply routes.c. Preparing range cards to include estimatedranges to important landmarks.89

d. Selecting and preparing a position where hecan observe his assigned frontage, controlling hissquad, and maintaining contact with the platoonleader.e. Selecting and supervising the preparation ofalternate and supplementary positions.f. Inspecting cover and concealment of men andweapons to check closely that the position is concealedfrom enemy ground and air observation.g. Preparing a sketch in duplicate of the squad'ssector of fire, showing prominent terrain featuresand the estimated ranges to them. He gives onesketch to the platoon leader and keeps a copy forhimself.82. CONDUCT OF THE DEFENSE. a. Initial fires ofweapons used within the squad area are withhelduntil the enemy comes within effective rifle range(maximum 500 yards) or when the enemy reachesa designated terrain feature. This gives maximumsurprise and avoids the premature disclosure ofthe battle position. During hostile preparatoryfires, the squad takes cover in its prepared positions.As soon as these fires lift, the men takefiring positions to meet the hostile attack.b. During the defense, the squad leader's primaryduty is to control the fires of his squad. Onlyin the close-in defense of the squad does he takepart in the fire fight. The assistant squad leaderfights as a rifleman and as a grenadier, and heassists in the control of the squad.c. Squad members open fire upon the approachingenemy on command of the squad leader as90

given in the platoon leader's order or when theenemy reaches a predetermined line. As theenemy approaches the position, the rate of fire isincreased to inflict maximum casualties and tostop the hostile attack before it reaches the position.If the enemy assaults and enters the position,he is driven out by fire, grenades, and thebayonet. The success of the defense depends oneach squad defending its assigned area. A stubborndefense in place by a front-line squad breaksup enemy attack formations and makes him vulnerableto counterattack. The squad withdrawsonly on orders of a higher commander.d. When the attacking force contains tanks aswell as infantry, the primary targets for all squadweapons (except grenade launchers) are hostilefoot troops and exposed men on the tanks. Therifle grenadiers fire at tanks which threaten thesquad position. If the enemy infantry does notfurnish a target, rifle fire is used against openturrets and vision slits of attacking tanks. Mencontinue firing unless forced to take cover to protectthemselves and their weapons from the fireand crushing action of the tanks. Men return totheir firing positions as soon as the tanks pass, andthey fire on approaching foot troops. Maximumeffort is made to separate the foot elements fromthe tanks.83. SECURITY. In all types of defensive situations,security is maintained. The rifle squad, as anyother unit, is responsible for its own local security.Measures to closely check and coordinate the se-853696 0-49-7 ~~~~~~

curity for the battle position are given by highercommanders. These measures consist of all orpart of a system of sentinels or listening posts, outguards,patrols, supports, and reserves-dependingon the force for which security is furnished.(See sec. V, ch. 8.) The rifle squad may be thesecurity force itself or it may be a part of a largersecurity force. In either case, the squad may beresponsible for one or more of t e following: asentinel post, a listening post, an outguard, andvisiting patrols.a. A sentinel post consists of one or two menand is established to give early warning of anenemy infantry, tank, or air attack. These postsmay be inside or outside of an organized position.They furnish the maximum observation over hostileapproaches and have cover, concealment, andgood routes of withdrawal. Sentinels do not engagein close combat. Means of communication areestablished to alert troops for an enemy attack.For its own local security a squad has a sentinelpost at all times.b. A listening post normally consists of two tofour men, and it functions when visibility islimited in order to give the early warning of ahostile attack. Listening posts are located to coverfavorable enemy approaches. Selected positionsfurnish cover, concealment, and good routes ofwithdrawal. Listening post men are relieved oftento maintain an alert warning system and, if frequentrelief is impracticable, double sentries occupythe post. Both remain awake to prevent asurprise.92

c. An outguard is a small group posted by anoutpost to delay and disorganize the enemy andgive warning of his approach. An outguard mayvary in size from a half squad to a platoon withsupporting weapons. Outguards organize defenseareas permitting observation and long fields offire. Each outguard organizes its position on anormal frontage so as not to sacrifice control. Foxholes are dug, the position is camouflaged, androutes of withdrawal are selected. Security for theoutguard is obtained through the use of sentinelposts, listening posts, and patrols. As soon as desirabletargets appear, outguards inflict maximumlosses on the enemy by long-range fire. Normally,outguards withdraw before fighting in close combat,on orders of the outpost commander or accordingto prearranged plans.d. Visiting patrols consist of two or three men,and they cover the intervals and maintain contactbetween stationary security elemnents. Visitingpatrols operate from right to left and at irregulartimes and by different routes to prevent the enemyfrom discovering the patrol system.93

CHAPTER 4WEAPONS SQUADSection I. GENERAL84. ORGANIZATION. The weapons squad consistsof a squad leader, a light machine gun team, anda rocket launcher team. Each team consists of agunner, an assistant gunner, and two ammunitionbearers.85. DUTIES OF LEADERS. a.. The weapons squadleader is responsible for the discipline, training,control, and conduct of his squad. He uses hissquad as directed by the platoon leader. He selectsand assigns exact locations for the weapons withinthe general area assigned by the platoon leader.He regulates the displacement of weapons, controlsthe expenditure of ammunition, and supervisesthe supply of ammunition by the ammunitionbearers. Whenever the ammunition bearers cannotmaintain an adequate ammunition supply, thesquad leader requests assistance from the platoonleader. In the attack, the light machine gun teamand the rocket launcher team often operate atsome distance from each other. When these unitsare separated, the light machine gun team usuallyis controlled by the squad leader. The rocket

launcher team is controlled by the leader of thatelement of the rifle platoon with which it operates.b. Team leaders move their teams to selected locations,prepare and occupy firing positions,camouflage, observe and adjust fire, and use ammunitionbearers to supply ammunition. Eachteam leader is also the gunner.c. Squad and team leaders use voice and visualsignals to control their units.86. CONDUCT OF FIRE. a. The light machine gunteam is assigned a definite target or a sector of tire.The squad leader determines the metnod of firingat a definite target, designates the target, specifiesthe rate of fire, and gives the command orsignal for opening fire. He establishes contactwith the rifle squad leaders to obtain informationof their situation and plans.b. The rocket launcher team is assigned a definitetarget or a sector of fire, or it covers a specificavenue of approach. The squad leader (or theleader of the rifle unit with which the team operates)designates the targets and gives the commandor signal for opening fire. In the attack theteam leader is alert to destroy enemy machineguns which may open short-range surprise fire onthe advancing riflemen.87. RANGE ESTIMATION. Men of the light machinegun and rocket launcher teams are trained in rangeestimation. Range estimations for the light machinegun may be verified by observing the strikeof tlhe bullets or by using tracer ammunition.95

Gunners make bold adjustments to compensate forany initial errors in range estimation. The rocketlauncher team estimates leads for firing on movingtargets. Skill in range estimation allows accuratesurprise fire.88. AMMUNITION SUPPLY. During the movementphase, the company headquarters /4a-ton truckstransport the weapons and ammunition of theweapons squads. In the assembly area or attackposition, the light machine gun and rocketlauncher, with an initial ammunition supply, areunloaded from the vehicle. Ammunition bearershand carry supplies from a company ammunitionsupply point to the firing positions. In many instances,the ammunition is obtained from a 1/ 4 -tontruck which is sent to the vicinity of the firingposition89. ANTIAIRCRAFT SECURITY. For antiaircraft securitymeasures, see paragraph 12.90. ANTITANK DEFENSE. The squad leader uses therocket launcher team to cover avenues of tank approach.This weapon is sited so that short-rangeflanking fire can be delivered against enemy tanksusing the approach. (Antitank defense for individualsis described in par. 13.)Section II. MOVEMENT TO CONTACT91. ROUTE AND TACTICAL COLUMN. In route columnand tactical column, the squad moves in the96

platoon formation as directed by the platoonleader.92. APPROACH MARCH. During the approachmarch, the weapons squad is located where it rapidlycan give close support fire when contact ismade. Crew-served weapons and ammunition maybe hand carried or they may be transported byweapons carrier. When conditions call for longdistancehand carry and for an expected great expenditureof ammunition, the weapons squad temporarilymay be reinforced with riflemen to carryextra ammunition. If weapons and ammunitionare transported on a carrier, they are readily available.Upon contact, the light machine gun teammay reinforce the fires of the rifle squad whichmakes contact, or it may assist the maneuver ofthe remainder of the platoon. The rocket launcherteam, in view of the launcher's limited range, normallyjoins that part of the platoon which is themaneuver element. However, the rocket launcherteam is sent immediately to any sector within theplatoon zone of action which is threatened with atank attack.Section III. PREPARATION FOR THE ATTACK93. GENERAL. Before the attack, the weaponssquad may be directed to halt in a covered areaselected by the platoon leader. This area usuallyis a part of the company or battalion assemblyarea. Immediately on arrival in this area, thesquad leader disperses his-men in the area allotted97

to him by the platoon leader. Normally, the platoonleader directs the squad to secure the lightmachine gun and rocket launcher and an initialsupply of ammunition from a company weaponscarrier. The squad leader checks the condition ofhis squad to determine that the weapons and ammunitionare in proper condition, that each manhas the proper amount of ammunition and rations,and that special equipment is issued. Existingcover and concealment are used to protect thesquad from aerial and ground observation and fire.Men use holes, ditches, or slit trenches. When anenemy threat exists, the squad may be ordered tooccupy positions to protect the assembly area. Onthis mission, the weapons are placed to cover avenuesof approach. While the squad is in the assemblyarea or is en route to the attack position,the weapons squad leader moves forward with therifle squad leaders to receive the platoon leader'sattack order.94. PLATOON LEADER'S ORDER. The platoon leader'sdecision as to the use of the weapons squad isgiven in the platoon attack order. The order statesthe mission, initial position areas, targets or sectorsof fire, the time of opening fire, and the organization.It may state the conditions for displacementand ammunition supply.95. TROOP LEADING PROCEDURE. On receiving theplatoon' leader's attack order, the squad leadermakes his reconnaissance. Often this is an observationmade from the point where he receives the98

attack order. He studies the terrain, paying particularattention to the exact positions for weapons,routes to firing positions, and routes for displacement.Based on the platoon leader's order andthe terrain study made while on reconnaissance,the squad leader formulates his attack order.96. TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT. a. The light machinegun team is used by the platoon leader to furnishclose support for the platoon. It usually joins theelement which makes a frontal attack. Its firesusually are under the direct control of the weaponssquad leader. The team displaces as the need arisesto continue close support. It has the followingmissions:(1) Supports by fire the units of the platoonor units of the adjacent platoon. To furnishthis support, the team may be directedto follow a certain rifle element, or itmay follow a general route along a flankof the platoon-occupying successive'firingpositions.(2) Protects the platoon flanks.(3) Covers the platoon reorganization.(4) Breaks up hostile counterattacks.b. The rocket launcher team's primary missionis to destroy enemy tanks. If there is no tankthreat, the rocket launcher team assists the advanceof the rifle elements. Because of the rocketlauncher's short range, the team usually moveswith a maneuvering element; this also permits theantitank weapon to arrive early on the objective.When enemy tanks appear, the team reverts to its99

antitank role, regardless of previously assignedtargets or missions.97. SELECTION OF FIRING POSITION. a. The platoonleader assigns a general position area and thesquad leader selects the exact primary and alternatefiring positions. (See par. 7.) Desirable characteristicsof firing positions are:(1) Affords observation of the assigned targetsor assigned sector of fire.(2) Affords observation of friendly troops.(3) Permits direct fire without interferencefrom friendly troops, trees, or other obstacles.(4) Gives maximum protection against hostileobservation and fire.(5) Uses tank obstacles such as ditches, largetrees, and boulders.(6) Permits covered routes for occupationand supply.b. The light machine gun is placed in partialdefilade. The squad leader controls the fire byvoice or signal. Positions near other automaticweapons are avoided.c. The rocket launcher firing site lets the gunnerfire prone at stationary targets and sitting orstanding at moving targets. Clearance to the rearis essential.98. TARGETS. a. Appropriate targets for the lightnmachine gun are crew-served weapons, smallgroups of enemy, pillbox embrasures, lightly armoredvehicles, and tank vision slits. Enemy100

whose general location is known may be engagedwith short burst of light machine gun fire. Inbuilt-up areas, light machine guns are used againstdefinitely located targets in buildings.b. The primary target for the rocket launcher isan enemy tank. High explosive, antitank, andwhite phosphorous rockets may be used againstsuch targets as crew-served weapons, pillbox embrasures,and small enemy groups. In fightingwithin built-up areas, targets include enemy personneland weapons in buildings. The launcheralso may be used against buildings to blast anopening for the entrance of assaulting infantry.99. ORDERS. The squad leader gives his attack orderto his men, and it covers the following items:a. Information of the enemy.b. Information of friendly troops, including theexpected action of the leading rifle platoon and themissions and positions of supporting weapons.c. Missions of each team to include initial firingpositions and the routes to them or the unit to befollowed; initial targets or sectors of fire; time ofopening fire; subsequent action; and instructionsfor reorganization of the objective.d. Administrative instructions, including thesupply of ammunition and the location of the battalionaid station.e. Communication instructions, including prearrangedsignals and the location of squad and platoonleaders.101

Section IV. ATTACK100. MOVEMENT INTO FIRING POSITIONS. a. Thelight machine gun team moves from the attackposition to its firing position under the control ofthe squad leader. In moving the gun into its firingposition, maximum advantage is taken of availablecover and concealment to avoid being discoveredby the enemy. If available, a covered positionimmediately in rear of the firing position is occupiedfirst. The team moves from the covered positionto the firing position just before opening fire.Ammunition bearers remain in the covered positionwhen they are not supplying ammunition.b. The rocket launcher team normally does notoccupy a firing position at the start of the attack.It accompanies the assault team and is used as directedby the platoon leader.101. SUPPORTING FIRES DURING THE ATTACK. a.The light machine gun team supports the advanceof the platoon rifle elements. The weapons squadleader keeps continuous observation on the advancingriflemen as well as on the objective, so that thefire of the team does not endanger friendly troops.He looks for positions from which the team maydeliver oblique, flanking, or enfilade fire on enemygroups holding up the advance of his platoon oradjacent units.b. The rocket launcher team fires at suitable targetsholding up the advance of the rifle elementswhen the threat of enemy tank attack is not present.If there is a threat of an enemy tank attack,102

the rocket launcher team occupies positions coveringavenues of tank approach (see fig. 30).102. DISPLACEMENT. When the progress of the attackmakes it impossible for the teams to executetheir missions from initial positions, they displaceto new firing positions. The teams move aggressively,closely behind or with the element of therifle platoon with which they operate. Before displacement,the squad or team leader looks for newpositions, and selects them by a visual or a physicalreconnaissance. In m6ving to the new firingpositions, the teams use the available cover, concealment,and defilade.103. REORGANIZATION. As soon as a hostile positionis captured or the attack is halted, the squadleader moves the weapons into firing positionswhich protect the platoon against a counterattackduring the reorganization. Instructions for reorganizationare given in the squad leader's attackorder. When positions are occupied to repel a possiblecounterattack, the squad leader checks hissquad for casualties, the condition of weapons, andthe status of ammunition. Strength, weapons, andammunition requirements are reported to the platoonleader. The squad leader receives orders fromthe platoon leader. Reconnaissance for positions tosupport a continuation of the attack is startedpromptly, and orders for further use of the squadare given by the platoon leader.103

Off..10 .:!!i'l : i Iiil:: :::::'

Section V. DEFENSE104. GENERAL. The weapons squad is used withinthe rifle platoon area to assist in the defense of theassigned platoon area. The platoon leader closelychecks that the squad weapons furnish the maximumprotection to the platoon defense area andcoordinate with the over-all fire plans of the companyand battalion.105. MISSION. a. The light machine gun teams offront-line rifle platoons are assigned missions bythe rifle platoon leader according to the battalionfire plan in order to form a band of fire acrbss thebattalion front. They are used within the platoonpositions to protect the platoon areas, exchangemutual supporting fires with adjacent units, anddeliver final protective fires. The light machinegun teams of the support platoon and of the platoonsof the reserve company protect their platoondefense areas, cover dangerous avenues of approachwith the battle position, and support adjacentunits.b. The primary mission of the rocket launcherteam is to furnish close-in antitank protection forthe platoon. This is equally applicable whether therocket launcher is used in the front-line platoons,support platoons, or platoons of the reserve company.106. SELECTION OF FIRING POSITIONS. Positionsfor the light machine gun and rocket launcher areselected by the platoon leader before the detailed105

organization of the platoon position. Positions selectedmay be within a rifle squad defense area, betweenrifle squad defense areas, or on the flank ofthe rifle platoon. Supplementary positions to protectthe flanks and rear of the platoon are preparedas required. (For additional information, see par.97.)107. SQUAD DEFENSE ORDER. On receiving the platoondefense order, the squad leader makes a reconnaissanceof the position areas assigned to theteams of his squad and notes the location of therifle squads and supporting weapons with whichhe coordinates. He then issues his order to thesquad on the position to be organized when practicable.The defense order follows the outline indicatedfor the squad attack order (par. 99), and ithas the following additional instructions:a. Final protective fires of the light machinegun, to include the method of calling for these fires,the location where signals can be given, and ratesand duration of fire.b. Organization of the ground, including typeof emplacements (app. V), other constructions,and work priority.108. ORGANIZATION OF THE POSITION. After issuingthe squad defense order, the squad leadermoves his two teams directly to their firing positions.Each weapon is located temporarily to coverits assigned sector of fire. The squad leader personallychecks the observation and sectors of fireallowed by the selected positions and completes the106

coordination with the rifle squads. Work then isbegun on the preparation of the positions. Responsibilitiesof the squad leader during the preparationof positions includea.Check of the final protective line of the lightmachine gun (see FM 23-55). The extent of theline and the dead space is reported to the platoonleader.b. Supervision of the clearing of fields of fire.c. Disposition of the initial ammunition supplyand selection of routes for supply.d. Preparation of range cards for each firingposition.e. Selection and preparation of his personal position,at a location where he can watch the platoonleader for orders and control both teams ofhis squad. When this cannot be done from one position,the platoon leader decides which team thesquad leader controls. The other team is commandedby the gunner and receives its orders directlyfrom the platoon leader.f. Selection and supervision of the preparationof alternate and supplementary position.g. Inspection of cover and concealment of menand weapons.109. CONDUCT OF THE DEFENSE. During the hostilepreparatory bombardment of the position, themen of the squad take cover in their prepared positions.As soon as the artillery fire or the air bombardmentlifts, men take firing positions to meetthe attack.5.3696 0-49--8 107

a. Light machine gun team,(1) Initial fires of a light machine gun locatedin a front-line platoon defense area arecoordinated with the rifle platoon fires.As the enemy attack advances, the lightmachine gun fires at suitable targets inits sector of fire. Rates of fire are increasedas the enemy comes nearer theposition. Final protective fires are deliveredon call.(2) During periods of reduced visibility, thegun is laid on its final protective line.When final protective fires are called for,only those guns open fire whose final protectivelines protect the unit calling forthe fire. When visibility is good, thesquad leader or gunner determines therate and duration of fire on the final protectiveline. For conditions of reducedvisibility, the platoon order gives the rateand the duration of fire. In the absenceof instructions, the usual rate is 150rounds per minute for 2 minutes and then75 rounds per minute until ordered tocease firing. (See FM 23-55).(3) Light machine guns of the support platoonor of platoons of the reserve companyare used to stop the enemy whobreak through the main line of resistance,to stop an enemy envelopment, or tosupport a planned counterattack.b. Rocket launcher team. The rocket launcher teamopens fire on hostile tanks when they come within108

effective range. It continues to fire until forced totake cover to protect itself from the crushing actionof the tank. The firing position is resumedas soon as the tank passes, and the team then firesat the rear of the tank. If there are no hostiletanks, the rocket launcher team fires at crewservedweapons and enemy groups. For maximumfire effect and to prevent early disclosure of itsposition, the rocket launcher opens fire only atshort range.109

CHAPTER 5RIFLE PLATOONSection I. GENERAL.110. ORGANIZATION. The rifle platoon consists ofa platoon headquarters, three rifle squads, and oneweapons squad. The platoon headquarters includesthe platoon leader, platoon sergeant, assistant platoonsergeant, two messengers, and an aid manattached from the regimental medical company.111. DUTIES OF PLATOON HEADQUARTERS PERSON-NEL. a. The platoon leader is responsible for thetraining, discipline, control, and tactical employmentof his platoon. He develops responsibilityand leadership in his squad leaders by giving instructionsthrough his chain of command.b. The platoon sergeant is the second-in-command.He assists the platoon leader in controllingall operations and takes a position where he bestcan assist in that control. He takes command whenthe leader is absent.c. The assistant platoon sergeant enforces ordersconcerning cover, concealment, and discipline.He usually is in rear of the platoon where he observesthe situation on the flanks and rear. He110

supervises the ammunition supply and distribution.d. Messengers maintain liaison between thecompany commander and the platoon leader.When the company prepares for action, one messengerreports to the company commander and oneremains with the platoon leader.e. The attached aid man provides first-aid treatmentfor men of the platoon.112. CONTROL AND COMMUNICATION. The platoonleader controls his platoon by oral orders andby arm-and-hand signals. Communication withcompany headquarters is by radio, telephone, messenger,or visual signals.113. AMMUNITION SUPPLY. Before combat, ammunitionis issued in the assembly area. Duringcombat, the platoon and its attachments draw ammunitioneither from a company ammunition supplypoint or from a designated company vehicle.The assistant platoon sergeant supervises ammunitionreplenishment.114. ANTIAIRCRAFT SECURITY. For antiaircraftsecurity, see paragraph 12.115. ANTITANK DEFENSE. Antitank defense formen is covered in paragraph 13. Antitank weaponsof the platoon are used as noted in paragraphs50 and 90.111

Section II. MOVEMENT TO CONTACT116. GENERAL. During the advance in route or tacticalcolumn, the rifle platoon moves as part of thecompany. During foot marches, the usual formationfor the platoon is a column of files on each sideof the road (march column formation, app. II).This formation gives maximum speed and control.It also is used to move the platoon from one locationto another in a combat area behind friendlyfront lines. During the approach march, the rifleplatoon, or elements of it, may perform reconnaissanceand security missions-for example, an advanceparty, a flank guard, or a march outpost.117. ADVANCE PARTY. a. When the platoon is usedas an advance party (fig. 31), it is sent forwardfrom the support. (See par. 22.) The advanceparty in turn sends forward a squad as the point.The mission of the advance party is to secure theuninterrupted forward movement of the support.b. The advance party is disposed in a column ofsquads, each squad in a column of two's with onefile on each side of the road, and there is a distanceof not more than 5 paces between men. The advanceparty commander usually marches at thehead of the advance party or between the pointand the advance party. He goes where he best canobserve the ground and direct the action. He isresponsible that the assigned route or direction ofmarch is followed. He usually is responsible forthe rate of march of the advance guard, and heprescribes the distance at which the point is to112

POINT15o_-250 /< j.ICo ONNECTING FILEE] £ WEAPONS SQUADLEGENDATTACHED AID MANPLATOON LEADERPLATOON SERGEANTASSISTANT PLATOONSERGEANT/ MESSENGERF'igure 31. Platooli as the advance party.113

precede the advance party. In open country, thisvaries between 150 and 250 yards. At night orunder conditions of poor visibility, distances arereduced considerably. The advance party sendsforward connecting files to maintain contact withthe point. (See par. 53.)c. Because of the small size and the mission ofthe advance party, its flank security normally islimited to visual reconnaissance. Distant dangerouslocalities on the flanks are reported to the supportcommander, who sends out the necessary flankprotection from the support.d. When the column halts, the advance partyprovides security to the front. It immediatelysends observers to nearby points, giving observationto the front and flanks.118. FLANK GUARD. The platoon, acting as a flankguard for a marching column, conforms in generalto the doctrine governing the use of a rifle squadas a flank guard. (See par. 26.)119. MARCH OUTPOST. The rifle platoon may establishthe security for a marching column duringa temporary halt. It occupies critical terrain featurescontrolling the approaches to the route ofmarch. Its actions depend upon the duration ofthe halt, the nearness of the enemy and likelihoodof early contact, and the terrain. The rifle platoonleader receives specific instructions from the companycommander.120. COMBAT FORMATION. In the approach march,114

after the initial contact is made or as it is beingmade, the leading rifle platoon (advance party)and other selected platoons deploy and use suitableformations. These formations, which are used inthe attack as well as in the approach march, varywith the terrain and enemy situation. The companycommander ordinarily prescribes the initialformation and allows the platoon leader to changethe formation as necessary. The usual formationsare the platoon column, vee, line, wedge, and echelon(see app. II).a. The platoon column is used to approach anenemy position which is believed to be directly tothe front but not yet located. It normally is thebest formation for movement in woods, smoke, fog,at night, and through defiles and along trails. It iseasy to control and is flexible; it provides some allaroundprotection and permits the immediate actiontoward the flanks.b. The platoon vee is used when the enemy is believedto be directly to the front and his approximatestrength and location are known. The bulkof the firepower of the platoon can be directed tothe front. It provides security to both front andflanks and favors maneuver and control.c. The platoon line is used when the location andstrength of the enemy is known. It lets the platoondeliver the greatest firepower to the front inthe shortest time. It is used primarily during theassault phase of an attack. It also is used to rapidlycross an area exposed to mortar, artillery, orlong-range machine gun fire.d The platoon wedge is used when little is115

known of the enemy strength and disposition orwhen the platoon is acting alone. It provides ahigh degree of flexibility, gives all-around protection,and is easy to control.e. The platoon echelon right (left) is used toprotect an open or exposed flank. It permits heavyfire to the front and in the direction of the echelon.121. ACTION WHEN CONTACT IS ESTABLISHED. a.When the point meets enemy resistance which it isunable to overcome, the advance party deploys andattacks aggressively without hesitation or prolongedreconnaissance (see fig. 32). Maximumeffort is made to clear the way quickly for the remainderof the column. The advance party leadermoves forward rapidly when the initial contact ismade and decides upon the best method of attack.He may use the point squad for a frontal attackand maneuver with the remainder of the platoon,or he may make a direct frontal attack with theplatoon. The method of attack and the formationused (par. 120) depends upon the terrain and enemysituation. When the resistance is overcome,the march is resumed promptly. If the platoon isdeployed extensively, it may be replaced by anotherplatoon from the support.b. If the advance party is unable to overcomethe enemy resistance, it makes maximum effort toimmobilize the enemy by fire and to locate hisflanks. Further action is taken according to instructionsfrom the support commander.c. Once contact is established, the support commandermay find it necessary to deploy laterally116

C;Torh A o W i-;Xt:::X: :f:g::: 0~~~~~~)@ ~ ~I- `izofgC: S'enemy resistance, the advance party immediatelydeploys and attacks.117

across the axis of advance to guard against a surpriseattack from the flank or definitely to locatethe enemy. In this case, the advance party platoonor a rifle platoon from the support proper may beassigned a zone of reconnaissance and successiveobjectives within this zone. The width of the zonedepends upon the terrain and the observation.When moving to successive objectives in a zone ofreconnaissance, the platoon leader often movesahead with a security squad to a specific terrainfeature. Having reconnoitered the terrain feature,he signals the platoon forward, and then, with thesecurity squad, he moves on to another terrainfeature.Section III. PREPARATION FOR THE ATTACK122. GENERAL. Before the attack, the platoon mayhalt in a covered area selected by the companycommander. This area usually is part of the companyor battalion assembly area. While the platoonis preparing for the attack, the platoon leader,accompanied by the platoon sergeant and a messenger,moves forward to receive the company attackorder. The assistant platoon sergeant supervisesthe preparation of the platoon. (See pars. 61 and93.)123. COMPANY COMMANDER'S ORDERS. The companycommander decides whether the platoon initiallywill be in the assault or in the support echelon.If the platoon is in the assault echelon, it isgiven a section of the line of departure or an area118

from which to start its attack, a direction of attack,and a terrain objective or a series of objectivesto capture. The width of the zone may beshown by assigning a frontage between 100 and250 yards. The platoon seldom is assigned boundaries;thus, it uses covered routes in adjacent platoonzones of action, provided this is coordinatedwith the adjacent unit. The time of attack normallyis given in the company order.124. TROOP LEADING PROCEDURE. After the platoonleader receives the company attack order, hisactions usually follow a logical sequence calledtroop leading procedure. The leader uses this procedurebecause it saves him time and helps himremember just what to do. Upon receiving theattack order, the platoon leader takes the followingactions:a. Reconnaissance plan.(1) Studies his map and plans his reconnaissance.(2) Coordinates with the other platoon leadersbefore they leave the vicinity. Hisplan includes the establishment of liaisonwith the leader of any friendly unit incontact with the enemy and throughwhich the platoon will pass. Valuablefirst-hand information of the enemy'sstrength and location can be obtainedfrom leaders of these units.b. Observation post. (See fig. 33.)(1) Selects an observation post that givesmaximum observation of his zone of ac-119

w Wd~~~~~La WZ0_co tsZ I00 00:t 0w~~,~"OJ~~~~~~1E~~~~~i~~~iC~Cu·ew~~~~~~~~0~ ~ 1 ~yz~::0C3Wa lilB a~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~r120 o

COVER AND CONCEALMENTOK AS FAR AS THISSMALL HILL AND THATFARM HOUSE. TWO SQUADSFORWARDg 4. n is ecoaiss the tooFig/lre 34. D1I'i.lg his recov'nlaissauce, the platoon leadermakes his estimate of the situation and for-IIultlates his plan of attack.121

tion and adequate cover and concealment.(2) Sends his messenger back to guide thesquad leaders to the platoon observationpost to receive his attack order. If appropriate,he directs that the assistant platoonsergeant move the platoon forwardto the platoon attack position.c. Reconnaissance. (See (fig. 34.) Goes on a personalreconnaissance, during which time he makesa continuous estimate of the situation to includea terrain analysis. In this terrain analysis, themilitary aspects of the area are interpreted andevaluated in terms of five factors: critical terrainfeatures, observation and fields of fire, obstacles,cover and concealment, and avenues of approach.(1) Critical te'rrain features. Studies the terrainfrom both the enemy's viewpoint andthe viewpoint of his platoon. He decideswhich elements of the terrain are vitaland will have a marked influence on theoperation. He considers which terrainfeatures his platoon must seize or use ordeny the enemy in order to accomplishthe platoon's mission. Examples of criticalterrain features are the platoon objective,high ground, a clump of trees, adraw, a ditch, or a road embankment.Thestudy is not limited to the platoon'szone of action. The use of adjacent criticalterrain features is requested if theywill further the success of the operation.(2) Observation and fields of fire. Studies theterrain to find observation and fields of122

fire that are available to the enemy aswell as to his platoon. He notes pointsthat need to be neutralized to limit theenemy's observation or fields of fire onhis route of advance. He considers fieldsof fire of enemy weapons in adjacent platoonzones from which the enemy canplace fire on the advance of his platoon.He notes the good points of observationavailable to him which will aid control ashe advances with his platoon. He notesfields of fires available for the weaponswithin his platoon and for any attachedweapons. If indicated, he requests supportingmortars or artillery to cover terrainwhere his weapons have poor fieldsof fire.(3) Obstacles. Studies the natural featuresof the terrain which will stop or delay theadvance of his platoon. He considerswhich natural obstacles may give his platoonflank security. Studies artificial obstaclessuch as minefields, wire entanglements,and blown-up bridges to determinetheir possible influence on the operation.He considers the enemy's observationand fields of fire available to protectthe obstacle. He considers specialequipment needed to breach the obstacle.He studies the terrain to determine ifthere is a way of avoiding the obstacle.(4) Cover and concealment. Considers each853696 (-49--9 12

possible route that his platoon may usein moving to its objective. First, he triesto find a route that will give him coverfrom enemy fire and, at the same time,concealment from enemy observation.Since this combination rarely can befound, he next considers routes which includeirregularities of the terrain providingcover and concealment for part of theway to his objective. He considers theuse of smoke to provide concealment. Determinesthe cover and concealment availableto his own supporting or attachedweapons. Considers covered or concealedpositions from which he can launch theassault. He also considers the cover andconcealment available to his platoon afterthe capture of the objective.(5) Avenules of approach. Studies the terrainto determine the best avenues of approachfrom the line of departure to theobjective. He looks for a route whichprovides cover and concealment and aidscontrol and speed of movement of the platoon.He avoids a route which prematurelymasks direct fire supporting weapons.Determines which avenues of approachthe enemy may use in counterattackingwith foot troops or tanks. Looksfor routes he can use to evacuate his casualtiesand to resupply his platoon anduses those which are best protected bycover and concealment. He tries to find a124

direct route, but he selects a longer routeif it provides better cover.d. Estimate of the situation.(1) Considers throughout his reconnaissancehis company's and platoon's mission inrelation to the terrain. He now examinesin detail the courses of action which theplatoon may follow in accomplishing itsmission. He estimates the enemy'sstrength and disposition and estimateswhat the enemy can do in his zone of action.He considers his own strength andplanned locations, the capabilities offriendly supporting units, and the missionsof adjacent platoons. His estimateof the situation is a continuous process,through all phases of combat.(2) Decides upon his method of attack (seepar. 125).e. Orders. Gives his attack order (see par. 126).f. Supervision. Supervises the preparation for theattack after he gives his order.125. METHOD OF ATTACK. a. The platoon advancesfrom the line of departure to the assault positionby fire and maneuver. In addition to the heavyindirect fires furnished by the artillery and mortars,the platoon is supported by many direct-fireweapons. These include the 57-mm rifles from theweapons platoon, the machine guns and 75-mmrifles from the heavy weapons company, and attimes the fires of a tank platoon.b. In some cases, prearranged supporting firesare adequate to keep the enemy down and neutral-125

ize his resistance throughout the advance from' theline of departure to the assault position. In thisevent, the platoon advances rapidly as a unit acrossthe line of departure to the assault position underthe protection of these heavy fires. Under theseconditions, it is unnecessary to add to these firesthe fire power of riflemen until the assault starts.If there is a suitable firing position near the lineof departure, the light machine gun may add itsfire to those of the other supporting weapons.c. The platoon uses a covered approach if oneis available. If there is no covered approach, theplatoon makes a rapid frontal advance to the assaultposition, taking maximum advantage ofavailable supporting fires and smoke. Occasionalenemy weapons encountered are taken under fireimmediately by the advancing riflemen. This situationoccurs often when the platoon attacks as apart of the company, battalion, and regiment in acoordinated attack.d. Prearranged supporting fires may not neutralizeall enemy direct-fire weapons. The rifleplatoon then reinforces the supporting fires witha portion of its own fires to let other platoon elementsadvance. If this condition is determined beforecrossing the line of departure, a part of therifle platoon (for example, a rifle squad and thelight machine gun team) may execute a frontal attackto make the enemy's fires ineffective and hold,him in position. At the same time, the remainderof the platoon advances to the assault position underthe protective fires of the first element, usingmaximum cover. However, in most cases where126

the supporting fires are unable to neutralize enemyweapons or to keep them neutralized throughoutthe advance to the assault position, the effect ofthose weapons will become apparent after the platooncrosses the line of departure. When the platoonreceives the fires of such weapons, the areasof the weapons not neutralized are taken under fireimmediately by the advancing riflemen. If thisenemy fire continues, it then is necessary for theplatoon leader to use fire and maneuver within theplatoon itself. He uses the fire of his organic lightmachine gun, any attached supporting weapons,and a portion of the rifle elements to neutralize theenemy weapons and let the remainder of the platoonmaneuver. (See fig. 35.) He also adjusts supportingfires of higher commanders on the enemyweapons not neutralized.e. The platoon also attacks other than as an assaultelement of a larger unit. To gain fire superioritywhen attacking as a unit, the platoon usesa portion of its fire power to replace or add to thesupporting fires normally furnished by highercommanders. This usually is done in the followingsituations:(1) When the platoon acts as a combat patroland only artillery or mortar concentrationsare available on call by radio.(2) When the leading platoon in the approachmarch makes contact and heavy supportingfires are not available immediately.The platoon then attacks aggressively,using fire and maneuver within itself torapidly overcome minor resistance.127

SERGEANT.. -.: SOQUADENEMYifz~'HiQ1LA- |MOVE YOURUP THE LEFT FLANKTO THOSE WOODS AND GETSURPRISE FIRE ON THEENEMY TO OUR FRONT.Figure 35. In the attack the platoon advances by tre andinavenver.128

(3) When in the pursuit or in the continuationof a fast moving attack in which supportingweapons have not displaced rapidly.(4) When attacking over terrain such asheavy woods, jungles, or mountains andwhen supporting weapons cannot bebrought forward or have no fields of fire.f. Timely coordination of the assault with thelifting of support fires is a most important elementin infantry combat. The termination of supportingfires is indicated to the riflemen of the assaultechelon by a visual signal fired by a selected supportingunit. Squads not already deployed as theyapproach the assault position move into formationas skirmishers (app. II). The platoon takes upthe assault fire and advances rapidly to the objectiveas the artillery, mortars, and other supportingweapons lift their fires from the objective in ordernot to endanger friendly troops.126. ORDERS. (See fig. 36.) a. The platoon leadergives his order at a previously selected observationpost, and there he orients his squad leaders bypointing out important terrain features. The platoonorder includes the following:(1) Pertinent enemy information; informationof friendly troops to include the companyobjective, the missions of adjacentunits, and the support expected from thecompany weapons platoon, battalionheavy weapons, elements of the heavymortar company, and the altillery.129

o z .... ;-"V::~IP, :i.:':.4~~~~~~~~~~~~~j~~~~~'~hi~~~3?0130

(2) Platoon objective, line of departure,frontage, hour of attack, formation, anddirection of attack.(3) Line or area of departure for each squad,the mission or targets of each squad, securitymeasures, and instructions for thereorganization on the objective.(4) Location of the battalion aid station andother administrative details.(5) Communication instructions to includeprearranged signals, the platoon leader'slocation, and the company command postlocation.b. The platoon leader makes certain that squadleaders understand the order. Upon receipt of theorder, the squad leaders prepare for the attack asoutlined in paragraphs 61 and 68.Section IV. ATTACK127. MOVEMENT ACROSS THE LINE OF DEPARTURE.The platoon moves in march column from the assembly,area to the attack position. The platoonmay move from the attack position to the line ofdeparture in a partially deployed formation, or inthe attack formation. The determining factors arethe terrain and hostile observation and fire. Themovement from the attack position is timed sothat the leading elements of the platoon cross theline of departure without halting at the specifiedtime. The failure to cross the line of departure ontime causes a loss of maximum advantage of supportingfires, and the flanks of adjacent units maybecome exposed.131

128. CONDUCT OF THE ATTACK. a. The principlesoutlined in paragraph 70 for squad conduct of theattack are applicable to the platoon. The platoonmoves across the line of departure, using availablecover and concealment. Enemy fire and observationare neutralized by the fires and smoke providedby supporting weapons, particularly fromthe artillery and mortars. Mortar and artilleryfires cover the movement of the assault rifle platoonto within assaulting distance of the objective,usually 100 to 150 yards. When troops have effectivesupporting fires, they take advantage of it andmove rapidly. When the assault elements are withinassaulting distance of the objective, the supportingfires are lifted on call by the company orbattalion commander. Then the advance rifle unitsimmediately start their assault under cover oftheir own direct-fire weapons.b. Advance against long-range fires. During the advanceof the platoon to the assault position, thesupporting weapons may not completely neutralizeenemy fires from weapons which the platooncannot combat (distant machine guns, mortars,and artillery). The platoon leader then has threepossible alternatives: to detour danger areas byusing defilade to escape machine gun fires or to bypassimpact areas of enemy mortars and artillery;to move the platoon through the danger area asrapidly as possible; or to stop the advance.(1) When the terrain or the size of the enemyconcentration permits bypassing, thismethod is the best.(2) When the enemy fires cannot be bypassed,132

often they are light enough to permit therapid movement through the danger areaat the cost of only a few casualties. Insuch situations, the platoon leader unhesitatinglymoves the platoon forwardrapidly, since defensive fires usually increasein intensity and accuracy as thefighting progresses, particularly whenthe attacker suspends or eases its pressure.(3) To stop the advance gives the enemymore time to bring down fires and at thesame time deprives adjacent units thesupport upon which they are depending.Halts which are not absolutely forced byenemy action usually result in needlesscasualties because of the increased lengthof time men are exposed to enemy fire.Therefore, the platoon leader stops hisadvance only when a continuation of forwardmovement would result in excessivecasualties. When the platoon is forced tostop, the platoon leader immediately reportshis position to his company commander,the enemy action which causedhis halt, and any other information. Atthe same time, he is alert to resume theadvance, should the enemy fires cease orlighten in intensity.c. Advance against short-range fires.(1) Where the enemy fires come from smallarms within effective range of the platoonweapons, all members of the platoonimmediately fire at these enemy weapons.133

(See par. 60.) When the platoon's firefails to neutralize the enemy weapons theadvance is made by fire and maneuverwithin the platoon itself.(2) Specific targets holding up the advanceare pointed out to the leaders of supportingweapons units, accompanying forwardobservers, and to the company commander.At the same time, the platoonleader uses all means within the platoonto further the advance. Enemy are pinneddown by the fire of one platoon elementwhile the remainder of the platoon maneuversforward under the cover of thisfire. Then the original maneuver elementof the platoon occupies firing positionsand covers the advance of the other element.(3) Maneuver in the zone of an adjacent platoonis often the only way a squad orsmall group can approach the enemy position.(See fig. 37.) The platoon leaderuses such a route after coordinating withthe adjacent platoon.d. Contact with adjacent units. The platoon protectsits flanks by having connecting groups maintaincontact with adjacent units (see par. 75).When a considerable gap develops between his platoonand an adjacent platoon, the platoon leaderreinforces the connecting group and promptly reportsthe situation.129. ASSAULT. a. Before the assault, the platoonworks its way as close to the hostile position as134

./ I:j:: | - -:::~:i:::iRE ^i~ii-li: iin E : : i: :::: s:ES ----::"~~~~~~7inA ,,d9. .AR: : s - : .:

possible, taking maximum advantage of the shockeffect of friendly supporting fires on the enemy.When the platoon attacks as part of the company,the assault is made at a specified time or on a signalfrom the company commander. If a platoon isassaulting alone, the prearranged signal for liftingsupporting fires is given by the platoon leader.b. As the supporting fires lift, the objective iscovered with assault fire from all available weapons.The enemy is beaten down, blinded, or destroyedby fires from rifles, automatic rifles, riflegrenades, hand grenades, rocket launchers, andrecoilless rifles. Ammunition is used unhesitatinglyand replenished. The platoon does not hesitateor stop at the near edge of the objective, butdrives forward to the far edge before the enemyhas time to recover from the initial shock of theassault. Immediately upon arrival at the far edgeof the objective, the platoon prepares for a possiblecounterattack and for the continuation of theattack to the next objective.130. REORGANIZATION. a. The platoon leader'sfirst consideration after capture of the objective isto locate the platoon quickly to repel a possiblecounterattack. When the nature of the objectivepermits, the attack order includes a plan for dividingthe objective into squad sectors so that eachsquad leader may know the position of his squadon the objective. This may be done by the clocksystem. An imaginary clock is placed on the objective,with the center of the clock on the center ofthe objective (see fig. 38). The direction of theenemy to the front is 12 o'clock, the squad sectors136

then are assigned by hour numbers. For example:the first squad defends and reorganizes from 9o'clock to 11 o'clock; the second squad, from 11o'clock to 1 o'clock; and the third squad, from 1o'clock to 3 o'clock. Immediately upon the captureof the objective, the squads move, without furtherorders, to their assigned locations. The platoonleader inspects the platoon area and makes adjustmentsto take advantage of the terrain and to meetenemy resistance.b. As soon as positions are secure to repel a possiblecounterattack, the platoon leader prepares tocontinue the attack. Weapons are checked and ammunitionis redistributed. A report is sent to thecompany commander stating the effective strengthof the platoon, the condition of weapons, and thestatus of ammunition. A squad greatly reduced instrength may be combined with another squad, orits men may be distributed among the othersquads. However, a squad of five men which includesa leader, an automatic rifleman, and a riflegrenadier, may be an effective fighting force. Ordersfor the continuation of the attack usually aregiven by the company commander. The attack ofa new objective is made like the initial attack. Theplatoon leader makes a brief reconnaissance to thefront and flanks to observe the area of advance,looks for available routes for moving the platoonforward, makes an estimate of the situation, andformulates a plan for the continuation of theattack.131. SUPPORT PLATOON. a. In the early phases ofan attack, the rifle company commander often137

'20 S QUAD7 S.1 12a H eIST SQUAD 3S UAD38 4Figure 38. The clock system may be used for reorganizationon the objective.138

keeps a platoon in support. Support platoon missions(fig. 39) may include one or more of thefollowing:ENEMy , ENEMYIC,~;R C e ~:' ESi STAn .RESISTANCE-_''ASSAULTINGPLATOONSASSAULTINGPLATOONSSUPPORTPLATOONPLATOONATTACK THE FLANK OF POINTS OF RE-SISTANCE HOLDING UP THE ASSAULT-INGS PLATOONSTAKE OVER THE MISSION OF ANASSAULTING PLATOONQ41V ENEMY r ENEMYS GUPPORTSUPPORTADJACENTUNITi) FURNISH SECURITY TO THE FLANKS ~ MAINTAIN CONTACT WITH ADJACENTUSING COMBAT PATROLSUNITS BY MEANS OF N CONNECTI GFigure $9. Missions of the support platoon.XHiS:-HO9C ()-49----1Ij 139

i-zoLL~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.'~s'"'i~';" 0 : '.~~~~~ ~~~ ~4a: ~ o~ ~ z> a. F- W1' *r~~~~a·~~~z OW IL ILIL°°0a-z' ~zu~~~~t-ZLo IrLL~0 Z Zoo4WL~~~~~~s~.~~~~P ~~~~Za ~~~~wwF~--1Z00zO140D - 0: CZw 00z Jo LLu z00 U w0Z.AO~~O ,~~~,r·~~~it0 ~~~~t140~~~~~~~~

(1) Furnish flank security by means of flankcombat patrols.(2) Maintain connecting group contact withadjacent units.(3) Attack the flank of the enemy holding upthe assault elements.(4) Take over the mission of an assault platoonif it is disorganized or lost, or suffersexcessive casualties.(5) Mop-up a position overrun by the assaultelements.(6) Furnish protection against counterattacksduring the reorganization.b. The support platoon advances by bounds asdirected by the company commander. It uses a columnformation until committed to action. The platoonleader prevents it from merging with theassault elements. During the advance, the supportplatoon leader constantly observes the action ofthe assault elements and the situation on theflanks. As the situation progresses, he makes tentativeplans for the use of his platoon.Section V. DEFENSE132. TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT. a. A rifle companyorganizes its assigned defense area by assigningareas to its rifle platoons. Each rifle platoon isassisted by the fires of supporting weapons. Thedefense areas organized by a rifle platoon may beclassified according to location as a front-line area,a support area, or a reserve area. Each of theseareas is organized similarly. Each platoon nor-141

mally occupies one defense area; however, the terrainmay require that elements of one platoon occupyseparate defense areas. In this case, eacharea is commanded separately and operates directlyunder the company commander.b. The mission of the front-line platoon is, withthe support of other units, to stop the enemy byfire in front of the main line of resistance and torepel him by close combat if he reaches it.c. The primary mission of the support platoonis to support the front-line platoons by fire. Othermissions include extending in depth the defense ofthe company area, protecting the flanks and rearof the company area, limiting penetrations, andrarely ejecting the enemy by counterattack.133. TROOP LEADING PROCEDURE.- When the platoonleader receives the company defense order,his actions usually follow a logical sequence. Theseactions are called troop leading procedure. Theleader uses this procedure because it saves himtime, helps him remember just what to.do, andprovides the maximum available time for thetroops to prepare for the defense. Having receivedthe company order, the rifle platoon leader takesthe following actions:a. Initial plans.(1) Makes a tentative plan for defense. Thisgives him a basis for later action and letshim orient his leaders in time for themto do certain things early, rather thanafter the platoon order is issued. Thisplan includes the general tentative loca-142

tions and missions of the three riflesquads, weapons of the weapons squad,and attached troops.(2) Plans the movement of his platoon to theassigned defense area and gives themovement order. He does this to securea controlled, timely arrival on the positions.(3) Decides where, when, and to whom theorder is to be given, and he notifies thepersons concerned.(4) Plans his reconnaissance, which is asdetailed as time permits. He gives hismajor attention to critical points. He informshis lower leaders of his plan of reconnaissanceso that he can be locatedquickly if needed.(5) Coordinates with adjacent units and arrangesfor the supporting weapons to beused in his area.b. Reconnaissance.(1) Goes on his personal reconnaissance ofthe ground, taking with him the men heneeds. His reconnaissance is as detailedas time permits.(2) Examines the immediate front of the positionto find areas which give the enemyclose, covered approaches to his position.He looks for natural obstacles and exposedterrain over which the enemywould have difficulty in moving. He looksfor commanding terrain features whichmay be occupied as hostile observation143

posts. He looks for areas within the platoondefensive position which are exposedto hostile observation.(3) Examines the ground in his defensivearea to determine the exact limits of hisarea of responsibility. He decides whereto coordinate with adjacent units andwith supporting weapons in his platoonposition. He selects locations for squaddefense areas, including supplementarypositions. He determines the missionsand general locations for his light machinegun and rocket launcher, includingalternate and supplementary positions.He decides on the missions and generallocations for attached weapons. He selectsroutes of communication and supplyand the location of his command andobservation posts. He determines thepriority of work.c. Orders.(1) Goes to the point previously selected togive his order. He adjusts his tentativeplan as affected by his reconnaissance andgives his order.(2) Informs the company 'commander of hisdefense plan.d. Supervision. Supervises the organization ofthe platoon defense area.134. PLATOON DEFENSE ORDER. The platoon defenseorder is given from an observation pointoverlooking the platoon defense area, when prac-144

ticable. The defense order follows the same 5-paragraph form as the platoon attack order (par.126), with the following additional instructions:a. Location and sector of fire for each riflesquad.b. Location, mission, and sector of fire for eachautomatic rifle, rocket launcher, light machinegun, and attached weapons.c. Organization of the ground including the typeof emplacements (app. V), other construction, andthe priority of work.135. FRONTAGE AND DEPTH. a. The company commanderassigns frontages to his rifle platoons consistentwith the natural defensive strength andrelative importance of their defense areas. If aplatoon occupies an area having poor observation.and poor fields of fire (for example, heavilywooded or broken terrain), the frontage usuallydoes not exceed 300 yards. If the area is open andpermits longer fields of fire, a frontage of 600yards may be assigned. If the terrain is openand flat or an obstacle across its front makes anenemy attack in strength difficult, the frontage assignedto the platoon may exceed 600 yards.b. The frontage physically occupied by the platoonis determined by the intervals which can beleft between fox holes and between adjacent unitswithout jeopardizing the effectiveness of the defense,and by the number of supporting weaponswithin the area. These intervals are determinedby observation, fields of fire, and obstacles. In general,the intervals between fox holes vary from 5145

to 20 yards. Under normal conditions, a 25-yardinterval is allowed for each crew-served weaponin the platoon area. The platoon covers by firethe portion of its front which is not physicallyoccupied.c. If the platoon has good fields of fire to theflanks and rear from its front-line fox holes, itmay use a depth of only 50 yards. If elements ofthe platoon must move from their forward positionsto get adequate fields of fire to the rear, adepth up to 200 yards may be used.136. DISTRIBUTION OF SQUADS. (See fig. 40.) a.I- 150.300 YARDS C_i~~ - ~300-600 YARDS146Figure 40. Rifle platoon in defense (schematic).

The three rifle squads of a front-line platoon areplaced to deliver their heaviest volume of fire forwardof the main line of resistance, both immediatelyin front of the platoon defense area andacross part of the front of adjacent platoons. Thesquads are placed generally abreast, with the menstaggered in depth in an irregular line. Whengaps exist between platoons, the flank squads arelocated to cover them. Rifle squad positions areadjusted to permit supporting weapons in theplatoon area to be placed at points from which theycan get their best fields of fire.b. The rifle squads of the support platoon andof the platoons of the reserve company are locatedto deliver their heaviest volume of fire forward oftheir platoon defense areas. They cover gaps betweenthe forward platoons and are mutually supporting.Their rifle squads are placed similar to afront-line platoon. At times a platoon may occupytwo defense areas, with the platoon sergeant incommand of one; however, integrity or rifle squadsis maintained. The automatic riflemen normallyremain with their squads. The platoon leaderplaces the light machine gun and the rocketlauncher where each best can accomplish its mission.Except when the men of the platoon can fireto the flanks and rear from their primary individualemplacements, supplementary positions areconstructed for all-around defense. Plans aremade for shifting part of the platoon to thesepositions. Natural cover, drainage lines, ditches,trenches, and other defilade are used for the movementto supplementary positions.147

137. FIRE PLAN. a. The rifle platoon leader familiarizeshimself with the parts of the battalionand company fire plans that affect the defense ofhis area. He also procures a map or overlay whichshows artillery concentrations by positions anddesignating numbers. When time and facilitiespermit, he issues copies of this map or overlay tohis platoon sergeant and assistant platoon sergeantin order that any one can call for specificfires in event forward observers become casualties.He then plans the fires of his organic and attachedweapons to provide the maximum defense of theplatoon area in coordination with the company andbattalion fire plans. The rifle platoon fire planincludes the assignment and coordination of sectorsof fire for each rifle squad and for weaponsunder the direct control of the platoon.b. The front-line rifle ptatoon distributes its fireto cover its front and flanks and portions of thefronts of adjacent platoons. Each rifle squad isgiven a sector of fire. These sectors overlap to getcomplete coverage of the target areas. Each automaticrifle is emplaced where it can cover themajor portion of the squad sector of fire and canfire across the fronts of adjacent squads. It isassigned a principal direction of fire to cover aspecific terrain feature or to cover a gap in thefinal protective fires of the supporting weapons.c. The light machine gun is assigned a sector offire and a final protective line. It is placed whereit gives the maximum protection to the platoondefense area, exchanges mutually supporting fires148

with adjacent units, and delivers final protectivefires.d. The rocket launcher is assigned a sector of fireand a principal direction of fire. It is placed whereit can give maximum antitank protection to theplatoon defense area. Its location and principaldirection of fire are coordinated with other antitankweapons.e. The support platoons and platoons of the reservecompany assign their squads sectors of firewhich complete the all-around, integrated defenseof the area. They cover unit flanks and gaps betweenunits and are prepared to fire on an enemypenetration or envelopment. Their machine gunsare given principal directions of fire to cover gapsbetween forward defense positions and to coverlikely routes of hostile approach within the battleposition. The rocket launcher is used as in a frontlineplatoon.f. The rifle platoon leader tells his men how thefires will be controlled. These measures to controlplatoon fires normally include selection of terrainfeatures over which the enemy must pass beforethe platoon opens fire; signals for shifting fires ormoving to supplementary positions; and signalsfor final protective fires.138. COMMAND AND OBSERVATION POST. Theplatoon leader does not have separate commandand observation posts. He selects a position fromwhich he best can observe the front and flanks ofhis area and control his troops. His position preferablyhas cover for messengers and concealed149

outes to the company command post. The platoonsergeant is placed where he best can assist theplatoon leader in the control of the platoon. Hewatches the platoon leader for commands, and controlsthe part of the platoon most difficult for theplatoon leader to control directly. Forward observersand commanders of supporting weapons locatedin the area usually station themselves withineasy communicating distance of the platoon leader.139. ORGANIZATION OF GROUND. a. The organizationof the platoon defense area is continuous.After the locations for weapons emplacements andindividual fox holes are selected, the primary considerationsare to get the men dug in, the positionconcealed from air and ground observation, andthe front cleared sufficiently to permit effectivefire. The company order normally states the sequencein which the tasks are done. This sequenceis-(1) Preparing fox holes and weapons emplacements.(2) Clearing fields of fire.(3) Constructing wire entanglements andother obstacles.(4) Preparing routes for supply, communication,and evacuation.(5) Laying antitank mines, trip flares, andantipersonnel mines.b. When the platoon reaches its defense area,crew-served weapons are mounted immediately intemporary firing positions, fields of fire are cleared,and work is started on the position. Weapons em-150

placements and fox holes are dug, and positions areconcealed from air and ground observation. Thiswork is done concurrently. Covered and concealedroutes for supply, communication, and evacuationare prepared and overhead cover, alternate andsupplementary positions, wire entanglements, andother obstacles are prepared as time permits.140. CONDUCT OF THE DEFENSE. a. The platoonholds its position at all costs and never withdrawsexcept upon the verified order of the companycommander. Successful defense depends on eachunit holding its area. Initial fires of weapons usedwithin the front-line platoon area are withheld untilthe enemy comes within effective rifle range(maximum 500 yards) or when the enemy reachesa certain terrain feature. This gives maximumsurprise and prevents the premature disclosure ofthe battle position. During the hostile preparatoryfires, the platoon takes cover in its preparedpositions. As soon as the hostile preparation firescease, all weapons are readied to meet any hostileground attack.b. The duties of the platoon leader during theconduct of the defense include-(1) Fire control, including the opening ofinitial fires and the shifting of fires tothe most dangerous targets.(2) Requests for additional supporting firesas required.(3) Shifting of men within the platoon positionto defend it.151

(4) Keeping the company commander informedof the situation.c. Unit leaders control the fires of their unitsand direct them against the most threatening targets.The platoon leader keeps fire control bycontinuous observation and timely orders. If anadjacent defense area is penetrated, fire is directedagainst the enemy to keep him from wideningthe break and enveloping nearby platoons. Ifthe platoon is threatened with envelopment, theplatoon leader changes the locations of his mento get all-around defense of his area. Except inemergencies, nonorganic weapons used within theplatoon area by higher commanders are not shiftedwithout the approval of the commanders concerned.The decision to move a crew-served weaponfrom the primary to the alternate position ismade by the immediate commander in the vicinityof the weapon. This move prevents destructionof the weapon and crew by enemy fire or infiltratingparties. Usually, this move is accomplishedduring lulls in the fire fight. During a fire fight,such a movement is exceptional and will be influencedby available cover and concealment. Whentwo or more weapons are moved to alternate positions,the weapons move by echelon. The commanderof the defense area is notified immediately.(See par. 82.)d. It usually is necessary to make adjustments atnight to meet conditions of reduced visibility.These adjustments may include minor shifting ofweapons within the platoon defense area, use ofsecurity detachments to cover open and exposed152

areas which favor night attack, use of infraredequipment and means of night illumination, andthe strengthening of local security elements.141. SECURITY. The platoon provides its own localsecurity by constant observation to the front,flanks, and rear. Enough men are kept alert at alltimes to maintain an effective warning system. Asentry is posted in each squad area to give thewarning of hostile ground or air approach. Tokeep alert, sentries are relieved at least once everytwo hours. Additional security measures may begiven in the company defense order.153

CHAPTER 6WEAPONS PLATOONSection I. GENERAL142. ORGANIZATION. a. The weapons platoon consistsof a platoon headquarters, one 57-mm riflesection, and one 60-mm mortar section. The platoonheadquarters has a platoon leader, a platoonsergeant, two truck drivers, and two messengers.The platoon headquarters has two 1/ 4 -ton trucksto transport weapons, ammunition, and accessories.A caliber .50 machine gun may be mountedon one of these vehicles.b. The 57-mm rifle section consists of a sectionheadquarters and three 57-mm rifle squads. Thesection headquarters has a section leader and amessenger. Each squad has a squad leader, a gunner,an assistant gunner, and two ammunitionbearers. The principal weapon of the squad is one57-mm rifle.c. The 60-mm mortar section consists of a sectionheadquarters and three 60-mm mortar squads.The section headquarters has a section leader anda messenger. Each squad has a squad leader, agunner, an assistant gunner, and two ammunitionbearers. The principal weapon of the squad is one60-mm mortar.154

143. DUTIES OF PLATOON HEADQUARTERS PER-SONNEL. a. The platoon leader is responsible forthe training, discipline, control, and tactical employmentof his platoon. He recommends the useof his platoon to the company commander and controlsits actions through timely orders to his section.He goes where he best can influence the actionof his platoon. However, since the 57-mmrifle squads normally operate with the rifle platoons,he usually is concerned with the use of the60-mm mortar section.b. The platoon sergeant is second-in-commandof the platoon. During a movement, he marchesat the rear of the platoon to help maintain control.He constantly keeps in touch with the situationto the platoon's rear and flanks, supervises ammunitionsupply, and assists the platoon leader inobservation and fire control.c. One messenger accompanies the platoonleader; the other reports to the company commanderwhen the company deploys for action.d. Truck drivers conceal and camouflage theirvehicles at halts, and they perform driver maintenance.They use antitank rifle grenades for theantitank defense of their vehicles. The 1/ 4 -tontruck driver is trained to use the caliber .50 machinegun which is mounted on the vehicle. Otherdrivers also are trained in the use of this weapon.144. DUTIES OF SECTION AND SQUAD LEADERS.The section and squad leaders train and lead themen in their units. They deploy their units accordingto the platoon or section mission.85369(; 0-4---19---11 155

a. The 57-mm rifle section.(1) The section leader assigns general positionareas and targets or sectors of fire,and he controls the displacement of theweapons and the supply of ammunition.In the attack, he watches the rifle elementsand regulates the movement of hissquads to fit in with the maneuver of therifle elements. When a squad is attachedto a rifle platoon, the section leader assiststhe rifle platoon leader in supplyingthe squads of his section.(2) The squad leader moves his squad to itsposition area, selects and supervises thepreparation and occupation of exact firingpositions, adjust the squad's fire, anddirects its ammunition supply.b. The 60-mm mortar section.(1) The section leadelr assigns general locationsfor his squads within the area givento his section, assigns targets, and controlsthe displacement of the weapons andthe expenditure and supply of ammunition.He goes where he best can controlhis section. He may conduct fire at thesection position, or act as a forward observer,or take a position where he canobserve closely the rifle troops and controlthe movement of his section.(2) The squad leader moves his squad to itsposition area, selects and supervises thepreparation and occupation of exact firingpositions, and uses his ammunition156

earers to supply ammunition. Squadleaders are trained as forward observersand operate with front-line rifle platoons.(For general duties of forwardobservers, see sec. II, app. IV.)145. CONTROL. a. For methods of combat control,see sec. I, app. IV. The amount of control theplatoon leader exercises over his sections dependson factors to include the time available to reconnoiterand give orders; the observation of hiszone of action; the detachment of his platoonelements to rifle units; his ability to contact hisunits; and the speed and intensity of the action.The platoon leader furnishes maximum fire supportto the rifle elements by using his platoonheadquarters personnel to locate firing positionsand targets, to help in getting firing data, and toassist in ammunition supply and the movementof vehicles.b. In the attack, the 57-ram i'fle section may beused in general support of the company to increasethe flexibility of fires and to have a continuity offires during the displacement. However, becauseof limitations of the terrain and the difficulty inmaintaining control, squads of the 57-mm riflesection usually are placed in direct support of, orattached to, the assault rifle platoons. When squadsof the 57-mm rifle section are attached to rifleplatoons, control passes to the leader of the unitto which they are attached. The weapons platoonleader and the 57-mm section leader aid the rifleplatoon leaders in supplying the 57-mm rifle157

squads. In the defense, the squads usually are indirect support of the rifle platoons and occupy positionswithin platoon defense areas.c. The 60-mm mortar section normally is used asa unit under the control of the weapons platoonleader. The platoon leader assigns the initial positionarea and section mission and the section displaceson his order. Communication within thesection between observers and the mortars is byradio or sound-powered telephones.146. CONDUCT OF FIRE. a. The 57-mm rifle squadsare given definite targets or sectors of fire. Thesquad leader selects targets, specifies the type ofshell and rate of fire, and gives the command orsignal for opening fire. (See FM 23-80.)b. The 60-nmn mortar section may be given adefinite target or a target area. The sectionusually is used from a section position and the firesof all mortars are placed on the same target ortarget areas. Planned mortar fires in the attackconsist of concentrations. A concentration is thefire of one or more mortars in an area 50 yardsin diameter. Any number of concentrations maybe planned in the attack. When given a target bya forward observer, the section leader directs thefire of all or a part of the section on the targetby means of appropriate fire commands. (See FM23-80.)147. OBSERVATION. a. Squad leaders for the 57-mm r'ifle section place themselves where they canobserve their targets or sectors of fire. The squad158

leader usually is close enough to the gun so thatvoice or signals can be used to control the fire.When a part or all of the section is in generalsupport of the company, the section leader has anobservation post at a point from which he best canobserve the targets or sectors of fire given to hissquads.,b. Observation for the 60-nm mortar section isobtained primarily by forward observers with therifle platoons. Communication between these observersand the mortars is by radio or sound-poweredtelephones. When the situation permits, itmay be desirable to have a section observationpost. The observation post should give observationover the company zone of action, provide coverand concealment, and have a covered route to it.This observation post adds to but does not replacethe observers with the rifle platoons.148. AMMUNITION SUPPLY. a. The platoon's vehiclestransport weapons and ammunition. In theattack, one of the vehicles usually supplies the assaultrifle platoons and attached 57-mm rifles. Theother vehicle supplies the 60-mm mortar section.The platoon sergeant supervises resupply of ammunition.b. In the assembly area or the attack position,the weapons and the initial ammunition supplyfor the 57-mm rifle section are unloaded from theplatoon weapons carrier and are hand carried inthe attack. In defense situations, the weapons andthe initial supply of ammunition are unloaded atthe firing position. Ammunition is resupplied by159

ammunition bearers who return to a company supplypoint and hand carry it forward to the firingposition. Often, ammunition can be delivered byvehicle to the vicinity of the firing platoon.c. Ammunition for the 60-mm mortar sectionnormally is transported by vehicle. When the vehiclecannot be brought to the firing position area,the platoon leader selects the point at which ithalts, and the ammunition is hand carried to thefiring position. The empty vehicle returns to thecompany supply point for resupply.149. ANTIAIRCRAFT SECURITY. Antiaircraft securitymeasures are covered in paragraph 12.150. ANTITANK DEFENSE. Individual antitankdefense is covered in paragraph 13. The 57-mmrifles may be used for antitank defense in eitheroffensive or defensive situations. The weaponsthen are sited along avenues of tank approach sothat flanking fire can be delivered against armor.(For capabilities of the 57-mm rifle against tanks,see par. 6.)Section II. MOVEMENT TO CONTACT151. GENERAL. During the advance in route ortactical column, the weapons platoon moves aspart of the company. In route or tactical column,the vehicles and accompanying personnel normallymove with the battalion transport. If thecompany has a mission requiring readiness for ac-160

tion, the 1 / 4 -ton trucks move with their companyunder the direct control of the platoon leader.152. APPROACH MARCH. The company commandergives the platoon its mission. The situation mayrequire elements of the weapons platoon to be indirect support of or attached to the rifle platoons.The formations and movements of the weaponsplatoon resemble those for the rifle units. Theplatoon leader directs the initial platoon locationto permit close support of the rifle units. A 60-mm mortar forward observer and a 57-mm riflesquad accompany the advance party of a supportcompany of the advance guard.Section III. PREPARATION FOR THE ATTACK153. GENERAL. a. Before the attack, the platoonmay be directed to halt in a covered area selectedby the company commander. This area usually isa part of the company or battalion assembly area.While the platoon is preparing for the attack, theplatoon leader, accompanied by a messenger,moves forward with the company commander toplan the attack. The platoon sergeant supervisesthe preparation of the platoon, as detailed in paragraphs61 and 93.b. The company commander may order theweapons platoon to occupy firing positions to protectthe assembly area, or the weapons may remainon carriers within the platoon area. This decisiondepends on several factors, including theenemy threat, the length of time the unit will re-161

main in the assembly area, and the availibility ofbattalion and other supporting weapons for protectionof the assembly area.c. The 57-mm rifle section may be used for protectionof the company's portion of the battalionassembly area, or the 57-mm rifles may be left onthe weapons carrier in the area given to the 57-mm section and be ready for action should the needarise. When the company occupies an assemblyarea which is separated from the other units, thecompany commander may have the 57-mm riflesection occupy positions covering the most likelyavenues of approach, particularly if the threat ofan enemy break-through exists.d. The 60-mzm mortar section rarely occupiesfiring positions when the company is assigned aportion of the battalion assembly area. The mortarsremain on the weapons carrier in the sectionarea. When the company occupies an assemblyarea which is separate from the other units, thecompany commander may direct that the mortarsbe placed to fire on avenues of approach.154. COMPANY COMMANDER'S ORDERS. After receivingthe recommendations from the weaponsplatoon leader, the company commander uses theweapons platoon to carry out the company planof attack. This decision is given as a part of thecompany attack order. The order gives specificmissions, initial position areas, targets or sectorsof fire, attachments to rifle platoons, time of openingfire, and plan of reorganization. It may give162

the conditions governing the displacement andprovisions for ammunition resupply.155. TROOP LEADING PROCEDURE. a. The weaponsplatoon leader's troop leading procedure followsthe same sequence as that of the rifle platoonleader (par. 124). Before issuing the company attackorder, the company commander may take theweapons platoon leader on a reconnaissance, or hemay direct him to reconnoiter for specific information.To give the weapons platoon maximumtime to prepare its positions, the platoon leaderusually gives his attack order immediately follow-'ing the company attack order. This also allowsmaximum time for squad and section leaders toreconnoiter and select exact firing positions, to observethe ground over which the attack will bemade, to occupy initial positions, and to complete.preparations for the initial mission. (See fig. 41and par. 7.)b. The weapons platoon leader gives timely instructionsfor the forward movement of the platoon.Unless the company commander has specifiedthe off-carrier position for the 60-mm mortarsection, the platoon leader selects this positionwhile on reconnaissance.c. The 60-mm mortar section leader goes aheadof his section to the position area after receivingthe platoon leader's order. He notes the locationof the front-line troops and his targets or targetareas. When he has selected the general locationfor his weapons and cover positions, he moves the163

;I E~~~~~~~~~~q:-:::j :::i:::14C:~~~~~~~~iFi ::_::in .:j::::::::::i:i164 ~ :::i::::::::: 0

squads and their weapons from the off-carrier positionto the firing positions.d. The 57-mm rifle section leader supervises theattachment of his squads to assault rifle platoons.For squads not attached, he selects position areas,assigns targets or sectors of fire, and provides forammunition supply.156: TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT. a. In the attack, a57-mmm rifle squad ordinarily is placed in directsupport of or attached to each assault rifle platoon.A squad not thus used may be retained undercompany control in general support, and usedwith the support platoon if it is committed. The57-mm rifle usually is used for direct fire on targetswhich hold up the advance of the platoon itsupports. The squad displaces as necessary tomaintain close support of the platoon. Once theobjective is captured, the squad protects the reorganizationof the platoon and assists in breakingup hostile counterattacks. Exceptionally, oneor more 57-mm rifle squads may be assigned themission of antitank protection for the company.b. The 60-mm mortars usually are placed in asection position. During the attack, the mortarsfire on request from forward observers, firing attargets which hold up the advance of the assaultplatoons. The mortars usually displace by sectionwhen their fires no longer can give close support.After capture of the objective, the section protectsthe reorganization of the company and aids inbreaking up hostile counterattacks.165

157. SELECTION OF FIRING POSITIONS. a. Desirablecharacteristics for 57-mm rifle firing positions(see fig. 42) include-(1) Observation of friendly troops and observationof targets or sectors of fire.(2) Fields of fire which permit direct fire.(3) Cover and concealment from enemy observationand fire.(4) Safety clearance to the rear, particularlyapplicable to closed rooms.(5) Obstacles which give protection againstenemy tanks but do not interfere withfiring.(6) Covered routes of communication for occupationand ammunition resupply.b. Desirable characteristics for 60-mm mortarfiring positions include-(1) Locations within the effective range oftargets or target areas.(2) Mask clearance of hills, trees, buildings,and similar obstacles to high-angle fire.(3) Cover and concealment from enemy observationand fire. Complete defilade protectspositions from enemy flat-trajectoryfire, and holes and ditches give some protectionfrom high-angle fire.(4) Dispersion between mortars to preventtwo mortar positions from being hit byone enemy shell. Dispersion is limitedby voice or visual control.(5) Covered routes to the position for occupationand ammunition resupply.166

167

158. TARGETS. a. Appropriate targets for 57-mmrifles are point targets; for example, crew-servedweapons, small enemy groups, pillbox embrasures,and enemy tanks which are about to overrun thefriendly position. The 57-mm rifle may be used tofire on small area targets in which enemy personnelor installations may be located but are notclearly visible. Fighting in built-up areas, the57-mm rifle is used against definitely located targetsin buildings and against the buildings themselvesto let the assaulting infantrymen enter.Smoke shells may be used to limit enemy observation.b. Primary targets for 60-mm mortars are pointtargets; for example, crew-served weapons andsmall groups of enemy personnel, particularlythose in defilade. The 60-mm mortars are effectiveagainst small area targets but are not used tosearch large areas. The white phosphorous (WP)shell may be used to screen specific points, suchas the embrasures of pillboxes or a street barricade.When fighting in built-up areas, the mortarmay be used against roof-top targets. It also isused against defiladed targets not closer than 100yards from friendly troops and which are tooclose for the use of 81-mm and 4.2-inch mortarsor artillery.159. ORDERS. a. The platoon leader's orders includeas much of the following as is necessary:(1) Information of the enemy and friendlytroops, including the expected action ofthe leading rifle platoons of the company168

and the positions and missions of the battalionheavy weapons elements.(2) Mission of the weapons platoon.(3) Instructions concerning ammunition supply,location of the battalion aid station,and other administrative matters.(4) Communication instructions (includingprearranged signals) and the location ofthe platoon leader and company commander.(5) Orders to the sections to include initialposition areas, route or unit to be followed,.off-carrier position, initial targetsor sectors of fire, time of opening fire,displacement and reorganization, and attachmentsto rifle platoons.b. The attack orders of a section leader include-(1) Information of the enemy and friendlytroops.(2) Mission of the section.(3) General location of squad firing positions,instructions for movement to them, andinstructions on the opening and conductof fire.(4) Instructions concerning ammunition supplyand the location of the battalion aidstation.(5) Prearranged signals and the locations ofthe section leader and the platoon leader.c. Each squad leader includes in his attack orderthe items of the section order which pertain tohis squad. After the initial firing positions are occupied,he gives the fire order for firing at the first169

target. Squad leaders of 57-mm rifle squads attachedto rifle platoons get their orders from therifle platoon leader.Section IV. ATTACK160. MOVEMENT INTO FIRING POSITIONS. a.The weapons, ammunition, and accessories of the57-mm rifle section are moved by weapons carrierfrom the assembly area to the attack position, ifpracticable. Otherwise, the weapons are unloadedfrom the weapons carrier as far forward of theassembly area as possible. At the attack position,the squads which are attached to assault rifle platoonsjoin those platoons and move to a cover positionas directed by the rifle platoon leader. Thesquad leader selects the exact firing position andsupervises its preparation and occupation. Whenthe mission requires one or more squads to beplaced in general support of the company, thesquads are moved to the firing position area bythe section leader. The exact firing position isselected by the squad leader and occupied like thatof the squads attached to rifle platoons. The routefrom the cover position to the firing positionshould be covered and concealed. When not resupplyingammunition, ammunition bearers remainin a cover position near the rifle.b. Since the 60-mm mortar section normally isfired from defilade, it usually moves by vehiclefrom the assembly area to an off-carrier positionlocated as close to the position area as the situationpermits. The weapons, accessories, and initial sup-170

ply of ammunition are unloaded and hand carriedto exact firing positions selected by the squad leaders.The squad leaders supervise the preparationand occupation of the firing position. Ammunitionbearers are dispersed near the firing position whennot resupplying ammunition.161. SUPPORTING FIRES DURING THE ATTACK. a.The 57-mm rifle squad leaders use their squads tosupport closely the assault rifle platoons duringthe attack. They continuously watch the advancingriflemen and the objective so that theirfires do not endanger friendly troops. Theypromptly fire at surprise targets which threatenthe advance of the assault platoons. When the advanceof the assault platoons masks the fires of57-mm rifles, the fires are shifted to the flanks ofthe objective or a displacement is made.b. The 60-mm mortar section may fire prearrangedconcentrations on specific targets or targetareas before and during the initial phases ofthe attack, as part of the company or battalionfire plan. During the attack, they fire at suitabletargets as directed by the company commander,the weapons platoon leader, the section leader, oras requested by the forward observers. Duringthe assault, the 60-mm mortar section fires on appropriatetargets on the flanks or beyond theobjective.162. DISPLACEMENT. a. When the assigned missionno longer can be accomplished from initialpositions, displacement is made to cause a minimumof interruption in fire support.853696 0-49--12 171

. The rifle platoon leader to whom a 57-mmrifle squad is attached may direct the displacementof that squad. Often the squad leader, on his owninitiative, moves his squad to new positions whencontinuous fire support is impossible, or when theold position cannot be held due to enemy action.The displacement then is made rapidly; the squadmoves closely behind or on the flank of the rifleplatoon. The squad leader leads his squad forwardto select and direct the rapid occupation of a newfiring position.c. The 60-mm mortar section ordinarily displacesas a unit. Displacement of weapons andammunition is made by vehicle, if possible. Whena displacement of the section is expected soon, theplatoon leader makes a personal reconnaissanceand designates a new general position area to thesection leader. The section leader indicates squadposition areas to the squad leaders. The squadleaders lead their squads forward, making use ofcovered routes, and select the exact firing positionsfor their squads.163. REORGANIZATION. a. As soon as the hostileposition is captured, or the attack is halted for anyreason, weapons are placed in positions whichprotect the front and flanks of the assault rifleplatoons against a counterattack. (See fig. 43.)b. After weapons are emplaced to repel a counterattack,the platoon leader begins the preparationto continue the attack. He has his squad leadersreplace key men within their squads, check thecondition of weapons, and collect and redistribute172

ammunition. Concurrently, the platoon leader replacesleaders in the platoon. The squad leadersreport the strength of their squads and theirweapons and ammunition needs, and the platoono° 011-.~31 PLATOONIST PLATOONIFigure 43. Reorganization. As soon as the objective is captured,the weapons of the weapons platoon areemplaced in positions to protect the front andflanks of the rifle platoons.leader, in turn, reports the platoon needs. Ordersto continue the attack are given, and the actiontaken resembles the action before the initialattack.173

Section V. DEFENSE164. TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT. a. The weapons platoonof the rifle company assists the rifle platoonsin the defense of their areas. The company commandercoordinates the fires with those of thebattalion fire plan. When circumstances permit,the weapons are kept under company control tocoordinate fires. When time is limited, the weaponsmay be attached to rifle platoons to give themaximum close support to the rifle platoons untildetailed coordination is made under companycontrol.b. The mission of the 57-mm rifle section in defenseis to destroy enemy crew-served weapons,enemy groups, and tanks attempting to overrunthe position. The rifles are used by the companycommander to cover sectors, or approaches inwhich targets of opportunity are most likely toappear.c. The missions of the 60-mm mortars of a frontlinerifle company in defense are to-(1) Cover its assigned sector., The mortarsgive close support to the forward defenseareas by firing concentrations on targetsof opportunity-particularly thosein defilade-to break up a hostile attackbefore it reaches the battle position.(2) Assist in the battalion coordinated fireplan. Mortar barrages fill gaps in thefinal protective fires of the battalion fireplan. If no gaps exist inside the companysector, barrages strengthen the final pro-174

tective fires in the most dangerous areasof approach.(3) Assist in limiting penetrations. Concentrationsare planned within the companydefense area to limit an enemy penetrationof the main line of resistance.(4) Support counterattacks. Concentrationsmay be used to block off the penetratedarea or to give close support to a counterattackforce.165. SELECTION OF PQSITIONS. a. If practicable,the platoon leader accompanies the company commanderon his reconnaissance and makes recommendationsfor the use of the weapons platoon.Based on his own reconnaissance and the recommendationsof the weapons platoon leader, thecompany commander's defense order assigns missionsand general locations for the weapons platoonelements.b. The weapons platoon leader's troop leadingprocedure follows the same sequence as that of therifle platoon leader. (See par. 133.)c. When sectors of fire, observation, and communicationfacilities are not limited, the most effectivefire and control is obtained by using the60-mm mortars in a section position under companycontrol. Then the firing positions normallyare in the vicinity of the support platoon. Observersare located in front-line platoon areas withdirect communication by both wire and radio tothe section.d. When sectors of fire, observation, and com-175

munication facilities are limited to prevent coverageof the company front, the section may be dividedand guns placed within the front-line platoonareas.e. After receiving the company commander's order,the weapons platoon leader gives his order,and he has the platoon elements moved to theirfiring positions. The platoon leader and sectionleaders precede the remainder of the platoon tothe defense areas to coordinate the use of theweapons and the selection of firing positions. Firingpositions selected for the 57-mm rifles and60-mm mortars in defense resemble those selectedin the attack. (See par. 157.)166. SECTORS OF FIRE AND TARGET AREAS. a.The 57-mrm rifles are used by the company commanderto cover approaches where targets of opportunityare most likely to appear. Often one57-mm rifle is used in direct support of each rifleplatoon defense area. Specific sectors of fire andposition areas are designated by the weapons platoonleader.b. Each 60-mm mortar squad is assigned a sectorof fire, one barrage, and any number of concentrations.The three squad sectors overlap tocover the entire company front. The company commandernormally uses the barrages to close smallgaps in the machine gun final protective lines.These barrages are 50 yards square and normallyare located at least 100 yards forward of the frontlineelements. The weapons platoon leader assignsconcentrations and sectors of fire according to the176

company defense plan. These concentrations areplanned both forward of and within the battle position.Concentrations are 50 yards in diameter.(See figs. 44 and 45.)I1/i /ODCONCENTRATIONBARRAGEFigure 44. In the defense, 60-mm mortar sectors overlap tocover the entire company front.167. ORDERS. a. The platoon defense order is basedon the company order and the platoon leader's reconnaissance.It is given to the section leaders and177

other key men of the platoon. When practicable,the platoon leader gives his order from a positionwhere he can point out to each lower unit leaderthe selected firing positions, sectors of fire, and lo-'' ' x ®0R 1DOBARRAGECONCENTRATIONFigure 45. If the 60-mm mortar section is divided, its gunsare placed within the front-line platoon areas.cations of adjacent troops. The section leaders givetheir orders based upon the platoon order and178

their own reconnaissance. The troop leading procedureused by the section leaders is similar to thatused by the platoon leader. The platoon leader andthe section leaders supervise the coordination andexecution of their orders. The defense order followsthe general form for the platoon attack order(see par. 159) and contains the following additionalinstructions:(1) Barrage and concentration areas for the60-mm mortars.(2) Final protective fires to include themethod for calling for these fires, a locationfrom which visual signals for firesare given, and the rates and duration offire.(3) Organization of the ground, includingtypes of emplacements, other constructions,and priority of work.b. The squad leaders base their orders, on theorder of the section leaders. The squad leadersselect exact positions for the guns or mortars, andthey give orders for clearing fields of fire and preparingand camouflaging primary, alternate, andsupplementary positions.168. POSITION OF LEADERS. a. Platoon leader.The platoon leader assists the company commanderin controlling weapons platoon fire missions.Normally, the platoon leader is at or nearthe firing positions of the 60-mm mortars. Whenobservation and sectors of fire are limited, theplatoon leader may establish an observation postfor increased observation of the company sector.179

. Section leaders.(1) The 57-mm rifle section leader remainswith the squad used in the support platoonarea. From this position, he best isable to control the supply of all squads,replace key men, and rapidly shift fireto meet a threat from the flank or rear.(2) The 60-mm mortar section leader is concernedprimarily with fire control andammunition supply. If the mortars arein a section position, the section leaderremains at the firing position. If the mortarsare divided, control of fires usuallyis delegated to the squad leaders, and thesection leader concerns himself primarilywith ammunition supply.c. Squad leaders.(1) The 57-mm rifle squad leaders stay withthe rifles and control their fires.(2) The mortar squad leaders act as forwardobservers with the front-line rifleplatoons. They put their observationposts within the platoon areas where theybest can observe their assigned sectors.A squad leader not used as an observerassists in the control of fires.169. OCCUPATION AND ORGANIZATION OFFIRING POSITIONS. a. After squads arrive at theirassigned locations, the firing positions and sectorsof fire of the weapons are shown to the squadleaders. Each squad leader has his squad weaponmounted in a temporary firing position, prepared180

to open fire to cover his assigned sector of fire. Assoon as the weapons are mounted in temporarypositions, the positions are constructed, camouflaged,and stocked with ammunition. The weaponsthen are mounted in the primary firingpositions.b. The characteristics of the 57-mm rifle aresuch that emphasis is placed on clearing fields offire, preparing alternate positions, and concealingthe positions. The ammunition bearers preparefox holes from which they can resupply ammunitionand give close-in protection to the weapon andthe remainder of its crew. After the squad digs in,the squad leader examines his position from thedirection of the enemy to check on the camouflageand concealment. Ranges are determined to themost important landmarks in the squad sector offire, and range cards are prepared.c. The primary 60-mm mortar positions and theobservation posts are constructed first, and foxholes for the ammunition bearers then are prepared.Alternate positions are constructed accordingto the priority of work. If the situation permits,each mortar is registered on its barrage andon as many concentrations as necessary. Care istaken to avoid endangering security elements, reconnaissanceparties, and work details forward ofthe battle position. Firing data are recorded bythe squad leader. One copy of each range cardis kept by the squad leader, and one copy is givento the platoon leader. The platoon leader then preparesand gives the company commander an overlayor firing sketch showing the prepared mortar181

fires. After the company commander approvesthese planned fires or makes necessary changes,he prepares a company overlay or firing sketchand gives it to selected men of the company andto the battalion commander.d. Camouflage is concurrent with the constructionof defensive works. Spoil not used in constructionis disposed of immediately. Parapets aretramped down and sodded. Men avoid makingnew paths ending at installations.e. Dry, concealed ammunition shelters are constructedwithin or near the weapons emplacements.170. CONDUCT OF DEFENSE. a. The 57-mm riflesengage by direct fire enemy crew-served weapons,groups of men, and tanks. If located within ornear a front-line platoon area, the rifles withholdtheir fire until the other weapons of that defensearea open fire. If more than one of the abovetypes of targets appear within the assigned sectorat one time, a 57-mm rifle fire is directed againstthe target which is the greatest threat to the position.The 57-mm rifles do not fire at night exceptin emergencies and when the enemy is atclose range.b. The 60-mm mortars initially are laid to firewhere suitable targets are most likely to appear.If the enemy succeeds in driving in security elements,the mortars then are laid on their barrageswhen not firing other missions.c. As the enemy advances, observers call forfires on suitable targets within their sectors. If182

final protective fires are called for, the mortarsfire their barrages. If the barrage of any mortaris not within the area where the final protectivefires are needed, that mortar fires the.concentrationswhich most effectively reinforce the finalprotective fires. If the enemy penetrates any portionof the battle position, the mortars fire in thearea of penetration to disrupt and destroy theenemy and to prevent a widening of the penetration.d. The decision to move a crew-served weaponfrom the primary to the alternate position is madeby the immediate commander in the vicinity ofthe weapon. This move is made to prevent thedestruction of the weapon and crew by enemy fireor infiltrating parties. Usually this move is madeduring lulls in the fire fight. During a fire fight,such a movement is exceptional and is influencedby the available cover and concealment. When twoor more weapons are moved to alternate positions,the weapons move by echelon. The commander ofthe defense.area is notified immediately.183

CHAPTER 7RIFLE COMPANY, OFFENSIVECOMBATSection I. PREPARATION FOR THE ATTACK171. GENERAL. a. For the general duties of the companycommander and company headquarters personnel,see chapter 1. For the conduct of the companyin movement to contact, assembly areas, andattack positions, see chapter 2.b. Before the attack, the company may be directedto halt in a covered area selected by thebattalion commander. This area usually is partof the battalion assembly area. Normally, whilethe company is preparing for the attack, the companycommander joins the battalion commander toreceive the attack order. He usually takes withhim the weapons platoon leader, the communicationsergeant, a radio operator, and a messenger.One officer, usually the executive officer, remainswith the company.172. BATTALION COMMANDER'S ORDERS. The companyusually attacks as part of the battalion. Thebattalion order indicates whether a company isinitially in the assault or in reserve and gives thesupporting and attached units. If the company isin the assault, it has a definite terrain objective or184

a series of objectives, a line of departure or areaof departure, a definite zone of action, a directionof attack, pertinent parts of the battalion or regimentalfire plan, and the time of attack.173. TROOP LEADING PROCEDURE. a. Company commander.After receiving the battalion order, thecompany commander decides what preparationsare to be made, what he will do personally, andwhat he will delegate to others. The company commander'sactions generally follow this sequence:(1) Confers with other unit commanders.(2) Plans his reconnaissance.(3) Selects an observation post and sends forhis unit leaders.(4) Make a reconnaissance.(5) Formulates a method of attack.(6) Gives the order.(7) Supervises the execution of the order.b. Conference with other unit commanders.(1) He holds brief conferences with commandersof adjacent and supporting unitsbefore leaving the place where the battalionorder is given. Frequently, all thathe can do now is to make definite arrangementsfor a later exchange of information,either through conferences or messages.He secures information by telephonefrom commanders not present, orby sending agents to confer with them.(2) The information the rifle company commanderneeds from the local coveringforce commander is the exact location of185

elements through which the company willpass, and detailed informatlon of enemyactivities and locations, sucn as locationsof automatic weapons, observation posts,antitanK guns, minefields, intrenchedriflemen, and recent patrol action.(3) The intormation he usually needs tromadjacent commanders is their plan ofattack and the method of maintainingcontact between the two units.(4) The information he needs from supportingweapons commanders is the exact positionareas and target areas of theirweapons. This information is essential toavoid premature masking of their firesand to determine the best possible locationsfor company weapons.c. Reconnaissance plan. He studies his map, observesthe ground, and selects a route for his reconnaissance.d. Observation post. He selects an observation post.Its location gives the maximum observation overthe company zone of action and is concealedenough to permit the assembly of his officers forthe company attack order. He selects this pointearly to allow time for the platoon leaders to beguided there by a messenger. He issues instructionsregarding the time and place of giving theorder and the movement of the company from theassembly area to the attack position.e. Reconnaissance. His reconnaissance is carriedout while the company is moving forward and hisplatoon leaders are moving up to join him. During186

his reconnaissance, he makes an estimate of thesituation which includes a terrain analysis.(1) An estimate of the situation is a reasoningprocess by which a commander arrivesat a plan of action to carry out hismission. The company commander considershis mission, the opposing enemyforce and its capabilities of interferingwith the execution of his mission, hisown force, the terrain, and the coursesof action open to him. For units as smallas the rifle company, the estimate is comparativelybrief and simple. It is basedupon available intelligence, personal reconnaissance,and the reconnaissance ofunit leaders and patrols.(2) The terrain is evaluated for its criticalterrain features, observation and fieldsof fire, obstacles, cover and concealment,and avenues of approach. (See par. 124.)While on reconnaissance, the companycommander determines the possible locationsof enemy weapons and personnel.He notes the routes or areas where theenemy's observation or fire is limitedmost by the terrain and which ones arehis most favorable avenues of approachto the hostile position. He considers thehelp he can expect from smoke and fireof supporting weapons, and he notes thelocations where his own weapons can beplaced to support the movement of hisrifle units. He also considers whether ad-853696 0-49 13: 187

jacent units initially will be ahead, behind,or abreast of his company andtherefore determines whether his flanksare protected or exposed. He noteswhether the terrain gives the enemycover or concealment from which tolaunch surprise counterattacks as the attackprogresses. With these factors inmind, he decides how to use his companyto accomplish his mission promptly andwith the fewest casualties.f. Method of attack. Upon completing his estimateof the situation, he decides how he willattack.g. Orders. After completing his reconnaissance,the company commander immediately gives his order.This is done to allow platoon, section, andsquad leaders the maximum time to make theirown reconnaissance, give their orders, and placetheir units for the attack. (For details of theattack order see par. 185 and app. I.)h. Supervision. The company commander supervisesthe preparation for the attack.Section II. METHOD OF ATTACK174. OBJECTIVES. The battalion attack orderusually directs the capture of a terrain objectiveor a series of terrain objectives. The company order,as a means of coordinating the efforts of thecompany, assigns successive objectives to the assaultplatoon or platoons. As its initial objective,each assault platoon is given the nearest terrain188

feature or hostile position within its zone of actionwhose capture is essential to the accomplishmentof the company mission. Platoons may continuetheir attack against other definite objectives aftertheir initial objectives are captured. If the companycommander desires to control the action moreclosely, the platoons may be directed to continuethe attack on company order. Depending on theterrain, there may be several of these successiveplatoon objectives to be captured before the assaultechelon reaches the initial company objective.175. SCHEME OF MANEUVER. a. The cover andconcealment provided by irregularities of the terrainseldom is uniform in all parts of the companyzone of action. Available supporting fires may notbe enough to neutralize all hostile elements opposingthe advance. The hostile position usually isoccupied irregularly because of the terrain. Openareas may be lightly occupied physically, but adequatelycovered with fire; while broken terrain andcovered approaches leading to the enemy positionmay be strongly occupied. Since the enemy's observationand fields of fire are weaker in brokenterrain the company commander plans to concentratehis efforts on advancing a portion of his assaultechelon through that part of the companyzone which gives the best cover and concealment.b. The remainder of the assault echelon attacksthrough that portion of the company zone givingthe best remaining concealment and cover. Thisforces the enemy to disperse his efforts, prohibitingthe use of his maximum defensive strength189

against one portion of the assault echelon. (Seefig. 46.)176:-FORMATIONS. a. The formation used for.theattack is governed by the mission of the company,?LDASSAULT ECHELONSUPPORTPLATOONFigure 46. The company advances along routes which offerthe best cover and concealment.the width of the zone of action, the reinforcementsand supporting fires, the terrain, the knowledge ofenemy locations, and the need for security.190

. By using a formation with two rifle platoonsin the assault echelon and one in support, thecompany can deliver a strong initial attack whileretaining a support to influence future action.c. A formation with one rifle platoon in the assaultechelon and two in support is used frequentlywhen the company has a very narrow zone of action,when it is operating on an exposed flank, orwhen the enemy situation is obscure. In this formation,the support platoons may be in column behindthe leading platoon; they may be echelonedbehind the leading platoon toward an exposedflank; or, if both flanks are exposed, they may beecheloned, one to each flank of the leading platoon.d. The situation and terrain may require the useof all three platoons in the assault echelon, butnot necessarily abreast. A formation for the initialattack with all three rifle platoons abreast is exceptional.It may be used when the company isgiven an extremely broad zone of action and theenemy situation is known.177. LINE OF DEPARTURE. The battalion orderdesignates a line of departure from which thecompany launches its attack. Its purpose is to coordinatethe advance of the assault echelon so thatits elements will strike the enemy in the order andat the time desired. This line should be approximatelyperpendicular to the direction of attackand recognized easily on the ground, and it shouldbe controlled by friendly forces. Occasionally, theline of departure is difficult to locate on the ground,or it cannot be reached without exposing the as-191

sault echelon to observation and fire. In this event,the company commander has each platoon start itsattack from a suitable position in rear of the lineselected by the battalion commander; a companytime of attack is prescribed so that the leading elementscross the line ordered by the battalion commanderat the time set in the battalion order.178. ZONES OF ACTION. a. The battalion commanderordinarily does not designate boundariesbetween companies. An interior company usuallyremains within the battalion boundaries and withinthe zone of action assigned by the battalioncommander. The entry into an adjacent battalionzone is coordinated with the commander of the adjacentunit, either by the battalion commander orthe company commander. To make a flank attack,a company commander can move elements in rearof an adjacent company within the battalion sector.This ordinarily is done by coordination betweenthe two company commanders concerned.An interior company ordinarily uses a zone of actionfrom 200 to 500 yards in width.b. Each rifle platoon in the assault echelon isgiven a definite zone of action. (See fig. 47.) Thezone of action is indicated by giving the platoona particular section of the line of departure or anarea from which to start its attack, a direction ofattack, and a definite terrain objective or series ofobjectives to be captured. If desired, the widthof the zone may be indicated by directing that theplatoon attack on a frontage indicated in yards.This is its zone of responsibility in which it drives192

.. .......EL'I'DI ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~I193

forward and captures the assigned objectives.Normally, the frontage assigned the platoon isfrom 100 yards to 250 yards; under exceptionalcircumstances, these limits vary. For reasons indicatedin paragraph 123, boundaries between platoonsseldom are given.179. SUPPORT. At the start of the attack, the companycommander may hold out a support for lateruse in repelling counterattacks, for replacing anexhausted part of the assault echelon, or for strikingthe final blow necessary to capture an objective.It is adequate in strength to accomplish itsprobable missions. (See par. 131.)180. WEAPONS PLATOON. The 57-mm rifles and60-mm mortars are placed in position before theattack to neutralize enemy elements that may holdup the advance of rifle platoons. (See par. 156.)181. SUPPORTING FIRES. (See app. IV.) a. Thebattalion commander announces the supportingfires in his attack order to include the platoons ofthe heavy weapons company, the heavy mortarcompany, the tank company, and the artillery.The targets or target areas and the time and durationof the supporting fires are given to the companycommander. He plans his attack to take maximumadvantage of the supporting fires whichcover the movement of the assault echelon fromthe line of departure to the assault position. Thefires are lifted by the battalion or comhpany commanderwhen the assault echelon reaches the assaultposition.194

. Platoons of the heavy weapons company. The positionareas and initial target areas or fire missionsof the machine gun platoon, 75-mm rifle platoon,and 81-mm mortar platoon are given in thebattalion order. The weapons of the machine gunplatoon and 75-mm rifle platoon are emplaced inthe vicinity of the line of departure. The rifle companycommander coordinates the emplacement ofhis own crew-served weapons and the advance ofhis rifle units with the position areas of the heavyweaponsunits. When terrain or communicationdifficulties make control by the battalion commanderimpracticable, machine gun and 75-mmrifle units may be placed in direct support of orattached to rifle company. (See sec. I, app. IV.)c. Heavy mortar company. The heavy mortar tompanyusually is placed in general support of theregiment with priority of fires to specific battalions.Fires of the heavy mortar company are usedprimarily to destroy or neutralize enemy troopsand weapons which can be fired at more readily bymortars than by the supporting artillery. Theheavy mortar also fires smoke missions.d. Tanks. Tank fires increase the fire power andshock effect of the rifle company and provide antitankprotection. One or more tank platoons areoften attached to a rifle company to form an infantry-tankteam. In general, there are five methodsof attack which may be used by infantry-tankteams. These methods are modified frequently bycombining elements of two or more methods. Thecircumstances of enemy resistance and terrain indicatewhich method promises the maximum suc-195

cess in any specific attack. The methods of attackare discussed in the following paragraphs.(1) Initially, the tanks support the infantryby fire from stationary hull defilade positionson or near the line of departure.When the infantry approaches the assaultposition, the tanks advance rapidly andjoin the infantry at the assault position.Supporting fires on the objective then areshifted, and the assault is executed by infantryand tanks together. The tanksshould time their advance from the lineof departure so infantry and tanks reachthe assault position at the same time.During the assault, infantry and tanksadvance generally abreast. This methodis used when the objective is definedclearly and when fields of fire exist forthe tanks. Surprise usually is achieved,and the maximum tank fire power isavailable at the critical time of the finalassault. The fires from the moving tanksat short range, in combination with theassault fire of the infantry, add greatlyto the intensity of the shock effect.196(2) Tanks cross the line of departure in orderto pass through the advancing infantryeither before it reaches the assault positionor when it is at the assault position.Thereafter, the tanks precede the infantryby distances varying from 50 to 300yards. They are protected against localantitank weapons by their own fires, time

or VT artillery fire, and fires of the rifleunit. When the supporting fires are liftedjust before the tanks arrive on the objective,the rifle units immediately open assaultfire and follow the tanks to the objective.This method is used mostly inattacks heavily supported by artillerytime and VT fire and against an enemywho possesses little or no overhead coverand whose forward antitank weapons includefew tanks. It has the advantage ofspeed and shock action and usuallyachieves surprise. Maximum tank firepower is available during the critical periodwhen artillery and mortar fires arebeing shifted and the task of keeping theenemy's forward weapons neutralized ispassing to the weapons of the assaultechelon. As in the previously discussedmethod, the tanks support the infantry.advance by fire from stationary hull defiladepositions until the time arrives tolaunch their own attack.(3) Infantry and tanks, moving by separateroutes, converge on the objective fromdifferent directions. Because of the greaterspeed of the tanks, the infantry usuallystarts its attack first, and the tanks crosstheir line of departure at the time necessaryfor a coordinated final assault of infantryand tanks. Whenever possible, thetanks support the infantry advance byfire until the time arrives to start their197

own attack. This method is useful whenthe terrain or enemy defenses favor theuse of two routes, one for infantry andanother for tanks. It usually achievessurprise and has the advantage of convergingfire effect and shock action.(4) Infantry and tanks move together at thesame rate of speed throughout the advancefrom the line of departure to theobjective. The infantry may move slightlyin advance of the tanks, between them,or immediately in rear. As the advanceprogresses, these relative positions oftanks and infantry are adjusted accordingto the enemy resistance and the terrain.This method is used when visibilityis limited, in built-up areas, and in woods.It permits close coordination and maximummutual support, but it sacrificesspeed and surprise. The slow rate ofmovement increases tank vulnerability tohostile antitank fires and gives the enemytime to increase the intensity of his defensivefires. In close terrain, when littleis known of the enemy, it frequently isdesirable to use this method initially,passing to another when the assault echelonenters more open terrain or when theenemy situation clarifies. In a variationof this method, the infantry rides on thetanks until enemy fire forces them to dismountand fight on foot. This providesspeed but results in increased exposure198

of infantry to enemy fire, particularly toair bursts. It also interferes with theoperation of the tank. It is used primarilyin exploitation.(5) From stationary hull defilade firing positionson or near the line of departure,tanks support the infantry by overheador flanking fire throughout its advancefrom the line of departure to the objective.This is the least efficient of all themethods. It should be used only whennatural or artificial antitank obstaclesprohibit the tank movement to the objective,or when additional tanks are providedto increase the tank support in thefirst three methods discussed.No matter what method is used to reach the objective,once it is captured, infantry and tanksclosely coordinate their actions during the mop-upphase. Tanks particularly support the riflemen inclearing the objective area of hostile automaticweapons. The riflemen assist the tanks by promptlyeliminating individual and crew-served antitankweapons. During the reorganization and the preparationto continue the attack, the tanks aredisposed along with the infantry as previouslyplanned, to hold the captured ground against acounterattack. (For additional details see app. IVand FM 7-35.)e. Artillery. The infantry regimental and battalioncommanders, with artillery liaison officers, preparea detailed plan of close artillery fire support.This fire plan is based on the battalion command-199

er's scheme of maneuver. An artillery forwardobserver moves with each company to obtain andadjust the artillery fires requested by the rifle companycommander. (See app. IV.)182. USE OF SCREENING SMOKES. a. The rifle companyfrequently uses screening smokes to assist itsattack. Smoke support may be accomplished byorganic means or by supporting artillery, mortars,or tanks. Organic means consist of rifle grenades,hand grenades, rocket launchers, and the 60-mmmortar. These provide only small, local screenswithin the company zone of action. Supportingsmoke screens are fired on call or as predeterminedfires. They are more-general in extent and requiregreater coordination with adjacent units, as considerationmust be given to the drift of the moreextensive smoke cloud.b. Smoke is used carefully and with skill in orderto obtain the maximum success and the minimuminterference with the unit or adjacent units.Small screens from company weapons rarely requiremore than internal coordination. Windspeed and direction are considered in predictingthe cloud drift and in establishing the location ofimpacts to give the maximum screening effect. Ifwhite phosphorous smoke is fired for both casualtyand screening effect, the bursts are directly on thetarget, regardless of wind direction. Smoke missionsinclude-(1) Screening movements of the rifle company.(2) Blinding hostile observation.200

(3) Reducing the effectiveness of hostileaimed fire.(4) Isolating enemy positions or areas.(5) Obtaining casualties (use white phosphorousonly).(6) Screening reorganization of the company.(7) Indicating targets or marking front linesfor supporting artillery, mortars, or airforce units. Colored smoke frequently ismore suitable for this work than whitesmoke. (For details concerning the tacticaluse of smoke, see FM 3-5.)183. SECURITY. a. Regardless of flank protectivemeasures taken by battalion and regimental commanders,the company commander is responsiblefor the close-in protection of his flanks throughoutthe attack. Usually, there are gaps between the.company and the units on its right and left. If, atthe start of the attack, an adjacent unit is abreastor ahead of the company and the gap cannot becovered by observation and fire, the company commanderhas a connecting group maintain contactwith the adjacent unit and report periodically thelocation of its nearest flank. (See par. 75.)b. Ordinarily, security groups are detailed fromthe support platoon. These groups may operate directlyunder the company commander, or he maydelegate control by directing that the platoon leadermaintain contact or protect a flank. When thecompany commander delegates this control to theplatoon leaders, he indicates the maximum size ofthe security group.201

c. Timely warning is the key to reducing lossesfrom air and tank attack. Each rifle platoon providesits own air and antitank security. The antitankrifle grenadiers and rocket launchers protectthe platoon; they are not used to protect other companyelements.d. The company commander coordinates theantitank defense measures within his company.He gives each rifle platoon specific directions orareas to defend against enemy tank attack.184. TIME OF ATTACK. The time of attack normallyis given in the battalion order. The companycommander allows time for the movement of hiscompany to its attack positions, and he also allowstime for reconnaissance, the preparation of plans,and the issuance of orders by himself and his unitleaders. Some of these activities can be carried onconcurrently. The start of the attack may be coordinatedby having units begin their forwardmovement at a definite hour, or by having themready at a specified time and beginning their operationon a prescribed.signal.185. ORDERS. a. The company commander giveshis order for the attack to his assembled platoonleaders and the leaders of attached units. Whenconditions permit, the first sergeant, the communicationsergeant, the platoon sergeants, and thesection leaders of the weapons platoon assemble tohear the order. The company commander orientsthe executive officer as early as possible. Wheneverpracticable, the order is given at a point fromwhich important terrain can be pointed out. Maps,202

aerial photographs, and sketches may be furnished.When time is limited and the leaders are separated,the company commander gives his orders,either oral or written, in fragmentary form. Leadersof units which are engaged with the enemy arenot called away from their units to receive orders.For the form of a company attack order, see appendixI. The company order includes-(1) Information of the enemy and friendlytroops. Information of friendly troopsshould include the location and actions ofsupporting, adjacent, and other unitswhich have a direct bearing on the company'sattack.(2) Company mission, time of attack, line ofdeparture, direction of attack, and theinitial formation.(3) Specific instructions for each assault rifleplatoon, for the weapons platoon, and forattached elements.(4) Location of the support and, if practicable,its probable use.(5) Instructions for maintaining contact andflank protection.(6) Plans for reorganization after taking theobjectives.(7) Location of the battalion ammunitionsupply point, the battalion aid station,and other administrative instructions.(8) Location of the company command postand the initial and future locations of thecompany commander.b. Orders have their maximum effectiveness85:(;96 (o-49 14 203

only when each man of the company understandswhat he is to do, and the where, when, how, andwhy. The trained soldier who is briefed completelywill attempt to find ways of overcoming every obstacleto accomplish his mission. The unbriefedsoldier, no matter how well trained, is likely to suspendor cease his efforts when he meets strong resistancebecause he does not know what should bedone. Therefore, the company commander closelychecks that the men are thoroughly briefed. Themaximum possible use should be made of all availableand improvised orienting aids, such as maps,sketches, aerial photographs, and, when time permits,sand tables.186. ANTITANK DEFENSE. For antitank measuressee paragraphs 13, 50, 90, and 150.187. COMMUNICATION DURING THE ATTACK. a.Tactical control of the company during the attackdepends primarily on communication. The companycommander keeps informed of changes in thesituation of his own units and those in adjacentand larger units. To do this, a constant flow ofinformation is needed to the front, laterally, andto the rear, so that he can give timely orders tomeet changing situations.b. Adequate communication within the companyis the company commander's responsibility. A radiooperator and a messenger habitually accompanythe company commander.c. Communication with the battalion commanderand adjacent unit commanders is maintained.The company commander normally communicates204

with the battalion commander by radio. Communicationbetween company and battalion commandposts is by wire, radio, and messenger. The companycommander may communicate with adjacentunits direct or through the battalion command postby radio, messenger, and wire, when practicable.d. The command post of an assault rifle companyis seldom more than 300 yards from the front line,and it moves forward as the company advances.The new locations are reported to the battalioncommand post. All locations should provide concealmentfrom enemy ground observation and, ifpossible, defilade from enemy fire and concealmentfrom aerial observation.Section III. ATTACK188. MOVEMENT TO THE LINE OF DEPARTURE. Themovement from the attack position to the line ofdeparture is in a deployed formation which permitsthe assault elements of the company to usemaximum cover and concealment. This formationplaces them on the line of departure in the relativeposition from which they start the attack.189. CONDUCT OF THE ATTACK. a. The assaultplatoons cross the line of departure at the time setfor the attack, using the cover and concealmentprovided by the terrain and the protection givenby the supporting fires. If subjected to effectivesmall-arms fire before reaching the assault position,the platoons advance as discussed in paragraph128. If subjected to hostile artillery or mor-205

tar fires, the assault troops move rapidly throughor around the impact area. The ability of an enemyobserver to adjust fire on advancing rifletroops is partially or totally neutralized by fire andsmoke fromr friendly supporting weapons. In addition,as the troops near the assault position(within 100-150 yards of the objective), they areless vulnerable to enemy mortar and artillery fires,since the defender ordinarily does not place thesefires on his own troops. Therefore, to obtain thisrelative immunity from enemy indirect fires, theassault echelon moves rapidly toward the enemyposition.b. Leaders aggressively push groups forward toseize natural strong points of terrain from whichfire (particularly that of automatic weapons) canbe delivered on enemy positions. Because of unequalresistance by the enemy, differences in terrain,and variations in the assistance receivedfrom supporting fires, some units may advancewhile others are held up. A platoon not stoppedby fire pushes on even though adjacent units arestopped. This advance may outflank resistanceholding up adjacent units and may let automaticweapons deliver flanking fire on the enemy. It maypermit other elements to move into the gap to envelopthe enemy or attack his rear. Islands of resistanceare overcome by combined frontal andflanking action.190. CONTROL. a. Once the attack is launched, thecompany commander influences the action by supervisingthe assault platoons, by using all avail-206

able-supporting fires, and by using the support atthe proper time and place. To plan ahead and actat the proper time, he keeps constantly informedof the situation on his front and flanks. The companycommander, accompanied by a radio operatorand a messenger, moves where he best can observeand control the action of that part of the companywhose operations are most vital to success. Hemust be able to communicate readily with the assaultplatoons, the company command post, thesupport, the supporting weapons under his control,the forward observers of weapons units of higherechelons, and the battalion commander.b. Supporting fires. Throughout the attack thecompany commander brings about the closest coordinationbetween the movements of his rifle platoonsand the fires of supporting weapons. He arrangesfor heavy, well-coordinated fire support, toobtain the maximum shock effect on the enemy.Under its protection, he pushes the attack rapidlyto save time and casualties.c. Use of the weapons platoon. The weapons platoonpushes forward aggressively to maintain effectivefire support. (See pars. 162 and 163.)d. Use of the support. (For missions of the support,see par. 131.)(1) When the company commander holds outa support at the start of the attack, it iskept close enough to the assault echelonto permit its prompt use to exploit a successor to repel a counterattack. If thesupport is directed to follow the assaultechelon by bounds from one covered po-207

sition to another, the company commanderkeeps it within supporting distancebut does not merge it with the assaultechelon. If the company commander initiallydirected the support to await ordersin a certain location, he gives timely ordersfor its forward movement. Variationsin terrain or in the situation mayrequire a change in the manner of controllingthe movement of the support, ora change in the distance at which it followsthe assault echelon. The companycommander considers these conditionsand directs changes whenever necessary.(2) When use of the company support is necessaryto renew the impetus of a stalledattack, it is committed without hesitation.It is used preferably for a flank attackor an envelopment against an enemyweakness rather than against enemystrength. Every attempt is made to avoidattacking through an assault platoonwhich is disorganized or which has excessivecasualties. The support attacksas a complete unit. Except to repel acounterattack, the company support ordinarilyis not used if the assault platoonsstill have elements which are not committed.A new support is reconstituted atthe earliest practicable opportunity.e. Security. The company commander does notdepend on the original measures taken for flanksecurity to remain effective throughout the entire208

attack. (See par. 183.) He adjusts his flank securityto meet changes in the situation.f. Assistance to adjacent units.(1) The company assists adjacent units to advance.This is done when directed by thebattalion commander, or when the companycommander estimates that such assistancewill help achieve 'the battalionmission.(2) Assistance which lets a rearward adjacentunit advance is generally an effectivemeans of protecting the company's flank.(3) Assistance by fire and maneuver usuallyis more effective than assistance by firealone. (See fig. 48.) Such maneuver issupported strongly by the fire of availableweapons, including those of the unit beingassisted. Maneuver is not used if itresults in depriving the company of itsessential elements for its own furtherprogress.191. ASSAULT. When the assault echelon progressesas close to the enemy position as it can withoutmasking its supporting fires, the fires are liftedand the assault is started. The company commanderlifts supporting fires by giving a prearrangedsignal, or he estimates when the units willbe ready to assault and arranges with the battalioncommander for lifting supporting fires at thattime. When supporting fires are lifted, assaulttroops close rapidly and aggressively, using assaultfire. Supporting weapons cover the assault by fir-209

zooc - ~, 4'>-4p 0Z 0I w a o WIU w > -j . xmu IL 0 mu) m aai wI IL (n U < < < 10o w mzo z D mo zw IO or u. - < u w 0 EL Z oo 4

ing on adjacent and rearward hostile elements.The assault is started on the company commander'sorder or signal, and it is repeated by all officersand noncommissioned officers. The assault ispushed through the depth of the objective withoutallowing the enemy an opportunity to reorganizeor man his defense. The company commander usesevery means at his disposal to press the attack aggressivelyforward, and he exploits without delayevery advantage gained.192. REORGANIZATION. a. Immediately upon takingan objective, the company places itself to repela counterattack according to the company attackorder. The company commander then makesprompt adjustments to fit the situation. He ordersthe rapid displacement of the weapons platoon andany attached weapons, and he places them to coverpossible enemy avenues of approach to the frontand flanks of the captured objective. He uses othersupporting fires to protect against hostile counterattacks.b. After the company elements are placed to repela counterattack, reconnaissance is made for acontinuation of the attack. Concurrently, the companycommander has each platoon leader reorganizehis platoon. Key men are replaced, ammunitionis redistributed, and the unit situation,strength, and ammunition status are reported tothe battalion commander. Ammunition is broughtforward by vehicle or carrying parties, and casualtiesare evacuated. Identification of enemyunits is reported, and prisoners are sent to collect-211

ing points. Completion of the reorganizationshould find the company regrouped into an effectiveteam with control re-established, with an adequateammunition supply, and with plans completedto continue the attack. The battalion commanderis informed of the situation.193. ACTION WHEN THE ADVANCE IS HALTED. a.When strong enemy action forces a temporary defensewhile in close contact with a strong enemy,the company organizes its position as outlined inparagraph 287. The company may continue theattack by fire until other supporting fires can helpor until an adjacent or reserve unit flanks the enemyposition. The company does not withdrawfrom its position except on order from the battalioncommander.b. When a hostile threat is repulsed after a temporarydefense at close quarters, the company preparesto continue the attack as outlined in paragraph175. The company commander's troop leadingprocedure is applied as the situation permits.c. During temporary halts other than those requiredby enemy action, the company commandergives security instructions to the company. Maximumadvantage is taken at halts to reorganize theplatoons, to resupply, and to prepare for continuingthe attack. Protective measures are taken tominimize casualties because of enemy small armsor artillery fire and aerial bombardment.194. PURSUIT. a. The pursuit starts when the enemycannot maintain his position and endeavors to212

escape by retreat. It begins only upon orders of ahigher commander. Once it starts, it is characterizedby boldness and rapidity of action and ispushed to the limit of endurance. Security measuresare limited in order to aid the advance. Noopportunity is given the enemy to reorganize hisforces or his defense.b. To conserve the strength of troops, the pursuingelements usually are motorized, and maximumuse is made of vehicles and tanks to overtakeand envelop the enemy. The formation and actionsof a leading rifle company resemble those of thesupport of a motorized advance guard battalion(par. 31). The company commander is allowedmaximum freedom of action by the battalion commander.The battalion commander's orders usuallyare brief and fragmentary, giving missions,direction of advance, and objectives. Objectivesare much more distant than in normal attack situationsand may include important road junctions,stream crossings, villages, and towns along theaxis of advance. Frequently, the company is orderedto continue the movement during darknessor to make a limited objective night attack. Thenight attack follows the general principles outlinedin section V, this chapter, but the preparation timeis brief and daylight reconnaissance usually islacking.c. Tanks and elements of the heavy weaponscompany in the pursuit are attached to a leadingrifle company. The enemy may use tanks and selfpropelledguns to cover his retreat. Therefore, thecompany commander uses his attached tanks for213

oth assault purposes and antitank protection.The company commander calls for fires of artilleryand heavy mortars through accompanying forwardobservers but does not delay his action awaitingsuch support. Uncovered night movements arecommon in the pursuit.d. Frequently, in the pursuit, a rifle company isattached to a tank company. (See FM 7-35.)Section IV. RESERVE RIFLE COMPANY IN THEATTACK195. MOVEMENT TO INITIAL POSITION. a. The battalionorder designating a rifle company as thebattalion reserve indicates the initial location ofthe company. The order may include instructionsfor a subsequent movement, flank protection, preparationof plans to meet various situations, andcontact with adjacent units.b. Upon receiving the battalion order, the reservecompany commander considers possible coveredroutes from the assembly area to the initialreserve position. The selection of the route is madeafter a reconnaissance, preferably by the companycommander. Maximum effort is made to avoid disclosingthe location or movement of the reserve.The company commander normally remains withthe battalion commander during the conduct of theattack.c. After making his reconnaissance of the routeto and the location of the initial reserve position,the company commander gives his initial order.214

He gives his men information of the enemy and ofsupporting troops, the battalion plan of attack, andinstructions for the movement to the initial reserveposition and its occupation and security.1%. MOVEMENT TO SUCCESSIVE RESERVE POSI-TIONS. a. Initially, the reserve company usually isplaced behind the company which is attacking thekey objective in the battalion zone. Later, it advancesbehind the company making the most rapidprogress, to protect that company against counterattackand infiltration from its rear, to support themain effort, and to exploit a success. The companycommander reconnoiters and recommends successivepositions and routes to them.b. Except in emergencies, the company movesby bounds, on the orders of the battalion commander.When the company is too far behind theassault rifle companies to accomplish its probablemissions, the company commander promptly reportsthis fact to the battalion commander.197. PLANNING POSSIBLE MISSIONS. a. The reservecompany may be assigned one or more of thefollowing missions:(1) Envelop points of resistance located bythe assault echelon, frequently by a movementthrough the zone of an adjacent battalion.(2) Protect the flanks and rear of leadingcompanies.(3) Repel counterattacks, especially againstthe flanks.215

(4) Mop-up of a position overrun or bypassedby the assault echelon.(5) Take over the mission of all or part of theassault echelon.(6) Keep contact with adjacent units.b. As the attack develops, the battalion commanderindicates the probable use of the reserve.He has the company commander reconnoiter andmake plans. The company commander makes timelyplans to meet all possible situations, and he reportshis plans to the battalion commander for approval.He informs his unit leaders of the detailsof these plans and estimates the time necessary toput each plan into effect.198. RECONNAISSANCE AND LIAISON. To executeany of his missions promptly, the company commanderconstantly keeps himself informed of thesituation bya.Personal reconnaissance and observation.b. Liaison with the battalion commander andthe battalion command post.c. Communication with the battalion commanderand the battalion command post.199. ACTION WHEN COMMITTED. The battalioncommander selects the attack position, the companyobjective, the direction of attack, the tentativetime of attack, and the general supportingfires. The actual time of attack is announced bythe battalion commander after the company arrivesat the attack position and the company commanderreports that the company is prepared for216

the attack. When the reserve company attacks, itoperates as any rifle company in the attack.Section V. NIGHT ATTACK200. GENERAL The rifle company may be used ina night attack as part of a battalion or as the principalattacking force. In either case, the actions ofthe company are the same.201. PURPOSE OF NIGHT ATTACK. Night attacksmay be ordered for one or more of the followingpurposes:a. Avoid heavy losses which would occur in'daylight.b. Complete or exploit a success.c. Prevent the enemy from improving his defenses.d. Gain important terrain for further operations.e. Deceive and surprise the enemy.202. CHARACTERISTICS OF NIGHT ATTACK. a.Night combat is characterized by a decrease in theeffectiveness of aimed fire; by an increase in theimportance of close combat and fire of fixed weapons;and by difficulty in movement, maintenanceof direction, troop leading, control, and contact.Night attacks often are favorable to the attackerin order to complete or exploit a success, to gainimportant terrain for further operations, to avoidheavy losses which would be incurred by attacks indaylight over open terrain, or to capitalize on the217

surprise inherent in night combat. The surpriseand shock to the defender, on the other hand, dueto his limited observation and the reduction of hisdefensive measures, occasionally cause him panic.b. Secrecy and surprise are essential for accomplishinga night attack at the minimum cost ofcasualties. A simple plan helps obtain surprise.Surprise can be gained by striking the enemy froman unexpected direction. However, failure to obtainsurprise need not cause a night attack to fail.The attacker, by resolute action, can destroy ordrive back an enemy who has discovered or anticipatedtheir approach.c. The objective should be easily identifiable atnight and small enough to capture in a single assaultby the attacking force. Because of reorganizationdifficulties, the company ordinarily is notgiven more than one objective during any onenight.203. TYPES OF NIGHT ATTACK. Night attacks areclassified as nonilluminated and illuminated. Anonilluminated night attack is made under coverof darkness, using only the light which may beavailable from natural sources. An illuminatednight attack uses artificial light-for example,flares and searchlights (see par. 211). These twotypes are classified further as supported or unsupported,according to their execution. The type ofnight attack used depends on the terrain, the tacticalsituation, and the equipment.204. SUPPORTED NIGHT ATTACK. The capture of awell-defended enemy position may require the use218

of all supporting weapons. In a supported nightattack, maximum effort is made to maintain secrecyas to the exact location, direction, and timeof attack. Such a supported night attack, utilizingbattalion and regimental weapons and artillery,includes preliminary preparation fires as well asprotective fires during and after the attack. Theprotective fires isolate the objective and prevent orlimit a hostile counterattack.205. UNSUPPORTED NIGHT ATTACK. An unsupportednight attack, either illuminated or nonilluminated,differs from a supported night attack inthat preliminary preparation fires are not used.Supporting fires are planned resembling those fora supported night attack, but the fires may bewithheld entirely or withheld until the attack isdiscovered by the enemy. The planned protectivefires may be used as in a supported attack to preventor limit a hostile counterattack.206. RECONNAISSANCE FOR A NIGHT ATTACK.Daylight observation of the objective, and approachesto it, is desirable. When such observationis impossible, essential information can be obtainedfrom large-scale maps, from aerial reconnaissance,and from night patroling. To preservesecrecy, it may be necessary to limit reconnaissance.207. NIGHT ATTACK PLAN. a. Minute detail andcareful preparation characterize the plan for anight attack. Plans should be simple. A complexplan is warranted only after the company comx536196()-'49--15 219

mander has weighed its advantages against the increasedprobability of failure by its use. No setmethod of attack can be followed, and the proceduresare varied according to the visibility, theterrain, and the enemy activity. To plan the attack,the company commander seeks complete anddetailed information of hostile forces (size, organization,identification, and night locations), theexpected action of friendly troops, and the groundto be crossed.b. The company commander obtains informationof hostile locations from sources to include-(1) The battalion commander. (This includesinformation from higher commanders;for example, intelligence studies, aerialphotographs, and reports of prisoners ofwar and of civilian inhabitants of thearea.)(2) The front-line elements.(3) Observation posts.(4) Reconnaissance.(5) Patroling. (This frequently is the onlysource of detailed terrain informationand of hostile outguards and listeningposts.)c. The company commander obtains informationof friendly troops from the battalion commanderand the units involved.208. DIRECTION AND CONTROL. The companycommander uses maximum means of maintainingdirection and control, which usually include-220

a. Selection of open terrain which favors theadvance.b. Use of selected riflemen or machine gunnersto fire tracers at the objective area.c. Use of guides for movements in rear of andforward of the line of departure. Competentguides frequently can be selected from patrolswhich are familiar with the area.d. Designation of the lateral and forward limitsof the objective by unmistakable terrain features.e. Designation of compass directions for routesof advance forward of the line of departure.f. Use of connecting files or groups, both laterallyand in depth. Their need is determined bythe visibility, the terrain, and the enemy activity.g. Designation of a base platoon. It usually isthe platoon having the most easily identified route.h. Regulation of the advance forward of the lineof departure to include the limit of advance on theobjective.i. Retention of the company column formationas long as possible. If practicable, deployment asskirmishers is delayed until the company is withinassaulting distance of the enemy position.j. Designation of each platoon's mission aftercapturing the objective. The platoon leader assignssquad sectors and definitely indicates thearea and boundaries of each squad objective.209. TIME OF A NIGHT ATTACK. a. The time of attackusually is given by the battalion or regimentalcommander. When the rifle company is the principalattacking force, the company commander may221

e called upon to recommend the time of attack.b. An attack started during the first hours ofdarkness may be used after a successful day attack.It then strikes the enemy before he has timeto organize his position or plan his artillery support.This timing of the attack also may be consideredwhen enemy night operations are expected.c. An attack during-the last hours of darknessis used better as a preliminary operation to a generalattack at daybreak because it gives the defenderno time to reorganize. The attack shouldbegin in time to complete the capture of the objectiveat least one-half hour before daylight. Thisallows time for the reorganization of the assaulttroops under cover of darkness. The time of attackshould provide a cushion of time to compensatefor reasonable delays, such as a temporary loss ofcontact or control, or an unexpected difficulty.210. NIGHT ATTACK FORMATION. a. The companyusually crosses the line of departure and advancestoward the enemy in a column, as this is the easiestformation for the company commander to control.It is maintained until the platoon release point isreached (par. 215), or deployment is forced byenemy action. If visibility permits control and theobjective is close to the line of departure or if earlycontact with the enemy is expected, it may be desirableto advance from the line of departure withplatoons on a line and each platoon in a column offiles. After the line of deployment is reached (par.216), or if the enemy discovers the attack beforeit is reached, the assault is begun.222

. When the company is one of the assault companiesin a battalion attack, its assault usually ismade with all rifle platoons abreast in order to obtainthe maximum fire power and shock action.When the company attacks alone, it usually holdsone platoon in support. When a support is heldout, it moves as directed by the company commander.It may follow closely the assault echelonor it may be left in rear of the line of departure tobe brought forward by guides or on a signal. Itmay have the mission of mopping up or givingnormal support. If no support is held out, one isdesignated immediately after the objective is captured.c. The weapons platoon and any attached tanksor other supporting weapons are made availableshortly after capture of the objective. Weaponswhich can be hand carried may follow the assaultechelon by bounds, but they should not be so closeto the rifle platoons that they get involved in theassault. The decision on how and when to movethem depends on the visibility, the terrain, andthe enemy action. When conditions are unfavorablefor a movement directly behind the assaultechelon, the supporting elements may be left behindthe line of departure to be brought forwardby guides after the objective is captured. In suchcases, if the supporting weapons are used to furnishprotective fires for the assaulting force, theynormally should be placed in suitable positions onthe flanks of the line of departure from which theycan deliver flank protective fires. The forwardmovement after the capture of the objective may223

e made by hand or on carriers. Control measuresused for this movement vary with the visibility,the terrain, the enemy action, and the absence orneutralization of enemy antitank obstacles ormines.211. ILLUMINATION DEVICES. If illumination devicesare used during the night attack, the plan ofattack depends on the visibility they give. Thevisibility may vary from conditions approximatingdaylight, when direct lighting by searchlights andartillery or aircraft flares are used, to conditionsapproximating the light of a half moon or less,when indirect lighting by searchlights is used. (Seepar. 225.)212. NIGHT ATTACK POSITIONS. The last-minutecoordination before crossing the line or point ofdeparture is made in an attack position. If thisposition is not given by the battalion commander,the company commander selects it during his daylightreconnaissance. The attack position is directlybehind the company line or point of departure.It should be clearly. recognizable on theground; if not, it is marked unmistakably. Coverfrom enemy direct-fire weapons is desirable butnot essential, since the assault troops occupy thisarea only briefly. Open terrain is preferable unlessa high degree of visibility is present. The useof guides, the choice of clearly defined routes, andthe use of marking devices during the movementto the attack position, minimize confusion, preventloss of direction and control, and preserve secrecy.224

213. LINE OR POINT OF DEPARTURE. The line ofdeparture for a night attack resembles that for adaylight attack. The limitations on visibility dictatewhether greater attention is given to selectingand to marking a line of departure which easilyis recognized at night. (See figs. 49 and 50.) Ifthe company makes the initial advance in column,the line of departure is crossed at a single point-the point of departure. The line of departurefor a night attack normally is the line held byfriendly troops.214. ROUTES TO OBJECTIVE. Routes to the objectiveare selected carefully. The company commanderweighs the advantage of ease of controlgained by selecting a route which follows aneasily recognized landmark against the disadvantageof the possibility that the enemy's locationsand prearranged fires cover roads and otherobvious routes of approach.215. PLATOON RELEASE POINT. The platoon releasepoint is the point where the company commanderreleases control to the platoon leaders forthe movement to their respective areas of deployment.It normally is located between the line ofdeparture and the probable line of deployment andis used when the company advances in column.When the company advances in parallel columnsfrom the attack position, the platoon release pointis located in the attack positions. If enemy actioncauses a premature deployment before the com-225

LIMIT OF ADVANCEPROBABLE LINE OF DEPLOYMENTDEPLOYMET\ SQUAD RELEASE,AREAPOINTSPLATOON RELEASEPOTNTFRONT LINESPOINT OF DEPARTUREATTACKASSEMBLYFigure 49. Rifle company in a night attack moving from apoint of departure (schematic).226

MIT OF ADVANCEDEPLOYMENTT (FPAREAPROBABLE _ ,...DEPLO .A SQUAD ASEPOINTS&EI !IILINE OF!DEPARTURE iASSEMBLYAREAFigure 50. The rifle company in a night attack may movefrom a line of departure in a line of columns(schematic).227

pany arrives at the platoon release point, the platoonsdeploy and fight as directed by the companycommander or as required by the situation.216. PROBABLE LINE OF DEPLOYMENT. The probableline of deployment is a previously selected linewhere deployment is completed before the final assault.It is a terrain feature which is recognizedeasily at night and is within assaulting distanceof the objective. This distance varies according tothe type of position being assaulted, the type andintensity of the preparation fire, the expected hostilereaction, and the terrain. The probable lineof deployment usually is from 100 to 200 yardsfrom the objective. It is far enough from the objectiveto permit undetected deployment as skirmishers,yet close enough to permit maximum controlduring the assault. When no suitable naturalline of deployment is available, a line should bemarked by guides using telephone wire, engineertape, luminous buttons, or infrared equipment.217. LIMIT OF ADVANCE. To retain control andprevent the assault echelon from being endangeredby friendly protective fires, the company commandergives a limit of advance, both in depth andto the flanks of the objective. This limit should followterrain features which are recognizable atnight.218. SECURITY MEASURES. Frontal and flank securityis maintained during the movement fromthe line of departure to the line of deployment. The228

size of these security detachments varies with theamount of detailed information of the enemy, theterrain, and the expected hostile counteraction.The distance at which these detachments operatedepends on their mission and their commander'sneed and ability to control them.219. SECRECY MEASURES. Surprise is of utmostimportance in a night attack. It is obtained chieflythrough secrecy measures which includea.Restricting the size and activities of reconnaissanceelements and other preparations for theattack.b. Keeping rifles loaded and locked during themovement, allowing firing only on order of selectedleaders.c. Prohibiting smoking, use of lights, talking(except to whisper orders or instructions), andthe use of shiny or noisy equipment.d. Darkening faces and hands with dirt or othersubstance.e. Regulating the rate of advance from the lineof departure so that the entire company can movesilently. The rate of advance depends primarilyon the terrain and the visibility.220. IDENTIFICATION. The force commander determinesthe means of night identification, whichmust be readily available to all men. A white clotharm band around each upper arm may be used forvisual recognition. Words or noises, such as a challengeand a password given in a low tone withouthissing, are valuable as a means of identification.229

Distinctive marks for officers and noncommissionedofficers are desirable.221. MANEUVER. During a night attack, limitedmaneuvers, such as a close envelopment, can beexecuted successfully, provided the visibility permitscontrol. Under conditions of poor visibility,however, maneuver should not be attempted andunits are assigned limited objectives toward whichthey advance in a straight line.222. COMMUNICATION. Leaders familiarize themselveswith the communication used for the attack.Communication plans include emergency signalsfor calling for and lifting supporting and protectivefires. Wire is laid usually from the battalionto the assault company by a wire party closely followingthe advance. To preserve secrecy, wire communicationand messengers should be used exclusivelyduring the movement from the line of departureto the line of deployment. Alternatemeans, such as radio and pyrotechnic signals, arecarried and used, if ordered by the commander.223. COMPANY NIGHT ATTACK ORDER. The companyorder for a night attack has more detail thana similar order for a daylight attack to provide forevery possible development. The following detailsnormally are covered, in addition to those inappendix I:a. Designation of platoon release point, if used.b. Azimuth and description of landmarks.c. Platoon missions at daylight.230

d. Security measures for each platoon.e. Means of identification.f Measures to maintain secrecy.g. Method of advance.h. Rate of advance.i. Special measures for control and coordination.i. Action in case of hostile countermeasures.k. Probable line of deployment.I. Limitations on firing.m. Limitations on reconnaissance.n. Specific orders for night patroling before theattack and after the capture of the objective.o. Illumination devices.p. Limit of advance after the capture of theobjective.224. CONDUCT OF A NIGHT ATTACK. a. Advanceto the line of deployment.(1) The advance from the line of departureto the deployment area is made in acolumn formation. A silent, stealthy advanceis essential to secrecy. This formationis maintained until the platoon releasepoint is reached, unless enemy actionforces an earlier deployment. Theline of deployment should be secured bypatrols before the company arrives. Whenthe platoons reach the line of deployment,they form skirmish lines and they assaultat a prearranged time or on a givensignal. Deployment is accomplishedquickly and quietly; any confusion or de-231

lay at this point increases the enemy'schances for detecting the attack.(2) The commander of each column marchesat or near its head. When the companymoves in a line of columns, the companycommander marches where he best cancontrol and regulate the advance. A noncommissionedofficer marches at the rearof each column to assist in control andenforce secrecy. Column commandersand the company commander constantlycheck on direction and contact.(3) Commanders prevent a premature assault;however, action of hostile patrolsor outguards may force part of the companyto deploy before the time planned.If possible, elements forced to deploy reformin a column after the resistance isreduced.b. Assault. Deployment may be ordered by thecompany commander because of enemy action, orit may be made upon arrival at the line of deployment.If the deployment is forced by the enemy,the assault is begun as soon as the deployment iscomplete and the assault is made at a walk, withmen firing as they advance. Flares may be used toassist the assault troops in firing and in movingforward. When the assault troops deploy undiscoveredat the line of deployment, they move offin the assault, maintaining silence until fired on bythe enemy. Maximum effort is made to maintainthe skirmish line and prevent it from breaking upinto isolated groups. Noise and tracer fire may be232

used to demoralize the enemy. Assault echelonsdrive forward to the far edge of the objective,leaving mop-up missions to the support and reserveunits. Aggressive leadership by officers andnoncommissioned officers is emphasized.c. Reorganization. Reorganization begins as soonas the objective is captured, and it is carried outsimilar to a daylight attack. (See par. 192.) Securityelements are established far enough to thefront and flanks to prevent the enemy fromsecretly re-forming for a counterattack within assaultingdistance of the captured position. Thepreplanned protective fires are continued as necessary.Just before daylight, all troops and weaponsare redisposed as necessary to strengthen the positionand to obtain better fields of fire. When theattack will be continued after daylight, immediatepreparations are made to continue the attack.225. ILLUMINATED NIGHT ATTACK. a. The battlefieldis illuminated by attached or supportingsearchlight units, by flares fired by mortars andartillery, or by flares dropped from aircraft. Battlefieldillumination by searchlight is divided intodirect lighting and indirect lighting. Direct lightingnormally is used for target designation, observation,blinding the enemy, and deception. Indirectlighting is used for movement to positions,observation, movement to attack, and movementof reserves and supplies.b. Direct lighting is not practicable under allconditions because the hostile reaction is immediateand violent, requiring early displacement of233

the searchlights. Indirect lighting by the reflectionof light beams from clouds or by the diffusion ofthe beams over the area provides intensity of lightapproximating half moonlight. The indirect lightingmethod is known as artificial moonlight. Ifflares are used to illuminate night attacks, theyusually are placed behind the hostile position tooutline it to the assault troops. Many flares arenecessary for a night attack. When using battlefieldillumination, the attacker usually sacrificesmuch of the secrecy of his movements and he mayreveal his intentions of making the attack, yet theattacker gains more effective control and firesupport.Section VI. ATTACK OF A RIVER LINE226. GENERAL. a. This section covers the rifle companyas part of a battalion in the attack of a riverline, the far bank held by the enemy. (For principlesgoverning operations at a river line, seeFM 100-5.)b. The battalion warning and attack ordersusually include-(1) Information of the enemy and the terrainof the crossing area.(2) Mission, hour of crossing, attack position,crossing site, zone of action, and objectivesof the company to include any diversionaryactions to deceive the enemy.(3) Plan of supporting fires.(4) Engineer material and men to assist in234

the crossing, including where and whenthey will be available.(5) Communication plan.227. RECONNAISSANCE. a. The battalion order fora river crossing operation is preceded by a warningorder. Upon receipt of the warning order, thecompany commander begins his reconnaissance ofthe proposed crossing site and obtains informationto include-(1) Enemy locations and weapons in thecompany zone of action.(2) Route from the battalion assembly areato the company attack position.(3) Attack position.(4) Routes from the attack position to thecrossing site.(5) Suitable terrain features to guide the directionof attack.(6) Width, depth, and current of the riverat the proposed crossing site, and thecondition of the river bottom and bothbanks.(7) Disposition and plans of the supportingengineer unit.b. The company commander discusses this informationwith the engineer unit leader whoseequipment the company will use during the actualcrossing.228. ASSEMBLY AREA AND ATTACK POSITION. a.The assembly area for a river crossing is similar85:3696 O--4:m----IE 235

to any assembly area. Plans and orders for thecrossing are completed in this area.b. The attack position for a river crossing is thearea where infantry troops are met by guides,which usually are furnished by the engineers, andare conducted to the crossing craft, preparatory tothe movement to the near bank. Desirable characteristicsof the company attack position for a rivercrossing include-(1) Ease of identification at night.(2) Accessibility to trucks or carrying partieswhich transport the crossing craft.(3) Nearness to easily identified, concealed,and covered foot routes to the river.(4) Nearness to the actual crossing sites.(5) Concealment for the assembly of craftand other means of crossing.(6) Terrain suitable for the distribution ofassault platoons parallel to the crossingfront. This distribution allows troops toproceed directly and without delay toembarkation points and permits them toleave the near bank at the same timealong the entire front.c. For a detailed discussion of assembly areasand attack positions, see paragraphs 37 and 38.229. PLANS AND PREPARATIONS. a. Based on thebattalion order and on additional information securedby reconnaissance, the company commandermakes his detailed plans for the movement to theriver, for the crossing, and for the action afterlanding.236

. To make the crossing with minimum confusionand delay, the company commander divides thecompany into boat groups (fig. 51) for the movementfrom the assembly area to the far bank ofthe river. The company's boat allotment is suballottedto platoon leaders (boat group leaders),and tactical unity is maintained if the situationpermits. Boat groups rehearse their loading andlanding operations, preferably with the same engineerswho will support the group in its actualcrossing. The formation used for the movementto the river places boat groups in the same relativepositions they will be in when crossing.c. The company commander closely checks thatmen are instructed in the action to take duringthe crossing, to include paddling, safety, and limitationson firing.d. As its initial objective, the rifle company isgiven a part of the battalion's initial objective.This objective is a terrain feature whose captureneutralizes hostile direct fire from that feature onthe crossing sites.230. ASSIGNMENT OF CROSSING MEANS. a. If thecompany is in the battalion assault echelon, enoughassault or storm boats or other crossing craft areprovided to move the entire company in one trip.(See fig. 52.)b. Tactical unity within the platoons is maintainedas far as possible in assigning men to crossingcraft. One satisfactory method for distributingthe elements of an assault company is asfollows:237

--~~ : '._ --IRIERBOAT BOAT BOAT BOAT BOAT' NO 5 - NO 4 - NO 3 -- NO 2 '.-- NO IRIFLE P LAT SGT PLATOON - ASST RIFLESQUAD RIFLE HQ(-) PLAT SGT S SQUADSQUAD RL 57 MMTEAMSQUADLMGTEAMa 57-m. . rifle squad.238

BOAT GROUP BOAT GROUP BOAT GROUPNO 3 NO NO'.'~ I : ,; -, HQ /& D 4COI \

(1) Leading wave. Assault platoons (withattachments) and forward observersfrom the 60-mm mortar sections and the81-mm mortar platoon.(2) Second wave. Company command group,weapons platoon (less detachments), supportplatoon (if any), attachments fromthe heavy weapons company, and artilleryand heavy mortar company forwardobservers.c. If the company is the battalion reserve, it maycross on the craft which initially carried the as--sault echelon, or it may cross as a unit on a footbridge or ferry.231. WIDTH OF CROSSING FRONT. a. The crossingfront for the company is given by the battalioncommander and he assigns each company a definitezone of action. The frontage approximates thatfor normal terrain.b. The company commander determines zones ofaction for the platoons. In assigning platoon zones,the company commander considers the followingfactors: the amount and type of enemy resistanceexpected during the actual crossing, the conditionof both banks of the river, the width and depth ofthe river, the speed and direction of the current,and the amount and type of crossing equipmentavailable. These factors may require that gapsexist between the zones of action of platoons; however,tactical unity of the elements is preserved.c. For protection during the crossing and easeof deployment after the landing, lateral intervals240

etween craft afloat resemble those between correspondingunits on land.232. FORMATION FOR THE CROSSING. The riflecompany usually crosses with the three rifle platoonsabreast, each reinforced with a 57-mm riflesquad. Company aid men are attached to each platoon.The remainder of the weapons platoon andthe company command group normally follow inthe wave behind the rifle platoons.233. ORDERS. To give squad and platoon leadersthe maximum time for reconnaissance and planning,the company commander issues timely warningorders. The final order for the crossing is ascomplete, specific, and detailed as practicable. Itincludes instructions for the movement from theassembly area to the near bank, the crossing ofthe river, and the capture of the initial objective.Upon capture of the initial objective, the companycommander usually gives additional orders for thecontinuation of the attack. Besides the data furnishedin usual attack orders, the river crossingorder covers the following:a. Location of the attack position and routes toit, and the time of departure from the assemblyarea.b. Method of march control to the attack position;for example, guides, control points, andformation.c. Instructions for forming boat groups.d. Allotment of assault boats to platoons (boatgroups).241

234. MOVEMENT TO THE RIVER. a. The companymoves to the attack position under battalion control,when practicable. The company marches inboat teams as organized for the crossing.b. Upon arrival in the attack position, the companyis met by engineer guides who lead boatgroups to their boats. Boat teams, accompaniedby engineer crews for the craft, are guided alongpreviously marked and secured routes, carryingtheir boats to the river. The movement is timedand coordinated so that no pause is made at theriver's edge, and boats of the leading wave arelaunched at approximately the same time.235. CROSSING THE RIVER. Engineers usually arein charge of the crossing craft; however, keepingdirection from embarkation to landing areas is theresponsibility of the senior infantryman in eachboat. If the craft does not operate under its ownpower, the boat teams paddle. Each craft startsacross the river as soon as loaded and goes asrapidly as possible to the opposite bank. No attemptis made to maintain formation of any kindwhile on the water, although intervals betweencraft should be maintained. No effort is made tocounteract the natural drift unless the current isso swift that it causes an appreciable drift downstreamfrom the proposed landing site. In such acase, the need for counteracting this drift is anticipatedby the commander conferring with supportingengineers. Firing from craft rarely isattempted in daylight and never at night. Afterreaching the far bank, the troops debark rapidly,242

deploy, and attack the initial company objective.Engineer crews return the craft immediately forfurther operations.236. SUPPORT OF CROSSING. a. Air, artillery,heavy mortar, and heavy weapons company supportfor a river crossing is arranged by highercommanders. The plan of supporting fires is statedin the battalion attack order. The weapons platoonof an assault company is not used to providesupporting fire during the actual crossing. Itcrosses with the company and, after landing onthe far bank of the river, it supports the attack.The weapons platoon of a reserve rifle companyinitially may occupy firing positions on the nearside of the river to fire on targets on the far side.b. The location of the heavy weapons companyin a river crossing operation usually is as follows:(1) One section of the machine gun platoonordinarily is attached to each assaultcompany until the initial company objectiveis captured. Thereafter, the platoonis used as directed by the battalion commander.It may remain attached to assaultcompanies, be in direct support ofassault companies, or be in general supportof the battalion.(2) One section of the 75-mm rifle platoonordinarily is attached to each assaultcompany until the initial company objectiveis captured. Thereafter, the platoonis used in its normal role.(3) The 81-mm mortar platoon is used on the243

near bank in general support of the crossing.A mortar observer moves with eachassault company. The mortar platooncrosses the river as soon as the initialbattalion objective is captured.c. A daylight crossing usually is made undercover of a smoke screen laid by aircraft, artillery,heavy mortars, 81-mm mortars, or chemical units.d. For a discussion of the regimental tank andheavy mortar companies in support of a rivercrossing operation, see FM's 7-35 and 7-37.237. ATTACK AFTER CROSSING. After crossing,troops in the leading wave promptly clear the riverbank. If the actual crossing of the water is opposed,or if the initial company objective is closeto the river, no attempt is made initially to reorganizefrom boat teams to platoon groups. Theplatoon leader regains control of the boat teamsand reorganizes his platoon as soon. as he can.When the actual crossing of the water is unopposed,individual boat teams go immediately topreviously selected locations and are reorganizedinto their normal platoon organization. Rifle platoonsthen advance to the initial objective. Subsequentoperations resemble those for any otherattack. (See par. 189.)238. SECURITY. After making a river crossing, thecompany promptly establishes normal security. Inaddition to close-in protection, the company usuallypatrols vigorously, especially the unprotected244

flanks, to secure early information of enemy locationsand activities.239. AMMUNITION SUPPLY. Ammunition requiredfor the initial operation on the hostile bank is carriedby the men in the assault craft. The companycommander may have extra rifle ammunition carried,and he may have men (in addition to theregular ammunition bearers) carry extra ammunitionfor the rocket launcher, the 57-mm rifle, thelight machine gun, and the 60-mm mortars. Thebattalion establishes an ammunition supply pointon the far side of the river as early as possible.The pioneer and ammunition platoon moves thisammunition forward to the rifle companies.240. COMMUNICATION. Communication during- the attack of a river line is similar to communicationin other attack situations. Radio and visualcommunication may be restricted until leading elementsreach the attack position or until the attackis discovered. Messengers (and wire communication,if available) are used during the movementto the river and after the landing on the far bank.The battalion communication section lays a wirehead to the river and extends it across the riveras soon as practicable. Company communicationmen operate this wire head.Section VII. ATTACK IN WOODS241. GENERAL. a. An attacking force usually avoidsisolated wooded areas in the enemy's defensive245

position. It bypasses such areas on either or bothflanks while neutralizing their edges with fire andsmoke. If avoiding the woods is impracticable andtheir possession is necessary, the attacker envelopsthem. If they cannot be enveloped, thenthey must be attacked frontally.b. When woods are attacked frontally, the attackconsists of the seizure and occupation of the nearedge, the advance through the woods, and the exitfrom the woods. This section is concerned primarilywith the advance through the woods.242. FACTORS INFLUENCING OPERATIONS INWOODS. The following factors require that anattack in woods be planned and coordinated carefully:a. Knowledge of the woods. Accurate informationis needed concerning the density of the woods, andthe location of roads, trails, streams, landmarks,enemy dispositions, and obstacles inside the woods.Much of this information can be obtained fromaerial photographs and intensive ground patroling.b. Roads and trails. Key points along roads andtrails usually are defended heavily by the enemy.The company plan of attack includes provisions toclear the enemy from these roads and trails in orderto allow the use of vehicles for supply andevacuation and the use of tanks to support the attack.Continued advance without securing suchroads and trails may result in considerable difficultyor failure of the attack.c'. Enemy automatic fires. Defensive automaticweapons fire along existing or prepared fire lanes.246

Such weapons ordinarily do not have long or widefields of fire, but they are extremely difficult tolocate. They usually are eliminated by small groupsattacking their flanks and rear.d. Effects of high explosive fire. Tree bursts increasethe area which can be covered by artillery and mortarfires. The enemy usually minimizes the effectsof such fires against him by building overheadcover for his positions. The assault rifle companynormally is exposed to hostile artillery and mortarfires. Areas which are under these fires shouldbe crossed rapidly or detoured.e. Antipersonnel mines and booby traps. If the enemyhas time to prepare his position, he will place antipersonnelmines and booby traps throughout thearea. The problems involved in their detection andremoval vary with the density of the woods andthe underbrush.f. Snipers and raiding parties. Woods give excellentconcealment for snipers and raiding parties ofeither side. Special precautions are taken to protectcompany command and supply groups in theexercise of their duties.243. PLANS. a. Formations. 'Dispositions depend onthe frontage, the difficulty of movement, the visibility,and the enemy strength and characteristics.In woods made up of large trees, there usually islittle undergrowth, and leading elements may bedeployed completely. In woods made up of small,dense trees, or where undergrowth is heavy, a lineof squad columns often is the best formation forthe leading elements of the company. Security ele-247

ments precede each leading unit, reconnoitering tothe front and flanks. Rear units of the companyordinarily follow in column. Unless other elementsof the battalion follow closely, some protection tothe rear is provided.b. Maintenance of direction, contact, and control. Difficultiesin maintaining direction, control, and contactrequire control to be given to platoon leaders.To prevent the loss of direction, a magnetic azimuthnormally is given each platoon. To aid control,the company commander and his commandgroup usually follow closely behind the center ofthe leading echelon. The rate of advance dependson the visibility and must permit contact withadjacent units. This contact is by connectinggroups. Periodic halts restore contact and cohesion,and phase lines may aid control.c. Supporting fires. Because of control, coordination,and observation difficulties, direct-fire weapons,such as heavy machine guns, 57-mm and 75-mm rifles, and tanks frequently are attached to theassault rifle platoons. Effective use of tanks dependsprimarily on the visibility in the woods andthe presence of roads and trails. In this type ofcombat, tanks are protected closely by foot elements.Limited observation and the presence oftree masks reduce the effectiveness of close supportby artillery. Consequently, the use of 60-mm and81-mm mortars from openspaces in the woods assumesadded importance.d. Support platoon. If a support is held out by thecompany commander, it is kept close to the assaultechelon.248

e. Communication. Radio communication often islimited greatly by the trees, and wire and messengersmore often are used. When the woods -aredense and enemy infiltration is possible, wire linesare policed often and thoroughly to prevent tappingand cutting by the enemy. Messenger communicationis slow because of movement difficulties.244. CONDUCT OF THE ATTACK. a. Seizure of thenear edge of the woods is similar to any otherattack. While the reorganization in the near edgeof the woods takes place, the company commandergives instructions for the advance through thewoods. The company starts the advance as soonas the reorganization is complete or on order fromthe battalion commander. A company formation isadopted which helps maintain contact with adjacentcompanies and which protects exposed flanks.Assault platoons should not dissipate theirstrength by furnishing numerous connectinggroups. If the advance is unopposed, short haltsare made to check direction and contact. Suchhalts are made best at well defined lines or areas;for example, trails, streams, or near edges of clearings.If satisfactory areas or lines are not foundin the woods, halts may be made on a time scheduleor after advancing a specified distance on anazimuth.b. When resistance is encountered, the companyuses frontal and flanking action to overcome it.Much of the combat consists of small-unit actions.Success depends on information gained by patrol249

action before the formulation of plans and on intelligent,aggressive leadership by platoon andsquad leaders. When the woods are dense, elementsof the support platoon may be used to mopup the enemy in areas overrun by the assault platoons.The artillery normally fires against rearwardtargets or areas. Close fire support missionsare supplied by 81-mm and heavy mortars.c. The exit from the far edge of the woods issimilar to any other attack.Section VIII. RAIDS245. EXPLANATION OF TERM. A raid is an attackmade to accomplish a specific purpose inside theenemy position, with no intention of holding anyground.246. PURPOSE OF A RAID. Raids are made to captureprisoners, to capture or destroy mat6riel, orto obtain information of hostile dispositions,strength, works, intentions, or methods of defense.247. CHARACTERISTICS OF A RAID. A raid is characterizedby the immediate withdrawal of the raidingforce after accomplishing its mission and bythe fact that both flanks of the raiding force areexposed during the conduct of the operation. Thewithdrawal is the most difficult part of the operation,and flank security is given added importance.248. TYPES OF RAIDS. a. Raids are classified as supportedand unsupported. In a supported raid, use250

is made of heavy fire support. In an unsupportedraid, heavy fire support is planned but used onlyon call.b. Supported raids may be made in daylight ordarkness. For protection, they depend on surpriseand the fires of supporting weapons. When theraiding force is as large as a company, or whenthe mission requires that the raiding force remainin the hostile position for any length of time, protectivefires of supporting weapons usually areneeded, particularly during the withdrawal.c. Unsupported raids usually are conducted atnight without the fires of supporting weapons anddepend primarily on surprise and darkness forprotection. Such a raid ordinarily is executed bya force smaller than a company.249. ORDERS FOR A SUPPORTED NIGHT RAID.The rifle company as a unit usually is used only ina supported raid. The battalion commander givesthe mission, the objective, and the time. He mayrequest the recommendations of the company commanderfor the routes of advance and withdrawaland for planning the fire support. The battalioncommander arranges for rehearsals, and he mayprescribe other details or leave them to the companycommander's judgment.250. RECONNAISSANCE FOR A SUPPORTED NIGHTRAID. For planning a raid, a thorough reconnaissanceis made by the company commander and hisunit leaders resembling that for a night attack.Night reconnaissance, as well as daylight recon-853696 0-49 17 251

naissance, is desirable. Besides the personal andmap reconnaissance made by the company commanderand his unit leaders, patrols reconnoiterthe approaches to the enemy lines. Reconnaissancebefore the night of the raid tries to obtain informationof the enemy strength and dispositions, androutes of advance and withdrawal.251. ORGANIZATION FOR A SUPPORTED NIGHTRAID. The company commander organizes his companyinto a number of assault and support parties.Each party is organized and equipped to accomplisha specific part of the over-all mission. Assaultparties eliminate hostile resistance en routeto the objective, furnish frontal protection for theraiding force while it is on the objective, and coverthe withdrawal. Support parties do specific taskswithin the objective; for example, guardingprisoners, removing or destroying enemy materiel,or searching for information of intelligencevalue. Support parties furnish flank protectionand attack unexpected resistance. Assault partiesnormally are organized from the rifle platoon andare reinforced with automatic weapons. Supportparties normally are organized from the weaponsplatoon, operating without crew-served weapons,and from the remainder of the company.252. EQUIPMENT FOR A SUPPORTED NIGHT RAID.a. The company commander indicates the equipmentfor the men of the company raiding force,which depends on the mission. If the raid is made252

to capture prisoners or gain information, submachinegun, knives, and blackjacks may be used.b. Since raids often require heavy firepower atshort ranges, a large number of automatic weaponsand grenades are carried by the men.c. Men's hands and faces may be blackened withcharcoal, mud, potblack, or grease, and a specialidentification is worn on the uniform.253. PASSAGE OF ENEMY OBSTACLES DURING ASUPPORTED NIGHT RAID. A raid against a wellorganizedposition usually must overcome enemybarbed wire entanglements and other obstacles.Barbed wire is cut by the leading elements. If thewire is too extensive for rapid cutting, bangaloretorpedoes are used to blow out sections of it. Theleading elements of the raiding force include menexperienced in detecting and disarming mines andbooby traps.254. SUPPORTING FIRES FOR A SUPPORTED NIGHTRAID. Supporting weapons of battalion, of regiment,and of the artillery fire their supporting andprotective fires during the raid. Preparation firesbefore the raid may be used. They should be ofshort duration because they are likely to alert theenemy. Arrangements for fires may be made bythe battalion commander in close coordination withthe company commander. Preparation and supportingfires are used as in other attacks. Theprotective fires isolate the objective, prevent orlimit hostile counterattacks, and aid in keepingopen the route of withdrawal. All fires of the253

area are coordinated so that the exact location,the direction, and the time of the raid are keptsecret.255. RALLYING POINTS FOR A SUPPORTED NIGHTRAID. The purpose of a rallying point is to assembleelements of the company which are separatedduring the raid or which complete their specifiedmissions and are ready to withdraw. A rallyingpoint is selected in the vicinity of the objectivearea. A rallying point or a series of rallying pointsmay be selected along the routes of advance andwithdrawal. A rallying point within the friendlylines is used to aid the prompt collection and transmissionof materiel, prisoners, and informationgathered in the raid.256. FLANK PROTECTION FOR SUPPORTED NIGHTRAID. The company commander plans to protecthis flanks during the raid. He protects his flanksby planning artillery and mortar concentrations onprobable avenues of enemy approach, and he sendsout patrols from his support parties to the flanksand to key terrain features. Flank security elementsare given definite instructions regardingtheir dispositions and the time or signal for thewithdrawal.257. WITHDRAWAL OF A SUPPORTED NIGHT RAID.Upon completion of its mission, the raiding forcewithdraws. The company commander orders thewithdrawal by a prearranged signal. When thesignal is given, the raiding force, less the covering254

force, assembles at the previously designated rallyingpoint. Withdrawal usually is along the sameroute used for the advance. It is covered by thefires of the covering force and the fires of supportingweapons. As the company withdraws, flanksecurity elements or patrols withdraw at the sametime. These security elements withdraw along theflanks of the company and give close-in protectionfor those flanks. The covering force withdraws asinstructed by the raid commander and it usuallywithdraws shortly after the main force.258. REHEARSALS FOR A SUPPORTED NIGHT RAID.Time often is available for rehearsals, particularlyin a stabilized situation. At least one daylight andone night rehearsal are desirable. Preferably,these rehearsals are conducted on ground similarto the area to be raided, and the men carry anduse the equipment ordered for the raid.259. CONDUCT OF A SUPPORTED NIGHT RAID. Theattack phase of a night raid resembles a night attack(par. 224). The control of elements whichare assigned special missions is given to the leadersof those elements. The raid commander, however,coordinates the actions of all elements of the force.During the raid, he decides when to call for, shift,or lift supporting and protective fires.260. SUPPORTED DAYLIGHT RAID. The plans andpreparation for a supported daylight raid are similarto those for a night raid. Smoke may be usedto conceal the company. The attack phase of a255

daylight raid resembles a daylight attack (par.189).261. UNSUPPORTED RAIDS. a. An unsupported raiddepends primarily on surprise. Surprise may beobtained by stealth or by extremely rapid attackand withdrawal. Supporting and protective firesare planned similar to a supported raid, but theyare not used unless called for by the raiding force.An unsupported raid of company size is exceptional.b. Unsupported raids may be used at night orunder other conditions of reduced visibility orwhen the enemy position is organized hastily andsurprise, through stealth or rapid attack, is likely.262. RAID BY AN ELEMENT OF A RIFLE COMPANY.The rifle company commander may be directed toconduct a raid, using an element of the company.Such a raid may be supported or unsupported. Anelement of the company is selected as the raidingforce in an unsupported raid only when the situationis such that the raiding force can accomplishits mission by surprise without the aid of supportingweapons. Such conditions exist at night orduring periods of reduced visibility. The companycommander selects the leader and the units to makethe raid. Subject to instructions from the battalioncommander, the company commander gives themission, the objective, and routes of advance andwithdrawal. If the raid will be supported, thecompany commander arranges with the battalion256

commander for fire support. He conducts rehearsalson ground resembling the raid area.SectionIX. INFILTRATION263. GENERAL. a. Infiltration is a method of advancingunobserved into areas which are underhostile control or observation.,b. The missions which may be given an infiltratingforce include the following:(1) Obtain information of enemy strength,dispositions, and supplies.(2) Disrupt hostile communication.(3) Attack and destroy a supply point, abridge, a command post, or some otherkey installation.(4) Attack against the rear of a hostile position,together with a coordinated attackfrom its front.(5) Confuse and harass the enemy concurrentlywith other operations.c. Weather and terrain considerations influenceinfiltration, which is accomplished best under conditionsof limited visibility. Fog, heavy rain, darkness,heavy undergrowth, and extremely ruggedterrain make control and coordination difficult, butthey help infiltrating groups reach their objectiveswithout detection. If a river or stream penetratesthe enemy lines, rafts or small boats maybe used.d. The size of infiltrating groups is determinedby their mission. If the mission entails securinginformation only, two or three carefully selected257

men may be more successful than a large group.On the other hand, units as large as a rifle companymay be directed to infiltrate through the enemylines and attack against the rear of the hostileposition, coordinating this attack with a frontalassault by another unit.e. During infiltration, control is given to lowerleaders, who- select and coordinate their ownroutes, formations, and rate of advance.f. Secrecy is needed for infiltrations. If a manis given the mission of securing enemy informationby infiltration, he penetrates the hostile lines,gets the desired information, and returns with theinformation in time for it to be used. He acts secretly.In other cases, it may be necessary to maintain'secrecyonly until the objective is reached;for example, the attack of a supply point, the destructionof a bridge, or the disruption of communication.264. INFILTRATION IN CONJUNCTION WITH ANATTACK BY A LARGE FORCE. a. General. Before anattack by a larger force, the rifle company or platoonmay be directed to infiltrate through the hostileforward defense during the day or at night,and then to attack enemy reserves or command,communication, and supply facilities in conjunctionwith the main attack of the larger force. If adaylight attack is planned, the infiltration shouldbe completed at least one-half hour before dawnso that the preparations for the attack can be completedunder cover of darkness.258

. Preparatory measures.(1) Before such action, reconnaissance ismade by the unit leaders. A study ismade of maps and aerial photographs,and information is obtained from theleaders or patrols which have operated inthe hostile area. A warning order isissued in time to permit small-unit leadersto make their reconnaissance. Aninitial assembly area is selected withinfriendly lines. Points at which the unitwill pass the friendly outpost are selected,and arrangements are made for passingthrough them. Reconnaissance of theroutes is made from the initial assemblyarea to the friendly outpost line.(2) Leaders plan the route of advance beyondthe outpost line. When extensive gapsexist between hostile forward elements,it may be possible for the entire unit tomove together. If only small gaps exist,the movement may have to be made bysmall groups advancing over separateroutes. If more than one route is used,each group leader plans his route. Asfew routes as possible are used, since controland reassembly of several groups isdifficult. The planning, made principallyfrom maps and sketches, seeks to locateridges, roads, streams, and other landmarksthat may be used to help maintaindirection.(3) Rallying points are selected for unit or259

groups to reassemble if surprised or scattered.(4) If the mission requires the unified actionof the groups, assembly areas within theenemy lines are selected. These areasshould be identified easily by a landmarkthat can be found during darkness. Alternateassembly areas are selected.c. Plan. Careful and detailed planning, similarto that for a night attack, is made. Because of thenature of infiltration missions, additional planningis necessary for secrecy and for aiding the movementduring periods of limited visibility. Theseadditional plans provide that-(1) Guides are obtained to lead the unit tothe friendly outpost line. Frequently,guides for the route through the enemyposition are secured from patrols familiarwith that area or from friendly guerillas.(2) Each group moves in column. Distancesare regulated by unit commanders andsecurity is provided to the front, flanks,and rear.(3) If the weapons platoon is used, weaponsare hand carried. If the movement ismade by several small groups, weaponsplatoon squads are attached to thegroups.(4) No definite rate of advance is given. Therate depends on the visibility, the terrain,and the enemy activity. Frequently,groups may halt for long periods while260

enemy patrols are allowed to pass. Planningallows time for such eventualities.Secrecy is more important than speed.(5) Radios or pyrotechnics ordinarily are notused during the movement. They are carriedfor use after the attack is launchedin rear of the enemy lines.d. Orders. Orders are detailed, and each man istold exactly what he is to do. Orders include directionsfor the movement to the assembly area inthe rear of the enemy lines and for the attack. Ifthe attack is part of a large-scale action, coordinationis made with fires supporting the main attackto prevent casualties from such fires.e. Conduct of movement.(1) Each group advances silently. Its leaderis at its head or where he best can controlits movement. A noncommissioned officerat the rear of each column preventsstraggling. Each column leader constantlychecks the route and direction.(2) Each column provides its own protectionto the front and flanks. Enemy outpostsand patrols are avoided. If they cannotbe avoided, they are eliminated as quietlyas possible.f. Action on reaching assembly area. A group approachingthe assembly area within the enemylines is halted while the area is reconnoitered. Ifno enemy is found, the group'moves into the areaand establishes security. Leaders reconnoiter forwhatever action is required by the mission. Anyneeded changes in plans and orders are made so261

that the attack is begun as planned and coordinatedwith the main attack.265. INFILTRATION DURING AN ATTACK. Smallgroups may be sent forward by infiltration duringan attack. When an attack is slowed down orstopped, infiltrating elements may infiltrate into 'enemy-controlled areas to cause confusion, give theimpression of an attack from a different direction,or disrupt communication or supply. Infiltratingelements may consist of two or three men, or ofentire squads.Section X. OTHER OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS266. REFERENCES. For characteristics of combatand tactical principles governing other operations,see FM 100-5 and other appropriate referenceslisted in appendix VIII.262

CHAPTER 8RIFLE COMPANY, DEFENSIVECOMBATSection I. GENERAL267. EMPLOYMENT. The rifle company of a frontlinebattalion is used to reorganize, occupy, anddefend a company defense area on the main line ofresistance, or to constitute the battalion reserve.268. PRINCIPLES OF DEFENSE. In organizing andconducting the defense of his area, a rifle companycommander applies tactical principles to give themaximum coordination of troop locations, terrain,and fire power. These principles includea.Organization of key terrain. A defensive positioncan be defended best by organizing key points andcovering by fire the intervals between and approachesto these key points. A commander evaluateshis terrain (par. 269). Based on this evaluation,he selects and organizes the key terrain featureswhich give the best defensive strength to hisposition.b. Organization in depth. Any defensive positioncan be penetrated if the attacker is willing to paythe price. Therefore, the defender cannot defendon a thin line. Depth is essential. A commanderorganizes and places his troops and weapons in263

depth so that, if the enemy is successful in penetratingthe main line of resistance, a unit to therear can limit the penetration and thereby preventa major penetration.c. Mutual support. Units of a defensive position,across the front and from front to rear, are mutuallysupporting. Each unit on the main line ofresistance is placed so that it can support by firethe adjacent unit on either flank. Units placed indepth support the units to their front so that ifthe enemy succeeds in penetrating the forward defense,he immediately comes under the fire of thenext rearward unit and is prevented from reorganizing.d. All-around defense. A unit organizes its positionto meet an enemy attack from any direction.The extent of all-around defense depends on thetype of operation, the units involved, and the terrain.An independent unit operating in close terrainhas greater need for all-around defense thana unit which is part of a larger force and operatingin open terrain. A unit may defend in all directionsfrom its primary positions, or it may preparesupplementary positions and shift troops tomeet threats from the flanks or rear.e. Coordinated fire plan. Each unit plans and coordinatesthe fires of its weapons to obtain themaximum effectiveness of the weapons, the completecoverage of the battle position and its approaches,and continuous fire on the attacker. Unitplans provide for the opening of fires, for signalsfor final protective fires, for rates of fire, for mutualsupport of adjacent units, and for fires to be264

delivered under conditions of reduced visibility.Fire plans of smaller units are supervised and coordinatedby the larger units.f. Coordinated antitank defense plan. Plans for theuse of antitank weapons, minefields, and obstaclesare coordinated to protect the battle position froma tank attack or a combined tank-infantry attack.This is done to disorganize and delay hostile tanksin front of the main line of resistance and to destroyor eject the tanks if a penetration is made.Unit plans provide for the use of all antitankmeans under the commander's direct control.g. Flexibility. Flexibility in the defense is gainedby preparing supplementary positions, by holdingtroops in support or reserve, and by massing supportingfires in any area. The rifle platoon gainsflexibility by preparing supplementary positionsto which troops can be moved. It is normal for therifle company and larger units to use about onethirdof their force in rear of the main line of resistanceprepared to meet an attack from any direction.This adds flexibility to the defense sincethese forces can be used to limit penetration, toprotect the flanks and rear, or to eject the enemyby a counterattack. Flexibility is gained from supportingweapons by using them under centralizedcontrol, as this control aids the massing of supportingfires on a given target area.269. TERRAIN FACTORS. In making his terrainstudy, the commander considers how he best canuse and best deny to the enemy the followingfactors:265

a. Critical terrain features. A terrain feature isconsidered critical if it is a key point or area onwhich an operation depends, for either the attackeror the defender. Examples are a dominant hill orridge, shoulders of a valley, a road or trail, a builtuparea, or a communication center.b. Observation and fields of fire.(1) Observation provides information of theenemy and of friendly troops. Detailedobservation forward of the battle positionis used to direct fire on the enemyand to determine his plans. Long-rangeand close-in observation is maintained byall units. Close-in observation is gainedby organizing positions on the militarycrest (fig. 53); this also protects longrangeobservation located near the topographicalcrest. Coordination of observationby each unit obtains overlappingand detailed coverage of the area. Enemyobservation into the battle position is deniedby the use of security forces andfires of friendly weapons.ADIRECTION OFENEMY APPROACHA-TOPOGRAPHICAL CRESTB-MILITARY CRESTC-REVERSE SLOPE- _ LINE OF OBSERVATION AND FLAT-TRAJECTORY FIRE266Figure 53. Explanation of terrain terms.

(2) The effectiveness of direct-fire weaponsdepends on their fields of fire. Whenfields of fire are not good, they are improvedby cutting or burning weeds,grass, and crops, clearing brush andtrees, demolishing buildings, and cuttinglanes through woods. The clearing shouldnot warn the enemy of the battle positionlocation or destroy its concealment. Theorganizing of terrain which gives goodfields of fire, such as open, fiat terrain,requires fewer men and weapons thanclose terrain with poor fields of fire.c. Obstacles. In organizing a defensive position,natural obstacles which will hinder the advance ofthe enemy are evaluated and used. By properevaluation of natural obstacles, more effective useof artificial obstacles can be made. Because obstaclesnot covered by fire are of little value, the positionis organized so that they can be covered byobserved fire.d. Concealment and cover. Concealment and coverare used to prevent enemy air and ground observationof troops and installations. Irregular woodedterrain furnishes ideal protection from enemy airand ground observation but limits friendly fieldsof fire and observation. If the terrain is flat andopen with limited cover and concealment, timemust be allowed for troops to dig in and camouflagetheir positions.e. Avenues of approach.(1) Avenues of approach within the battleposition to be used for supply, evacua-85.3696 0-49--18 267

tion, movement of troops into forwardpositions, and counterattack must beevaluated as to their condition, cover, andconcealment from enemy observation.(2) Avenues of approach available to the enemyare considered in terms of roads,terrain corridors, cross compartments,and areas where the ground favors crosscountry movement into the defender's positionfrom the front or flanks.(3) After evaluating the terrain, the commanderplans the organization of his position.Section II. FRONT-LINE RIFLE COMPANY270. MISSION. The mission of the front-line riflecompany in the defense is, with the support ofother weapons, to stop the enemy by fire in frontof the main line of resistance, to repel his assaultby close combat if he reaches it, and exceptionallyto eject him by a counterattack.271. DISPOSITIONS. A rifle company assigned tothe defense of an area on the main line of resistanceorganizes its area according to the principlesof defense. It covers its front with fire, coordinatesits fires with and mutually supports the unitson its flanks, gives close rifle protection for thesupporting weapons placed within its area, andprovides for all-around defense. The ability toplace accurate fire on the enemy forward of thebattle position requires good observation. To ob-268

tain this observation, a forward slope frequently isoccupied. A reverse slope position, however, maybe preferable if observation can be obtained fromthe flanks or rear, and if the terrain on the reverseslope permits the placing of a heavy volume ofaccurate fire on the crest and approaches aroundthe flanks. The terrain may make it desirable tooccupy a combination of forward and reverseslopes.272. TROOP LEADING PROCEDURE. Following thereceipt of the battalion defense order, the companycommander's actions follow a general sequencecalled troop leading procedure. The purpose ofthis procedure is to help the company commanderremember all the essential actions, to help himmake maximum use of the time available, and tohelp him coordinate the actions of his unit leaders.In the allocation of the time available, the companycommander allows enough time for his lower unitleaders to perform their duties and the men of thecompany to organize the area. Plans are made andorders given so that there is a minimum of delayin beginning the organization of the ground. Thecompany commander's troop leading procedure isas follows:a. Makes tentative plan of defense. This gives hima basis for later action and allows him to orient,early, the leaders of the company and the supportingunits so that they can begin certain tasks beforethe company order is given. This tentativeplan includes the general dispositions and missions269

of troops and weapons within the company defensearea.270b. Plans movement of troops and issuance of his order.(1) His early planning and early issuance oforders for the movement of troops assistcontrol and secure the timely arrival ofthe troops at the defensive position. Thismovement normally is controlled by hiscompany executive officer. He planswhere, when, and to whom his order isto be issued.(2) He selects an observation point fromwhich all, or at least the most criticalportion, of the company defense area canbe observed. He designates this point asthe place where he later will issue thecompany order.(3) He designates the time when the orderwill be issued. In selecting this time, heconsiders the total time available, thetime needed for adequate reconnaissanceby unit leaders, and the time needed forthe actual preparation of the position.He allots enough time for preparing positions-evenif this may prevent a detailedreconnaissance on his part.(4) He designates the persons who will receivethe company defense order. Theseinclude the platoon leaders, and they mayinclude others, such as the artillery andmortar forward observers, the communicationsergeant, and leaders of crew-

served weapons located within the companyarea.c. Plans his reconnaissance. Before starting his terrainreconnaissance, the company commandermakes a brief map reconnaissance, determines thelocalities to be visited, and selects the route. Hisreconnaissance is as detailed as time permits. Hegives major attention to the most critical localities.He announces his route so that he can be locatedquickly.d. Arranges coordination with other commanders. Adjacentand supporting unit commanders normallyare present at the time the company commanderreceives the battalion defense order, and arrangementsfor maintaining coordination are made withthese commanders at this time.e. Makes his reconnaissance.(1) The company commander leaves the areawhere he received the battalion order andgoes on his personal ground reconnaissance.Frequently he is accompanied bythe weapons platoon leader and suchother persons as he desires. He first positivelyidentifies his area.(2) He studies the immediate foreground ofthe position to determine-(a) Areas which give the enemy covered orconcealed approaches to the position.(b) Natural obstacles and exposed terrainover which the enemy must pass.(c) Commanding features of the terrainwhich may be occupied as hostile observationposts, and areas within the de-271

fensive position which are exposed tohostile observation.(3) He studies in detail the ground withinthe defense area to determine-(a) Coordination with adjacent units andwith supporting weapons to be placedwithin the company area.(b) Locations for defense areas of companyelements, usually platoons.(c) Locations for the 57-mm rifles and 60-mm mortars.(d) Routes of communication and supply.(e) Location of the company observationpost.(f) Location of the company commandpost.(4) Because of limited time, the companycommander sometimes may issue his orderwithout making a detailed groundreconnaissance. In such cases, his ordermay be issued from the best observationpoint available, or it may be issued basedonly on a map study. Adjustments to improvethe coordination and tactical organizationare made as soon as the situationpermits.f. Completes plan and issues order. After completinghis reconnaissance, he goes to the point, previouslydesignated, for the issuance of his order. Hemakes such changes in his tentative plan as arerequired by his ground reconnaissance and by rec-- ommendations of his leaders. He then issues the272

company defense order, and informs the battalioncommander of the company's plan of defense.g. Supervises work. After the order is issued, thecompany commander supervises the detailed organizationof the company defense area.273. RIFLE COMPANY DEFENSE ORDER. The companycommander bases his defense order on thebattalion order, recommendations from his unitleaders, and his own analysis of the situation. (Forthe form of a company defense order, see app. I.)The order is issued orally and includes the following:a. Information of the enemy, including the directionand the time an enemy attack may be expected.Information of friendly supporting andadjacent units.b. Company mission.c. Missions and areas of each rifle platoon.d. Locations and missions of the 57-mm rifles,60-mm mortars, and any additional weapons attachedto the company.e. Fire control to include the details of callingfor fin'l protective fires.f. Security.g. Priority of construction.h. Location of mine fields and other obstacles.i. Engineer tools, ammunition supply,-and otheradministrative details.i. Location of the battalion aid station.k. Alterations or additions to the standing operatingprocedure; for example, antiaircraft security,type of emplacements, and sanitation.273

I. Command and observation posts.m. Communication instructions.274. FRONTAGE. The battalion commander assignsfrontages to his front-line companies according tothe natural defensive strength and relative importanceof their defense areas. A rifle company occupyinga defense'area on the main line of resistancenormally is assigned a frontage of 600 to1,200 yards. (See fig. 54.) Where a company occupiesa key area having poor observation and poorfields of fire, as in heavily wooded or broken terrain,its frontage is near the minimum figure.Where the terrain is more open and allows longerfields of fire and better observation, the frontageapproaches the maximum figure. In exceptionalconditions, as in open and flat terrain or wherethere are natural obstacles across the front whichgreatly strengthen the defense, the company maybe assigned a frontage greater than 1,200 yards.275. DEPTH. The depth of the company area fromthe main line of resistance to the rear normallydoes not exceed 700 yards. The area of responsibilityforward of the main line of resistance includeslocal security and seldom exceeds 500 yards.276. BOUNDARIES. The battalion commander designatesthe area of responsibility of each frontlinerifle company by the use of boundaries. Thelength of the boundaries indicates the forward andrear limits of responsibility, or depth. All defensiveelements and installations of the company nor-274

mally are included within this defensive area. Certainadministrative installations, such as the ammunitionsupply point, may be located outside theassigned defense area if the battalion commanderapproves.DIRECT ONOPENEMY APPROACH6.200 YARDSYARDSLIMITINGPOINTIFigure 54. The battalion commander prescribes the boundariesof the front-line rifle company defensearea.277. LIMITING POINTS. Points along a line of resistance,where the responsibility of one unit stops275

and that of another begins, are called limitingpoints. These points, which are designated by thehigher commander, serve two primary purposesfor the front-line rifle company. They indicate thegeneral trace of the main line of resistance anddesignate a place on the ground where adjacentcommanders coordinate their defense plans so thatadjacent defense areas are mutually supporting;The limiting point need not be occupied physicallyby either unit.278. DISTRIBUTION OF PLATOONS-GENERAL CON-SIDERATIONS. a. Platoons are used within the companydefense area to achieve the maximum effectiveapplication of the principles of defense. Normally,this is done by using two rifle platoonsabreast on the main line of resistance and one rifleplatoon in support. These platoons are placed toget the maximum coverage of the most dangerousavenues of approach and to cover other parts ofthe company defense area by fire and observation.(See fig. 55.) Elements of the weapons platoonare located within the company defense area wherethey best can accomplish their fire missions andobtain close protection by rifle elements. Usually,they are located within the platoon defense areas.b. During periods of reduced visibility, especiallyat night, there is greater possibility of theenemy attacking through open areas. This mayrequire adjustments within platoon defense areas.(See fig. 56.) These adjustments may include theminor shifting of weapons within defense areas,the changing of the support platoon location, the276

employing of security detachments to cover intervalsbetween defense areas, and the strengtheningof local security elements.PROBABLE ROUTESOF HOSTILE APPROACHFigure 55. Rifle company in a daylight defense.279. LOCATION OF FRONT-LINE PLATOON. Thewidth of a defense area assigned to a front-lineplatoon depends on such factors as fields of fire,obstacles, and supporting fire. A rifle platoon oc-277

cupying a defensive area normally is assigned afrontage of 300 to 600 yards. Because of its abilityto cover an area by fire, a platoon seldom occupiesOF HOSTILE APPROACHFigure 56. Rifle company in a night defense.all of its assigned frontage. When supportingweapons are placed within the platoon area, theoccupied frontage may be increased normallyabout 25 yards for each crew-served weapon. Thegap between platoons varies with the terrain andthe available fire. Factors to be considered includeobservation, fields of fire, ability of the support278

platoon to fire in gaps, and mutual support fromadjacent front-line platoons. The company commanderavoids dividing the responsibility for defendingan avenue of enemy approach. When possible,he assigns to one platoon both the approachand the terrain which blocks that approach.280. DISPOSITION OF SUPPORT PLATOON. a. Theprimary mission of the support platoon is to supportthe front-line platoons by fire. The terrainseldom permits the support platoon to fire in frontof the front-line rifle platoons. Therefore, this firesupport consists of firing in the gaps betweenfront-line platoons, within forward areas in casethey are overrun, and to the flanks and rear of thecompany defense area. This platoon also is assignedthe mission of extending in depth the defenseof the company area and protecting theflanks and rear of the company area. Exceptionally,it is assigned the mission of ejecting the enemyfrom the battle position.b. The location of the support platoon is on thebest defensive terrain in rear of the front-line platoonsand inside the company defense area, whereit can get the best observation and fields of fireto accomplish its missions. The position is organizedwithin rifle supporting distance (500 yards)of the forward platoons, and is at least 150 yardsto their rear to avoid enemy fire directed at theforward platoons.c. The support platoon is used to organize a singleposition to accomplish its mission if the terrainpermits. (See fig. 57.)279

500 YDS(MAX)eec150 YOSPLATOON'?'Figur.c 57. Support platoon occupying a single preparedposition-arr'ows indicate dir'ection of fire(schematic).d. If the terrain is such that the support platooncannot accomplish its mission from a single positionand concealed routes for movement within thearea are available, more than one position may beorganized. (See fig. 58.) The platoon then occupiesthe prepared position covering the most dangerousthreat and prepares to move to other positionson order.e. When the terrain is such that it is necessaryto organize more than one position but concealedroutes between these positions do not exist, it maynot be possible to move the support platoon afterthe fire fight begins. In this case, it may be necessaryto split the support platoon and have it occupymore than one position. (See fig. 59.) The integrityof rifle squads is maintained.f. The support platoon may be directed by thecompany commander to execute a local counter-280

· I /CONCEALED ROUTE'~/ .I /(LESS ONE SQUAD)Figure 59. Support platoon occupying more than one preparedposition (schematic).281

attack. However, because of its size and the factthat it usually is in the same fire fight as the frontlineplatoons, the support platoon rarely is giventhis mission. Such a counterattack, if ordered, isin the nature of a quick assault and mopping-upaction to destroy a small enemy group which hasmade a minor penetration.281. DISTRIBUTION OF WEAPONS PLATOON. Seeparagraphs 164 and 165.282. FIRE PLAN. a. The battalion order includesthe plans for the use of those weapons under battalioncontrol. The rifle company commander usesthe weapons which are under his direct control toprovide the maximum defense of the company areain coordination with the battalion fire plan. Thefires of weapons under the direct control of therifle company commander supplement and reinforcethe fires of battalion weapons. The companyfire plan includes the coordination of the platoonfires and the fires of the weapons under the directcontrol of the company.b. The company commander obtains the locationof the prepared barrages of the supporting artilleryand mortars, and the sectors and final protectivelines of the machine guns of the heavy weaponscompany. He then assigns missions to the 57-mm rifles and the 60-mm mortars to cover gapsand reinforce these fires.c. Rifle platoons are located to permit mutualexchange of fire, defense in depth, and all-aroundprotection. Platoon fire plans are checked to de-282

termine that light machine guns are used to fillgaps in the final protective fires, that the foregroundof each platoon area is covered by smallarmsfire, and that overlapping sectors of fire areprovided. Fire control measures are disseminatedto company elements, and observation is coordinatedfor complete and efficient coverage. As timeand facilities permit, lower unit leaders are issueda map or overlay showing the prearranged concentrationsby position and number of the supportingartillery and mortars.283. OBSERVATION. a. The company commandercoordinates the observation posts established bythe company to fit them into the battalion observationplan and avoid the duplication of effort. Thelocation of several observation posts in the immediatevicinity of each other is avoided. When terrainfeatures which offer good observation are limited,observers are spread across the front so thatoverlapping observation is obtained over the defensearea and the approaches to it. Communicationfacilities are coordinated and used to the maximum,so that any observer can call for and controlthe fires of any supporting weapon.b. The company observation post should give aview of as much of the company defense area andits approaches as possible. If observation is limited,an observation post is selected which providesobservation of the most dangerous approaches.Observation to the flanks also is important. Althoughthe observation post is the battle stationof the company commander, he goes where his853696 0--49-19 283

presence is demanded. The command post is keptinformed of his location.284. COMMAND POST. The company commandpost is located in the rear portion of the companydefense area. For local protection, it normally iswithin or near the support platoon area. It preferablyis in defilade and concealed from air observation.Covered and concealed routes to the frontand to the rear are desirable to aid communicationwith the platoons and with the battalion commandpost.285. ORGANIZATION OF GROUND. a. The organizationof the company defense area is limited onlyby the time and facilities available. The battalionorder normally gives the sequence in which thetasks are executed. These may include-(1) Preparing emplacements for weaponsand individual shelter.(2) Clearing fields of fire.(3) Laying antitank mines, trip flares, andantipersonnel mines.(4) Constructing wire entanglements andother obstacles.(5) Preparing routes for supply, communication,and evacuation.b. In the absence of special instructions, the menfirst dig standing-type fox holes or weapons emplacements.While these emplacements are beingconstructed, crew-served weapons are mounted innearby temporary firing positions. Maximum useis made of natural and artificial concealment and284

cover against both ground and air observation andfire. Protective wire is placed around each smallunitdefense area and tactical wire is installed forwardof the company position. Normally, some ofthese tasks, such as laying mine fields and constructingobstacles, are accomplished by or underthe supervision of specially trained elements fromother units.c. Organization of exposed areas subjected toenemy fire or air bombardment may have to beaccomplished piecemeal during daylight with menwell dispersed. If this is impracticable, the organizationof these exposed positions is postponeduntil darkness.286. ANTITANK DEFENSE. The preparation of acoordinated antitank defense plan primarily is theresponsibility of battalion and larger unit commanders.This plan provides for an adequatewarning system and for placing antitank weaponswithin and mine fields and obstacles forward ofthe front-line rifle company areas. The companycommander familiarizes himself with this planand uses his antitank weapons to give the maximumclose protection to his company area. Heplaces his antitank weapons where they can coveravenues of enemy tank approach by flanking fire,mine fields, and obstacles which are not coveredby the weapons of other units, or he uses them toreinforce the defense of his more vulnerable areas.Mine fields and obstacles are covered by fire to preventthe enemy from removing them before orduring a tank attack. They also are covered by285

weapons capable of destroying immobilized tanks.Mine fields are marked and a record of their locationsis made and given to the next higher commander.Guards are placed over antitank minefields to prevent casualties to friendly troops andvehicles. Guards in front of the main line of resistanceare withdrawn when security elementsforward of the main line of resistance have withdrawn.287. HASTY DEFENSE. a. When speed in the occupationof a position is necessary, the first considerationsare to get the troops on the position, toprovide for local security. and to start the organizationof the ground. The company elements andany attached weapons are located for all-arounddefense of the company area. As time permits, amore detailed coordination is made which may requirea readjustment of positions and fires.b. A front-line rifle company frequently is forcedto organize its position while in close contact witha strong enemy. Such a defense may be characterizedby all or part of the following: limited movementof men, troops subjected to observed enemyfire, defense of the position against hostile attackduring any or all stages of the organization, limitedattacks to seize key terrain necessary to theorganization of the position, and limited withdrawalsafter the approval by the battalion commanderto strengthen the position. When organizing aposition under these conditions, the principles ofdefense still apply. The extent to which these principlesapply varies with each situation. Troop lead-286

ing procedure is applied to the extent that the situationpermits. The company commander reliesheavily on the initiative of his leaders, since immediatedecisions by each platoon leader are necessarybefore the company commander can make hisdetailed coordination. To cover the organizationof the position, maximum use is made of availablesupporting fires.288. 'NIGHT DISPOSITIONS. a. It usually is necessaryto make adjustments at night to meet conditionsof reduced visibility. For the rifle company,these adjustments include-(1) Laying light machine guns on final protectivelines and 60-mm mortars on barrages.(2) Readjusting troops and weapons to blockareas, usually open and exposed, whichfavor a night attack and which are coveredsolely by fire during periods of goodvisibility.(3) Establishing night dispositions of localsecurity.(4) Placing antipersonnel and antitank minesacross likely avenues of approach. Thesemines should be removed at daylight.(5) Preparing to illuminate the foregroundby flares.b. Any company adjustments in fires or trooplocation to meet conditions of reduced visibilityare coordinated with the battalion commander. Allmen in the company are briefed on the battalion287

night locations and on fire plans. Infrared equip.ment may be used to increase the visibility.289. CONDUCT OF DEFENSE. a. As the enemy approachesthe battle position, he is fired on. Thesefires are delivered by outposts established wellforward of the battle position and by long-rangeweapons located in rear of the front-line companies.They are controlled by air observers, by patrols,and by ground observers located on the outpostpositions.b. When the enemy comes within effective smallarmsrange of the main line of. resistance (500yards), individuals and crew-served weapons locatedin front-line platoon areas open fire. As theenemy advance continues, these fires are increasedin rate, and additional weapons open fire as targetsappear within their sectors. The 60-mm mortarsand long-range weapons execute fire missions onappropriate targets within their effective ranges.Tanks located to fire in front of the main line ofresistance open fire at enemy tanks at long range,unless directed to withhold their fire until theenemy is closer. Observers in each forward defensearea keep the foreground under continuousobservation to permit the adjustment of fire oflong-range weapons. As the enemy draws closerto the battle position and delivers heavy fires inpreparation for his assault, the men occupyingfront-line defense areas take cover in their foxholes or emplacements.c. When the massed fires of the enemy are lifted,all weapons located within the forward platoon288

defense areas open fire to inflict maximum casualtiesand to stop the hostile attack before it reachestheir positions. Requests for supporting fires aremade directly to the nearest artillery, heavy mortarcompany, or heavy weapons company forwardobserver. Fire requests also are made by the companycommander to the battalion commander.d. If the enemy's attacking elements approachthe area covered by planned final protective fires,machine guns shift their fires to final protectivelines, mortars and artillery fire their barrages, andother weapons increase their rates of fire againstthe most threatening targets. Authority to callfor final protective fires is a part of the battalioncoordinated fire plan. This authority normally isdelegated down to and including front-line platoonleaders so that fires are delivered when needed.When fires are called for, they are delivered withoutdelay. Higher unit commanders immediatelyverify the need for these fires and call for reinforcingfires, if necessary. If the enemy assaults,he is met by fire, grenades, and close combat. Menin the threatened area do not withdraw except onthe verified order of their commander.e. When the attacking force includes tanks aswell as infantry elements, the primary targets forrifle company weapons, except antitank weapons,are the hostile foot troops or other exposed enemy.Fires are directed to separate the enemy footelements from the tanks. In exceptional cases,when hostile infantry or other exposed enemy donot offer a target, small-arms fire is directedagainst the open hatches of enemy tanks. Defend-289

ers using small arms against the accompanying infantryor using antitank rifle grenade, rocket, and57-mm rifle fire against hostile tanks continue tofire until forced to take cover in order to protectthemselves and their weapons from the crushingaction of the tanks. They return to their firingpositions as soon as the tanks pass and fire on therear of the tanks. Defenders also fire on approachingfoot troops or exposed enemy riding on orclosely following other attacking tanks.f. If the enemy succeeds in overrunning the defenseareas, the advance is resisted by fires fromadjacent and support platoon defense areas andfrom supporting weapons. If a minor penetrationis made by a small enemy group and the mainline of resistance is not jeopardized, the companycommander may order the support platoon to eliminatethe hostile group. Such an action is a quickassault and mop-up. A new support is reconstitutedat the earliest opportunity.g. In case the company is surrounded, the companycommander redistributes his troops andweapons in his area as necessary for a continuedall-around defense.h. The conduct of a night defense resembles thatof a day defense except that it is characterizedby more close-in fighting. It can be expected thatsome of the enemy will infiltrate the position. Atthe same time, light machine guns, 60-mm mortars,and other supporting weapons break up elementsof the enemy which still are outside the position.Although machine guns are layed in readinesson final protective lines and the mortars on290

their barrage areas, crews of these weapons (whennot ordered to fire final protective fires) shouldshift to more remunerative or more threateningtargets when visibility permits. Flares are usedforward of the position to assist in locating thesetargets.290. RELIEF. a. If the defense is prolonged or ifunits on the battle position have suffered heavycasualties, periodic relief of units in the line ismade. The front-line rifle company may be relievedby the battalion reserve company, by a rifle companyfrom a battalion other than its own, or by aunit of different strength and organization. Tomaintain secrecy and maximum security, the reliefof a front-line unit is executed at night.b. Relief plans are detailed and executed witha minimum of time and confusion. Incoming leadersmust know the organization of the position andthe plan of defense. This normally is done by theincoming unit's sending leaders to inspect the positionduring daylight and by key personnel fromthe incoming unit remaining on the position tolearn of any changes which occur after the initialreconnaissance. Unit leaders of the company beingrelieved are informed of the time, order of relief,and the routes and check points by which they willleave the position.c. As it is relieved, each unit, to and includingsquads and weapons crews, withdraws straight tothe rear. There the platoons normally are assembledand led by guides over previously reconnoiteredroutes to the company assembly area.8:569:s.; 0o-49--2''o 291

During this movement, weapons and troops fromother units normally are attached to the platoon inwhose area they had been placed.d. Commanders arrange for the mutual exchangeof weapons which cannot be moved easily or replacedduring darkness. Communication lines andextra supplies and equipment not essential to theunit being relieved are left on the position.e. Periodic reports are made to the next highercommander. The incoming unit commander assumesresponsibility for defense of the area whenthe major portion of his command is in positionand communication and control is established, orwhen he is ordered to do so by the over-all commander.291. REVERSE SLOPE DEFENSE-GENERAL CONSID-ERATIONS. The occupation of a reverse slope positionmay be dictated if control of the forwardslope is lost or not gained, or if the forward slopecannot be held because of its extreme vulnerabilityto enemy fire. The advantage of a reverse slopedefense is that the forward elements of the battleposition are protected from enemy ground observationand direct-fire weapons. This advantage permitsgreater freedom of movement, more detailedimprovement of the position, ease of supply, andrest for the troops. (See fig. 60.)292. REVERSE SLOPE ORGANIZATION. The reverseslope position generally is organized according tothe principles explained in paragraphs 270 to 288,inclusive. Modifications of these principles andadditional considerations include the following:292

a. Observation posts are prepared on or just forwardof the topographical crest and are occupiedAR~~~~~~~~I'~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Figrce 60. Rifle company in a reverse slope defense(schematic).293

y unit commanders and forward observers. Smallgroups of riflemen and weapon crews provide protectionfor these observers. Normally, these groupsare furnished by the support platoon. At nightthey are strengthened to prevent hostile infiltrationand surprise.b. When possible, the forward slope and flanksare covered by direct flanking fires of weaponsdefiladed from the front.c. A carefully laid field of antitank mines, tripflares, and antipersonnel mines may be used on theforward and reverse slope to slow the enemy attackand thus allow the defender more time tomeet the assault.d. Troops and weapons on the reverse slope arelocated to permit the maximum fire on the crest,in the approaches around the crest, and on the forwardslopes of adjacent terrain features.e. If within effective range, the military crestof the next high ground in rear is a desirable locationfor the support platoon.f. Final protective fires are planned to destroythe enemy as he attempts to cross the crest. Themain line of resistance usually is located at least200 yards from the crest of the hill to provide adequatefields of fire and to permit the delivery offinal protective fires without endangering friendlytroops.293. CONDUCT OF REVERSE SLOPE DEFENSE. Theconduct of a reverse slope defense generally is accordingto the principles described in paragraph289. The security detachments on the forward294

slope give warning of an enemy approach, and theydelay and disorganize him by long-range fires. Duringperiods of poor visibility, greater use is madeof warning and illuminating devices to give a bettercoverage of the front; for example, flares,searchlights, and antipersonnel mines. If the enemydrives in the security detachments and continueshis advance, planned concentrations are deliveredon the forward slope by the defending highangleweapons to disrupt the enemy's attempts tomass for an assault. Direct-fire weapons within thebattle position withhold their fires until suitabletargets appear. If the enemy crosses the crest inmass, final protective fires are delivered. If alimited penetration of the main line of resistanceis made and a counterattack is ordered, the normalprinciples of counterattack are applicable. Sinceit is necessary to deny observation to the enemyfrom the high ground overlooking the battle position,the counterattacking force seeks to reestablishthe security detachments on the forward slope.Section III. RESERVE RIFLE COMPANY294. GENERAL. The front-line battalion in defensenormally places two rifle companies on the mainline of resistance and one in reserve. (See fig. 61.)The battalion order gives the missions for the reservecompany and the priority of execution of assignedtasks. Upon receiving this order, the reservecompany commander takes such troop leadingsteps, as described in paragraph 272, as areapplicable. The battalion commander directs the295

COMPANYOEFENSE AREAs5o YARDS50R YARDS0·PRIMARY P O , · OI.PRIMARY POSITIONS_ _ _SUPPLEMENTARY POSITIONSFigure 61. The battalion reserve company prepares primarypositions on key terrain, normally withthree platoons across the battalion area in rearof the front-line. companies.296

use of the reserve company during the conduct ofthe defense.295. MISSIONS. Missions which may be assignedto the reserve rifle company area.Increasing the depth of the battalion defensearea.b. Protecting the battalion's flanks and rear.c. Acting as the counterattacking force.d. Establishing a combat outpost.e. Assisting in the organization of forwardareas.296. INCREASING DEPTH OF BATTALION DEFENSEAREA. The reserve company prepares primary positionson key terrain, normally with three platoonareas on line across the battalion area in rear ofthe front-line companies. These.positions are organizedwithin rifle supporting distance (500yards) of the support platoons of the forward companies,and at least 150 yards from those platoons,so that they will be outside the zone of dispersionof enemy fire directed at the front-linecompanies. The platoon positions are organizedsimilar to front-line platoons. Their fires and positionsare coordinated closely with those of supportingweapons located in the rear of the battalionarea.297. PROTECTING BATTALION'S FLANKS AND REAR.Besides adding depth to the defense, the reservecompany protects the flank and rear of the battalion.Since this protection seldom can be fur-297

nished from primary positions alone, it usually isnecessary for the reserve company to prepare supplementaryplatoon positions. If the battalion isthreatened from any direction other than thefront, the battalion commander may direct the reservecompany to occupy a combination of platoonpositions which best protects the threatened area.When the battalion has an unprotected flank, thereserve company initially may be disposed to protectit.298. COUNTERATTACKING. The counterattack is adecisive element of defensive combat. The basicelement of the battalion counterattacking force isthe reserve company. To give maximum strengthto the counterattack, the battalion commander attachesto or places in support of the reserve companyall available troops and weapons. These attachmentsand supporting missions become effectiveupon the battalion commander's decision tocounterattack. The battalion order gives the areasof likely penetrations against which counterattackplans are prepared. The reserve company commanderprepares counterattack plans concurrentlywith the organization of the defensive position.He submits these plans to the battalion commanderfor approval. The reserve company normally occupiesits prepared positions before the enemystarts its attack. Free movement of the reservecompany during the enemy attack is rare, as suchmovement may result in an undue number of casualties.For this reason, the counterattacking companynormally goes directly from its occupied po-298

sition to the line of departure by previously reconnoiteredroutes.299. ESTABLISHING COMBAT OUTPOST. All or partof the reserve company may be detailed initiallyto establish a combat outpost. For a discussion ofcombat outposts, see paragraph 320.300. ASSISTING IN ORGANIZING FORWARD AREAS.Working parties from the reserve company maybe detailed to the forward areas to assist in clearingfields of fire, erecting obstacles, laying antitankmines, trip flares, and antipersonnel mines, constructingemplacements and entrenchments, executingcamouflage, and performing similar tasks.301. WEAPONS PLATOON. a. When the reservecompany occupies prepared positions, the sameprinciples apply for the use of the 57-mm rifle sectionas for a front-line company. The section'splans to support a counterattack may include closesupporting fire from one or more positions, accompanyingthe counterattacking forces, or a combinationof both.b. Missions that may be assigned to the 60-mmmortar section include-(1) Attachment to the combat outpost. If thereserve company furnishes the combatoutpost, all or part of the 60-mm mortarsmay be attached to it.(2) Support of the main line of resistance.The 60-mm mortars may be emplacednear the 81-mm mortars and used to rein-299

force their fires in support of the mainline of resistance. The use and location ofthe 60-mm mortars to support the mainline of resistance are coordinated so thattheir use with the reserve company is notjeopardized.(3) Limit penetrations. When the reservecompany is occupying its prepared positions,the fires of the 60-mm mortarsare used to limit penetrations by firinginto the penetrated area or on the edgeof the penetration to block it off.(4) Support counterattacks. If the reservecompany is assigned a counterattack mission,the 60-mm mortars may accompanythe counterattacking force or furnishsupporting fires from their prepared positions.302. ORGANIZATION OF GROUND. Normally, thereserve company first prepares its primary positions.It then prepares its supplementary positionsaccording to the priority prescribed by the battalioncommander, and it improves routes to itslines of departure for counterattack, when necessary.The organization of each position includesclearing fields of fire and constructing and concealingindividual shelters, weapon emplacements, andobstacles.303. COMPANY ASSEMBLY AREA. The battalioncommander's order specifies whether the reservecompany is to occupy prepared positions, whether300

it is to be held in an assembly area ready to occupydesignated prepared positions, or to counterattackon order. Rarely will the reserve company be orderedto occupy an assembly area in lieu of theoccupation of its prepared positions. If it occupiesan assembly area, the company is held in dispersedplatoon groups. Shelters are prepared forthe men against air bombardment and long-rangefires.304. OBSERVATION POST. The initial observationpost of the reserve company should be located incoordination with the rear battalion observationpost to permit the maximum observation of thebattalion rear area. The company commanderneeds to have early information of the situationwithin the battalion area and to be in close touchwith the battalion commander. Subsequently, theobservation post is located to give the best observationof the area in which the company is used.305. COMMAND POST. The reserve company commandpost is located in rear of its primary positions.If the company initially occupies an assemblyarea, the command post is located withinthat assembly area. The location selected shouldpossess the characteristics explained in paragraph284. In addition, it preferably is located near thebattalion command post.306. ANTITANK DEFENSE. When the reserve companyoccupies a prepared position, the principlesof antitank defense for a front-line company ap-301

ply. If the company occupies an assembly area,the rifle grenadiers, rocket-launcher teams, and 57-mm rifle squads are located to cover likely tankapproaches.307. CONDUCT OF THE DEFENSE. a. As the enemyapproaches the battle position, elements (if any)of the reserve company on the combat outpostseek to delay and disorganize the enemy and thenwithdraw. As the attack of the enemy progresses,the reserve company commander keeps himself informedof the situation. The probable use of thereserve company is planned to permit the timelyalerting of troops to carry out their mission.b. If the enemy penetrates the position and thereserve company is ordered to defend from preparedpositions which block the threatened area,the conduct of the defense is similar to that of thefront-line companies. Because final protective firesare not planned to the immediate front of the reservecompany, principal directions of fire to coveravenues of approach inside the battle position areassigned in place of final protective fires. Fire datafor high-angle weapons are prepared and closelycoordinated with front-line elements to permit therapid and accurate use of concentrations.Section IV. OTHER DEFENSIVEOPERATIONS308. GENERAL. The principles outlined in sectionsI through III, this chapter, govern the usual organizationand defense by a rifle company. Frequently,the rifle company takes part in a defen-302

sive operation where the situation is different andrequires special considerations. Since the battalionis the basic tactical unit, the rifle company rarelyis used as a separate unit. In all these situations,the principles of defensive combat previously coveredare followed, if practicable. The applicationor modification depends on such factors as the terrain,the tactical situation, and the size of the unitinvolved. Those additional considerations whichapply particularly to the rifle company in such situationsare described in the paragraphs whichfollow.309. DEFENSE ON WIDE FRONT. a. When a battaliondefends a wide front, emphasis is placed onthe organization of key terrain features. Frequently,the rifle company, reinforced with supportingweapons, is assigned the defense of sucha key feature. Units smaller than a rifle companyrarely are assigned a key terrain feature. Whenassigned the mission of defending a key terrainfeature and providing assistance in covering gapsbetween terrain features, the front-line company-(1) Physically occupies a normal frontage.(2) Emphasizes provisions for the defense ofthe terrain feature against an attackfrom any direction.(3) Furnishes observation, security, and patrolsto cover the gaps.(4) Familiarizes key persons with the plansof higher units for covering the gaps byfire.b. The reserve rifle company, in an extended-303

front situation, prepares more positions, is morelikely to counterattack, and more frequently occupiesan assembly area initially.310. PERIMETER DEFENSE. a. When a rifle companyor a smaller unit is on an independent mission orwhen it is separated from the battalion and theenemy location is not certain, it usually establishesa perimeter defense. (See figs. 62 and 63.) In suchcases the company organizes its position as follows:,/4Figure 62. Perimeter defense of the rifle company in closeterrain (schematic).304

. Each rifle platoon is assigned a part of theouter perimeter to organize and defend. Eachrifle platoon leader normally organizes his assignedsector by placing three rifle squads abreast. Theplatoon leader places his light machine gun in aposition on the perimeter of the platoon sectorwhich allows the best coverage of the platoon frontand the best final protective line. He places hisrocket launcher on the perimeter where it best cancover the most dangerous tank approach. Two-· -__X/Figure 63. Perimeter defense of the rifle company in openterrain (schematic).305

man fox holes normally are dug 5 to 20 yardsapart, and 10 to 25 yards are allotted to crewservedweapons.c. The inner perimeter is organized by the 60-mm mortar section and the headquarters personnelof the company and of the weapons platoon. Thecompany commander may use part of a rifle platoonto strengthen this inner perimeter, whennecessary. Normally, not more than one rifle squadis used for this purpose.d. The company commander closely supervisesthe rifle platoon leaders' use of their weapons tocoordinate effective all-around defense of the companyarea. If the terrain dictates, he may attachto one platoon the rocket launcher of another platoonin order to give the maximum effective coverageof the most likely tank approach. He usuallyselects positions on the outer perimeter for allthree 57-mm rifles. The 60-mm mortars are emplacedwithin the inner perimeter close enough togetherto permit the control from one location. Topermit the rapid delivery of fires in any direction,each mortar is given a different sector; however,each mortar is prepared to reinforce the fires ofeither of the others. When the defensive positionis beyond effective range of the main force's supportingweapons, the additional weapons may beattached to the company. Attached machine gunsnormally are used singly on the outer perimeter.e. Security outside the perimeter is furnished bysmall outguards located on likely approaches andon observation points and by passive means suchas trip flares and booby traps. In dense terrain306

local security detachments may be withdrawnwithin the perimeter during periods of poor visibilityor darkness.311. DEFENSE OF RIVER LINE. a. General. The conductof a river line defense normally is decided bycommanders of large units. In the offensive typeof defense, a rifle company may be assigned themission of establishing small outguards along theriver to give warning and to delay and disorganizethe enemy if he attempts a crossing. A rifle companyalso may be part of a mobile counterattackingforce whose mission is to destroy the enemy whenhe is astride the river or soon after he crosses. Inthe position-type of defense, the rifle company maybe assigned a definite area to organize and defendon or near the bank of the river, or it may be designatedthe battalion reserve.b. Frontage. In the defense of a river line, a riflecompany normally is assigned a greater frontagethan in average terrain. This frontage is coveredby extending the intervals between platoons ratherthan the intervals between men.c. Employment of weapons. When the main line ofresistance is organized on the near bank of theriver, 60-mm mortar concentrations and barragesare planned to cover likely avenues of approach tothe far bank and probable crossing sites. Machineguns and other direct-fire weapons are assignedwide sectors of fire, and they cover the avenues ofapproach and areas which offer effective grazingfire. Machine guns are sited to fire final protectivelines that graze on the river or the far bank.8si:;.((; /)-4:---2-- 1 307

Rifle grenades, rocket launchers, and 57-mm riflesare used against enemy groups and equipment onthe far bank and on the river. When the main lineof resistance is organized back from the river bank,weapons are used as for a normal defense. Finalprotective fires of the 60-mm mortars and machineguns are placed on the near bank to destroy theenemy as he attempts to gain a foothold on thenear bank.312. DEFENSE IN WOODS. Defense in woods ischaracterized by short fields of fire and limited observation.To meet this situation, reliance is placedon closely coordinated preplanned defensive fires,obstacles, constant patroling, extensive use of localsecurity groups, and preparation of routes for therapid shifting of support and reserve units. Limitedfields of fire within the position require thereduction of distances and intervals between menand units. Overhead cover is constructed for foxholes and other emplacements for protectionagainst enemy fire and friendly close-in artilleryand mortar supporting fires. The support platoonprepares to counterattack against small infiltratinggroups which penetrate the position. Constantpatroling is maintained to the front and the flanksand within the position. Local security groups areequipped with rapid means of communication inorder to give immediate warning of the hostileadvance. A successful defense depends on vigilance,accurate information of hostile movements,final protective fires, and a rapid counterattack tomop-up hostile groups which infiltrate the position.308

313. ANTIAIRBORNE DEFENSE--GENERAL CONSID-ERATIONS. a. Measures must be taken by all unitsto protect themselves against an airborne assault.A rifle company may be used against an airborneattack as follows: if the company is occupying afront-line defense area it defends in place; if companyis within a regimental sector and not a frontlinecompany, it may be used as an immediatecounterattacking force.b. Companies used in rear areas may be assigneda definite sector of responsibility to organizeagainst airborne operations; they may organize,occupy, and defend important key points; or theymay be a part of mobile striking force.314. PRINCIPLES OF AIRBORNE DEFENSE. In organizingan area against airborne operations, thefollowing principles are applicable:a. To counteract hostile air reconnaissance, camouflageand concealment are perfected. Alternatepositions for weapons and men are dug so that thedefense is flexible. Dummy positions are preparedto confuse the enemy and prevent him from locatingthe exact positions.b. To give warning of hostile landings, a warningsystem consisting of warning station is establishedto cover possible landing areas in the area of responsibility.It often is necessary to supplementthese warning stations with motorized patrols. Allcommunication means are used to give promptwarning.c. To provide initial protection against hostilelandings, small detachments are established in the309

vicinity of landing areas, likely airborne objectives,and critical terrain features. These detachmentsform the local defense force. The purposeof this force is to delay, disorganize, and containthe airborne force until the mobile striking forcecan counterattack to destroy the enemy. The sizeof each force is determined by the importance ofthe area and may vary in strength from a singlerifle squad to a rifle platoon reinforced with supportingweapons. Obstacles to landing are constructed,with first priority given to landing areasnearest probable airborne objectives.d. To give maximum flexibility to the defense,a mobile striking force is organized. The purposeof this force is to destroy the enemy by counterattack.It preferably is motorized and strong infire power, and centrally located in a covered andconcealed position. Plans for its use are prearrangedand rehearsed.315. CONDUCT OF AIRBORNE DEFENSE. Duringhostile air reconnaissance, troops are concealed.During the hostile air bombardment, men occupycovered positions and prepare for the hostile attack.During the initial landings, the defense isaggressive. If low-flying transports or gliders comewithin range, all weapons fire. Warning stationsand local defense forces determine the main landingarea and the direction of movement of the hostileforce. Maximum fires are directed on the enemy.Local counterattacks inflict maximum casualtiesand delay the reorganization of forces thathave landed. As soon as reliable reports of the310

location and strength of an enemy landing are received,the mobile striking force is committed betweenthe enemy's landing area and probable airborneobjective. It destroys or contains the enemy.Aggressive and offensive action is necessary foran effective defense against airborne attack.316. OTHER DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS. For characteristicsof combat and tactical principles governingother defensive operations, see FM 100-5 andother appropriate references listed in appendixVIII.Section V. SECURITY MISSIONS317. GENERAL. A rifle company may be used forsecurity missions to includea.Assembly area outpost.b. General outpost.c. Combat outpost.d. Local security.e. Road blocks and defense of obstacles.f. Defense of rear installations.g. Rear guard.318. ASSEMBLY AREA OUTPOST. a. When a forceoccupies an unprotected assembly area, strong securitymeasures are taken. This security normallyis furnished by an outpost. When the force is aregiment or larger, a battalion usually is detailedas the assembly area outpost, and rifle companiesoccupy assigned sectors of the outpost. (See fig.64.) When the force is a battalion, one rifle com-311

pany (reinforced by supporting weapons) may establishthe outpost, but more frequently each companyfurnishes the outpost protection in the sectorcorresponding to its position in the assembly area.(See fig. 65.)A l\PATROL ROUTE 2·\ \ o tFOR REGTOR LARGER FORCEO OUTGUARD-USUALLY ONE SOUAD OR FRACTION THEREO--- ROUTE OF VISITING PATROLSFigure 64. Assembly area-company sector (schematic).b. When a rifle company in a battalion assemblyarea furnishes the outpost protection within anassigned sector, it normally does so by means of a312

series of small outguards and road blocks and bypatroling. These outguards are located approximately200 to 500 yards from the assembly area,with enough outguards and at such critical pointsAo 2 -.O OUTGUARD-USUALLY ONE SQUAD OR FRACTION THEREOF-- * ROUTE OF VISITING PATROLSFigure 65. When outposting a battalion assembly area,each rifle company usually furnishes the outpostfor its sector.as to permit long-range observation and fires andto cover probable enemy approaches. Each out-313

guard normally consists of part or all of a riflesquad, reinforced with supporting weapons. Observersfor supporting high-angle-tire weapons alsoare posted with these outguards. Control and communicationwith outguards is maintained by availablemeans, including visiting patrols. The oC(tguardsuse maximum fire power to delay any observedenemy. They give warning to the troops inthe assembly area and withdraw if threatened withclose combat or encirclement. Visiting patrols,usually consisting of three men, maintain contactwith the outguards and detect enemy activity inthe areas between outguards. They are dispatchedat intervals not greater than 2 hours, and by routesthat cover the sector. To prevent an ambush, thetime and the route are varied. In case of an enemythreat, the company occupies a defensive positionpreviously designated by the battalion commander.This position is on the best defensive terrain closeto the assembly area. The company commanderoften details one platoon to establish these outguardsand to do the patroling.319. GENERAL OUTPOST. a. The general outpostusually is established approximately 6,000 yardsforward of the battle position and it is prescribedby the division commander. It aids in securing thefront of the battle position and provides warningfor the main force and extended surveillance ofthe area over which the enemy must advance. Arifle company may be assigned an area on the outpostline of resistance to organize and occupy, or314

it may be designated as one of the reserve elements.b. The outpost order may prescribe that the outpostline of resistance be held for a definite timeor that the outpost conduct a delaying action. Ifit is to be held for a definite period, the companyorganizes its position as for a regular defense. If,it is to conduct a delaying action, the principlesfor a delaying action are used. (See par. 331.)c. In the organization of the ground, dummy emplacementsare constructed to deceive the enemyand to disperse his fire. The company organizes itssupport position and covers its front with outguardsand patrols similar to an assembly areaoutpost. (See par. 318.)320. COMBAT OUTPOST-GENERAL CONSIDERA-TIONS. The combat outpost usually is from 800 to2,000 yards forward of the battle position. It isprescribed by the battalion or the regimental commander.The mission of the combat outpost is todelay, disorganize, and deceive the enemy. It aidsin securing the battle position, gains timely informationof the enemy, and inflicts maximum casualtieson the enemy without engaging in closecombat. The responsibility for organizing and occupyingthis position may be assigned to frontlinerifle companies or to elements of the battalionor the regimental reserve. The combat outpost foreach battalion varies in size from a rifle platoonto a rifle company reinforced with machine guns,mortars, antitank weapons, and tanks.315

321. ORGANIZATION OF A COMBAT OUTPOST. a.The combat outpost is organized as a series of outguardswhich vary in strength from a half squadto a reinforced rifle platoon. These outguards organizedefense areas on terrain features permittingobservation, long fields of fire, and close rifleprotection for supporting weapons. (See fig. 66.)Outguards organize their positions covering a normalfrontage. These positions preferably are locatedwithin visual communicating distance ofeach other. If the terrain prevents this, contact ismaintained by patrols or other means of communication.Sentinels and patrols are used to the front,flanks, and rear to furnish security for the outguards.Patroling between outguards and sentinelsis carried on during periods of reduced visibility.Weapons are placed where they can get long fieldsof fire, and men are placed where they can getmaximum observation. This usually is on thetopographical crest of the terrain feature organized.b. In addition to the advantages already stated,such a position aids the withdrawal. A supportechelon ordinarily is not used and final protectivefires are not planned to protect the position sincethe combat outpost withdraws before the attackercomes within assaulting distance. Usual deceptivemeasures are used. Communication is maintainedto the rear by wire, radio, and messenger. Routesof withdrawal are selected and reconnoitered, andall men are notified of the withdrawal plan.316

IlIINo.ONOG 2 OROUTE OF RTE OF 2000 YDSWITDR RAWAL WITDR YAWAL-M mLRFigure 66. Comtbat outpost (schematic).322. CONDUCT OF A COMBAT OUTPOST. Whenthere are no friendly troops forward of the combat317

outpost, contact is maintained with the enemy bypatrols. In order to inflict maximum casualties and-confuse the enemy, fires of all weapons are openedat long range. As the enemy advances, continuousand increasing fire is directed on him. The nexthigher commander is informed of the first approachof hostile forces and is kept advised of thesituation. If the attacker continues his advanceand approaches within assaulting distance orthreatens an envelopment, the combat outpostwithdraws.323. WITHDRAWAL OF A COMBAT OUTPOST. Thedecision to withdraw normally is made by the battalionor the regimental commander; however, thecombat outpost commander may be given the authorityto make this decision. Predetermined andpreviously reconnoitered routes of withdrawal areused to offer maximum cover and concealment.These routes permit the freedom of fire by flattrajectoryweapons within the battle position andtend to deceive the enemy as to. the true locationof-the battle position. Several plans for the withdrawalare prepared. Normally, the least engagedunits withdraw first. Since the distance from thebattle position is short, there usually are no intermediatedelaying positions and the withdrawal ismade directly to positions within the battle position.Friendly elements are kept informed of thewithdrawal progress.324. LOCAL SECURITY. a. The establishment ofcombat or general outposts,by a commander of a318

larger unit does not relieve the company of theresponsibility of furnishing its own close-in protection.(See fig. 67.) During daylight, observers400-C D l ~YARDSMLR ii MLRO TWO TO FOUR MAN SENTINEL POSTS---- * ROUTES OF WITHDRAWAL aFigure 67. Local security forward of a front-line riflecompany.319

are posted to observe the foreground and to givewarning of an enemy approach. The plannedroutes of withdrawal of the outpost are includedwithin the areas of surveillance of these observers.b. Security sentinels are placed on the nearestterrain feature allowing observation of the company'sfront, generally not over 400 yards fromthe position. The company commander may directeach front-line platoon to furnish local security toits front, or he may assign the security mission tothe support platoon. Security posts normally consistof two to four observers. As the enemy approaches,local security elements give warning andobserve to determine the enemy strength, actionsand routes of approach. They withdraw to the battleposition in time to prevent close combat. Atnight, listening posts, supplemented by patrols, areestablished on the likely avenues of enemy approach.c. Within each squad area, at least one sentinelis alert at all times. At night, double sentinels areposted. Sentinels should be relieved every twohours, or more frequently, to keep them alert.d. The rifle company adds to its security bypassive measures to include control of movement,camouflage, concealment, and light and noise discipline.325. ROAD BLOCKS AND DEFENSE OF OBSTACLES.(See fig. 68.) The rifle company often is assignedthe mission of establishing road blocks or of defendingobstacles. The size of the force necessaryfor such a mission varies from a rifle squad to a320

einforced rifle company. Depending on the situation,the battalion commander may direct that thedefense be maintained at all costs until a specifiedtime or until the enemy pressure threatens to overrunor outflank the position. Troops and weaponsare placed so that they can cover.effectively, byfire, the road and the area on either side of theobstacle and approaches to it. In periods of goodvisibility, these positions are placed at such distancefrom the road or obstacle as to be outsidethe zone of dispersion of enemy fire directed atthe road or obstacle. During periods of poor visibility,positions are occupied closer to the obstaclebut beyond hand-grenade range. A small outguardOUTGUARDFigure 68. Road block or defense of an obstacle under conditionsof good visibility (schematic).321

is established where it can give adequate warningof the approach of an enemy torce. The leaderplaces guards to warn friendly troops of the obstacleor to prevent unauthorized persons fromgoing beyond the obstacle or road block. The leadermaintains contact with his commander andpromptly notifies him of enemy action and developments.326. DEFENSE OF REAR INSTALLATIONS. A rifle'company or a smaller unit may be detailed to protectan installation in rear of the battle zone. Hostileactions, against which this unit is prepared todefend, include ground attacks, airborne attacks,guerrilla raids, civilian uprisings, and sabotage.Normally, the unit can provide this protection bestby placing security detachments throughout thearea and retaining the bulk of its strength mobile.The security detachments may vary in size fromindividual sentinels to reinforced squads. Theymay include sentinel posts, outguards, and foot ormotorized patrols. Their numbers and locationsshould permit prompt suppression of minor disturbancesor timely alerting of the mobile forcein the case of a more serious threat. The mobileforce is prepared to defend the installation byattacking the hostile force or by defending fromprepared defensive positions.327. REAR GUARD. a. Rear guards are used to protecta foot or motorized column which is marchingaway from the enemy, and to protect the rear of acolumn advancing toward the enemy if an attack322

or a harassing action from the rear is possible.b. When a battalion is the rear guard, its rearrifle company is the support. The mission of thesupport is to protect that element of the rear guardwhich immediately precedes it in the direction ofmarch.c. A company having the mission of support of arear guard battalion adopts a formation similarto that of the support of an advance guard battalionin the reverse order of march. The supportis formed in three groups: the support proper,the rear party, and the rear point. The companydetails one rifle platoon to act as rear party. Therear party platoon details a rifle squad to act asrear point. The distances between elements of thesupport vary with the situation, the terrain, andthe visibility; they correspond generally to the distancesbetween elements of the advance guard(par. 22). When the support is motorized, it movesas a unit. When the column halts, the rear supportdismounts and forms a march outpost. When thecolumn moves, whether mounted or dismounted,the support follows the preceding element at a distanceset by the battalion commander.d. When an enemy pursuit is close, elements ofthe support delay the enemy to permit the nextpreceding unit to make suitable dispositions. Fireis opened at long range. Usually, elements do notmove toward the enemy to reinforce a lower element.The larger element occupies a delaying positionto cover the withdrawal of the smaller element.The element in contact with the enemy thenwithdraws under the protective fires of the ele-853696 0-49-22 323

ment occupying the delaying position. The rate ofretirement is coordinated with the main body andadjacent rear guard elements. In general, the combataction of a company operating as the supportof a rear guard in close contact with the enemyis conducted according to the principles of a delayingaction (par. 331).e. When the rear party is on foot, it is disposedin a column of two's with one file on each side ofthe road. The rear party commander marches behindthe rear party. From this position, he candecide quickly what to do when the rear point receivesfire. When the rear party commander decidesthat it is necessary to fight in place, he selectsa firing position that provides long fields offire and is well along the route of march from theposition occupied by the point. He sends a runnerto the leader of the point to tell him where the positionis and to lead the point back in its withdrawal.The withdrawal of the rear party is coveredby the support proper.f. The rear point stops to fire only when enemyaction threatens to interfere with the march. Itsignals the rear party commander when the enemyis sighted. The rear point is not reinforced byother troops. When the rear point is ordered towithdraw by the rear party commander, it uses aroute that does not mask the fire of the rear party.Section VI.RETROGRADE MOVEMENTS328. GENERAL. A retrograde movement is a movementto the rear or away from the enemy. It may324

e forced by the enemy, or it may be made voluntarily.Retrograde movements include withdrawalsfrom action, retirements, and delaying actions.329. WITHDRAWAL FROM ACTION. a. A withdrawalfrom action is the operation of breaking offcombat with a hostile force by a rearward movement.It may be followed by a retirement or bythe occupation of a rear position or area fromwhich subsequent offensive or defensive action isconducted. Withdrawals are classified as daylightwithdrawals or night withdrawals, according tothe time the movement is begun. Daylight withdrawalsusually result in excessive losses and areavoided. Secrecy, careful planning, and rapidmovement are essential to success.b. Orders from the battalion commander forwithdrawals include-(1) Organization and location of the battalioncovering force.(2) Attachments of elements of the heavyweapons company and other supportingunits to the front-line rifle companies.(3) Time of withdrawal .of each echelon.(4) Initial point and zones or routes of withdrawalfor each company.(5) Location of assembly areas and phaselines.(6) Route of withdrawal of the battalion commandpost and successive locations.(7) Requirements for maintaining secrecyand security.325

(8) Administrative details, including removalor destruction of supplies.330. RETIREMENT. A retirement is an orderlywithdrawal of troops according to their own planand without pressure by the enemy. It follows awithdrawal from action and commences when contactwith the enemy is broken completely.331. DELAYING ACTION. Delaying action is a formof defensive action on one or more positions usedto retard the enemy's advance and to gain timewithout becoming decisively engaged. This delayusually is obtained by forcing the enemy to deployearly and to consume time in preparation forbattle.332. RETROGRADE MOVEMENT TACTICAL CONSID-ERERATIONS. Retrograde movements are protectedby continuous ground reconnaissance to the flanksand rear, by covering forces, by rapid movementsunder cover of darkness, by strong antiaircraftdefense, and by continuous all-around antitankdefense. Obstacles and contaminations may beused to protect the flanks and. to delay the hostileadvance.333. RETROGRADE MOVEMENT ORDER. The followinginformation is included in a company retrogradeorder:a. Information of enemy and friendly forces.b. Company mission and details of coordinationapplicable to the company as a whole, including326

outes or zones of withdrawal, phase lines, formation,and location of the initial. point or comp/anyiassembly area.c. Tasks for lower units, such is elements of thecovering force, its composition, its commander andthe time he assumes command, and its route andtime of withdrawal. Also, specific tasks for eachunit to include attachments to rifle platoons, locationof assembly areas for each platoon, routes ofwithdrawal for all units, and time of withdrawalfor all units.d. Instructions relative to transportation, evacuationof casualties, and supply for covering forceelements and other units.e. Limitations, if any, on radio and special pyrotechnicsignals; present or future locations andtimes of opening command posts; and location ofthe company commander.334. NIGHT WITHDRAWAL-GENERAL CONSID-ERERATIONS. A front-line company executes anight withdrawal by all company elements movingto the rear at the same time, less those troops leftin place as a covering force. (See fig. 69.) Thesuccess of the withdrawal depends on careful coordinationand secrecy. The withdrawal of troopsand weapons and their subsequent assembly is doneas quietly as possible. By their fires and patroling,troops of the covering force simulate the normalactivities of the unit. Elements of supporting unitslocated within a front-line company defense areamay be attached to the company for the withdrawal.In preparation for a night withdrawal,327

special tactical measures may be used to confuseand disrupt the enemy; for example, limited objectiveattacks, raids, and variation of fire plans.335. COVERING FORCE FOR NIGHT WITHDRAWAL.a. The strength and composition of the coveringforce is designated by the battalion commander.It usually does not exceed one-third of the riflestrength of the company with skeleton crews forsupporting weapons. Normally, one rifle squad isleft in each platoon defense area of the forwardrifle companies. As soon as the platoons are withdrawn,men of the squad, left in place, move towhere they can cover the most likely enemy approachesto the platoon area and at the same timefurnish close protection for the supporting weapons.The squad left in the support platoon area ofeach front-line company patrols in the rear area.One rifle platoon usually is left in place in thereserve company area. It patrols, protects the coveringforce command post, and blocks the mostlikely avenue of enemy approach into the battalionrear area.b. Machine guns as needed are attached to thecovering force. Not more than two 60-mm mortarsof each front-line company are left in position tofire normal night missions. Rocket launchers asneeded are left in position to cover approacheswhich can be used by hostile tanks at night.c. Usually, the company executive officer commandsthe rifle company elements left as part ofthe covering force. He takes over the company328

command post. He uses messengers, wire, andradio to maintain communication.336. RECONNAISSANCE FOR NIGHT WITHDRAWAL.If practicable, unit leaders, down to and includingthe squad and selected guides, reconnoiter routesto their assembly areas during daylight. If thecompany organizes and occupies a rear positionfollowing the withdrawal, reconnaissance of therear position is made. Each company places guidesat the forward and rear positions. To preserve secrecy,reconnaissance groups are limited in size.337. EXECUTION OF NIGHT WITHDRAWAL. Rearwardmovement of all rifle company elements, lesscovering force elements, begins simultaneously atthe designated time. Men move back to squad assemblyareas, squads move to platoon assemblyareas, and platoons move to the company assemblyarea. Small column formations, which aid control,are used. Elements of the reserve company maymove directly to the company's assembly area.The movement is timed so that there is no waitingin platoon assembly areas or in the company assemlyarea. Company transportation meets thecompany as far forward as practicable. The limitof its forward movement is prescribed by the battalioncommander. Vehicles are moved singly orin small groups, and all motor movements aremade without lights. Enough vehicles are left withthe covering force to move its supporting weapons.338. SECURITY FOR NIGHT WITHDRAWAL. Thecovering force provides the primary security for329

Cu...'INITIAL COMPANY DEFENSE AREA AS OCCUPIE DURING DAYLIGHTXIIICOVEHINi; F'.IRCEYISTll .I'itN OF COMPANY ('OVERING FORCE LEFT IN POSITIOINFigure 69. Night withdrawal of a front-line rifle company(schematic).330

the company's withdrawal. The company commanderprovides additional close-in security forthe movement to the battalion assembly area.339. SUPPLY FOR NIGHT WITHDRAWAL. Ammunitionsupply of the front-line companies is replenishedbefore the beginning of the withdrawal, ifnecessary. The company commander anticipateshis supply requirements for the rear position andarranges to have those supplies moved to a locationwhich simplifies the supply of the company.340. COMMUNICATION FOR NIGHT WITHDRAWAL.a. In a night withdrawal, the company commandpost remains open in its old location until the company,less the covering force, leaves the companyassembly area. The time of displacement, the routeof movement, and the new location of the companycommand post are announced in the company order.A wire line may be laid from the assemblyarea to the old command post to provide rapid communicationwith the covering force and with thebattalion command post.b. The covering force uses wire lines alreadyestablished in the old position. The old companycommand post becomes the command post of thecovering force. For purposes of deception, the coveringforce maintains normal radio traffic. Uponits withdrawal, it cuts wire circuits and removesa portion of the wire to prevent its use by theenemy.c. During the company's movement from thecompany assembly area to the battalion assembly331

area, the company command post is with themarching column. Radio silence is maintained accordingto battalion orders. Maximum use is madeof existing wire circuits to the rear.341. WITHDRAWAL OF COVERING FORCE ATNIGHT. The battalion order specifies the conditionor time for the withdrawal, the routes of withdrawal,and the assembly area. If a rear positionis occupied by the main force, the covering forceusually is withdrawn in time to be under the protectionof the outpost of the rear position by daylight.All elements of the covering force usuallyare withdrawn at the same time. The coveringforce commander protects his movement to therear by the use of security groups.342. DAYLIGHT WITHDRAWAL. a. Daylight withdrawalsare accomplished best when the situationprevents the enemy from seriously interfering;however, in emergencies, daylight withdrawalsmay be ordered when the enemy is in close contact.A daylight withdrawal order normally isoral, brief, and fragmentary.b. In a daylight withdrawal, each echelon coversthe withdrawal of the next echelon to the front.(See fig. 70.) The support platoon covers the withdrawalof the front-line platoons. The battalionreserve covers the withdrawal of the support platoonof the front-line companies.c. The initial withdrawal consists of a thinningout of the defense area troops. Men from frontlineplatoons are sent to the rear of the support332

platoon area, where a platoon noncommissionedofficer assembles them or sends them directly to thecompany assembly area. Automatic weapons ineach area cover the withdrawal of the troops ofPROTECTS WITHDRAWAL OFFRONT-LINE PLATOONSTO DESIGNATED ASSEMBLY AREASFigure 70. Daylight withdrawal of a front-line rifle company(schematic).that area. When withdrawn, these weapons movedirectly to the company assembly area. As soonas the last elements of the front-line platoons havewithdrawn, the support platoon similarly with-333

draws under the protection of the battalionreserve.d. Supporting weapons in the rifle company areanormally are attached to the company for the withdrawal.Some of these weapons, together with theelements of the weapons platoon, may be used toassist in covering the withdrawal. If 60-mm mortarsare located in the forward platoon areas, theyare attached to the rifle platoons and are withdrawnwith the initial elements of those platoons.If the 60-mm mortars are used in the support platoonarea, they support the forward platoons andwithdraw with the support platoon. If 75-mmrifles are located in the forward platoon areas,they may be attached to these platoons for thewithdrawal.343. DELAYING ACTION IN SUCCESSIVE POSITIONS.Since a delay in successive positions is based onlimited resistance at any one position, the companymay be given a frontage twice as wide as it wouldhave in a sustained defense. This frontage normallyis covered by placing the three rifle platoonsabreast. Successive positions and routes of withdrawalare prescribed by the battalion commander.The company commander directs early reconnaissanceof these positions and routes by his unit leaders.The organization and the conduct of a delayingposition defense are according to the principlesgoverning a combat outpost. (See par. 321.) Thewithdrawal to the next delaying position may bemade by withdrawing platoons alternately andcovering the gaps thus created by the fire of sup-334

porting weapons, or by withdrawing all platoonsat the same time, with each platoon covering itsown withdrawal. Between the successive delayingpositions, intermediate positions offering goodfields of fire are occupied by detachments with automaticweapons.344. DELAYING ACTION IN ONE POSITION. a. The'nission of delay may require a force to hold acertain position for a predetermined time. Therifle company assigned a part of a sector on a delayingposition with this mission distributes itstroops, organizes the position, and plans its finalprotective fires as in a normal defense. Increasedfrontages are covered by allowing greater intervalsbetween adjacent defense areas. Intervalsbetween men in platoon and smaller defense areasare not increased. Gaps between units are coveredby flanking fire or by the fires of supporting weapons.Mobility is preferable for the support platoonso that it can provide support for the entire companyforward area.b. When the company is assigned the mission ofdelaying the advance of the enemy along a road,it should select a position where it can bring surprisefire against the enemy maneuvering towardthe road block. This may be done by placing asmall company element astride the road or in theimmediate vicinity of it and dividing the greaterpart of the company into groups to each side ofthe road.335

CHAPTER 9COMMUNICATION345. REFERENCES. For references on the details ofinstalling, operating, and maintaining communicationssystems, see appendix VIII.346. COMMUNICATION PERSONNEL. a. Officers aretrained in the capabilities and the use of the companycommunication system, including radiotelephoneprocedure and security. They operate handor shoulder-carried portable voice sets.b. The communication noncommissioned officeris trained as a communication chief. He keeps hiscompany commander informed on matters pertainingto communication. He supervises the installation,operation, and maintenance of the communicationsystem. He assists in the procurement ofsignal supplies for the company. He trains companycommunication personnel and other men designatedby the company commander. Part of thistraining is conducted by battalion and other headquarters.c. The communication noncommissioned officersupervises the maintenance of communication securityin the company. He transmits informationcontained in current communication orders; forexample, signal operation instructions (SOI) and336

standing signal instructions (SSI). He makes recommendationsto his company commander on matterspertaining to communication.d. The bugler is the principal assistant to thecommunication noncommissioned officer. His dutiesare assigned to him by the company commanderand the communication noncommissioned officer.He is trained to install, operate, and maintainall items of communication equipment in thecompany.e. The radiotelephone operators operate andmaintain the back-packed radio sets in the company.Their training includes radiotelephone procedureand security. They also are trained to install,operate, and maintain all items of communicationequipment issued to the company.f. The messengers are selected for their sturdiness,courage, and self-reliance. They must not besubject to night blindness. They are trained tocarry written or verbal messages under all conditionsand to install, operate, and maintain all itemsof communication equipment in the company. Messengertraining includes work on map reading andorganization and practice in recognizing commandersby sight.g. Orderlies and other men designated by thecompany commander are trained to install, operate,and maintain the company communicationsystem. These men are used to augment communicationpersonnel, especially for installing, operating,and maintaining the wire system and backpackedradio sets.337

347. EQUIPMENT. a. Light-weight switchboardswhich can service 6 single channels of wire communicationor approximately 24 party-line channelsare issued to the company. Battery and soundpoweredtelephones are provided. Light-weightfield wire is available to establish a command andfire-control seystem. The wire is laid or recoveredby light reels which may be hand carried. The wirealso is laid by the wire dispenser in which it isissued.b. Radio equipment includes low-powered portablevoice sets. Two types are issued; one is carriedin the hand or on the shoulder, and the otheris back-packed. Back-packed radios have a rangeof approximately 3 miles and are frequency-modulated(f-m) with a frequency (channel) which canbe changed by the operator. These radios will netwith similar type radios mounted in all tanks. Thehand or shoulder-carried radio has a range of approximately1 mile.c. Visual signal equipment consists of fluorescentmarking panels with different color combinations,pyrotechnics and smoke in various colorsand types, arm-and-hand signals, and improvisedlights and flags.d. Sound signal equipment includes whistles,horns, bugles, gongs, small arms, and other noisemakingdevices.348. USE OF COMMUNICATION. a. The companycommander directs the use of communicationavailable to the company. Communication i'sikept338.

flexible to provide a means of contact during thedifferent tactical situations.b. Wire communication depends on the timeavailable to install and recover the wire. (See fig.71.) If enough wire is available, recovery neednot be made by the company. In fast-moving situations,time limitations may limit wire usage toshort fire-control lines which can be recoveredI WRE NET IWIRE NETOPR,-60 -6BNI * BATTERY-POWEREDTELEPHONEIOSOUND'POWERED TELEPHONr] SWITCHBOARDCFigure 71. Type rifle company 'wire net.853696 0--49----23 339

quickly. In defensive situations, a complete wiresystem is installed for fire control and control ofunits.c. Radio is limited only by the characteristicsof the sets, such as range, frequency and type ofmodulation, security restrictions, and interferencefrom static, jamming, or terrain obstacles. (Seefig. 72.) Radio is an ideal means of communicationfor fast-moving situations. When wire isavailable, radio normally is held in readiness only.The details of net operation are contained in signaloperation instructions; for example, call signs, frequencies,and codes. The efficiency of the radiosystem depends on operator training.d. Foot messengers operate between the companycommand post and the command post of battalionand platoons. Messenger communication isused within platoons by the use of platoon messengersor other men. The company sends twomessengers to the battalion command post, one ofwhom returns to the company. This familiarizesmessengers with the locations of and routes to thecommand posts. An exchange of messengers ismade when the battalion or company commandpost displaces. Foot messengers may operate asmotor messengers by using company vehicles.e. Visual and sound signals are limited only bythe signals themselves and by limitations placedon their use for security reasons. They are a rapidmeans of communication but are easily misunderstood.Messages must be simple. For effective useof this means of communication, selected men areassigned the duty of remaining on the alert to re-340

RADIO NETSt /*s.. *-.. .- I -I s 2 3 WPNS /\ L … JLCOMPNY COMM.ANDERBN NETTANK'TLCMMAND POSTj-"-81-MM OR HEAVY MORTARLEGENDLIGHT WEIGHT*PORTABLEPACK TYPEOR MTS EOUIVALENTFigure 72. Type rifle company radio net.341

ceive them. The meanings of visual and sound signalsare prescribed in the signal operations instructions.They are an auxiliary means of communication.(1) Panels, smoke, and pyrotechnics are usedfor marking positions, for identifyingunits and vehicles, and for sending shortprearranged messages. These visual signalsare obtained from the signal operationinstructions or may be originated bythe company commander after proper coordination.Prearranged messages givenin the signal operation instructions usuallyinclude calls for fire, calls for liftingfire, and objective reached. Improvisedlights and flags may be used for specialpurposes. (For the use of arm-and-handsignals, see app. III.)(2) Sound signals are used chiefly to spreadan alarm, to attract attention, and totransmit short, prearranged messages.The sound signals used to warn of air,tank, and gas attacks usually are given inthe signal operation instructions.349. COMMUNICATION COORDINATION. The companycommunication system is part of the battalionsystem The company installs, operates, andmaintains its system as part of the over-all battalioncommunication plan. A pack-type radio setis netted with the battalion command net. In defensivesituations and when time permits in attacksituations, the battalion communication platoon in-342

stalls wire from the battalion command post to thecompany command post.350. QOMMIUNICATLON ORDERS. The rifle companybmmmndei'sort~dr contains instructions for communication.Frequently, such instructions consistonly of the location of the commander or of hiscommand post. Other instructions relative to communicationmay be given in fragmentary form.Such instructions include the allotment within thecompany of the means of communication and thesignal operation instructions of larger units thatare applicable to the company. In the defense,these instructions include the final protective fireswhich may be called for by pyrotechnic signal.Platoon leaders acquaint all men with this signaland inform them of the location or locations fromwhich it may be fired. Standing operating proceduremay be used to simplify and abbreviate orders.Because of . security reasons, the rifle companyis not given the complete signal operationinstructions. Pertinent information is extractedfor the company by the battalion or a higher commander.343

CHAPTER 10ADMINISTRATIONSection I. PERSONNEL ADMINISTRATION351. GENERAL. The company is the basic unit inthe army having administrative functions. Theentire administrative system of the army, fromsquad to the Department of the Army, dependsgreatly on the initial actions of the company commander.Personnel administration within the companyinvolves personnel management and recordkeeping and reporting.a. Personnel management functions of the companycommander are given in paragraphs 10and 11.b. Record keeping and reporting involve organizationaland individual records and reports. Organizationalrecords and reports pertaining to personnelare the morning report, duty roster, sickbook, company punishment record, company correspondencefile, and a file of regulations includingArmy Regulations, circulars, bulletins, and orders.Individual records and reports based upon theseorganizational records are furnished to the unitpersonnel section of the regiment. This providesthe proper maintenance of each man's records,such as the service record, the soldier's qualifica-344

tion card, and the pay roll. To assist him in theperformance of these administrative functions, thecompany commander delegates the over-all supervisionof administration to his executive officer.The company commander delegates the functionsof record keeping and reporting to the unit administrativewarrant officer and the first sergeant.The company commander signs or initials theserecords and reports as required, and he constantlyverifies their accuracy to insure efficient administrationin his unit.Section II. SUPPLY352. GENERAL. a. Responsibility. The company commanderis responsible for all supplies and equipmentissued to his unit. Although the system foraccounting for these items may be informal incombat, the company commander sees that his companyis completely equipped, that equipment iseffectively used, and that equipment on hand isactually needed. He enforces supply disciplinethrough constant care, supervision, maintenance,preservation, and conservation of all types of suppliesand equipment.b. Supply discipline. Good supply discipline promotescombat efficiency. It includes proper maintenance,salvage, vehicle recovery, evacuation ofcaptured materiel, prevention of hoarding, and theindoctrination of his men with the importance ofsupply. Supply discipline is acquired only throughtraining and enforcement by the officers and thenoncommissioned officers of the unit. This training345

stresses the proper use of food, clothing, weapons,fuel, and motor vehicles, and the practice of hygieneand sanitation. The equipment given to andcarried by each man should be that which he actuallyneeds. No individual should be permitted tothrow away prescribed equipment, to use transportationunnecessarily, or to handle supplies carelesslyor wastefully.c. Duties of company administrative group. The companycommander makes timely requests for supplies,distributes them to his men, and assists inthe supply of attached units. He is assisted by themess and supply personnel in supplying his unit.(For supply procedures within the infantry regiment,see FM 7-30.)346(1) The company mess personnel draw rations,check them, and divide them intomeals. The cooks prepare the meals anddistribute them and water to the company.(2) The company supply personnel are thesupply sergeant, the armorers, and anorderly. They request, draw, check, andissue all company supplies except rationsand water. The armorers, in addition totheir supply functions, make minor repairson weapons and equipment. Theorderly drives the company headquartersgeneral utility vehicle. The normal dutypost of the supply personnel is at the companysupply point.

353. TRANSPORTATION. Transportation for suppliesis provided by the rifle company's organictransportation, by a kitchen truck and trailerwhich is part of the regimental kitchen train, andby battalion-section vehicles of the regimental ammunitiontrain. To centralize the control of thesevehicles and to relieve company commanders ofadministrative detail, the kitchen and ammunitiontrain vehicles are assigned organically to the battalionsection of the regimental service company'sservice platoon. Regimental and battalion vehiclesmove supplies as far forward as practicable. Thecompany's lighter vehicles and carrying partiesmove supplies the remaining distance to the troops.354. FOOD AND WATER. a. Rations are issued tothe company automatically on the basis ofstrength; however, in special situations, the companycommander often submits an informal rationrequest for the required quantity of specified typesof rations. Rations to be cooked are drawn fromthe regimental class I supply point and dividedinto meal lots at the company kitchen. 'Rations,such as the five-in-one, or the individual type, maybe handled similarly, or they may be issued directto troops by unit supply personnel.b. The company kitchen may be established inthe company area, in the battalion kitchen area, orin the regimental train bivouac. The kitchen ismoved as far forward as is consistent with thesituation. In some situations, it may be necessaryfor troops to prepare meals individually, bysquads, or by platoons.347

c. The company mess location is as near thetroops to be fed as tactical conditions permit. Thelocation should provide defilade from hostile flattrajectory fires and concealment from hostile observation.Consideration is given to vehicularroutes and to the accessibility of the location to thetroops. As many men as practicable are givenwater and hot food at mess locations, and othersare fed by carrying parties.d. Distribution is accomplished with availabletransportation. When the kitchen is not in thecompany area, kitchen trucks or organic companyvehicles transport the prepared meal forward underregimental or battalion control to a releasepoint where company guides meet their vehiclesand guide them to the company mess location.355. FUEL. a. The battalion S-4 keeps the companiesinformed of the location and the time of openingof the class III supply points. Gasoline and oilfor company transportation are obtained by fillingthe empty tanks of the vehicles or by the exchangeof empty 5-gallon gasoline drums for full ones atthe class III supply points. Requisitions, eitherformal or informal, usually are not required.b. Gasoline for kitchen ranges or cooking sets isobtained by exchanging 5-gallon gasoline drums atthe class III supply point.356. CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT. a. The companyis issued clothing and equipment as authorized byT/A 21, T/O&E 7-17, and other directives. Replacementof clothing and equipment is obtainedby informal requisition to the battalion S-4. He348

notifies the company supply personnel when theymay obtain needed supplies.b. The informal requisition to replace lost ordestroyed items such as radios, watches, or armsis accompanied by a certificate of loss or destruction,which is informal and states the circumstancesof the loss or destruction.c. Damaged equipment is evacuated and repairedor replaced. Equipment which cannot berepaired within the company is sent by the firstavailable means to the battalion S-4. The battalionS-4 repairs and returns the item to the company,or procures and issues a replacement itemto the company. If the item cannot be repairedwithin the regiment, the regimental S-4 replacesthe item with a serviceable one. The battalion S-4is notified of the location and the damage of allequipment which the company cannot evacuate tothe rear.357. AMMUNITION. a. The basic load of ammunitionfor a rifle company is the number of roundsby type carrier on the company's organic transportation.This is a fixed quantity of ammunitionand is prescribed by the Department of the Army.Issues from the basic load are made to weaponscrews and to the men. The basic load is maintainedby drawing on the battalion section of the regimentalammunition train. The company commanderis responsible for the availability and the adequatesupply of ammunition for his platoons.Whenever the company is unable to draw enoughammunition to maintain its basic load, this fact is349

eported to the battalion commander. Platoonleaders supervise the delivery of ammunition tothe weapons and to the men. Leaders keep theircommanders informed of the amount of ammunitionon hand.b. In most situations, each rifle company establishesa company ammunition supply point as closeto the forward elements as enemy fire, defilade, andvehicular routes permit. From this supply point,ammunition is delivered to the men or weapons.The supply sergeant operates the company ammunitionsupply point.c. As ammunition from basic loads is used, it isreplaced by transferring and consolidating loadsso that vehicles thus emptied may be dispatched tothe battalion ammunition supply point for resupply.Vehicles dispatched for ammunition carry aninformal request which states the amount, the,type, and the caliber of ammunition needed. Battlefieldrecovery from casualties also is a source ofammunition replenishment.d. During offensive combat, ammunition supplyis mobile.. Before entry into combat, the companycommander may issue extra ammunition; the typesand quantities depend on the tactical situation.Mobility is permitted by providing the companywith only the amount of ammunition needed untila replenishment can be accomplished. Ammunitionis replenished whenever needed, either directlyfrom company vehicles, which are kept asclose to the troops and weapons as the tacticalsituation permits, or by hand carry from thistransportation. Vehicles dispatched to the battal-350

ion ammunition supply point follow the route ofammunition advance so that the ammunition supplypoint may be found easily if it displaces forward.e. During defensive combat, it is essential tohave a continuity of fire; therefore, enough ammunitionis available to every gun position. Normally,the company weapons carriers are under companycontrol. The placing of ammunition on position isnot a matter of routine. Ammunition to be placedon positions is determined by careful estimates ofthe amounts that will be expended before the timethat replenishment can be expected. Based on acareful estimate of ammunition needs, the companycommander issues instructions for ammunitionto be placed at weapons positions. This mustbe enough to permit continual fire by the weapon.Basic loads are replenished immediately, and theamount placed at weapons is considered as expended.If the ammunition at weapon positions isnot fired, it is picked up by the company, returnedto the basic load, and, if necessary, reported tohigher commanders as excess to the basic load.Basic loads are reduced to their normal level byfiring excess amounts before they are replenished.If covered routes are available, the ammunition vehiclesmay move directly to the platoon defenseareas, where the loads are distributed to gun positionsor to each man. When conditions prohibit themovement of weapons carriers forward of the companysupply point, the ammunition is distributedby hand carry from that point.351

358. ROLLS. a. Rolls contain articles needed by thetroops for their personal comfort. These includesuch articles as shelter halves, blankets, or sleepingbags. To avoid confusion and to aid delivery,rolls may be made up uniformly for all men,squads, or other small groups. Rolls usually arecarried on the company general utility vehicle.b. Rolls are delivered when the duration of thehalt and the comfort of the troops warrant. Duringoffensive combat, rolls may be sent forwardwith the supper and collected by the mess personnelafter breakfast. In defensive situations, therolls may be delivered and collected in the samemanner, or they may be left with the men. Thebattalion supply officer supervises the delivery ofrolls to companies and recovers them at the timeprescribed by the battalion commander.359. MISCELLANEOUS ADMINISTRATIVE MATTERS.During combat, many administrative matters aredeferred. When the company is in reserve or ina rest camp, these matters are completed underthe supervision of the company commander.a. Bathing of men. Normally, a division bath unitis available to the company in the regimental area.b. Replacement of clothing. Except for the exchangeof socks, it may be impracticable to issueclean clothing to companies in contact with theenemy; consequently, the company commander arrangeswith the battalion S-4 to furnish his menclean clothing when his company is in reserve orin a rest area.c. Repair and cleaning of clothing and equipment.352

When the company is in reserve or in a rest area,the company commander inspects his troops. Hehas them make minor repairs to their clothing andequipment. If laundry facilities are not available,the men wash their own clothing.d. Burial of the dead. By checking with the regimentalgraves registration section, the companycommander verifies that his dead are found, evacuated,and buried, and that their personal effectsare collected and forwarded.360. ORDERS. Supply matters in the company ordermay include the following:a. Location of the company and the battalionammunition supply points.b. Route of ammunition advances (in attack).c. Amount of ammunition to be placed on position.d. Disposition of company vehicles.e. Amount of field fortification material or infantryentrenching equipment to be available.f. Plan for feeding.g. Detailing of guides and hand carrying parties.h. Delivery of rolls.Section III.MEDICAL SERVICE361. GENERAL. The rifle company commander isresponsible for the functioning of medical serviceto provide for the health and sanitation of his command.This service is provided by Medical Departmentenlisted men from the battalion medical pla-353

toon of the regimental medical company who areattached to the rifle company.362. PERSONNEL AND DUTIES. The Medical Departmentenlisted men attached to the rifle companyare called company aid men. They are attachedto the company when it is on the march, inbivouac, or in combat. Their duties include thefollowing:a. Administer emergency medical treatment.b. Direct walking wounded to the battalion aidstation or previously arranged ambulance loadingposts.c. Move those unable to walk to protected places,to await litter bearers or cross country ambulances.d. Keep the rifle company commander informedof the medical situation.e. Keep the battalion surgeon informed of themedical and tactical situations.f. Attach an emergency medical tag to the dead,when time and the tactical situation permit.g. Assist the company commander in supervisingsanitation within the company area.363. MEDICAL EVACUATION. The battalion medicalplatoon operates the battalion aid station andevacuates the sick and wounded to it. The battalionsurgeon commands the platoon. Litter bearersor cross country ambulances accomplish the evacuation.The litter bearers and ambulance driversalso act as messengers, maintain contact with companyaid men, and administer emergency medical354

treatment to patients being evacuated to the battalionaid station. Cross country ambulances areused as far forward as the tactical situation permits.When these ambulances are unable to reachthe casualties, litter bearers carry the seriouslywounded to the battalion aid station or to ambulanceloading posts.364. ORDERS. The company order includes the locationof the battalion aid station.365. SANITATION AND PERSONAL HYGIENE. Unitcommanders supervise the sanitation of their unitsand of the areas their units occupy. (See AR40-205 and 40-210.) Medical Department-personnelact as advisers in the technical aspects of sanitation,Each individual is responsible for the enforcementof personal sanitary measures to protectthe health of other men and to closely check hisown.well-being. The care of feet is particularly importantin cold and wet weather. Poor disciplineregarding the care of feet may cause trench foot.When shoes and socks are wet and no replacementis available, the feet must be massaged to maintainthe necessary circulation of blood, and wet sockswrung out twice a day. Leaders must exercise thestrongest discipline to enforce these health precautions.Section IV. MOTOR MAINTENANCE366. RESPONSIBILITY. The company commander isresponsible for the operation and maintenance ofhis motor equipment. He discharges this responsi-95:3696 o-49-24 355

ility by the selection of drivers and by personalobservation and frequent inspection of vehicles,tools, and drivers.367. DRIVERS. The company commander and hisleaders direct and supervise the activities of thedrivers. Each driver should be assigned to a definitevehicle and held responsible for its maintenance.Drivers use their vehicle tools to performdaily and weekly preventive maintenance services.These services include inspecting, cleaning, tightening,and the care of tools and accessories. Thedriver does not lubricate any part of the vehiclewhere overlubrication would result in damage. Hedoes not tighten any part of the vehicle that involvesan adjustment which should be made by amechanic. Drivers accompany their vehicles andact as mechanic's helpers when maintenance isperformed on the company or regimental level.368. MAINTENANCE. a. Company-level maintenanceon rifle-company vehicles is performed bythe mechanics of the battalion headquarters company.It includes repairs, run-in tests, lubricationand adjustments, limited battlefield recovery, andoverflow from driver's maintenance. The monthlypreventive maintenance service is performed onthe company level.b. Regimental-level maintenance is performedby the maintenance section of the service company'sservice platoon. This section reinforces themaintenance performed on the company level, andit performs the semiannual preventive maintenanceservice.356

CHAPTER 11THE AIRBORNE RIFLE COMPANYSection I. GENERAL369. REFERENCES. For references on general discussionof airborne operations, data relative totroop movements by air, tactical doctrine and planningprocedures for airborne operations, techniquesof loading aircraft, and technical trainingdoctrine for parachutists, see appendix VIII.370. PURPOSE AND SCOPE. This chapter covers thetactical employment of the airborne rifle companyin its primary mission of air assault. After it reorganizesfollowing an airborne assault landing, theairborne rifle company operates tactically the sameas the rifle company. Therefore, most of the tacticaldoctrine of the rifle company applies to theairborne rifle company's ground operations. Thischapter emphasizes doctrine peculiar to the airbornerifle company-the differences which resultfrom its arrival method in the combat area.371. ROLE OF THE AIRBORNE RIFLE COMPANY.The airborne rifle company is trained and equippedto enter combat by parachute or glider. It normallyuses the parachute. It can drop into unpre-357

pared areas on any terrain that is relatively freefrom obstacles dangerous to a man. The companycan fight immediately upon landing; however, itcan fight most effectively after a time intervalwhich permits it to recover all combat equipmentand to assemble as a tactical unit under the controlof its company commander. The company usuallyfights as a part of a battalion.372. ORGANIZATION. The airborne rifle companyhas about the same organization as the rifle company.(See fig. 1.) For minor differences in menand equipment, see the current T/O&E.373. EQUIPMENT. a. For ground combat, the airbornerifle company has practically the same equipmentas the rifle company, but it requires specialequipment to enter combat by parachutes; personnelparachutes, aerial delivery parachutes, and cargoparachutes are required. Individual equipmentcontainers are used for the heavy or bulky itemsof equipment and supplies that are carried on theparachutist; each man carries his individual weapon.Aerial delivery containers are used to parachutethe equipment and supplies not carried bythe men. Weapons carriers can be dropped in specialcontainers by cargo parachutes. Each parachutistcarries as much equipment as possible sothat the company is ready to fight soon afterlanding.b. The airborne rifle company uses special signaldevices to assist the rapid assembly of troopsfollowing the assault landing. For a detailed dis-358

cussion of these signal devices, see the current fieldmanual and current technical manuals.c. The weapons carriers of the company can bedelivered by' parachute, glider, or assault transport.They may accompany the troops in the assaultlanding, or they may land later under thecontrol of the regimental or higher commander.Vehicles not moved by air join the company whenfriendly ground forces are contacted. All airlandedvehicles are combat-loaded with suppliesand equipment. During the initial phases of theairborne operation, transportation may be limitedby a lack of aircraft or suitable landing areas. Toincrease mobility, maximum use is made of capturedtransportation.d. All communication equipment in the airbornerifle company can be parachuted with the men; forexample, each operator carries his radio to permithim to enter the radio net promptly on landing.Telephones and some wire are carried by parachutists,and wire in bulk usually is dropped inaerial delivery containers.e. Company kitchens do not go with the companyin the assault echelon, but are brought intothe airhead under the control of higher commandersas soon as the situation permits. Until thecompany kitchens arrive, the troops use individualrations and mess equipment.374. SUPPLY AND EVACUATION. a. The supply andevacuation of an airborne force is by air until alink-up is made with friendly forces. Air supply359

and evacuation usually are coordinated by the divisioncommander or by a higher commander.b. Accompanying supplies are supplies of allclasses which the airborne unit carries into theairhead. The amount depends on the initial combatrequirements, the number and the allowablecargo load of the aircraft allotted to the company,and the logistical support to be given by higherunits after the company lands. These supplies usuallyare enough for 48 to 72 hours of combat withouta resupply. Therefore, accompanying suppliesmay exceed the amount the company actually carrieswith it in the ground attack. These additionalsupplies usually are recovered by battalion or regimentand placed in supply points.c. Parachutists carry their own rations and theammunition for their individual weapons. Ammunitionfor light crew-served weapons and limitedamounts of ammunition for the heavier companyweapons can be carried in equipment containerson the parachutist. Ammunition for these crewservedweapons also is dropped in aerial deliverycontainers. Upon landing, the weapons crew orother previously selected men promptly recover theequipment and supplies which the company needsto carry into combat.d. Rolls carried by parachutists are kept smalland light to keep the troops mobile after they land.Such items as toilet articles and extra socks arecarried by the individual in accordance with regimentalstandard operating procedures.e. The company aid men enter combat with thecompany. Litter bearers from the battalion medi-360

cal platoon may be attached for the air movement,landing, and reorganization. Casualties are heldat medical installations of higher units until evacuationis possible.f. When the airborne rifle company reorganizesfollowing the assault landing, its supply and evacuationbecome the same as the rifle company's.375. SUPPORTING ARMS AND WEAPONS. a. Artillery.Light artillery landed by parachute, glider, or assaulttransport accompanies or closely follows theassault landing of the infantry troops. Forwardobservers land with their respective rifle companies.They keep abreast of the situation and areready to direct artillery fires when their artilleryunits are in a firing position. When the airhead isestablished, medium artillery may be landed. Theprinciples of field artillery employment generallyapply within the restrictions of limited transportationand ammunition, decentralized control, anddifficulty of reorganization after landing.b. Combat aviation. Cooperating tactical aircraftgive air protection during the air movement, neutralizetargets in the objective area before the assaultlanding, and give close support to airborneunits during the ground assault. During the initialstages of the attack, cooperating aircraft supplementartillery, antiaircraft, and antitank weapons-whichusually are limited in number. Combataviation also supplements the striking powerof assault troops which is weakened by the absenceof friendly armor.c. Tanks. Although the airborne division has no361

organic tank units, it is normal to attach tank unitsto the division for sustained combat. The attachmentof these units males the airborne divisionequivalent to the infantry division in: tankstrength. Tank reinforcements usually join theairborne division when it contacts friendly forcesafter its airborne assault landing. Tanks attachedto or supporting the airborne rifle company areused as prescribed in FM 17-32.d. Regimental and battalion supporting weapons. Exceptfor their lack of organic tanks, the airbornebattalion and regiment have practically the samesupporting weapons as the infantry battalion andregiment. As in all ground combat, the supportingweapons give close support to the rifle companies.During the initial stages of the ground attack, ashortage of weapons carriers limits the displacementof heavy supporting weapons and also limitsthe amount of ammunition at firing positions.376. ANTIAIRCRAFT SECURITY. For defense againstan air attack, the airborne rifle company dependschiefly on passive measures. (See par. 12.) Antiaircraftunits attached to battalion or regimentgive additional security. Cooperating aircraftmaintain local air superiority.377. ANTITANK DEFENSE. Airborne troops areparticularly vulnerable to an enemy tank attackbecause of no friendly armor in the airhead. Initially,reliance is placed on antitank mines androcket launchers. The divisional and regimentalantitank weapons, which land with or soon after362

the assault elements, give some of the antitank defenseusually given by tanks. The antitank weaponsand the antitank measures of the airborne riflecompany in ground combat are practically thesame as those of the rifle company. (See par. 13.)Section II. PREPARATIONS FOR THE AIRBORNEATTACK378. GENERAL. a. Airborne operations require detailedplanning at all levels. Plans which are coordinatedin detail with participating troop carrierunits include the selection of drop and landingzones, the allocation of aircraft, the air movementplan, and the marshaling plan.b. For coordination, airborne commanders usuallyparticipate in the detailed planning of the nexthigher unit. The security requirements determinethe time the airborne rifle company commander isinformed of an airborne mission in which his companywill participate. Until the units are sealedin marshaling camps, operational information isgiven only to those who need it to perform theirduties. The briefing plan of the division or highercommander indicates when the unit commanderswill receive portions of the operations plan. Thecompany commander usually receives a warningorder at least one week before the operation.c. For an airborne attack, the company does itspreliminary planning and preparing at its basecamp before moving to the marshaling camp. Itmakes final plans and preparations in a marshalingcamp near the departure airfield. A base camp363

near the departure airfield may serve also as themarshaling camp.d. Planning is continuous until the operation isover. The company commander amplifies orchanges his plans to meet changes in the situationor in the plans of higher commanders.e. The company commander usually receives thewarning order while in the base camp. The warningorder may be in the form of the battalion operationsplan. Under exceptionally strict securityrequirements, the company commander may receiveonly general information until after the companyis sealed in a marshaling camp.379. BATTALION COMMANDER'S ORDERS. The battalionorder gives the company its mission and designatesthe supporting and attached units. If thecompany is an assault company, it is given a definiteterrain objective or a series of objectives, azone of action, a direction of attack, a line of departureor attack position, and the time or conditionsto begin the attack. The battalion plans andorders also includea.Information of the enemy and the terrain inthe area of operations.b. Location of drop zones or landing zones forthe battalion.c. Plan for reorganization after landing. Thisincludes the location of company assembly areas,the assembly aids, the method of collecting stragglers,reports, and security measures.d. Data on the air movement. This includes thelocation of the departure airfield; allocation of air-364

craft; composition of the aircraft serials; and thetime for the loading, the take-off, and the arrivalat the destination.e. Data on marshaling. This includes the locationof the marshaling camp, the time and methodof movement to it, and the activities inside it; liaisonwith troop carrier units; and plans for loadingaircraft. Data on marshaling may be in a separateorder if security requires withholding the airbornemission until arrival in the marshaling camp.f. Communication within the battalion.g. Plan for reconnaissance after the landing.h. Coordination with adjacent units.i. Antiaircraft and antitank security measurestaken on landing and during the attack.j. Instruction to glider pilots attached to thebattalion on landings.k. Recognition between airborne units and theforces making the ground link-up, when applicable.I. Details of air-sea rescue, when applicable.m. Details of time and place of arrival and theuse of troops and equipment in the follow-up echelon,when applicable.n. Organization of and instructions to the rearechelon.o. Supply and evacuation plan, including themethod of recovering supplies and special measuresfor air resupply and air evacuation.p. Alternate plans for accomplishing the mission.380. ORGANIZATION FOR THE ATTACK. a. Forthe airborne assault, the company adjusts its or-365

ganization to meet the requirements of the battalionplans and orders. The company may bereinforced, particularly if it is to reorganize in aseparate assembly area or if it is to go on a separatemission after landing. Attachments are executedbefore the move to the marshaling camp orimmediately after arrival in it. This gives thecompany commander time to coordinate the use ofhis attached units and to control the preparationsfor the air movement. In organizing for combat,the company may be divided into assault, followup,and rear echelons.b. The assault echelon of the company consistsof the troops and equipment initially landed byparachute or glider to seize the company objective.The entire airborne rifle company, with its organicweapons and transportation, can enter combatby parachute, glider, or assault transport;however, it may be necessary to leave some personneland equipment behind during the assaultlanding.c. The follow-up echelon is the combat portionof the company which is not included in the assaultechelon because of an aircraft shortage orbecause of the situation. It joins the assault echelonas soon as possible after the airhead is establishedor after a link-up is made between the assaultechelon and friendly ground forces.d. When weapons carriers, company kitchens,organic trucks, trailers, and their operating personnelcannot be included in the assault echelon orlater landings of the assault, they should be includedin the follow-up echelon.366

e. The rear echelon includes any portion of thecompany not needed for combat. It remains behindto do administrative work which cannot bedone efficiently in the combat area. This echelonis kept as small as possible. Its organization andfunctions usually are prescribed by the battalioncommander or by a higher commander. The rearechelon may include guards for organizationalproperty, personnel temporarily disqualified physicallyfor airborne assault landings, and, in someinstances, the company kitchens and mess personnel.The rear echelon normally operates underregimental or higher control.381. RECONNAISSANCE. a. The company commander'sreconnaissance before the airborne assaultlanding ordinarily is limited to a study of maps,terrain models, and photographs of the objectivearea. For other information of the enemy andthe terrain, he relies on higher commanders. Heseeks the following information on which to basehis attack plans:(1) Nature of the drop zone, or landing zoneif landing in gliders.(2) Nature of his assembly area.(3) Location of critical points or areas heldby the enemy in or near his zone ofaction.(4) Location and types of obstacles in hiszone of action.(5) Location of favorable routes of approachto the company objective.b. The company commander plans his after-367

landing reconnaissance before he begins the airmovement.382. MARSHALING CAMP. a. Marshaling is the processin which units participating in an airborneoperation move to temporary camps at or near departureairfields, complete their combat preparations,and load into aircraft ready for departure.b. A marshaling camp is a sealed area for thefinal preparation of troops for combat. Communicationszone personnel construct, maintain, andoperate this camp. During the marshaling, theyrelieve participating airborne units of as many administrativeproblems as possible. For secrecy,the camp is inclosed by wire or other obstacles.Airborne units enter marshaling camps for closeliaison with troop carrier units, for briefing troops,for secrecy, and for control of their final preparationsfor the air movement. The company marshalsin one camp as a part of the battalion orhigher unit. The company normally has 4 days inthe marshaling camp to-(1) Brief the troops.(2) Establish liaison with troop carrier unitstransporting the company.(3) Conduct a final equipment inspection.(4) Complete procurement of supplies andequipment.(5) Issue supplies and special items of equipment.(6) Complete the packing of aerial deliverycontainers.368

(7) Complete operational and administrativeplanning for the ground attack.(8) Combat load aerial delivery containersand other equipment and supplies intothe aircraft.383. BRIEFING. a. The troops are not briefed untilthey are sealed in the marshaling camp, whereuponthey are briefed in exact detail. Briefing aidsare used, including low-altitude photos of the operationsarea, large-scale maps showing enemydefenses and obstacles, and terrain models suchas rubber relief maps and sand tables.b. Platoon leaders brief their troops to let eachman know enough of the platoon and companyplan to perform his duties. Troops and leaders alsoare briefed on the plans of battalion and higherunits so that, in case of inaccurate landings or unexpectedenemy resistance during the landing andreorganization, they can conduct themselves accordingto the over-all plans of the higher units.Forward observers and attached units are includedin the company briefing. Glider pilots are briefedwith the troops they transport, since they mayhave to fight with them. All troops are briefedon alternate plans for accomplishing the companymission.c. In briefing the troops, the reorganization planis stressed particularly because, upon landing, eachman's ability to orient himself on the ground andto locate the assembly area is an important factorin regaining command control of the troops.369

384. LOADING-GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. a.Loading troops, equipment, and supplies into aircraftis a command responsibility. Aircraft loadingis planned in great detail because of the aircraftcharacteristics and the restrictions for safetyin flight. The company loading plan is based on thebattalion loading plan. Loading is supervised bytroop carrier representatives, usually the pilots,,who have final decision on matters affecting theiraircraft.b. Stations is the hour the aircraft must be completelycombat loaded, with all airborne and troopcarrier personnel in their places ready for thetake-off.385. LOADING FORMS. a. The'loading forms usedby the company are the air loading table and theflight manifest. The air loading table is a datasheet which contains general information of theload that actually goes into each aircraft. Theform usually is prepared by the company commanderand forwarded to battalion. When approved,this form is the basis for preparing flightmanifests.b. The flight manifest is an exact record byname, rank, and serial number of the personnel ineach aircraft. It also describes the loaded equipmentand supplies other than those carried on themen. In addition, it shows the load computations,the number of the aircraft, and other pertinentinformation. The airborne commander in each aircraftis responsible for preparing the flight manifest;however, the company commander usually370

prepares the form for all personnel and equipmentin his unit. A separate copy of the form is madefor each aircraft. The number of copies and theirdistribution is prescribed by higher commanders.(For a discussion and samples of these forms, seeFM 71-30.)386. AIRCRAFT PARKING DIAGRAM. a. The companycommander receives an aircraft parking diagramfrom the battalion commander. This is adiagram of the departure airfield. It shows theexact location and number of each aircraft allottedto the company. All aircraft are marked, usuallyby chalk on both sides of the fuselage, with numberscorresponding to the aircraft numbers on theflight manifests. For night loading, individual aircraftor parking sites may be identified by lights orluminous markers. Easily visible marking symbolsare used to speed identification and loadingand to reduce confusion on the airfield.b. The aircraft parking diagram also shows thelocation of the reserve aircraft kept at the departureairfield to replace last-minute failures.The loading plan is flexible, and alternate plansare prepared to reload on a priority basis in caseof a last-minute shortage of aircraft.387. LOADING EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES. Equipmentand supplies not carried on the men areloaded several hours before stations time. The menassigned to ride in an aircraft load the equipmentinto that aircraft. Air crews may assist in loading.The troop carrier units provide loading aids such853696 0-49 25 371

as ramps, cranes, load spreaders, and tie-downequipment. The company commander determinesthe adequacy of these aids. Transportation coordinationto and from the departure airfield and theloading schedule are made by the battalion orhigher commander. The company commander supervisesthe loading of equipment and supplies forhis company and sees that every load is safelybalanced and securely lashed.388. LOADING PERSONNEL. a. The movement fromthe marshaling camp to the departure airfield isplanned and closely supervised to get the troopsinto the right aircraft before stations time. Thismovement usually is planned and coordinated bythe battalion or higher commander. Before themovement, the men are organized into aircraftload groups, and the airborne commander in eachaircraft supervises and controls his load group.Routes to the airfield are reconnoitered and guidesare posted to prevent confusion or delay. Beforethe march, the aircraft load commanders are conductedon a reconnaissance of the route and the aircraftparking area. Upon arrival at the aircraftparking area, groups move to their assigned airplanesor gliders and prepare to load.b. In a motor march, personnel parachutes mayaccompany the men. In a foot march, personnelparachutes are dumped at the aircraft before thetroops arrive. Movement on the airfield is controlledby the air force. Ground traffic is strictlycontrolled on runways and taxi strips to preventconfusion and accidents. Before entering the air-372

craft, troops and equipment are given a final inspectionby load commanders. Particular attentionis given to the parachutes, and extra parachutesare kept available to replace last-minute defectives.The company commander supervises the loadingof his company.c. The following principles apply in loading aircraftfor airborne operations:(1) Enough men ride in each glider to unlashand unload the glider at the destination.This prevents confusion after thelanding and permits the rapid assemblyand recovery of equipment.(2) Commanders strive for tactical unity inloading. Tactical unity of squad and platoonsusually can be achieved in individualaircraft. The company is preferablyintact in a single serial. Supportingweapons and ammunition accompanytheir crews.(3) Key men and critical equipment are distributedthroughout several aircraft.Thus, the loss of any one aircraft does notcause excessive casualties to these men orexcessive loss of such equipment.Section III.AIR MOVEMENT, LANDING, ANDREORGANIZATION389. AIR MOVEMENT. The air movement from thedeparture airfield to the drop or landing zones iscontrolled by the commander of the troop carrierunit which transports the airborne units. During373

this movement, the company commander relinquishesthe tactical control of his troops and doesnot regain it until after the landing. The air movementis made according to the battalion or regimentalair movement table.390. AIR MOVEMENT TABLE. a. The air movementtable is a form prepared by the ground force commanderin coordination with the air force commander.It assigns aircraft to the airborne units,designates the number and type of aircraft in eachserial, and specifies the departure area, time ofloading, time of take-off, and other pertinent data.The air movement table of commanders down tobattalion is based-on that of the next higher unit.The battalion may not prepare an air movementtable. (For discussion and samples, see FM 71-30).b. Pathfinder serials precede the main troop carriercolumn. They drop parachute pathfinderteams who operate navigational aids. Parachuteserials normally precede glider serials. This permitsthe parachutists to capture and clear the landingzones. As the parachute serials approach thedrop zone, the pilots warn the troops in time forthem to make last-minute equipment inspectionsand to prepare for exit. Before crossing the dropzone, the air column reduces speed. The dropis made on the pilot's signal.391. ASSAULT LANDING. a. The company usuallylands as close as possible to the objective to preventexhaustion of the troops from carrying heavy374

combat loads or manhandling heavy equipment.Greater surprise is gained by landing directly onthe objective; however, this increases the problemsof reorganization and control when the objecti;eis held by the enemy.b. The airborne rifle company usually drops ona single drop zone as part of the battalion. Theparachutists carry as much equipment as possible.This increases their readiness for action and reducesthe assembly time. Additional equipmentand supplies are dropped in separate containers.(See par. 374.) During descent and upon landing,each parachutist orients himself. Immediately uponlanding, he removes his parachute and checkshis weapons and equipment. The company can bedropped in approximately one minute. Ground dispersionin landing depends on the type and formationof airplanes, the jumping altitude, the wind,and the skill of the pilots and parachutists.c. When a company lands by glider, it usuallylands on a single landing zone as part of the battalion.The time required for landing the companyin gliders depends on the aircraft type, altitude,number, speed, and formation, the skill of theglider pilots, the terrain, and the landing characteristicsof the gliders. The ground dispersion ofthe gliders inside a landing zone depends on thenumber of gliders, the obstacles to landing, thelanding characteristics of the gliders, and the skillof their pilots. Assault transports have the samerelative characteristics as gliders.d. After landing, the glider pilots come underthe command of the ground force commander. Up-375

on landing, personnel in the glider promptly unloadall equipment and supplies.e. When the company enters combat by parachute,weapons carriers may land by glider. Whenthis is the case, they may land on the drop zoneused by the company and battalion-after the dropzone is cleared of personnel and equipment thatwould obstruct glider landings. The weapons carriersmay land in separate landing zones under thecontrol of the regimental or higher commander.392. REORGANIZATION. Reorganization after anairborne landing consists of collecting equipment,assembling the tactical units, and regaining commandcontrol of the units. During the reorganization,the company is extremely vulnerable to enemyground attack; therefore, this critical phase isexecuted with all possible speed-even to the extentof limiting security. The company reorganizesaccording to a prearranged plan. It uses predesignatedassembly areas, assembly aids, and identificationmarkings for personnel and equipment.Pathfinder teams already on the drop zone aid inthe assembly of troops.393. ASSEMBLY AREA. The company assembly areais designated by the battalion commander beforethe drop. It usually is a part of the battalion assemblyarea unless the company has an independentmission. Alternate plans for reorganizationare prepared in case enemy action denies the selectedassembly areas. The company assemblyarea is as near the drop zone as practicable. For376

daylight landings, it provides cover and concealment.For night landings, the assembly area maybe located on the drop or landing zone. It shouldbe free of enemy troops and small-arms fire, andnear favorable routes of approach to the objective.Good assembly areas are identified easily on theground by woods, roads, railroads, hills, or otherprominent landmarks. An easily identified landmarkserves as a reference point by which the assemblyarea may be located, using specific distanceand direction.394. ASSEMBLY AIDS. Assembly areas are identifiedfurther by assembly aids installed by designatedmen immediately after the landing. For adaylight assembly, these aids may be flags, smoke,flares, panels, and special electronic devices. Fora night assembly, the aids may be flares, lights,fluorescent panels, white tape, sound, and specialinfrared and electronic devices. Battalion or regimentalpersonnel usually install these assemblyaids. When the company has a separate assemblyarea, it may establish its own assembly aids. Pathfinderteams are equipped with aids and can identifyassembly areas before the troops land.395. CONTROL POINT. To direct the troops to theirunit areas, a control point is established by battalionor regiment in or near the assembly area.The control point is identified by assembly aidsand must be located easily. Predesignated guidesfrom the company report to the battalion or regimentalcontrol point immediately after landing to377

assist in directing the company to its area. Thecompany also establishes a company control pointin the company assembly area; and the platoonusually establishes a platoon control point in theplatoon area. Guides from the platoon are stationedat the company control point. For nightassembly, company control points may be establishedon the drop or landing zone.396. IDENTIFICATION OF PERSONNEL AND EQUIP-MENT. Positive, rapid identification of troops andequipment contributes greatly to the speed andprecision of the reorganization. Personnel of variousunits wear distinctive markings. For example,colored cloth patches may be worn on headgear untilassembly is complete. Officers and other keypersonnel wear additional distinctive markings.Aerial delivery containers are marked in a simple,easily recognizable manner so they can be identifiedreadily by the unit to which they belong. Luminousmarkers or colored lights may be used innight landings. Aerial delivery containers aremarked to identify the contents. Gliders and assaulttransports may be marked to identify thetype of equipment they carry and the unit to whichthat equipment belongs. The airborne divisionusually standardizes the marking of its personneland equipment. Recognition aids must be unintelligibleto the enemy.397. ASSEMBLY. a. Using assembly aids accordingto prearranged plans, parachutists assemble initiallyby plane loads right on the drop zone itself.378

They check personnel and equipment. The groupsthen move directly to the control point, carryingwith them the equipment needed for the attack.When they reach the control point, they are directedto their respective assembly areas.b. Troops landed by glider or assault transportpromptly unload and move by aircraft loads directlyto their assembly areas. Pilots accompanytheir loads to the assembly area. There they areorganized into tactical units under their own officers.They pass to regimental or higher unit controlas soon as the situation permits.398. SECURITY. The first parachute elements toland usually have security missions which includerapidly gaining and maintaining the security of thedrop zone, and protecting the assembly of otherunits. All commanders, however, are responsiblefor their own security during reorganization, regardlessof the security provided by higher units.The size of the security force depends on the expectedenemy situation and the terrain, with particularemphasis on the enemy routes of approach.A rifle company may be assigned such a securitymission. Having assembled on the drop zone, thesecurity force elements move out on the mission.This lets security groups reach their assignedareas in minimum time. Any enemy troops on ornear the drop zone are engaged by the nearestparachute troops upon landing.399. COMMUNICATION. To aid command controland to speed up reorganization, radio nets are379

opened upon landing. Until assembly is complete,platoons and attached units periodically reporttheir status in personnel and equipment, and thecompany sends similar reports to battalion. Wirenormally is not laid during the reorganization.Messengers may be exchanged in, the assemblyarea.400. SEPARATED PERSONNEL. Troops landed inwrong areas assemble rapidly under the seniorofficer or noncommissioned officer present. He establishescontact with their respective headquartersas soon as possible. Lacking other orders, suchgroups direct their efforts toward accomplishingthe general mission. Individual stragglers join thenearest unit and rejoin their own units as soon asthe situation permits.401. RECONNAISSANCE. Ground reconnaissancebegins during the reorganization. Patrols are sentto reconnoiter the objective and routes to it, and toseek information of the enemy. The company commandermakes changes in platoon missions as indicatedby the ground reconnaissance, the dispositionof his units, and the enemy situation.402. COMPLETION OF REORGANIZATION. The company'sreorganization is complete when its unitsare assembled and command and fire control communicationchannels are established. It then isready to accomplish its ground mission. Becauseof inaccurate landings, enemy action, or excessivescattering, the company may start the ground at-380

tack before completing its assembly. The decisionto do this usually is made by the battalion or highercommander. In the absence of other orders, thecompany commander decides if enough of his companyis assembled to accomplish his mission.Section IV. ACCOMPLISHMENT OF GROUNDMISSION403. MOVEMENT TO OBJECTIVE. a. The assault companymoves on its missions when reorganized orwhen ordered by the battalion commander. Thecompany commander moves his platoons as rapidlyas possible, capitalizing on surprise.b. A line of departure, when used, is designatedaccording to standard doctrine for any groundcombat (see par. 177). Lack of detailed enemyinformation and lack of ground reconnaissance beforethe landing may make it difficult to select asuitable line of departure. The speed with whichthe company moves toward the objective frequentlyprevents a formal deployment along a previouslyselected line of departure. Company assemblyareas may serve as attack positions fromwhich assault companies move out in attack formations.When the objective is a considerable distancefrom the assembly area and the enemy resistanceis expected to be light, assault companies orbattalions leave the assembly area in an approachmarch formation with patrols protecting the flanksand the rear. Adjacent units are contacted to secureinformation of the enemy and the terrain.381

404. CONDUCT OF THE ATTACK. a. The principlesfor the rifle company in the attack, as prescribedin chapter 7, apply to the airborne rifle company.However, limitations imposed by an airborne assaultrequire all airborne commanders to consider,particularly during the initial stages of the attack,the following:(1) Possibility of combat immediately followingthe landing, with the resulting difficultiesof control and reconnaissance.(2) Lack of tanks.(3) Lack of medium and heavy artillery support.(4) Exposure to a counterattack on the flanksand rear.(5) Limited ammunition and other supplies.(6) Limited transportation.(7) Possible lack of reserves.(8) Difficulty of control in fast-moving or obscuresituations.(9) Inability to assemble quickly all or mostof their units, because of enemy action orinaccurate landings.b. The platoons attack according to the companyplan or as the plan is modified by the companycommander after landing. Changes in the originalattack plans are transmitted personally, by radio,or by messenger. The company commander movesto where he best can coordinate and influence theaction of his company.c. The initial stages of the attack are markedby the aggressive action of platoons and squads.These units quickly seize critical points and de-382

stroy organized resistance before the enemy recoversfrom the surprise of the assault landing.d. Enemy information available before the landingmay not have disclosed strong enemy positionsshort of the objective, thus requiring attacks notpreviously planned. Platoon and squad leaders directaggressive local actions to meet unexpectedsituations. The company commander keeps the attackmoving rapidly forward despite unexpectedenemy opposition. He accomplishes this by hispresence and example in critical areas, by shiftingsupporting fires, by modifying his scheme ofmaneuver, and by using his support.e. Organic and attached antitank weapons coverapproaches favorable to enemy armor. They areprepared for all-around defense. The use of thecompany's antitank weapons is coordinated withthose of the battalion to prevent unnecessary duplicationand to cover all favorable tank approaches.Company antitank weapons may be attachedto platoons or to security patrols, or theymay be kept under company control.f. As in any attack, supporting weapons givecontinuous close support to the assault echelon.They also are prepared to fire on dangerous approachesinto the flanks and rear. Artillery and81-mm mortar observers move with the companyto coordinate and adjust the fires requested by thecompany commander. The 60-mm mortar observersaccompany each assault platoon. To simplifycontrol during the landing, the reorganization,and the initial attack, battalion supporting weaponsmay be attached to the company for these383

periods, and company supporting weapons may beattached to assault platoons.g. A lack of weapons carriers delays the displacementof supporting weapons and also may requirestrict economy of ammunition. When supportingweapons and ammunition must be handcarried a considerable distance, additional ammunitionbearers are provided.h. The decision to hold out a support in the initialattack depends on many considerations: the widthof the company zone, the distance to the initial objective,the size of the initial objective, the anticipatedenemy opposition, the security to flanks andrear provided by the battalion commander, thesize, location, and mission of the battalion reserves,and whether it is a day or night attack. When thecompany commander holds out a support at thestart of the attack, he keeps it close enough to theassault echelon to permit its prompt use to maintainthe momentum of the attack. The support isused preferably as a complete unit; however, thecompany commander does not hesitate to sacrificeits tactical unity to repulse counterattacks fromthe flanks or rear, to exploit a local success, or tospeed up the accomplishment of his mission.i. The absence of ground reconnaissance beforethe landing and the lack of detailed enemy informationrequires the company commander constantlyto keep informed of the situation. Changesin the situation and new information of the enemyand the terrain are reported promptly to the battalioncommander and disseminated to platoonleaders, to company supporting weapons personnel,384

and to forward observers. The company commanderalso informs his security groups ofchanges in the situation, and he makes necessaryadjustments in their dispositions.405. ASSAULT. When the company launches itsassault, usual attack doctrine applies. (See par.191.) Unexpected situations may result in moreor less independent attacks by one or more platoons,each striving to reach the objective andaccomplish the company mission. In this case, aplatoon arriving within assaulting distance of theobjective arranges for the lifting of fires and forthe assault signal. Such arrangements are coordinatedthrough the company commander when possible;otherwise, the platoon leaders depend on theforward observers in their areas. The companycommander and platoon leaders press the assaultwith all possible speed and vigor. They capitalizeon the surprise gained in the landing, and on therapidity of the attack.406. REORGANIZATION. The airborne rifle companyreorganizes on the initial objective accordingto the doctrine prescribed for the rifle company.(See par. 192.) Battalion supporting weaponsattached for the landing and the initial attackmay revert to battalion control; similarly, companysupporting weapons attached to the rifle platoonsmay return to company control. Security isestablished against enemy counterattacks -fromthe flanks and rear. Reorganization on the initialobjective is accomplished quickly to permit theattack to continue exploiting surprise.385

407. CONTINUATION OF THE ATTACK. After capturingthe initial objective, the assault companycontinues the attack according to the battalionplan. The attack continues until the airhead is established.Combat during this phase follows thedoctrine outlined in chapter 7-within the airbornelimitations on equipment, supplies, and supportingarms and weapons.408. RESERVE COMPANY IN ATTACK. The doctrineof chapter 7 also applies to the reserve airbornerifle company. The reserve company commanderis restricted in planning possible missions by thelack of detailed enemy information and ground reconnaissancebefore the assault landing. He thereforestarts his ground reconnaissance promptlyafter landing. He gives particular emphasis toplans for protecting exposed flanks and the rearof the battalion. He also is prepared to take overthe mission of either assault company.409. DEFENSE. a. Defense of an airhead is basedon three prearranged lines:(1) The reconnaissance and security line,which marks the outer limit of the airhead.It corresponds to the covering forceor outposts of any defense.(2) The airhead line, which is inside the reconnaissanceand security line. It is occupiedand organized according to theprinciples of defense on a wide front,which are stated in paragraph 309.(3) The main line of resistance, which is in-386

side the airhead line. This line must beheld if the mission of the larger force isto be accomplished. In the defense it isoccupied only as a last resort. It is maintainedaccording to the principles of positiondefense.b. When the company captures its final objective,which usually is the part of the airhead linein its zone of action, it normally reverts to thedefense. The extent to which the airhead line actuallyis occupied and organized is determined bythe mission of the battalion or larger unit, theenemy capabilities, and the terrain. The companyusually is given a wide sector on the airhead line.Its conduct of the defense follows the defensivedoctrine in paragraphs 267-344.410. SUBSEQUENT OPERATIONS. The airhead phaseof ground combat ends with the link-up withfriendly ground forces at which time the airborneunits may remain in sustained ground combat orbe relieved.853696 0-49--26 --387

APPENDIX IRIFLE COMPANY ORDERS FOR ATTACKAND DEFENSESection I. ATTACK1. GENERAL SITUATION. a. Information of theenemy to include-Composition.Location.Strength.Identification.b. Information of friendly troops to includemission and location of-Next higher unit.Adjacent units.Supporting units.Covering forces.2. MISSION. a. Statement of the task to be accomplishedby the company.388b. Details of coordination to include-Time of attack.Frontage.Direction of attack.Line of departure.Formation.

3. TASKS FOR LOWER UNITS (TACTICAL INSTRUC-TIONS). a. These tasks are given under as manylettered subparagraphs as may be necessary, assigningone paragraph to each platoon and attachedunits in a sequence which designates theforward elements first. The instructions giveninclude-Attachment to each platoon, if any.Mission (objective).Frontage of attack.Direction of attack.Reorganization on the objective.b. Tactical instructions or information (exceptsignal instructions) common to two or more units,or to the entire company, not covered elsewherein paragraph 3 of the order. The instructionsinclude-Security measures.Special measures for control and coordination.4. ADMINISTRATIVE AND LOGISTICAL MATTERS.Instructions of immediate importance to tacticalunits concerning personnel, supply, and evacuationwhich are required for the operation. These in-clude-Arrangements for feeding.Amount of ammunition to be carried.Battalion ammunition supply point and routeof ammunition advance.Disposition of vehicles.Location of battalion aid station.389

5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL MATTERS. a. Ordersrelative to the use of communication means toinclude-Radio.Wire.Pyrotechnics.Signal security.b. Command posts to include-Location of battalion command post.Location of company command post or wheremessages will be sent.Tentative subsequent location of the companycommander during the attack.c. Axis of signal communication, which is indicatedby subsequent tentative command postlocations.Section II. DEFENSE1. GENERAL SITUATION. a. Information of theenemy to include-Composition.Location.Movements.Strength.Identification.Direction from which the enemy attack isexpected.Time when the enemy attack is expected.b. Information of friendly troops to includemission and location of-Next higher unit.390

Adjacent units.Supporting units.Security forces.2. MISSION. a. Statement of the tasks to be accomplishedby the company.b. Details of coordination to include-Formation.Boundaries.General trace of the main line of resistance.Limiting points.3. TASKS FOR LOWER UNITS (TACTICAL INSTRUC-TIONS). a. These tasks are given under as manylettered subparagraphs as may be necessary, assigningone subparagraph to each platoon and attachedunit in a sequence which designates theforward elements first. The instructions include-Areas and missions of each rifle platoon.Location and missions of the 60-mm mortars,57-mm rifles, and any additional weaponsattached to the company.Fire control, to include details relative to callingfor final protective fires.b. Tactical instructions (except signal instructions)common to two or more units, or to theentire company, not covered elsewhere in paragraph3 of the order. The instructions given in-clude-Security measures.Organization of ground to include type of emplacementsand priorities of work.Location of mine fields and obstacles.391

4. ADMINISTRATIVE AND LOGISTICAL MATTERS.Instructions to tactical units concerning personnel,supply, evacuation, and traffic details which are requiredfor the operation. These include-Arrangements for feeding.Amount of ammunition to be placed on position.Battalion ammunition supply point and arrangementsfor distribution.Disposition of vehicles.Location of battalion aid station and companyaid men.Sanitation measures.5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL MATTERS. a. Ordersrelative to the use of communication means toinclude-Radio.Wire.Pyrotechnics.Signal security.b. Command posts to include -Location of company and platoon commandposts.Alternate locations.392

APPENDIX IICOMBAT FORMATIONSSection I. GENERAL1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE. This appendix is a guidefor the rifle company commander, platoon leaders,and squad leaders in the training of the squad andthe platoon in combat formations. It covers thevarious types of squad and platoon formations andprescribes a uniform method of conducting drillin these formations over open ground and variedterrain. The formations are designed specificallyfor the rifle squad and platoon as organized underthe current T/O&E 7-17. (For tactical uses ofthe combat formations, see paragraphs 56 and120.)2. TRAINING. The initial training in squad andplatoon combat formations is conducted on openterrain such as a parade ground. As soon as menand units become proficient in assuming the formations,the drill is conducted on varied terrainto get practical training in the application of theformations to the terrain. After completing thetraining outlined above, the units take part intactical exercises involving an imaginary or asimulated enemy.393

Section II. RIFLE SQUAD1. ORGANIZATION. The rifle squad consists of thesquad leader, No. 1; five riflemen, Nos. 2, 3, 4, 5,and 6; an automatic rifleman, No. 7; an assistantautomatic rifleman, No. 8; and an assistant squadleader, No. 9. The automatic rifleman and hisassistant, No. 7 and No. 8, are referred to as theAR team.Note. The weapons squad consists of the squad leader,No. 1; a light machine gun team consisting of the gunner,No. 2; assistant gunner, No. 3; two ammunition bearers,No. 4 and No. 5; and a rocket launcher team consistingof the gunner, No. 6; assistant gunner, No. 7;two ammunition bearers, No. 8 and No. 9. The weaponssquad may conduct drill in combat formations similar tothe rifle squad. When moving as a part of the rifle platoon,the weapons squad usually moves in a march columnformation (par. 4) this section.2. CONDUCT OF DRILL. The instruction in combatdrill is conducted at ease. It stresses precision anddiscipline. The initial training is conducted at awalk. As soon as men understand the formation,the training speed is increased progressively untilthe movements are executed at a run. For drillpurposes, the normal interval between men is approximately5 paces; however, this distance maybe varied. In the initial stages of instruction, thesquad leader gives oral commands accompaniedby the appropriate arm-and-hand signals (app.III). Duties within the squad should be rotatedoften to promote interest and to teach each manthe entire drill. When executing movements, therifle and automatic rifle are carried at port arms.394

When the squad is halted, rifles are brought to orderarms and the automatic rifle to sling arms, andall men remain at ease. The squad leader mayleave his normal position in the formation and gowhere he best can control his unit. Men of thesquad base their positions and movements on thenumber 2 man unless they are directed otherwiseby the squad leader.3. OBSERVATION AND CONTROL. The squad alwaysprovides observation to the front, flanks, andrear. When halted, men face and observe in thedirections indicated in figure 73(i) and 0. Whilemoving, men observe in the same direction. Thesquad leader controls his squad by oral commandsor arm-and-hand signals (app. III). The menoften look toward the squad leader for instructions.4. MARCH COLUMN. To form march column, thesquad leader commands and signals: 1. MARCHCOLUMN, 2. MOVE. At the command MOVE,the squad forms as shown in figure 73 0.5. SQUAD COLUMN. To form squad column, thesquad leader commands and signals: 1. SQUADCOLUMN, 2. MOVE. At the command MOVE,No. 2 man moves forward 30 paces and the othermen take positions as shown in figure 73 O. Inboth squad column and squad diamond formations,the even-numbered men move to the right andthe odd-numbered men move to the left of thesquad leader.395

6. SQUAD DIAMOND. To form squad diamond, thesquad leader commands and signals: 1. SQUADDIAMOND, 2. MOVE. At the command MOVE,No. 2 man moves forward 15 paces and other mentake positions as shown in figure 73 Q.7. AS SKIRMISHERS. To form as skirmishers, thesquad leader commands and signals: 1. ASm ]iMARCHCOLUMNFigure 73. Squad formations.396

0#1 TOf0Figure 73. Squad formations--Continued.397

SKIRMISHERS, 2. MOVE. At the commandMOVE, each man takes his position as shown infigure 73 Q.~! t*t "~SQUAD DIAMONDFigure 73. Squad formations--Continued.398

8. AS SKIRMISHERS, AR TEAM RIGHT (LEFT). Toform as skirmishers, AR team right, the squadleader commands and signals: 1. AS SKIRM-ISHERS, AR TEAM RIGHT, 2. MOVE. At thecommand MOVE, the men take positions shownin figure 7 ®(. To form as skirmishers with theAR team on the left, the commands are: 1. ASSKIRMISHERS, AR TEAM LEFT, 2. MOVE.AS SKIRMISHERSFigure 73. Squad formations-Continued.399

At the command MOVE, the men take positionsshown in lower half of figure 73 ®.9. MOVEMENT. a. After the squad executes formationspromptly, training in movement is begun.The squad then is trained to move in any directionand, while moving, to change from one formationto another upon command and signal of the squadleader. Training progresses until a dispersed and(9 ® A q §AS SKIRMISHERS ARTEAM RIGHTm0 ®AS SKIRMISHERSAR TEAM LEFTFigure 73. Squad formations-Continued.400

disorganized squad can assume a combat formationpromptly upon a command and signal, showingthe direction it is to face and the desired formation.The squad may move as a unit, by groups,or by individuals. The movement may be madeby rushes, by walking, or by crawling.b. To move the squad forward when it is in anyformation at a halt, the squad leader commandsand signals FORWARD. The squad then movesforward, basing its rate and direction of movementon the squad leader or a previously designatedman.c. To halt the squad, the squad leader commandsand signals HALT. At the command HALT, thesquad stops in place.d. To assemble the deployed squad, the squadleader commands and signals ASSEMBLE. Menmove at a run and assemble in march column formationfacing the squad leader.Section III. RIFLE PLATOON1. ORGANIZATION. The rifle platoon consists ofa platoon headquarters, three rifle squads, and aweapons squad. Squads within the rifle platoonare the first squad, second squad, third squad, andweapons squad. Symbols for the platoon leader,platoon sergeant, assistant platoon sergeant, andmessenger are shown in figure 74.2. CONDUCT OF DRILL. Training in combat formationsfor the rifle platoon teaches the relativepositions of the squads in the platoon formations.401

Platoon drill resembles that for the squad (par. 2,sec. I, this app.). The platoon deploys with enoughdistance between squads to permit movement. Thearm-and-hand signal PLATOON need not precedearm-and-hand signals for the platoon. Signals$ PLATOON LEADERPLATOON SERGEANTASSISTANT PLATOON SERGEANTiMESSENGERFigure 74. Symbols representing platoon members.given by the platoon leader are for the entire platoonunless they are preceded by the arm-and-handsignal SQUAD. Oral commands, accompanied byappropriate arm-and-hand signals, are used forthis phase of instruction, as for squad drill. Fordrill purposes, the distances between squads arefixed for each formation, although they may bealtered to conform to the size of the drill field. Thedrill is conducted AT EASE. The squads move ata run when changing formation. When threesquads are abreast, the center rifle squad is thebase squad. In all other formations, the leading orright leading rifle squad is the base squad. The402

squad formations within the platoon formationmay vary; however, the weapons squad ordinarilyuses the march column formation.3. OBSERVATION AND CONTROL In platoon drill,each squad within the platoon observes to its front,flanks, and rear as in squad drill. Squad leadersobserve and control their squads and maintain eyecontact with the platoon leader. The platoon leadergoes where he best can control the platoon. Theplatoon sergeant and assistant platoon sergeantassist the platoon leader in the control of the platoon.Their positions are not fixed.4. MARCH COLUMN. To form a march column, theplatoon leader commands and signals: 1. MARCHCOLUMN, 2. MOVE. At the command MOVE,the platoon forms as shown in figure 75 (.5. PLATOON COLUMN. To form platoon column,the platoon leader commands and signals: 1. PLA-TOON COLUMN, 2. MOVE. At the commandMOVE, the platoon forms as shown in figure75 0.6. PLATOON LINE. To form platoon line, the platoonleader commands and signals: 1. PLATOONLINE, 2. MOVE. At the command MOVE, theplatoon forms as shown in figure 75 (.7. PLATOON VEE. To form platoon vee, the platoonleader commands and signals: 1. PLATOON853696 0-49-27 403

0 R SQUADF31 ['1 m25 YARDSo[]7R SQUAD _ __[ [ ] WPNS SQUAD· it · · ·F[1-LMG TEAM I 3LT F WWPNS SQUAD25 YARDSRL TEAAM Jr1 M 25 YARDSR SQUADRI--AMW W R SOUAD[] -- 0 R SOUADM7RCHSyi mbolR6LUMN O PLATOON COLUMN 0R SQUAD R SQUAD R SQUAD40 40g [] RSOUAD - ~. r] []8 .;MARCH COLUMNSyblWPNS SOUAD~~~[Symlbol-PLATOON LINEFigure 75. Platoon formations.404

VEE, 2. MOVE. At the command MOVE, the platoonforms as shown in figure 75 ®.8. PLATOON WEDGE. To form platoon wedge, theplatoon leader commands and signals: 1. PLA-TOON WEDGE, 2. MOVE. At the commandMOVE, the platoon forms as shown in figure 75 0.9. PLATOON ECHELON RIGHT (LEFT). To formR SQUADR SQUAD40 YARDS-- WPNS SQUAD40 YARDS-R SQUADX[•~~ ~ SYMBOLPLATOON VEEFigure 75. Platoon formations-Continued.405

platoon echelon right (left), the platoon leadercommands and signals: 1. PLATOON ECHELONRIGHT (LEFT), 2. MOVE. At the commandMOVE, the platoon forms as shown in figure75 ®.10. MOVEMENT. After the platoon is trained toexecute the basic formations promptly on command,it is trained to move and, while moving,to change from one formation to another. Therules for moving and halting are similar to thosefor the squad. In changing from one formation toanother, the base squad sometimes changes in orderto conform to the rules as explained in paragraph2, this section. For example, in changingfrom platoon vee to platoon line, the right leadingrifle squad remains the base squad until the lineformation is completed, then the center rifle squadbecomes the base squad. The redesignation of thebase squad takes place upon completion of themovement. A suggested sequence for drill inchanging formations is indicated in figure 76. Thesequence takes the platoon successively from platooncolumn through platoon echelon, wedge, vee,line, and back to column.406

R SQUAD40 YARDS40 YARDSf 1- YARDS-YR SQUAD 9 R SQUADWPNS SQUADPLATOON WEDGESymbolAR SQUAD_YARDSO140 YARDSWPNS SQUADjR SQUADYAi DS0r140 YARDSR SQUADPLATOON ECHELONRIGHT (LEFT)zSymbWlFigure 75. Platoon formations-Continued.407

(BASER SQUADV\ 0WPNS SQUADIo.,KoPLATOON COLUMN TO PLATOON ECHELON RIGHTFigure 76. Platoon movements.408

0BASR SQUAD$0WPNSR SQUADQI U R SQA D R UADPLATOON ECHELON TO PLATOON WEDGEFigure 76. Platoon movements-Continued.409

ElssE0I--PLATOON WEDGE TO PLATOON VEEFigure 76. Platoon movements--Continued.410

R SOUAD A S R SQUADIoPLATOON VEE TO PLATOON LINEFigure 76. Platoon movements-Continued.411

0{ )R SQUAD * R SOAD R SOUAD/ ''WPNS SQUADI IL-JPLATOON LINE TO PLATOON COLUMNFigure 76. Platoon movements-Continued.412

APPENDIX IIISIGNALS1. PURPOSE. Signals are used for transmitting essentialcommands and warning under conditionswhich make verbal commands or warning inadequate.Visual arm-and-hand signals are used habituallywith oral Icommands during instruction incombat formations in order that men become thoroughlyfamiliar with the meaning of the signalused.2. KINDS. The kinds of signal ordinarily usedare sound and visual.a. Sound signals include signals by bugles,whistles, sirens,, vehicle horns, or other sound devices;for example, fire alarms, gas alarms (FM21-40), or the firing of weapons. Special soundsignals may be used on night patrols as prescribedby the patrol leader or higher authority. (See FM21-75.)b. Visual signals include signals made by usingthe arms and hands, flags, lights, panels, and pyrotechnics.Pyrotechnic signals usually are prescribedin operation orders. Tanks may use flagsignals. (See FM 17-5.) Military police use armand-handand light signals to direct traffic. (SeeFM 19-5.) Motor vehicle operators' signals, and413

signals for use in motor marches or drill withvehicles are published in TM 21-305. Additionalsignals may be improvised and used appropriately.Visual signals within the scope of this appendixdo not include semaphore flag codes, blinker lightcodes, and panel codes.3. GENERAL RULES. Unit leaders repeat signalsor give appropriate commands to their units whenevernecessary to insure prompt and correct execution.Unless the signal is preparatory, executionof the movement indicated commences as soon asthe signal is completed and understood.4. AIR OR TANK WARNING. a. The following signalsare used by observers of all arms and servicesin transmitting the warning of the approach orpresence of enemy aircraft, parachute troops, ortanks: Three long blasts of a whistle, vehicularhorn, klaxon, or siren repeated several times; threeequally spaced shots with rifle or pistol; or threeshort bursts of fire from machine gun or other automaticweapon.b. In daylight, the man giving the signal pointsin the direction of the danger. At night, the signalis supplemented by voice warning to indicatethe direction of danger.5. WHISTLE SIGNALS. Whistle signals are limitedto ATTENTION TO ORDERS, CEASE FIRING,and AIR or TANK WARNING.a. For attention, blow a short blast with the.whistle. The signal is used to fix the attention of414

troops or of their commanders and leaders preparatoryto giving commands, orders, or othersignals.b. For cease firing, blow a long blast with thewhistle. This signal is verified at once by an armand-handsignal or by other means.c. For air or tank warning, repeat three longblasts several times.6. ARM-AND-HAND SIGNALS. If a movement is tobe executed by a particular unit or units of a command,a signal designating the unit or units isgiven before the signal for the movement. Usually,the person giving the signal faces the unit or personsfor whom the signal is intended.a. ATTENTION. Extend the arm sidewardslightly above the horizontal, palm to the front,and wave toward the head several times.b. READY? REPORT WHEN READY; I AM READY.Extend the arm slightly above the horizontal, towardthe leader or man for whom the signal isintended, hand raised, fingers extended and joined,palm toward the leader.c. FORWARD; TO THE RIGHT (LEFT) FLANK; TOTHE REAR. Face and move in the desired directionof march; at the same time, extend the hand verticallyto the full extent of the arm, palm to thefront, and lower the arm and hand in the directionof movement until horizontal.d. HALT or STOP. Thrust the hand upward verticallyto the full extent of the arm, and hold it inthat position until the signal is understood.e. DOUBLE TIME; INCREASE SPEED; RUSH. Carry415

the hand to the shoulder, fist closed; rapidly thrustthe fist upward vertically to the full extent of thearm, and back to the shoulder several times.f. QUICK TIME. Extend the arm horizontallysideward, palm to the front, and wave downwardseveral times, keeping the arm straight.g. CHANGE DIRECTION; SHIFT FIRE. Carry thehand (that is on the side toward the new direction)across the body to the opposite shoulder and,with the palm turned in the direction of shift,swing the forearm in a horizontal arc, extendingthe arm and hand to point in the new direction.For slight changes in direction, wave hand fromthe final position in the desired direction.h. ACTION (FRONT, RIGHT, LEFT, OR REAR);ASSAULT FIRE; FIGHT ON FOOT. Thrust the fistseveral times in the desired direction of action.i. OUT OF ACTION. Rapidly strike the closed fistof one hand several times against the open palmof the other.j. JOIN ME; FOLLOW ME. Point toward the vehicle,person, or persons desired, and beckon themto you by holding your arm horizontally, palm up,fingers extended and joined, and waving your handand forearm toward you.k. COVER OUR ADVANCE. Repeatedly strike topof helmet with open hand.I. COLUMN. Describe complete circles by swingingone arm to the rear in a plane perpendicularto the body.m. MARCH COLUMN. Describe complete circlesby swinging both arms to the rear in planes perpendicularto the body.416

n. AS SKIRMISHERS; LINE. Raise both arms laterallyuntil horizontal, arms and hands extended,palms down.o. AS SKIRMISHERS, AR TEAM RIGHT (LEFT).Raise both arms laterally until horizontal; swingarm, on side toward which AR team is to move,upward until vertical and back immediately to thehorizontal position; repeat movement severaltimes; hold the other arm steadily in the horizontalposition until signal is completed.p. VEE. Extend both arms downward and to theside at an angle of 45 ° below the horizontal.q. WEDGE. Extend both arms upward and to theside at an angle of 45 ° above the horizontal.r. ECHELON RIGHT (LEFT). Face the unit andextend the arm, on the side toward which thecolumn is to be echeloned, downward to the sideat an angle of 45 ° below the horizontal; extend theother arm upward and to the side at an angle of45 ° above the horizontal.s. DIAMOND. Raise both arms over the head,elbows slightly bent and fingertips touching.t. ASSEMBLE. Raise the hand vertically to thefull extent of the arm, fingers extended and joined,and describe large horizontal circles with the handand arm.u. ENEMY IN SIGHT. Hold the rifle horizontallyabove the head with the arms extended.v. RANGE OR BATTLE SIGHT. With the fistclosed, extend the arm fully toward the leader ormen for whom the signal is intended. This is thesignal that the range is to be announced. If noother signal follows, it means that the setting will417

e battle sight. If a range other than battle sightis desired, open the fist, and expose one finger foreach 100 yards of range.w. COMMENCE FIRING. Extend the arm andhand waist high in front of the body to their fullextent, palm of hand down; move them severaltimes through a wide horizontal arc.x. ELEVATE; DEPRESS. Extend one arm towardthe gunners concerned, with the palm of the handtoward the ground. Move the hand in a shortupward (downward) movement by flexing it atthe wrist, exposing one finger for each mil (or foreach 100 yards of range) the gun is to be elevated(depressed).y. CEASE FIRING. Raise the hand in front of theforehead, palm to the front, and swing it and theforearm up and down several times in front of theface.z. FIX BAYONETS. Simulate the movement ofthe right hand in removing a bayonet from itsscabbard and fixing it on a rifle.aa. MOUNT. Beginning at the side, raise onearm upward in the plane of the body, palm up,to a position 45 ° from vertical. Repeat severaltimes.ab. DISMOUNT; DOWN; TAKE COVER. Extendone arm upward at an angle of 45 ° in the planeof the body and lower it to the side. Repeat severaltimes.418

APPENDIX IVSUPPORTING FIRESSection I. GENERAL1. INTRODUCTION a. This appendix is a guide forthe rifle company commander. It is concerned withthe general composition, missions, capabilities,communication, and methods of requesting fires ofthe supporting weapons which are available to thecompany. The standard procedure for requestingthe fires of supporting weapons is contained inFM 23-85 and FM 23-90.b. The organization of the infantry division incorporatessupporting weapon elements withineach echelon. An infantry battalion has a heavyweapons company; a regiment has a heavy mortarcompany and a heavy tank company; and the divisionhas a tank battalion and the division artilleryconsisting of three battalions of 105-mmhowitzers and one battalion of 155-mm howitzers.Normally, one 105-mm howitzer battalion is placedin direct support of each infantry regiment. Whenan infantry regiment is in reserve, the 105-mmhowitzer battalion which normally supports thisregiment, together with the 155-mm howitzer battalion,are placed in general support of the otherregiments.2. MISSION OF SUPPORTING WEAPONS. The mis-853696 0---- 28 419

sion of all supporting weapons is to deliver fireto assist or protect a unit in combat.3. COMBAT CONTROL. a. General support. Supportingunits are in general support when the nexthigher commander controls their fires in supportof any or all combat elements. They usually continuein general support as long as this controlcan be exercised to provide maximum support.The heavy weapons company is considered to bein general support when its fires are controlled bythe battalion commander, the heavy tank andheavy mortar companies by the regimental commander,the tank company and the battalions ofthe division artillery by the division commander.b. Direct support. Supporting units are consideredto be in direct support when their unit commandersare given the responsibility for control oftheir fires in support of a specific combat element.A supporting unit may be placed in direct supportwhen its fires cannot be controlled effectively bythe next higher commander, or when it becomes desirableto allot its fires exclusively to a specificcombat unit. However, an artillery battalion indirect support of an infantry regiment remainsunder division artillery command. While this battalionexecutes fires for the infantry regiment itsupports, its fires may be massed elsewhere in anemergency.c. Attachment. When a supporting unit is attachedto a combat unit, command and controlpasses to the commander of the supported unit.He becomes responsible for its tactical employ-420

ment, control of its fires, and its combat supply.Attachment may be made when it becomes impracticableor undesirable to use the supporting unit ingeneral support or in direct support.Section II. HEAVY WEAPONS COMPANY1. ORGANIZATION. a. The heavy weapons companVconsists of .a company headquarters, a machinegun platoon, an 81-mm mortar platoon, anda 75-mm rifle platoon.b. The machine gun platoon has a platoon headquartersand two sections, each consisting of twosquads.c. The 81-mm mortar platoon has a platoonheadquarters and two sections, each consistingof two squads.d. The 75-mm rifle platoon has a platoon headquartersand two sections. There are no squads.2. MACHINE GUN PLATOON. a. Missions for themachine gun platoon include-(1) Supporting advancing friendly forces byneutralizing enemy positions.(2) Protecting the flanks when they have becomeexposed by the advancing of thebattalion.(3) Protecting rifle units during reorganizationand consolidation of an objective.(4) Assisting in repelling enemy counterattacks.(5.) Firing in support of outposts.(6) Firing along final protective lines in a defensiveposition.421

(7) Firing long-range overhead fire to harassthe enemy.b. The effective range of the machine gun islimited by observation. Ground observation rarelyis effective beyond 2,000 yards.c. Suitable targets for the machine gun platooninclude-(1) Point targets, such as enemy crew-servedweapons and embrasures of enemy pillboxes.(2) Targets in width, such as an enemyskirmish line.(3) Targets in depth, such as enemy columnmoving toward or away from the front.d. When the machine gun platoon is in directsupport of or attached to the rifle company, theinstrument corporal of the machine gun platoonusually acts as a liaison agent between his unitand the rifle company. This liaison agent transmitsfire requests desired by the rifle companycommander.e. The communication facilities available to theheavy machine gun platoon are radio, wire, messenger,and visual signals. Ordinarily, there is nodirect radio or wire communication between therifle company and the machine gun platoon. However,both the rifle company and heavy weaponscompany are in the battalion command net.f. Fire requests by the rifle company are transmittedthrough the liaison agent. In his absence,requests are made by direct contact with machinegun unit leaders in the company area or through422

command channels. In an emergency, the machinegun platoon can be contacted directly by radio.3. THE 81-mm MORTAR PLATOON. a. Specific missionsinclude-(1) Supporting advancing friendly forces byneutralizing enemy positions.(2) Firing countermortar fires, smoke missions,interdiction fires, harassing fires,defensive fires, and protecting rifle unitsduring reorganization and consolidationon an objective.(3) Repelling enemy counterattacks.(4) Supporting outposts.b. Maximum effective range: HE light ammunitionapproximately 4,000 yards (effective burstingradius 17 yards), HE heavy ammunition approximately2,600 yards, and WP approximately 2,400yards.c. Suitable targets for the 8-mm mortar platooninclude-(1) Grouped personnel.(2) Reverse slopes and defilade areas.(3) Crew-served weapons.(4) Light fortifications.d. A forward observer party, usually consistingof a section leader and a radiotelephone operator,goes forward with each front-line rifle company.They control the fire of the platoon as required bythe rifle company. The forward observer does notnecessarily remain with the rifle company commanderat all times; however, the rifle companycommander remains in communication with the423

forward observer. Having a forward observer witheach rifle company permits fire requests to go tothe mortar platoon by the most direct channel.e. The communication facilities available to the81-mm mortar platoon are radio, wire, messenger,and visual signals. One radio is operated in theheavy weapons company command net. The remainderof the radios are operated in a platoonfire control net, one with each forward observerand one at the platoon fire control point.f. Fire requests by the rifle company normallyare transmitted by or through the forward observerof the mortar platoon. However, fire requestsmay be transmitted through command channelsif the forward observer cannot be contactedreadily. Initial fire requests by other than atrained forward observer include, as a minimum,the following elements, in the sequence indicated:(1) The observer identifies himself usually bythe use of a code word or words: UNIONBAKER ONE.(2) The observer alerts the fire control pointby saying: FIRE MISSION.(3) The azimuth is given to the target by theobserver from his position; example:AZIMUTH 2760.(4) The target location is designated by givingfirst the azimuth from the observerto the target and then by giving a shiftin yards from a known point to the target(fig. 77) (shift is given in the sequence.Known point, deflection, and424

ange-example: FROM CR 695, LEFT200, ADD 400) ; or by giving coordinatesreferring to a map; or by requesting amarking round from which the observercan shift to the target (observer may say:MARK CENTER OF SECTOR or MARKBASE POINT).;~. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Z4O~OBSERVER.- .TARGETOBSERVER~~~~~~GUNFigure 77.Tariget designation.425

g. The nature of the target consists of a descriptionof the enemy installation, personnel, equipment,or activity which is observed; example:MACHINE GUN.h. The observer's designation of control consistsof the term: WILL ADJUST or FIRE FOR EF-FECT if the observer believes the target is locatedaccurately enough to be hit without adjustment.i. An example of an initial fire request is asfollows:UNION BAKER ONEFIRE MISSIONAZIMUTH 2760FROM CR 695, LEFT 200, ADD 400MACHINE GUNWILL ADJUST4. THE 75-mm RIFLE PLATOON. a. Specific missionsinclude-(1) Supporting advancing friendly forces byneutralizing enemy positions.(2) Protecting rifle units during reorganizationand consolidation of an objective.(3) Assisting in repelling enemy counterattacks.(4) Firing indirect fire on interdictory andharassing missions.(5) Providing antitank protection in the battalionzone of action.b. Maximum effective range: HE ammunition6,955 yards, HE-AT ammunition 1,700 yards, andWP ammunition 7,020 yards.c. Effective bursting area: 15 yards by 45 yards426

(long axis perpendicular to the direction of fire).d. Armor penetration: 4 inches up to 30 ° angleof incidence.e. The 75-mm rifle platoon is used most effectivelyto fire on the following targets: groupedpersonnel, automatic weapons, casement embrasures,antitank guns, tanks, and vehicles.f. The communication facilities of the 75-mmrifle platoon are radio, wire, messenger, and visualsignals. Ordinarily, there is no direct radio orwire communication between the rifle companyand the 75-mm rifle platoon.g. Fire requests by the rifle company for fireare made by direct contact with the 75-mm rifleunit leaders in the company area.Section III.HEAVY MORTAR COMPANY1. ORGANIZATION. The heavy mortar companyconsists of a company headquarters and three platoons.Company headquarters includes an operationsand fire direction section which establishesand operates a company fire direction center. Eachplatoon has a platoon headquarters and four mortarsquads.2. SPECIFIC MISSIONS. The heavy mortar companyis charged with the following specific missions:a. To support advancing friendly forces by neutralizingenemy positions.b. To fire countermortar fires, smoke missions,interdiction fires, harassing fires, and defensivefires.427

c. To protect rifle units during reorganizationand consolidation on an objective by repellingenemy counterattacks. To support outposts.3. MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RANGE. The maximumeffective range is HE 4,400 yards (effective burstingradius 20 yards), WP 4,260 yards.4. TARGETS. Suitable targets for the heavy mortarplatoon include grouped personnel, reverse slopesand defilade areas, crew-served weapons, and lightfortifications.5. FORWARD OBSERVERS. Forward observers fromthe mortar platoons operate in the zones of actionof the front-line battalions. The forward observerstransmit requests for and adjust the heavy mortarfires.6. LIAISON. One man in each platoon headquartersis designated as a liaison agent for the supportedbattalion. He receives and transmits fire requestsand advises the battalion commander of the capabilitiesof the heavy mortars.7. COMMUNICATION. Within the company, thereare two radio nets. One net includes the forwardobservers and the fire direction center; the othernet includes the firing positions and the fire directioncenter. There is no direct radio or wire communicationbetween the rifle company and the mortarcompany except by prearrangement.428

8. FIRE REQUESTS. Requests for fire by the riflecompany are made by direct contact with a forwardobserver operating in the rifle company zoneof action or through command channels. In anemergency, the heavy mortar company can be contacteddirectly by radio. For the technique of requestingfire, see paragraph 3, this section.Section IV. TANK COMPANY1. ORGANIZATION. The regimental tank companyconsists of a company headquarters and four tankplatoons. There are two M45 tanks in companyheadquarters. Each tank platoon consists of twosections. The first section contains the platoonleader's tank and two tanks; the other sectioncontains two tanks. Platoons are equipped withM26 tanks.2. MISSIONS. Missions of the regimental tank companyare toa.Support the advance of infantry by directfire, maneuver, and shock action.b. Provide antitank protection.c. Protect rifle units during reorganization andconsolidation of an objective.d. Assist in repelling enemy counterattacks.e. Engage in exploitation and pursuit operationssupported by infantry.3. ARMAMENT. a. The M26 tank is equipped withone 90-mm gun, two caliber .30 machine guns, andone caliber .50 machine gun.429

. The M45 tank is equipped with one 105-mmhowitzer, two caliber .30 machine guns, and onecaliber .50 machine gun.c. Maximum effective ranges-(1) 90-mm gun: HE ammunition 19,560yards (effective bursting area 40 yardsby 12 yards); HVAP ammunition, 2,400yards (armor penetration, 7.8 inches upto 30 ° angle of incidence at 1,000 yards);APC ammunition, 2,400 yards (armorpenetration, 4.8 inches up to 30 ° angleof incidence at 1,000 yards).(2) 105-mm howitzer: HE ammunition,12,205 yards (effective bursting area, 50x 15 yards); HE-AT ammunition, 1,500yards (armor penetration, 51/2 to 6inches).(3) Caliber .30 machine gun: 2,000 yards.(4) Caliber .50 machine gun: 2,000 yards forground fire; 1,000 yards for antiaircraftfire.4. TARGETS. Tank fires are most effective againstthe following targets: enemy tanks and other vehicles;direct-fire weapons emplacements; fortifications;and personnel.5. COMMUNICATION. Communication betweenthe tanks and infantry is by radio, external tanktelephone, or visual signals.a. Each tank has two radios, one of which operatesin the supported unit net and the other inthe tank unit net.430

. Each tank has an external tank telephone overwhich a man outside the tank can talk to a maninside the tank.c. Visual communication between infantry andtanks is by arm-and-hand signals, tracer bullets,pyrotechnics, colored smoke, and panels.6. FIRE REQUESTS. Fire requests are transmitteddirectly to the tank unit or single tank by any ofthe available means of communication.Section V. ARTILLERY1. MISSIONS. a. To give close support to combatunits.b. To fire long-range interdiction, harassing, andcounterbattery fires.c. To isolate enemy positions.2 RANGE. a. 105-mm howitzer: 12,200 yards (effectivebursting area; 15 yards by 50 yards).b. 155-mm howitzer: 16,400 yards (effectivebursting area, 18 yards by 60 yards).3. TARGETS. The artillery is used most effectivelyto fire on the following targets: grouped personnel,reverse slopes and defilade areas, light fortifications,tanks, vehicles, and crew-served weapons.4. FORWARD OBSERVERS. An artillery forwardobserver party normally goes forward with eachrifle company to adjust needed artillery fire. The431

forward observer party is not attached to the riflecompany.5. LIAISON. With each infantry battalion there isan artillery liaison officer. He supervises the forwardobservers assigned to that infantry battalion,advises the supported unit commander of thecapabilities and limitations of the artillery, andtransmits fire requests of the battalion commander.6. COMMUNICATION. The communication facilitiesof the forward observers and liaison officer areradio and wire. Wire is the primary means of communication.Radios in the artillery fire directionnet supplement the wire. The artillery installs,maintains, and operates its radio and wire communication.7. FIRE REQUESTS. Requests for fire by the riflecompany normally are transmitted through theforward observer; however, requests may be transmittedthrough command channels if the forwardobserver cannot be contacted readily. For methodsof requesting fire, see paragraph 3, section II, thisappendix.432

APPENDIX VWEAPONS EMPLACEMENTS1. GEN ERAL. All men are trained to seek individualprotection when halted. When the halt is expectedto be brief, troops take advantage of natural protectionallowed by the terrain, such as ditches orholes in the ground. When the situation temporarilyis stabilized, they dig intrenchments fortheir individual protection and emplacements fortheir weapons. Intrenchments and weapons emplacementsare located to cover a selected area withfire. At the same time they provide maximum concealmentand protection from air and ground observationand fire. They are developed as rapidlyas combat conditions permit. In order to confusethe enemy, decoys or dummy positions are used.For the construction of individual prone sheltersand fox holes, see FM 5-15.2. TOOLS. Tools normally used for hasty fortificationwork are carried by individual soldiers.These may be supplemented by additional toolsobtained from engineer supplies. Under unusualterrain conditions (frozen or rocky ground, forexample), engineers furnish equipment such asair compressors, bulldozers, and explosive charges.433

3. OBSERVATION POSTS. a. Initially one-man foxholes or two-man fox holes make good observationposts. Both of these positions are well camouflagedfor this purpose. (See fig. 78.)OBSERVATION POST IN STANDING TYPE DOUBLE FOXHOLECROSSI~ S-~EC~T LONG~ LIGHT BRANCHES TOELIGHTBRANCHESAAN AINEISFRONOP UT INTO HIEW-SHOWING Op BUILT INTO HILLSIDE) .1 ,Figure 78. Tuwo-mannfox hole observation post.b. When positions are occupied for considerabletime, it may be desirable to construct a sturdiertype observation post for greater protection. Suchan observation post is shown in figure 79.434

Irz00Or 0vr F4~~~~-U) O4 : e04 ZW~~m wm o0~~~~> a~~~~~~u ~ ~ -- th0 i08 6 3irw L>L wn'O i .,Za~~~zo~~~~~~~u) ~ ~ ~ ~O~~~~~(0 z co~~~aet..I~~~~~~~If)8536960---429 '35i ,z853696. (3--49--29 435

4. OVERHEAD COVER. (See fig. 79.) Individual soldiersand crew-served weapons require overheadcover for protection from air bursts. Such protectionmust not interfere with the use of weapons,nor be so bulky as to make it impossible to maintainthe camouflage of the position. Local materialsare used, supplemented by any additional materialsavailable. In a fully developed position,overhead cover consists of a minimum of 11/2 feetof earth supported by 4-inch logs.5. EMPLACEMENT FOR LIGHT MACHINE GUN. a.Initial stage. The initial stage in the developmentof this emplacement is the excavation of an openshallow pit. (See fig. 80.)b. Horseshoe emplacement.(1) The emplacement is developed further bydigging out a horseshoe-shaped trench,about 2 feet wide, along the rear and sidesof the pit. A chest-high shelf to the centerand front is left to serve as a gun platform.The spoil is piled around the emplacementto form a parapet at least 3feet thick and low enough to permit allaroundfire. The parapet is camouflagedcarefully. (See fig. 81.)(2) This emplacement furnishes protectionagainst small-arms fire and shell or bombfragments except from air bursts. Infirm soil, this emplacement offers protectionagainst the crushing action of tanks.In loose soil, logs about 8 inches in diameter,placed across front, rear, and sides436

HEAVY MG - ITOI i FT.Figure 80. Initial stage of emplacement for the caliber .30light machine gun.437

SECTION. PARAPET 3 FT THICKALL AROUNDBERM ABOUTI FT WIDETRENCH 2 FT WIDEGUN PLATFORMFT WIDE3Vz FT LONGCHEST HIGHt Xe7 ~\3V2PLANFigure 81. Horseshoe-type emplacement for the caliber .30light machine gun (camouflage not shown).438

of the emplacement and embedded flushwith the top of the ground, help to makethe emplacement resistant to the crushingaction of tanks. When tanks are about tooverrun the position, the gunners pullthe weapon to the bottom of the trenchat the rear of the emplacement and thencrouch down to either side.c. Overhead cover. The final step in the developmentof the light machine gun emplacement is toprovide overhead cover following the principlesalready discussed. In open ground, concealmentmay be difficult due to the high silhouette createdby the overhead cover. In broken ground, the entireemplacement may be excavated as a cave inan embankment or beneath a large tree or rock.6. EMPLACEMENT FOR ROCKET LAUNCHER. a. Initialstage. This emplacement initially is a circularpit, 3 feet in diameter and about 31/2 feet deep.It is large enough for two men. It permits the assistantgunner to move as the gunner traverses theweapon. This permits the assistant gunner toavoid being in rear of the weapon when it is fired.It is deep enough that the rear end of the rocketlauncher, at the launcher's maximum elevation inany direction, is clear of the parapet. Thus, theback blast from the rocket will not be deflected intothe emplacement, burning the occupants. Exceptin firm soil, the requirement for depth can be metonly by an emplacement which is too shallow togive protection against the crushing action oftanks. Therefore, fox holes for the gunner andfor the assistant gunner are dug near by.439

. Pit emplacement. In firm soil, the circular pitcan be enlarged from 3 feet to 4 feet in diameter,with an additional circular pit 2 feet deep and 2feet in diameter dug in the center. This results ina circular fire step 1 foot wide and about 31/2 feetbelow the surface. When tanks appear about tooverrun the position, the gunner and assistantcrouch down into the lower pit. (See fig. 82.)l0| lFigure 82. Pit-type emplacement for the rocket launcherteam.440

c. Overhead cover. When heavy logs are available,the pit emplacement is completed by constructingtwo one-man fox holes with overhead cover (seefig. 83.) This method is practical only when thereis no danger of the overhead cover deflecting theback blast into the firing pit. To prevent this possibility,it may be necessary to raise the fire stepapproximately 1 foot. The alternate method is toprovide overhead cover for nearby fox holes.7. EMPLACEMENT FOR 57-mm RIFLE. a. Initial stage.First, dig an open shallow pit, as shown in figure80.b. Oval emplacement. Next, dig an oval-shapedtrench around a waist-high firing platform whichsupports the tripod. In most types of soil, it isnecessary to revet the firing platform. It must behigh enough to let the back blast escape over theparapet. The oval emplacement permits fire in alldirections.c. Overhead cover. The oval emplacement is completedby providing overhead cover and concealmentfor the gunner, his assistant, and the rifle.Space can be provided under cover on one side ofthe emplacement for two men, and on the otherside for the rifle. (See fig. 84.) The emplacementis camouflaged by stretching a suitably colored netover the entire position at least 18 inches abovethe rifle. Unless the soil is exceptionally firm, it isnecessary to dig nearby fox holes for the gunnerand assistant gunner to protect them from thecrushing action of tanks.441

tL .:---I-Figure 83. Rocket launcher position with overhead cover(camouflage not shown).442

SIDE ELEVATION I MAN FOXHOLE(MODIFIED)I _Figture 84. The 57-mm rifle position with overhead cover(camouflage omitted).8. EMPLACEMENT FOR 60-mm MORTAR. a. Initialstage. Partial protection from direct fire can be obtainedby digging two one-man fox holes near themortar position. (See fig. 85.) In defiladed posi-443

tions, this emplacement is satisfactory when completedby adding overhead cover and camouflagefor each fox hole.b. Pit emplacement. If the position is exposed, enlargeone of the fox holes to form a pit emplacement(fig. 86). This gives a rectangular pit largeenough to hold the mortar, the gunner, and theassistant gunner. Keep the emplacement smallenough to give protection from bomb and shellfragments, but allow room for firing the mortarand for storing necessary ammunition. The frontedge is sloped so that there is mask clearance, andthe aiming stake, at least 10 yards to the front, isvisible through the sight. Pile the spoil all aroundthe pit to form a low parapet. Fox holes for membersof the mortar squad not required at the gunare prepared near the emplacement. Additionalammunition is placed in nearby shelters.c. Overhead cover. (See fig. 87.) The pit emplacementis completed by digging an additional areain the rear of the open pit and by covering thisarea, as well as part of the open pit, with logs andearth.9. CAMOUFLAGE. a. Camouflage is of prime importancein concealing defensive works. Before anyexcavation is started, all turf, sod, leaves, or foresthumus is removed carefully from both the area tobe excavated and from the area on which spoil isto be piled. This material is set aside and later replacedover the spoil when the work is completed.The workers confine their activities to the area beneaththe camouflage net. The net is suspended444

I,,,,/ I 1r i1 j j ./,. ~'/i Ii~tIPIlr~~~~~~"/1 1445

ABOUIUT5 FT.i·- BEXCAVATIONBERM IFT WIDE ABOUT 3 2FT.SPOILDEEPPLANLINE OF IGH it Ito£ IS.STAE-GUNEER ASGOTE: SPIL PILEDALL AOGOG AGOC..OUFLAOEOFigure 86. Open emplacement for the 60-mm mortar.446

TOPSIDEENEMY14HYSLOPED AS SHOWNBY DOTTED LINEENEMYFigure 87. A 60-mm mortar position with overhead cover(camouflage omitted).447

high enough above the ground to permit excavationwithout snapping equipment or entrenchingtools.b. After the excavation is completed and thespoil covered with sod or other natural camouflagematerial, the net is lowered close to the ground so'that it is inconspicuous when observed from theground. Nets. are kept in position when the weaponis not being fired. Arrangements are made towithdraw or lift the net during action. Figure 88illustrates the basic principles of camouflage.WRONGRIGHTORIGINAL SITE UNNATURAL OBJECTS MAKE POSITION BLENDDISCLOSE EMPLACEMENTS WITH NATURALSURROUNDINGSWRONG\ R IGHT/ 3\\.\ . , \.GRASS STREWN IN AN UNNATURALFLAT MANNER REFLECTS LIGHTAND CAN EASILY BE DETECTEDCOVER SPOIL WITH GRASSOR OTHER NATURALGROWING VEGETATIONWRONGRIGHTBRANCHES AND BRUSH PILED HORIZONTALLYARE UNNATURAL AND CAN EASILYBE DETECTEDBRANCHES AND BUSHES PLACED INNATURAL GROWING POSITIONFigure 88. Camouflage.448

10. DISPOSAL OF SPOIL. Complete removal of spoilaids in concealing an excavation. When this isdone, the excavation is made somewhat deeper inorder to obtain the same protection that is givenwhen the spoil is used to construct a parapet. Indisposing of spoil, care is taken not to create pathsor vehicle tracks which might disclose the position.The spoil is dumped in inconspicuous locations, asat the base of trees, along natural drainage ditches,or along hedgerows.11. REVETMENT. (See fig. 89.) Revetment is necessaryin soft or sandy soil to prevent caving. Itconsists of lumber, wire netting, small branches,brush, sandbags filled with earth, or other availablematerials. The dimensions of the excavationare modified slightly to provide for the space occupiedby the revetment.PAPRAPETSTRUTS_IN MEDIUM SOFT SOILLOWER PIT ONLY WILLREQUIRE REVETMENTGROUND LINEFigur 8. STRUTSSUMPFigure 89. Cut-timber rcvetment.449

12. DRAINAGE. Provision is made to take care ofrain water, surface drainage, and seepage. In general,a shallow ditch a few inches deep around theexcavation will carry off surface water. Waterwhich falls into an excavation or seeps in throughthe ground is removed by bailing.450

APPENDIX VITRAINING PROGRAMSection I GENERAL1. PURPOSE. This appendix is a general guide forthe tactical training of the rifle company and itssquads, sections, and platoons (in preparation forfurther training on the battalion level).2. APPLICATION. Tactical training within the companyis conducted according to the doctrine andprocedures described in FM 21-5. Unit tacticaltraining begins after the men have completed individualtraining, including the performance oftheir principal duty; care, operation, and use oftheir individual and crew weapons; and generalinstructions in the use of other platoon weapons.Throughout the training period, the application ofprior instruction to current training is stressed.Each man is conditioned mentally for the shock ofbattle; every opportunity is taken to subject personnelto overhead fire, fire past their flanks, andthe movement of tanks over fox holes and weaponsemplacements. The development of leadership andinitiative in unit leaders is kept in mind constantlythroughout tactical training.853696 0-49-30 451

3. MODIFICATION. As in any program, it is necessaryto modify details of the program to meetchanges in the training time available, to make thebest use of existing training facilities, and to conformto the weather. The general sequence of subjectsand the general balancing of time among subjectsshould be preserved.4. TACTICAL TRAINING. a. General conduct of training.When possible, the training should follow thissequence: conference, demonstration, practicalwork, and critique.(1) The conference is an explanation of theprinciples to be taught.(2) The demonstration or a tactical walkshows how it is done. When it is impracticableto present a demonstration or tacticalwalk, a sandtable exercise can beused. Training films also are used as anaid in the conference or as a substituteor supplement for the demonstration ortactical walk.(3) Practical work of the most value is infield exercises by the units concerned.Leaders observe execution and correcterrors without discouraging enthusiasmand initiative. There are pauses in theexercises to allow corrections to be made.(4) A critique discusses the good and badpoints of the exercise. It includes bothcommendation for proper application oftactical principles and constructive criticismfor failure to apply those principles.452

If the phases of training represented bythe exercise is completed satisfactorily,the fact should be stated. Deficiencies arenoted and corrective measures initiated.b. Explanation of terms.(1) A field exercise is an exercise conductedin the field under simulated combat conditions,in which troops and armament ofone side actually are present in whole orin part, while those of the other side areimaginary or represented.(2) A conference is a directed discussion of asubject. In the initial exercises in combattraining, each exercise or phase ofthe exercise is preceded by a conferencetreating briefly the points to be coveredduring the exercise or phase. When ademonstration is used, part of the conferencemay be given concurrently withthe demonstration. A conference includesclass participation; a lecture includes littleor none.(3) A demonstration is an accurate portrayalof a subject or procedure to be taught.During the demonstration, personnel receivingtraining are assembled on commandingground to observe, and the instructorexplains the lessons and principlesbeing illustrated. While a demonstrationis a valuable aid to the instruction,particularly in the early stage ofcombat training, it is not a substitute forpractical work.453

(4) A tactical walk is an exercise in which aseries of military operations are statedand solved on the ground, the troops beingimaginary. A tactical walk can beused to supplement or replace a demonstrationwhen it is impossible to preparetroops to present the demonstration. Theinstructor conducts the personnel receivingthe instruction over suitable terrain,explaining and pointing out on the terrainthe principles and situations involved.When a field exercise on the samesubject is to follow, a tactical walk, themost value can be obtained from the tacticalwalk when it is conducted over thesame terrain on which the field exerciseis to be held.(5) A sand table is a shallow box containingsand used to reproduce terrain in scalemodels. When it is impracticable to presenta demonstration or tactical walk, thetactical principles can be presented effectivelyon a sand table. For details onthe construction of a sand table, see FM21-8.c. Field exercises.(1) The greater portion of the training programprescribes a series of field exerciseson the squad, platoon, and company level.The subjects listed and the hours shownshould be used as guides for the minimumrequired to prepare the company progressivelyfor training on the battalion level.454

(2) Appendix VII contains a series of typefield exercises for the subjects outlined inthe training program. For some subjects,time has been allotted to conduct morethan one field exercise. For example, inthe training program (see par. 2, sec. II,this app.), 15 hours are given to the riflesquad in the attack. These 15 hoursshould be given over to a. series of squadattack problems similar to the type fieldexercise (see par. 3, sec. II, app. VII)outlined for the rifle squad in the attack.5. PHASES. The training program divides the-trainingas follows:PhaseHoursSquad --------------------------------------- - 44Platoon ------------------------------------------ _ 64Company --------------------------------------- - 100Total ---------------------------------------- 208Section II. SQUAD PHASE1. GENERAL. The training program for the riflesquad is outlined in paragraph 2, this section. Aprogram is not outlined for the other squads of thecompany (weapons, 57-mm rifle, and 60-mm mortar)because they ordinarily are not used as independentunits. The rocket launcher team and thelight machine gun team of the weapons squad usuallyoperate with elements of the rifle platoon andon divergent missions; the 57-mm rifle squad or-455

dinarily is placed in direct support of or attachedto a rifle platoon; and the 60-mm mortar squadusually functions directly under section control.In the squad phase, these elements are given trainingwhich prepares them to operate efficiently duringthe platoon phase. This training includes asmuch of the following as is applicable to the varioussquads:a. Selection, occupation, and organization of positionsin normal terrain, in woods, and in towns.b. Preparation of range cards.c. Establishment of observation posts.d. Use of communication.e. Ammunition supply.f. Displacement.g. Night occupation of positions.h. Night movement.456

ag c t a -~~~~~4r =

08l o8dd_ o: o . c C-U a U . 0.000 c, o-E a 0w ~ ru~~~~~~~0LU~ ~~a 2 0u aG11 ~~~~~kU ~s04458 o~458

Section III. PLATOON PHASE1. GENERAL. The training program for the rifleplatoon is outlined in paragraph 2, this section.A unit training program is not provided for theweapons platoon because the platoon does not operateas a unit; during combat the sections of theplatoon function independently of each other ondivergent missions. During the platoon phase, sectionsof the weapons platoon receive tactical trainingas indicated below.a. The squads of the 57-mm rifle section trainwith the rifle platoons in their normal role of attachment.b. The training program for the 60-mm mortarsection is outlined in paragraph 3, this section.Of its total time (64 hours), 36 hours are allottedto the section for independent training, and 28hours are allotted for combined training with rifleplatoons. The section functions in direct supportof a rifle platoon during specified field exercises.459

0~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~4~4 ~k ; :pw n pr n .o0 0 .F~~~~~~Cm,,E t b X ; a, P P P· . o ' *. ~; . ~ -S=.sr0 04> -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~CZ * H X 0 * H X Q C * tS YID ell 0t(D~ 0 ~_e o PeQ

41Pk r rk ._~~Si . .. .. _o b o o oO.~~o~~sO . e * * x S _o4o o c*"oI _ cq I X _ I q . . I *)Ob~~~~~~c : t - ^C;s Cs J t ~ D 1d vO CaIn N t I 2Y - _O Cd - O O-w s ~ Er Er R R0~~~~~~~~~~~~0·l 0ItD CO CI 00 ZCo3 u; O EQS $~~~~~~~~~~~~~6S 41 ,C*- 00 O o Cl oo £ H Q ~~~~Hc) 3 o X;O461

V I w QI~as 0 - . 4)0Ck'bo 41 -0 Q· Os ·CaB" r. doS4~i· ~ J a zCs aSco044 T4rX4E:~~~Ccocr~o-0 Cs A a.dcoE*4 4141ac0C1 t-uiUo ~~~~~~~~ ~e o~~~~0 o .t4) ry t '0NZPC3~~0z 0 ;zcdz zs ·s~~~~~~~~~~~OsW~~~~C ~~~~~~US. 400 0 U U -0EbD~~m Er Lb1 r r0 z0LUE-i E~~~U.~g462

U' n; ' d,CEC=a n a) 4e ·-O _I o 0 4oo 5r~~ o 1ssK| qEBOFIIpe r4 co co P.Ige~~·S CA Y0 *=E~~a 5·- "Ss ° - + 1 *CO .. '~ .0.-.cC o03 z 03 t--S~~~d -·r~~~~ -co @~~c~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ rn,.el 1 . p ~ '; . ~CO -4 -4 '" @ _;Xa° el s. G - 4) '- t O'C11X ~ ~ A ~ ~~~ CO0 -~~ a~~~~ao~~~~1 o46.LOcorcE OEJE 00 ~ 6N ~ ~ ~~~~~C Ca 4 1

=.~ E' ~co,3 " 03 " $a8E; rs W a c 4 B6n~0~~~~~~~n ~0JI r ., r 4CU o z.o Er 1 zo z! ~ O ° = ,l aZ _' 'E 0 o464 0 0 0CA E Z 2l 0l=Z_O .,. ,, ,~'~oP, CO P0 o m 3I~P--. s@S: Ts4 r E AAC46 X ¢ b Xc o0~~~~~~~~~2 0 01 0E Hr:O O~ Ep W~o~~~~Co,%D I 0Hi~ ~, E (464 ~ ac

9 :cor0 cC) b :3 C Ob-4e M · F 4b o e O 13 b ,: o ° r CalXO C CO O:0B&CaPb Sd o , b okF~~~o;I ~~~~o cF 4 14Om.$ As:4~~~~~~~~~~~~6co 'g 4 " r2;~~~~~U465

Section IV. COMPANY PHASE1. GENERAL The training program for the riflecompany is outlined in paragraph 2, this section.During this phase, the company is trained as afighting team to execute battle missions undervarying conditions.466

,0 '"'0oO · g a$~, o& 4C>~ . 4 ,,~°2 ..uILd~ , to" o oLO la,r7 4 44I s.IO 0 ; CIco g o' coQr_ , ,, b ~ Wk 4O ' ~ °=@$) .~XW 4- Az g o '0 co P. d 0 ' 0 0 onC0 000 * leZ j-i ~ · · : 3ILL.OYIaO k 7O·50 C F .853696 0-a49 31 467~e853696 0- .31

Q o_~ Q Eo 9 4--..= vw _ , - E _v :3O_E d Od~~~~CMS Ca Q) SCZCoooa~~~~~~~cx* co C 4) 000 .00U~~~~~~~er468u 00~~~LA.v " ·Ci L c469~~~~~t-I - ~c

o nbo; Ya 8 00t c x ,i, A. ,i0 0 r .laco o^ -bo cq O = N = O c 1 Ib~~~~ t b 4b > > rC'd Ird~ I L, 2'b~· '- -'- -· *c)_C)~ ~~~~ E: E1 S,,:- O -< _O X O Y _ -Y O _ 30o toElf Ca o¢ t~d n, $ i~$0 0 00 *Ca 0 co A 0 Ca00 00 00Q)coal~ au~a F R a~~~~~~~~~~~64) 0~~~~~~~~~~~~6

E.CC041 ~ ,M N '.4 CID M c. Cb = co coYco QO * d0 Nz b F oms~~~~~~~~0 0bC,1.u r a v_CWbO =~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ i" T' CV rim w .2 CO 3C~~Vr°- °w o 3 C) co E. b OI o S X = - * ° o0 Cd E 4 C$_~~~~~~u}x, L 5x> *4J =; sd o @ E = r: v w EZ tS Q C4 x co> U in to~ w C) ·F U2-4 -4,47"470~~~~~,CO

APPENDIX VIIFIELD EXERCISESSection I. GENERAL1. GENERAL. This appendix is a guide for thepreparation and conduct of field exercises for therifle company and its units. The exercises outlinedcover most of the actions in which a rifle companyis involved during combat. These exercises shouldbe modified as local situations and the particularneeds of individual units warrant.2. PREPARATION. a. General. For a general discussionof the preparation of field exercises, see FM21-5 and TF 7-295. For the control and conductof field exercises, see FM 21-5. Officers and noncommissionedofficers who are to participate in theexercise are instructed and oriented in the principlesand methods of troop leading in advance ofeach field exercise. All personnel charged with theconduct of tactical training should study not onlythe text references listed in appendix VI, but alsoshould read other pertinent literature concerningthe subject. Preparation by instructors is essential.Provision is made for the absence fromscheduled training of the minimum number of471

officers and noncommissioned officers when suchabsence is for the preparation of instruction.b. Tactical situation. The tactical situations aremade logical and simple. The general situationfurnishes the background information for the exercise,describing the situation as it exists at thebeginning of the exercise. It states, in generalterms, the information that the participants wouldknow if they actually were in combat. The initialsituation starts the action and normally consistsof an order from the next higher commander. Theinitial requirement indicates in general termswhat is expected of the unit. Subsequent or additionalsituations are prepared to continue the actionthrough a definite phase of combat. A requirementsimilar to the initial requirement is preparedfor each subsequent situation. In preparingexercises, it is kept in mind that teamwork of theunit in executing essential tactical operations isemphasized throughout the exercise, and that theexercise is for the benefit of all men. Terrain permitting,it often is advantageous for related exercisesto be based on a continuing tactical situation.For example, separate exercises are fitted into onecontinuing situation for successive training in theapproach march, attack, assault, and reorganization.c. Terrain. After preparing a brief written outlineof the scope of the exercise, the instructormakes a thorough reconnnaissance of availableterrain. This reconnaissance includes the selectionof the most suitable area--one offering the largestvariety of terrtain features for a continuous de-472

velopment of the exercise. For instance, training aunit in the defense requires a terrain which offersobservation for smaller units and permits the deliveryof effective fires. For the attack, it is desirableto have rolling terrain with open fields, thickets,woods, hedges, and buildings. In the area selected,the zone of action is checked beginning atthe starting point and ending at the objective.Motor reconnaissance of the terrain is not sufficient.The instructor walks over the entire areaand often assumes the prone position to examinethe terrain as it will be seen through the eyes ofboth friendly and enemy troops. In such a manner,a general plan of the exercise-the place forthe initial situation, the zone of action, and theposition of the enemy-takes shape. Considerationis given to the effect which distant commandingterrain, in the direction of the enemy, mayhave on the tactical situation.d. Representation of enemy. For details of the AggressorArmy, see FM's 30-101, 30-102, 30-103,and 30-104. The conduct of the enemy is confinedto definite actions corresponding to the plan of theexercise. Aggressor tactics are planned in advanceto provide as much realism and detail as are consistentwith safety and the availability of personneland materials. The enemy shows himself, fires,digs in, conceals himself, ceases fire, and screenshimself by smoke in the manner and at the timeand place ordered by the instructor. Artillery andmortar fires are represented best by explosivecharges; fountains of earth rising into the air area spectacular substitute for supporting artillery473

fire. To represent hostile small-arms fire, the instructoror his assistants use signals or words toindicate the area covered by fire, showing whetherthe unit itself or some adjacent unit is the target.Communication between the instructor and theenemy leader, to bring about the desired action ofthe enemy at the proper time, is established bestby radio or by prearranged flag signals. It is notdesirable to prescribe the action of the enemy on atime schedule. Telephone, radio, and prearrangedsignals help the instructor to maintain firm controlover the exercise at all times and permit briefinterruptions of the exercise for timely corrections.e. Ammunition. Fire as much ammunition as permitted.Field targets are used and scored. Blankammunition is used when the use of live ammunitionis not feasible. The ammunition supply planis simulated realistically by the use of substitutesrepresenting the volume and weight of ammunitionrequirements.f. Equipment. The unit uses all weapons, vehicles,and other equipment authorized.g. Administrative arrangements. In his written plansfor the exercise, the instructor preparing the problemstates when, how, and by whom the administrativearrangements for all units will be made.Such arrangements include familiarizing the umpiresand the enemy personnel with the problemsand with their own functions; arrangements forprocuring and placing targets, procurement of ammunition;range guards and safety precautions;transportation, uniforms and equipment of par-474

ticipating units; road closures, and permission touse the area.3. CONDUCT. a. General. A field exercise is preparedas a realistic situation in which the enemyis represented. It is executed forcefully as onecoherent operation and is followed by a critique.Combat missions are executed by the applicationof tactical principles and not by following arbitraryrules. In the tactical training of small units,combat procedures are stressed. Unit umpiresclosely observe the use of defiladed routes, individualcover and concealment, response to ordersand signals, proper technique of fire, fire and maneuver,and exploitation of supporting fires.b. Umpires. For the responsibilities, duties, andconduct of umpires, see FM 105-5. Umpires supplythe elements of action which are lacking undersimulated conditions, especially the effect of fire.Keeness, enthusiasm, and imagination are essentialto effective umpiring. All umpires are informedin advance of the object of each exercise,the situation, the plan of action, the type of assumedfire actions, and any special duties. Duringthe exercise, umpires make notes of points to becovered in the critique. Umpires and their assistantsshould be marked distinctively by white helmetbands or shoulder loops.c. Instructor. The instructor directs the exerciseand is chief umpire. He does not command theunit undergoing the instruction. The companycommander umpires exercises involving his pla-475

toons. Platoon leaders umpire exercises involvingthe sections and squads of their platoons.d. Assistants. In small units, umpires usually arenoncommissioned officers who observe the courseof the action and guide it through its phases whichare coordinated by the instructor. One umpirewith an assistant, if available, is assigned to eachsquad and platoon. The assistant checks the executionof the tactical phases and such technical mattersas safety regulations and proficiency in thetechnique of fire.e. Orientation. On the day of the exercise, theenemy troops are concealed in position before theunits undergoing training arrive in the trainingarea. Following any necessary conference on theexercise, the instructor orients the unit on theground and announces the initial situation to theassembled unit. The exercise is begun on ordersor by a prearranged signal from the instructor.f. Development of the action.(1) The plan of conducting the exercise includesthe progressive development of theaction as to time and space; the representationof troops and fires; use of smoke;use of explosive charges and other noiseproducers; use of gas masks; use of roadblock signs; arrival of messages and orders;occurrence of simulated casualtiesessential to the conduct of the exercise;replacement of leaders; cooperation withsupporting weapons; appearance offriendly and hostile aircraft and tanks;and progressive maneuvers of the enemy476

forces represented by troops or prearrangedsignals.(2) During the conduct of the exercise, leadersare allowed a reasonable time for reconnaissance,decisions, plans, and issuanceand execution of orders. Excessivespeed in the execution of an exercise usuallydestroys training values. Properlyconducted progressive training in combattechnique teaches unit leaders to makerapid decisions when a quickly changingsituation requires such action.(3) When necessary, the exercise is interruptedfor correction of errors or forbrief discussion. Pauses are announcedby a prearranged signal and are conductedunder nontactical conditions-whichmay be indicated by having the men removetheir headgear. This method of interruptingthe exercise for brief discussionis recommended especially for earlyperiods of combat training in order toemphasize principles while the actionsstill are fresh in the minds of the men, toascertain the right and wrong of ordersissued by leaders, and to insure that eachindividual understands the situation. Atthe conclusion of the exercise, as well asat the end of each phase, men are assembledfor a critique.g. Critique. While personnel are assembling fora critique, the instructor holds a brief discussionwith the umpires and consolidates their notes pre-477

pared during the exercise. An essential factor ofgood instruction in combat training is tactful andconstructive criticism. In his critique, conductedon the ground immediately after each field exercise,the instructor discusses the performance ineach phase of the exercise and makes comparisonswith other possible solutions. To state merely thata certain part-of the exercise was well done, orpoorly or incorrectly done, has no instructionalvalue. Instead, the why and the probable consequencesin actual combat are emphasized in regardto the possible solutions. Praise and criticism areweighed carefully at the critique. Recognition increasesthe self-reliance of any man or leader. Onthe other hand, tactical errors and their consequenceare discussed in detail. In making criticisms,the instructor avoids ridicule, sarcasm, andany remarks which might be harmful to initiativeor which might lead, in the minds of men, to a dislikeof assuming responsibility. The critique isconcise and factual so that the men leave the critiquefeeling that they have benefited by it.478

4) 'a s. h h -E 43"2 co .. W 0 Cd 0 cW c 0 W ","I Cco3a)·~r Ca · a.0W 0 co Cacd IoW :J0 4~o'a - CD> QQ~d vm W 0 o +a Ca 4~ od, o 0+4 a r W (D-a E- 0 .1 a3P~~~~m L ~ d lam cCa co :SF~4 oto , ed Q) CD v cOf cov10 W= : C O Ca ;4o, ~~~caE, ,o 1a~~* co,w g eb el ·5? ~ o GO .. ,.c b : : :E. C ) 'a o a0 CZ k ~(W 4 O>o Cd a,-1 E0 4 d -j1 0 I~C4-4 1z z d CO44 `< bd 'C~~~4= 4 cW 0 4E E r0 4~~~~~~~~~~~~7W3~ o Car Fcducb~~o1.4 4 1 4 b'd 42. :z 0 IC =~I.. o b , co~~ rC a F(II)~~~~47

I b 1 )4) ·&'lt49 40 co8 0 aco~?0 ba edF.8 ,vQ Q) o 0I ~ o0 co M =.- j~0da~~9 ~~~~~~13 dQ~~~0U2 h Co V =0 LIEa FCO".· d a 4a,09 d I= OJ rbo Cd clA-.E~ a Qja a> CHo bO~bocl o ed : a,:O~~~~cdc, I~~~~~~~coce(d ~ ~ d Ok.C480 m :

s = " E- ° CaB= ww=0=c° Il . A ~I ooY- g F~ I 6 m I 0 " I br Fl k= l b"a .=' F o 0 4 :.j :od,acM55ow o

cd,= C 0 o d " ZD4 3 L s 3 cd C) D) - 2 °-C'j== 4 @ t =OZ00 CZS O 0 'O ce I0-r C- , -.o ,,oC-Cz -1'-Cd C)d C)a a a a ~~~~oCQcoh~Ca482 lo~C1CCPCE ,c.482

Cao < Q @ o = QV cd " "~0r. E., c t Y Q r rb obo: Jod'cCg 3 r. -fO8 >.3. ww W ) f =o > ~~~~42 E0 0 = o4 · n Ca dao ta k Co C)>so Ca4: ;*~XYP a) 0co w k c '( a,..¢n = Cd al - a) .Cd=a)=ay~~Ld0ai~~~~~~ >*.0~~~ 0 04~~~~~~~44 ) -B ce;med7~~~UI... co w 0. r :3 cb'~~ (d ulcp~~ *p 09 1 0 Ca 9aarI ~' ·-~Cd v w dh~~E.>, - , 0CCaaok ~~mbo0 d 0M0 Ca;.· . . £, Qo Q0 0853696 0-9---32 48853696 9 2 3

tox m~ oQ()WD4 ~ a, q,~jw Q 0 l:,-~°~o~= > ,~ CaM ~'I o c,a -4.~ E FC 0 co,~Vac: o .,c·-.Ca Cd '' o-rc co1, 4-~ 0 ~ ~, · ~ > - ~,~..~ C>ist g, 0 '-~ . .ba, u Qp , ·E~ EE w 4J n0 caF~~bCa " 4,1 C Z e Co d o ; V a a o$4 M 9 ~ 0 m·C , =9 [_ o >4 C .d~o= Q ) a)Ld0F toC.)= a z 0 4 1 a a4 ; a_ ~,.4ac~~ ~~~mco bacdm~~~~~~C0cCd, O ~ j ap~ a dCQa c~ mCI 0>0=c 1 O Qc . (1rCF~OF~oOQ)~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~cI~~~~~~~~~4a~~g" ocl E - d 3 E-a, aoo~~~~~c co 4-4484~4 E:O c

o I o= =; ·- * E> a V a 4 4 ° 4@t)> X 4>a m oo 4,CgCd -4idCd0 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~. 0X a : C °° ral'o ob oCUcc m . = t* 90 E3 , l aoY rX °0CZ~cV:I4, oCY° t4 * oC d~~,,,~~ . ~..,,: Qo~ H u· na, 0 t O 1CdE~~ r.0 ~~d a bo 144i co co oIb402 ceIe . r2. , . . ,=ca(1)L~~~~~C 02 a.0bo * al · i as~-~ P.~~~o· r a~~o, c ,d ~f~'· ~acd "'a P4 " 9 Ca-d.~ 4 cis oa, a,-,.~ Izi c~wba ~~ o m a)0 cl 9 cl041 o m ;-1" d 4" o~§h la Ca 4 O 4-;a) cd 4cd 1(1) (L) a rA 4)c40dC* E, o0 - cd E A adC00 .-, e'oa c*~~~~~~~~r ao d C;U 0~ ~ of a . ~f?o., t~~~~~~~~~~~ba~c~~~crv ~~~~~~48k~~~~~~~~170~~U24boz,,,C~fX~c d 0

· ~ P ~ ,c: ~ .'4,0 ~0 yl C.) a) ;.OF O0w- Ca - , --." ': '&4 O = E-(jc4~ Q O b O -, :;f4E~ .?~ O O~a ~ e., -- = 0 ; O = G W ~ bo 0 C) la 0bo4w ,a ocd = O oa~~, o~a r1C~a E .-48 r.~ ~w 0va l~~E: 04JE C* Ca bo -44 o LCnl : 4 r0 ~~~ 41 71o--a,~~~~~a._..o0 Cd 9 Co o oa b0> Q 'Z0~~~~r§ Cd ocl O a~~~bw~a~4. 00 .CC~~~~0· ,4-S ;4=A ,co 4)"0 co cO Cd la04 z 44 >0.4 , >O Z0 " ao486

O~*-. Ii,m ao0 > 0o 4 j -4j- - Im .c,- 0 . . , o . Cr. GI .o b-o 0=s~~~~~~~r. 0~~~ 0 '""4 C. M,b.. OO. >aF aEOHo, s EF, o ·EI E bbc,~~~" · W ~ .? c ~ lak ) Ld ~~ a., Q) z 4W .--C0 WU· W m 0 )ce -PJ cd o rcd o 0a c"E·-a ~~~bpp E~. % 4C io0 Cd iM >b cd 9 ae aw. - ( R 4 >cd > .Cd0·P4 -.A &a0.- o oF 4a)W~~~~~~~0 W a02~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~ fn C · " 4~ h~~~~~~ o ~ ...c abcd 'a 0 C-) 0 4-I ~Q) 'a () cd a- co . - -Scd .", - O ) rL m., (d r.- C* * a I ae4 u OD ed > a;~ C a U m a a I) CC~ bO .0+~W "l e& w r3-+~ ~ ~ 0,-~ ~ ~ ~~(r=)J0rn41 Ca Ca ird (y~~~F~~L~A~~ceCd Ua 4 d 1·0 d~~~~~~~la"a a 0 o"B a48487

coba r.~opO )Ca OC)P7 O a a d ~ c~cd oz QCO I o a Q.,o,Q) ~ 0cd Ooc7~, 4~ 0 C's) ·.'--0't: nf ~ E k c~ 0 0." 0q + C.)Oa ~v0 c dCZuF,~ ~~,~~~~~~~~~~~~~Io ~ oCCD 0 C 2 ) ) k a488a0 Cd cl Cd 0 ;0U2~~~~~~~~~~~~~0cl Ca C* +Q04H CZ bo04 Q(1) S .cdCZ~~~ toYo~~~~~~N.,-,"4-4 U2 Q) 0 P C')1 c~~~~~~ a 0w l>ci a).~c ~ Ca rn04- > +j WoaC d la N,> c, t : o Ca' = ,Cd0 4j U2 bo CS C*488~~~4 y~~~cfo h u aj m d4j ~ 4-c ~ C =C d a dQ-414 -4 ,4=1 o

'~~~~~~~~ 00 0 ., 0 9 Cd 41a,~~~~~~~ i,, B ,~0~~~~~o k lo~~oC=-bS .cdUIc 0bO~~~~. rn: oj; : k r4 ct: 0CZ CZ cd drcd~ c'" o V2 (I0,' .2 '~CU ;4 (V n C -- ~ o,.. Ca 4J4I - 0 0> b sm m o id o ECa~.~o ~, m '~~ 4:::~o 0F O· noF: P 0 ) d ~ u C W o (L a) 4'"0 02., a a . o a '. E ~4~ ~ 0 , k d -6a mb ~f a ek l i o b ocH 4 0 C cI C d .(.Td rCa b A -d4 aa,S cd k Md daH m u c 4b C1-4 a 4) = -E ) 0 0 ElbrA 41 Q) &1:1 u g0 .,-, A~.. 0 c4, 0rcl c~~~~~~~~~~k d tbo -4 /) Cj L*7 CN a 4 a, a 74 C~0 Cd 4~ , c, Oa ed .Z? ~~~ v c, O o ~ 48

9~i k (1 ). ~00 t "0 Ca. - o0 0 r 1) 1.a k E;L 4a C:~ 0 c~ .~~0 ce 0 .oO cl 8 4 fd.~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~cCl 4Cda Ca c(c,ed ,cl 4 cla,~~~d -1QCd =S s. U2~~~4 tre Cd kcded I a) aF~ d 0 pi Wa re a 7 CCd~~~~.a) E Dcr aa d olao a) d d k or4jo w .! >eo ~~C "CF..' oO~~ri lQ) F~~~ ~ cco 4 5 ; & +O. LdC d~~ a, a, P C e~~~aa d OwmClud 4 4 a a dF~~ m ~- o~ ~~e E-4 1 ~ r &4 a C -Qcd F Ca o co ' a E Za ;3 C c, · 0a,3 C 00 o ~ Q.o ~'~ a)4J = c a E-4 O EQ)41boC~~~4L .- a) C = 2Cd 4~ ) 4 ~o co o~41 E 0 "&, +~. d .~bo C o C*.Ca .R d cd c~ o 41. 4-Ca ,a :- ') 4- 1494O c~~ 7 Cd M C) 9 k o k oC41~ 0j dr E C' 4 ~ 0 ~~~c o1)490~ ,a dma~ c :1 !~$-k4

a z @ -. >, c~ ';... .3 v, $aosw=a w @, a 7 < ocdl ha ~~~l 1 r.,a~co =~ ° aQ 0~ 0.4 "-' °' "-~W, o . .@ r ~ 4; a *Jr> - V 0O < 4- @ - =5 pz'Z > a E 0clr.0.. .. c: 4w $O,, o; £; E S .obolo: U 4J '- . > 0; 0Ymw·0 lo,= ° u, > L3 ) U ,EMR: 0- : . E Os° aL ¢> *-B =° =° QO e .4 ;.4 Eo ° o W ,: . '$°O ed aS k B -a o C com0 . UO 8 ~ ~ ~ ~·~4 .Z? ; g'0 CCCc 41 ~n -H b Q>C 1 3(1)0 o a00~ cd ~ v C) c.3U~Em 4., jfc ~40~ m~oCaco~~~~~~~( 02 ~~~o o. .4-1 1+ ;, V. ago a0 Cma 0 4 D Q () 0 300 Ca4Oco o 1 boPz44 '0 w Ca o -+71~~~~~~u(bP'D~~~~49~Z 4

(v la L4) wCd la , Cd I 'Cd .6i MC* Cd C) 0 Ur= o 0 U2 - , CdCa'ECCa 9 a ) 0 0 J~ 4a 0()4,.-, os cd o.4J a) r. Cd da3 ed s F: o~~~~~~~~ t~~ I O d4n 4J rn b o 4J >r74~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~." ~ .,~ ~ ~ V ~ ,_(1- O) k IC ._ 0 'l 4~ r. " ' . . r- co ( 0,~~ 7 O~~ k E: kbo~~C's I +, cl ; w o i r g· ' B 'C ' i jd ;Ma~~~~c, E k H O~~~~~0 ) cd·., O m c, cb~~~~,r. cd Qbo 4 ce Cd a) r.o C~ c~~~ u > 5~ ~~~~~~~eMe C 4 4 3Y1b ~F f 'i.j k F: 0 h .~ 1 ~.VI 42, Ca o ebo0 Ca C* kV UD.,~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ _.,.-,cd 4 g·co I a) 42ma E ~~~~ 0 .=aao I ~~~~o ed 4Jas UQ cd t: 43 co > I 04-3o0 zboO~~;.4Qcd 0oQ)2w Cd 3 ..0 H a ;j. Urnta~~~~~o 49~~~~~~~~~~~~424) .-Cd -4 4) 0 C.ce = Ca > 0 E1 v w a4Jla 0 . C) a) Cd&.I r.0d k z -a-.2 c492~EnlOot

S o1 b4 n. ) 0 0c ' cC' 0 , 4.0 Ug ~ ,~ ~0 ~.-,~ o . . o. ~ *-,o> -J4'D2 bO 'a 4-- r '.4oz4J0E. .O g b . -4-- o r - O ,. > X o -o ~.= a,. 'a n .- ogo ¢ + a 0 u Xa lLO f~r· r.* '-- , la"· *:: : 'o r.Cao . C0.g , 404-1 rFwc,;- )o- C0 0 c-=S bO0~~~~~4=r.49493

4-' co b- o~~~~~~~~.0 >0o.. 45 Ca0.~~~'G 44 C. a a -Clla o t'o v co co.~ ~'. ~ B~~~~~~F~ c -" ,.cog~ats Q CZ -4 Ca0_e-.~ .- C* woM W0 Sr4 d 0-0 bo 0 '~o 41C0 Ca Z v 3 wod o, iz.) C) g o X 4 a, W 4 40 0 . .' 0q-4 .- - 0 450Wa) 0ood0~,Ca ~ ~ 0o Cd0 U F~~~~ E~~ U I k a) ir~~~~a49';o ~ ~ >~%) 9-P =0C c ce>4-4c~ r.~z o" O tLt a; c.0Ca 0 kd~ i494

04w0lo0e0cl SC i,' o" '0 4 Ju 'O:10 O Qa 4i I)·. a~~ o , ~ m0 a ;'~Ca O r, 10g c Wco 4i02 a~~~~~~~~~~~~~~r -4) 4 L) Q F13CC* ob o EcaJ ·r,-,o4 O7Q,c~ Icd C , a, oObo ., a a, ·· J3rd. 2dk O Ca F0c~~c ~a Ca + gO0 41O z ~ o M g; (P CL) . 4k c & 9 .o Oa ·r~c0 Cd co bo Pp, " ~ c~~k d 0O V4 Ca 4JCO a (d~~0 r 4OFr d O O a)4a dY-r O CO ) 4O495

'~ Cc:,. "O .~" .~ 4: ~. r~ o "- ) " "O 00 ' 4 ~ 0 0 ~ ' '"" 0= Q I .. .c::&02 r o ',-.ci F'.u ~ 0 "q ~-~ - Ca " -"- -t=> 4~a Q) b oCa 0 = E-cd - m 0.= .. , .J o(L)4 0C a "0~E04 Q"O a ~~.~.~.c +.© k-W Ca +- m~,: LO2 C.0Z''" a C. ~. R.~n,04~ -+j o~ w ) j0=&, 4 =% c g 0, " co P?S Q -j004 I a 4mJmCc~ k ) = d Ca boglO~ ~C~ Q) F(la Q ~ )= = z B ),,43 "0Ca 9 = 4 4J0 0I. c cajItsla 0eo bo ' .. ..4 ; bO Cq Z 04 44 co (n cis00bo Ca 1 $ Ca Cd d 02 4 10 ( )0 d o:· rO nf bO > Ca 70ce~r-)";. "0 7C1 bO Oa) O lw == Ca d w O4 a·~ O 7 ,~, ~o cd I, 02= . ,0d o4z., r '-E: m " ." Ca ?C1oa ok mr 4)FCa0 ~~~~~bo os o =cE c = E QE0 ~ c 0O%) O = aP- 4 cAco 0a~· ~~~~~~ a ~ ~_ ~ E ~+o o 3;"o~~~int~~ on o~~~ C)~~~~5U C a ozC O~~~~nf b I$I. m ~~~~~~~~_O " ~~Cd C* '"00496c, a o B

t; X2> &n ~ _ cX °o E = sd ;: & o t *= iQ-csa Ws ·nOoPC. Y '" SO ·e.Y OX Z ~~ s o .* O ', ° a~ O~r .tlrd~abocdtH~ C- , ._ 0 o 0 Aa SAEmv Ua F 44-, cdo O~~'m~ to Cd a , (d,r: E '¢ am o ~ ~ 6~,4 -' G ,t4-E ~ o° ., a~ ,a a,~eelIE. E~'L o r.&oS~ Cd Q ~; Ca &02~ °&O d 0 " . -~~~~~~~~~~~c04"Qr." S. a4 1 LIs.o·- Z ,~ oo ~4E: a 1o . ° ,. ~. E-4 ::: -" ~ t~_ o

42 = 0@ hl S a -- o. b. . r SR,, R m o ' S p, cw,St °bo S E 'aS'°'F a "= 0 o 4 ,o=o o"_ S _ f < O .Q. " Q) w b 4.44- o u ¢ 3d b4984OQ cis 403 'o%Hr 00-80 0 =Mm~~~~0c498 :a -·F

c, a o a, E caCo cCa ad Q) 0 C) (d aqCo4 w 1 E A 0cd w >.E. Ou~. O· m(&02 0 4o a o$~~dF~h 0 > 0wa gs 4 bOk 0 F 4ro oa o Co o : E~~C~~:OF~~~ · c~~~~p~ c. E-E:o ed Ca > S C )~4 o, ~!!o E ·! (d Q W E >1, Q Co o ~>b 4 0 C o b = r4 1 4ra E ~ W~~, O·- aba 0 oed k " 71'M C.4m bo 0 r1 F4E- Cabo 0 a ge 4 :s 4 :-~!" cwE- 4, wq $02 a w &cdM>~~~e0 0,~ 8~~~~ ~~~~dC0 F o d C0~ ~ Ca 0Ca m '. 000 ) - C 00 hB I'B ~0 941)~o o WC 9d OD giF~W ri4w 0 ad Go853696 0--49-33~449

1 1- o $ w 4) 0 --4 - o Ca+d -4c p, Cw 4- A a U=~ . 4 , E . E..~~ a a o a co a)cd %-4Ca O 04a bo QC* P~~ ou~~~~a bo s ~~d ~ ~ r . a .0CO Q, O ag~~4-u~ CQ oa~n--o ~ n :~-t-~ F o o~ Cao O~ c~ > IuboIC~aa 0 IoM'k7· 0c:o0 C) 2 , :$ 1 40 4~~ pQ 10 0 ;4 -+aECa C e ~F a o aE 4'"ae5001~~~~C~ ~~g 'C r\ o Vbo aaa·r o ' ~4.2 d coFk c~ O '+ c cC~~~~~~~' au 4 'au Ca04~~~~~ C*u co 4JM bO .0 ( O .4 =;4 Ca Ca Qola 4 E0 4Jco CCa a F500smCD C) Cd V(d

41o~ co>rA 0 00mo ~ m o ~o hcb~~~~ W o b-a = 0 0oI~ao 4~00ril 7 .4.0 Q kddcCD CaoU e = 0 bDa ,..0.~ o i J02 rn .4 0 0C* co M mr, co o gE DIIIC~~ .~i· . , yo'u0cd'j a a ,s an Ca 0z C* e Ca C).,.U '"0Q)~~~~~~~~~~~~~C ~ co 0$ a02 ~ ~ ~,W 1 0 -- C*,Oa~ ~~)-4.a, ~ 0 ~~~ &B 40, o 1) + Cdo o? aF: t: ak "I s k 4 · I.d ~t: aBo14' PuE '"a.~O 4.w 1~~~~~~~-c o CdC) a04 0 400 ~~~~~~~~0Ca Co 4 O' adcaa, u '"~~~~;4 o Ca co F$40) W~~~~~0r. > on 0 co C *C) s c r.Ca0 r4 -1 4a~~~~~~~Eh r 2. Z 7a~~~~~~~~F: ~ ~~~E4 0 4mbo co : o 4C14~~~~~~)

~. o ~ ~ 'Fc ,-, om C 4)~m &· P,, o-0 ~,~ o0~ w co am ' A' ' '10u e .,ma d &d0 0 a, Co 1 o . o g3 ~'4-1 oF4 o.~ .'Q (, co,,L)'~~ II) k~~4 0 ~c4 o w w o co (L) 0._._ ,~, o o S 0.E F a cl a E " E w 0o· oE5 0 i~ ~0'~'~ M 0~ c~ g ~ 02co 0 0 . 0 -- G'o "b04: ~. c,o 4- 43 to· 0a a >uco C.)il aC.) oo $-4 W" o 43 " cboo'~ o co C o co,coo 0$4 4- 00 .- o o C1 0 CU2 4 + 4 aooE~co r. 0 C5col l~~ar k 'aV4 0 CS o 0 a C3 C*.. 4 5 P.Q o E ei 2 id P u 0 b 7i502m ,0 cd Q 1

co Oo " O0 ° ,o N 0 b:ow 'ax B a sv U A C w w a *_C4v2 o CD O~'° 0r'.4:m BaGZ *d p,~0~~-' C 0 c 0C : C d-~ coco° ' R. o R .G) 0 . 0 , 0Qi · .. A 4_ 00 Ca'vibO ·c~oEI Fh4 I~ ~uE: a af~""'i D dU p~~~4Jr.CEo~d b~503503

'z o o' ~40) a a cl~~~~4)tOgc,~~~~~~~~~I~ , co FkCQ~~~~~$ ) 4J 4 =:~ .A Imo' 2F~~~ a E~~~d 4 0a 44-o cd §~ a >, -· a ~~~~·cl ~~~a*I ur CIS a uaEo w. Z)Cd 'a -u p a, ed O " 19 O.C~ a E: C) aI Q, U 1 WaI· .,,-'.4~~~~~ss 4o A4~h:~ t 1 · c~ am0 Cd $4 .-O M4bO~~o 4eLCap0 (D.61 4 .4$r. 2 Zm cd a0 ~6 w Co0 bo:3 : w co-&s~~~~~~~~o¢IB 0 1~~~0PCtgc~1coo rn o I MCs bo r baoc a10 P , 4-a 0CODCaM 0 0 m m j La u~ccd $40Cdun LA a)504~~

0o02 a(I E 4,- . o .,I=: E c~ ~.., :nPo,..~= .."', ~ .o 4j : : .'-o r P +O ra E. o i"'~ v ' -~Cd Cd a) CZ 3 a C02&04Jd1 P,dI) 0Q )de o Q0C* 4L % p ~a:: ceo Cd is. ° 4,d c oo :~2laq,~W4 -4 cCa &cc L.EEo eV , 0 EoEQ) 4-E - cF: ka' r. 9 a r a d 0·) a)4-)l4~cd ce a Cd r4 4J0 ~Frak w=.~ CH V W bOc 0 d .- , CQ -6 Q) o~= Qr. cd r. r. U20 b 4kaCd 4Q (X r 0 c(1 o -jcd P, P4,Q'au u :Oi-6z 4 alJ o 4OC P64 cd cl :q0ca ,P a vlP~~w Ld h~ W U k F~~ ~~ O o " 0

c, O~~~~~ a 4t) C .cd,~~~s ~~~~ "'"eos,~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~J. m TC~~~~ ka lk 0 :4 1) Cd V - ). .Q e O 4 ,Ca =~ ~ ~ ~ aEmy, ~~~~bo4~0 , ->I 0 = =4a Z k 4'= M on .=C ,a Ed" Qa + C0 k 0 ( ) 4-l CP4 0~·~10 a) = a ~ o4 c l~ p( ox SMC44) 41 a F~4' 4-4 00 4-4Cd ) C0 L 6- 4~ 04V I4 4.o uc~~~~~~~a Cd 4~~~dp &, 0 0 0 ce 'i0 Q .-boCd4- Cd 4k" w b0 0 -wP4 0 P4 '-t ~ o .4(L 45.O -4,C3 mao ) l a W~0Go C -4a .> -4 4wO~~~~~~~00 a k~~~0O $~~~~m"" F~~"CnCd v O C d % F.,506 o

o U bo bO i4) ~ '~ = ~ -0 ^ onw:a:i) n a X=o .oo4Q~~~~ Q OQ nl m OeEX *> E - g o g E.m-~ A" +.~F~,~ o', ).5 Xd . Cd ===°OE OJ. - Q= E a z b svo S+s

Ca -1 k. a h (dk ka) Ca 0 0) ~ 0-45~~ .. ~col~0 Q >a -9 Oa c, ~~~~~~~moP aao~&4 P, aco 4i- Fm CO Zc·n E 3 'o c d Im4 E, QCao~,oa w rp~, ~~' E,,¢, j~ ~~.~~o"tsV S0 ~ .= oceo-w wZ '--c:Cs cd 4 4FL a po~oX4 Ca4-F~ ~ Ed I0cd c7! 0, 0J. a m aic 4).a 6iaC)cFm~~WaD5~~~~~~tr Cd4-~ 'g co 0: Cd4-4 o w C: , Cd ~aoha ~~~~~o >c.- .~ ~~~~~~~~~c1E: m P o, o 4 2 -(Dacdolckr lQ~Omo· 1 0 0 0 '" 0 l0, Zi'> Ca 4 o0 la o . 0 o C 4oco~~~I d co co uC ,,,~~~? a o -4ia0McC3a~~~~~~ai ti4#508

O I*'. bO O -, 8 o wQ c° * Cd :o N'a > ° Po ·ZE:~..~r~.~ ~ ,,. ,- .o ~g *w , 13 w C)~Cga5 , o· 0- I 0$ .U ~4 .o ' C dm r- b m CEg0 "3'd'

'L-4 '.4 Ao .~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~0 o A = ,o 0Cld boZ cZ 2 0 Z Qc Uk a ~C1 ~ E ·~ n.O ·4J-4, - 0--d 0 A0 1. 0Cbo~toZI,4B C.)l aoe,a l11 , > nCa o A U 0>(1)~~~~~~~Pcdco c o 02 anU o>~~~~~.,~·rr0d 0 acdp

,~ . ōw bo sk W coc o Ca,C. WI.co 0 ° 5o ~ c, Mo sc0 A N 'a A~a o,~ >" 0 Ei: PCa o W CdO ~~)cod CJ )n4m~~~ ' ~e ~4--l 0 4 k 'o g0 co cA I "A bo v boE:3 s E4J 4 r. 25e11a p E a (d4-a004aF4a 8 '" aL Z~~~~~~ECd~~ 0 co oC=3m 430 'r. ~?m'~~~~~oO02 .4jmr. Z 4 - cd ·co W 0 :3a~~0Eo~~~~~~1

oa,~~~~~; ChD~RI)C,c~~~~d o'4-5 40q , S~~4) S4-a 0Za~~~~mmaco 0 L)'Q 4c . co 14 u- ,~4Z 4 2 m-Eo~~~~~~~~~~~0c0 k XO p~c Oco cc3MF: a o ~~a 'w g~~7JSoOL J lcoco $1 M 0 09 ,h0 a F 4 h 3~~CD9Ca co 8 ac· (2tm~~0FOQ0 o5121

o)q 0 w w a '$4 W W W 0 .245 co > o·r$4 Ca1u 'I: c~~od C VI V PcoEZ 45.4 0 10oo bO + cC! 0 C* 'd~ 8 w 4j~r t co Flo Cd N W &0 +5 0 o k 0 0 F 4 c 41 = co 4, , eCor. E 42 0 > 0r d $Z.0p L~Z 00 & 0bo d~Iaoc E o ~ ·. F: 0 a,o,ofZ C tr. , A a w w 4) :Cmd ' 1 h O:Cd 0 0 &J Pw a8 c1104- C ,0 - r 144 ) 4-14i4i ceej A co0 4 $4 go .,4 ~~~~~ o~~~~uc W S4-~~ d 3 Wg & > O g -50 c,~ o 100$4 $ - (1) kCD co W r. 0 a 4:-+ $4 r. t) d " w d , W o ' 4)'C C Q +3 F:~~~~~~~~14J -- # obr. 8 om(d o~~~~&> co > 44Oo · ~~~~~~d O>b 4~ r- 0 El .- " +cod

'. 5'o ' 0 a4- = c44, ~ °D ~., 0 E. Y c O , , ' = OCO. 44.4 °on o ~ . . 1 o .(d~~ ~~.= o -, c ,0Moono.O 0 a a51'4514··

@ i ; e C4 ;4 h W ,4 w = + A4'a_W0> W 0 AO~00 .d4* c*) U 'j Q 0 CO. o _ . O, OO O ~EO 41U: .*. ° 0 ° 2 0* 0- 0~ 0'.f r 0 4 a M 0W '.4OV0 0.. ;,o,0.- 0UE ~F A *_ *4 40~ 8 o oo - )~U26 49 aa .- 0-- "4569f .> a 09- 0U . , - 51cE ~ Q) d'~ CZ 4S53696 0-- 9 -- 34 51

,,, g " ~~~~~~~t 9 ~~~~ 0 CONO.- m 4 biCdd0IF: bo Cd a h~~~~~~~~~~~k: u(,Cd0q) cd dc'O~ ~xw da~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~·a a T 4U'C a41 o 0) 9 -Q d~~ga O .^ 1 S T~~~~ Ca ~~ r~~ Ed #cdLEcd~iW ~~~~~~~C~~~C) ~~~~~~ 74Ced E O 4, ac, 4Z o aE:Ed ~~~~ ,O B f: a E4,a~~~~~~~C c~~~ 7 Ed ." E~~~d co >~"e ~~~-' a,~~~EE ~~~~m~- co Q · o4f cd 5~e4-: ' C" Q~a3cepd94 cDU O, , IV - wdC3> U~lt~ ER. FL a Ed~~0a~~~~~~~~~~~~:zC.) k 0U" ~~~~~ 8'6 cl ~~~~~~~~~a~~ E:YI j" E~d C) 4~Q)..~'~3 ' wR.4 ls: :Z~~~~i~~cdw of~~c516

m) 4~M0) r/(44 j)J ~ 0 0) Sz0 C o) Uo 00oCH ~ Cd Cd Z 4$4 a) ) .-. ) 0U 0 C~0k4 .>x,:a,. 0)o -.C, .~~~~~~~Ca)~~~~~~~~~~~~~n~~~~~~~~~~~-~~4Cd da 43 d0, -% g - CZ 04 ao t= Ed r.. bo w - OE~' ~~"Eo ,~4.a. O, ~.P4 '4-j 0 o P, o -4j oa4rr -dCd ~~ -4J ~ d CU Cd Q ~l 0) C..4 cl 4) d CWr) Q) C F0 0P4F a Q (k a) P40 hGo EJ F W14 Z0 0 w 00Cd Q) Q) F4 c 43u1d u Eu l 44 Ed4 4U CceQ)-CZU+4 ~ 0)7~CU0ukoCd0 C)hu 0 a) E mIU 0 ~ 0Cd C 1aCdooCdZor-) -4· d·? Ecd 4-Dc~~~o"Cd1 oct~~~~~~514-.IC0 C ' $04 o a~a h m ~;" o Cjbio z40 4CU CZ~ : " u o ~f' 1

1- >1 I > w >~ Q , L0 F0 .O V=k · +;:Ca t= r. N4i 0 co bog$.~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~rm, C QW0 0k 0 Eo;o '"0>CH 4. mW C°JEce co O* C d co m .bo 0 t) 0 ce r,'o cd Q) i 0~ r, V. F-4-) aa 4 8 ,n 0o 4,7= (d c . o a O Q1 a-1Co 0t O c0 " AP·C~a7 edce . Ca C'd a,O d 'aa =4a aE- .. c~ 0 , , 0.,m oi Ea O U El·Ctnl d~O4 la CdV.~a, a~~~~c a0 ( dao4)Ca4 0 C Q . -j a,- co ."" ' i 4Ja,~ ~,, .~~.0 = n .- O , o< +j- Cd C SO w 0 o W4 )o a ) o or. 4-1.~' I k·co · coC, a.c n acCd o 'a bo c) oda A a lr-: 4i 4.) e518 bo~~~ ~cov0 q~

~·1 1 P1" ~ 4- 1 C bO~~ ,< ~ 'b-~~~~~- ~ ~,§~~~~~~~~~ ~ ~ ~a· . ' 0... ~ , ..Q C~ d M ",0 0. 04 -0) n W0 . §'Cdt *- 4~0) + .~- ew 0cd co a 00 45~ bO~ ')co~~~~~~~~coo 4 4- 4 'U -:bO 0 0~~~~~~~Cd 44_r:Coc~C~bw ba aa.M~~ Wo (d E B E 0) cco+Cd 03 z~~"9351" coc5 i~~~4 0

~B · ~ ~I i o, ~ · 8 I $'" i> c~ c. .obo o , . oC 9c o a· Sd -a zo - : F- -I., F: o~0~4 " ~1a o~~cd t, -' 0 "0 - cd " U .24,- Z - 4i Co 00 4J~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~d-C0(1) C.) 4j 4 >4O-a bo 7Cd X cd o l4~.o ola ~'~ zo c" bo ' d . b o=~~~X·C: 8 m d cd, a . X06 .- o ~uc:,.," bo c. E ..-- "0 $.4o Cd a b ~o lEl C P O d C p+ 24a0m a,4- 7,0 rl 0 4 j C d C~,u d Li Ocl g 4 bo c d co 0·S 4 z cou3k O~~fl E0 cl l 4~CbO cd E- cC~~~~~~~~ O~~~~~CCm ~~4 o~o~~~~~~-~~~~44>· '= 4 uE .o4CP E 0 bo~ dL~52 a 01) = =bo m- z ° ~0 t - 4sCa d Q)c d 0 f.4ao,~~~~~b0 .- p -4-- 'j . . '-0 OF~~~~Ocw 0 Cd -4c ., >c520bp !, '

,c X 3o·SC4 W E a F d >o Ps ed dCd Cog) uZ 0b C . , - ., c F: a oO Q Do 4"toSCu : CDCa4-4 ' +, .° (.w 1) e *- U -0 0- . C4o; C6+ ~ 0P4 P4 4Ba 19" a a··Ccc, o~~ n CD tO ~~~I=~5Z

' .- J.P o °.C a) .- 0 B0AC, dW _WR. - d e4-4 w4 d *< tpC4 wW W°0 b, =EE3a 4 x cd @C 4 Do0 C0 CDCts 0 z = ~ 0 CU C P-;. -4.) ts a> 0ac~ " Cd = bo 0 0 L CU

.~ o o + m ba EC ; 4 a.-~ o boo0 ~I4 c- "~ om aa, E ·r, oe d 0 gd Cod 'o " a .-.· ~ E: O a ~ p, (d 4 F>(,a P e9 4O n m4 0 0I~ c"- a · ~8 ~ O ~ -~ o ~ c~ c¢ ra 4 c4D~ I~ (da·? ~$4tn0 cdI : ~~~~~b h *.0wl ' . - * E ,. ,- -Q(1 o t.. ,~ 0 o Ca ~ ".- ' - ~ ::0 " 2 a 0$dEm$4Mm d Cd 0. _ , ~ 0lp-~°~P 4 . a o0 W 10o0 u_.Ed F d PCd0~ ~~ 4 w'cC* Cd; 4 4 CH 0 O .- L cw o > C -> 4 Ca a >~~ OtH U4- ~~a, E 0 C vr,ce I= 8k C & am ·2~m ~~Emm m a C d 3,4Cd Cd 0~~~~ r aEdc0u a Q a C)A dr. 0 l a 4(9 C~~ ~~~~~d CaLF: ( bOE 4 0 bocd 14 4 S.;.0 , 0 Q, CCCwC.) 0 1. 1) .9 0 -p; Cao F cl0Ed v, 00 .0 0ao ' -S 4'- -m ~~~p ~~~c+3 " lu -4S -0 "O Y~~~ g) C, O m 2 m go4r.0>ao bo a (v E 4cd0 UmECa cd4(dO o - rd V hi ckV~~~~~~~~~~~~2

o~ ~a o ~ I o E a o ,-- SCO 3w E C* r, oaCdCdb a); co d ¢ ol a ° $b 4 . o c, eb4 1i) =R iE d Q, P: bO OC ". _ D -§ .rcocoCdCd~I Q o * c~.. >, o .° R 0o

° Q bg =.S.= - S °d O O- ~., W C X.°°0ocdW 4 O ~Q) , cgcd oo .) O 0"~,-r~j I~,m~iJ ' a ~~o 00C5_.a . ' _ ·0 0 w ; El CdE--.(1)0, 00· i .i .,_, CZ ,.O 00-o525

0° o , c 0.m O 0Y bQb4 n =Q 2n S= C)° =E .$4 O 0 P. =d cd C acl ( ) ; E* bo P, = 0 oE oC m 4 J Q C) U m_ = * o cs C) 2 o 'a = CU02 .- ,0 4? cou'ISC.- a) C) C)C .-" z 5 . = corm -~~,~ ~ o h00 0 0IoUha526

El ou· II ~Ea) I W MI= 6 "0M Z =pu 0o o~ij =t) =q Q00Wf.ZLM F al.~ E r & 4J O : o~ EF: rd~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~C-ij=a= CL F'C 3 c s aCZ:: 2 EboV ccl a).2==-~:CE Er,43V'd o v v cd boce V 0 A0M C w c o 0 ww >a a(= ar.ocl 0 W -w wC: Vg >cQ CZ Q X .E; A > U d0oceM Cd~~~~~~~~~~~~0 oCa~ocw -a 9 C4·S~~aa~obBSu0 VE· ~~ ~E~~~ a : =-4a)d d0 ~cl F :b-P so.E ISaou o mE~~~k Cd W 0,oZw MuCa00boaOm>~O cCa 0 m Ecd . ) % MWCd J 4 o > -d C*0cd a Ca o (d a · ~~~0 c c527

._-a -09 > Lo" -6) E ; S 2 0 ° as CX >,w o El > * -Q uh , ~ °c O o b ° s., _ > 3 l Md " o M B 4 tJ0b9 C.) zD q, CX g= Md Oooo0 U2 u 4-a .-~ 0''·E~ ._ -. o iV ry ola 'i ;. v o -r 'd0 ,.' ,o.0 '; :1> :, O.>2°+ ~' a .o · VOo =0. >>o CU M02 CZV d C a4!_u Wu~~~~~~k ~~~~OQ>no¢ OUCH Ee 0C)~l~Oac> 0 0o I$4t V(8)ouu528

Cj a 0 -44o S g °OS.o ;mC> ; = bo 4j EE b&a:.S Go .0 . _.eCd 4-o r 'd·-r' oc,Ofl O) .D-~, o,.., ~, ~ W'~o *_0 , 0c., ~dOS .~YT/0i; ' SoE.) T

tn ^ 4D rVI - I m 0 U\S X°· o a- ~~ a, - m ( b< O 4J 0C* h s o a b >m-3 ; r o >, *;, °S mW 0 4- b o $4.-4 -- mX rA.- = C*_" C)!co O tW A 0)10 N: d4'4--l m m h~ w 44~eWo oC k 0o ,C., 4"O 4s cdw md 3 0;~~cV Q = pdq) Q =~~~~~~~~~ 'aC0aa d d C 4° >< d° gaa c E ,- , 1° 4o* o F - d 4j P._ P7s Cd c F 1 ) o .sl P, = aL cd o 1 C* · 00o R o co.o o '~ ~530 tr. 'a E o 5w0 z E l o F~0C~ -4a4) C m 1oCoi to ld o o Cd~ t0 'g " C Car. c~, ~ ~.~2 0 0·> 4c~ a Fc~l0oEd~~~Co P4 d o W~~w o~0 ) cd r 0 .~M ma 0Rg, a a, E~d 4-)cd d 000 ao~a, C) 0530nt

* al - U>0'lo ' .0 c4 oC) _) co.-.- p d + .- w0 4) .tm b > 89 0-mCd C.)z A Ca o 4 X.~ct F: ah a)44)4UO oG) oE3 0 -o v- -d(Ca ~~o d M~~~~~o r. 01 ) A0"cJw0 w i1-ooQ ~ ,~ oooo '-d .4.) C4.) 4)be 0r S-a IA..4- E-' OS. Q OS'0 U ". c0 bO bOS4 4Zh OS:~ ~4-a J~ .0 0 Sa .5! 0. a)4 94 )~U 0 b4 C4) c 0 C la Go no d ocoCd k ( CmboE*Ca. ~5 C~O BA.In 4. 4.> 04~ .) 4 >0 4~~~ E L Ufl.. 4-EX~~~~~m4 ti! P C4 0 Cd E5I6 -ku0 b cc C~ Q, 'C Q 0 ol ~E Z _ C*bo &4 :3 < bo0 I 4 0 rnn Q ~O O 0 w or.4~ k Cd W 40 6 ~.4-O-oj a E 0 9 '0LbO I rC jco 0Qcou.o >u~~ - 0'" co Ca a "Cd.- 4 4-CAR.- S a -v E.z g 'a Cd r-tA d 4 o~ Pl w a85369 0-49 35 53

k aGoo4-4o .4 m·0r aE4) F2 F 4 =mc, r bor uo 0)M ~ ~~~-, 5 0 00§oC·4 Z5 O~C ~ 9CH u0~~~.-C" "~4) o Ea0D4s~~ · cr~~a ccoP o ,4c o 0o C h h4Cu1 b co02 0 E lao.- C4a 4 Z> C) C) co coiso Ca IGQ S.., kU r.0 co4 B.Ca oPt5 0 44 u&4 co0 co co(co-2 & ~ ". CA 0j 1.~~~&o~c CU. - aco : 5 o rr. Fq W*4.)Cab# ~o QX0co l 0.5 r. ;a - 1 oa0$: oo .N, m0 W ." Ca0 4( r.e X o co0:~0ebo '~a 45C* Ca532 F:70,W 4~Ico532

cocisc.~ U,wo" . 0 E ,ECGk .~~,~C.,. ' >"0'Uf~a:o J 0o S .~c~co~o0 G4 be45 Cd '4 4-5533

APPENDIX VIIIREFERENCES1. MILITARY TERMS.TM 20-205, Dictionary of United States ArmyTerms.Dictionary of United States Military Termsfor Joint Usage.2. LIST OF TRAINING PUBLICATIONS.FM 21-6.3. TRAINING FILMS, FILM STRIPS,AND FILM BULLETINS.FM 21-7, List of War Department Films, FilmStrips, and Recognition Film Slides.4. TRAINING AIDS.FM 21-8, Military Training Aids.5. MEDICAL.AR 40-205, Military Hygiene and Sanitation.AR 40-210, Prevention and Control of CommunicableDiseases of Man.6. CHEMICAL. 'FM 3-5, Characteristics and Employment ofGround Chemical Munitions.534

7. INFANTRY.T/O&E 7-17, Infantry Rifle Company.FM 7-24, Communication in the Infantry Division.FM 7-30, Supply and Evacuation, The InfantryRegiment: Service Company and MedicalDetachment.FM 7-35, Antitank Company, Infantry Regimentand Antitank Platoon, Infantry Battalion.FM 7-37, Cannon Company, Infantry Regiment.8. ARMORED.FM 17-32, Tank Company.9. INDIVIDUAL SOLDIER.FM 21-7, List of War Department Films, FilmStrips and Recognition Film Slides.FM 21-8, Military Training Aids.FM 21-10, Military Sanitation.FM 21-75, Scouting, Patrolling, and Sniping.10. BASIC WEAPONS.FM 23-5, U.S. Rifle, Caliber .30 M1.FM 23-7, U.S. Carbine, Caliber .30 M1 andM1A1.FM 23-15, Browning Automatic Rifle, Caliber.30, M1918A2.FM 23-25, Bayonet.FM 23-30, Hand and Rifle Grenades, Rocket,AT, HE, 2.36-inch.FM 23-32, Rocket Launchers.535

FM 23-35, Pistols and Revolvers.FM 23-55, Browning Machine Guns, Caliber.30, M1917A1, M1919A4, and M1919A6.FM 23-65, Browning Machine Gun, Caliber.50, HB, M2.FM 23-80, 57-mm Rifle, M18.FM 23-85, 60-mm Mortar, M2.11. COMMUNICATION PROCEDURES.FM 24-16, Signal Orders, Records and Reports.FM 24-17, Signal Center and Message CenterProcedure.FM 24-18, Radio Communication.FM 24-20, Field Wire Systems.12. SPECIAL OPERATIONS.FM 31-5, Landing Operations on HostileShores.FM 31-25, Desert Operations.FM 31-40, Supply by Air in Combat Operations.FM 31-50, Attack on a Fortified Position andCombat in Towns.13. MOUNTAIN AND WINTER.FM 70-10, Mountain Operations.FM 70-15, Operations in Snow and ExtremeCold.14. AIRBORNE.FM 71-30, Employment of Airborne Forces.536

TM 71-210, Air Transport of' Troops andEquipment.TM 71-220, Technical Training of Parachutists.15. JUNGLE.FM 72-20, Jungle Warfare.16. FIELD SERVICE REGULATIONS.FM 100-5, Operations.17. STAFF OFFICERS.FM 101-10, Organization, Technical and LogisticalData.537

INDEXParagraph PageAction, zones of ........ 178 192Administrative group, company 4, 11,352 2, 10,345Advance guard:Advance party ...... 22, 24 20,24Point ........... 22, 25, 52 20,24,46Road space ........ 22 20Support . . . . . . . ... 22, 23, 26, 31 20, 23, 24,29Advance party:Characteristics ...... 22, 24 20, 24Contact established .... 121 116Mission .......... 117 112Aid men, company ....... 111, 362 119, 354Airborne assault ....... 391 374Airborne defense .... . 313-315 309Airborne rifle company:Communication ...... 399 379Equipment ....... . 373 358In attack. (See Attack.)Role ........... 371 357Supply and evacuation . 374 358Supporting arms ..... 375 361Air-loading table ....... 385 370Air movement ......... 389 373Air movement table ...... 390 374All-around defense ...... 268 263Alternate firing position .... 7 7Ammunition .......... 357 349Ammunition supply:Rifle company ...... 357 349Rifle platoon ....... 113 111Rifle squad ........ 48 45River crossing . 239 245Weapons platoon ..... 148 159Weapons squad ...... 88 96539

Paragraph PageAntiaircraft security:Rifle company ...... 12 11Rifle company (airborne) . 376 362Rifle platoon ....... 114 111Rifle squad ........ 49 45Weapons platoon ..... 149 160Weapons squad ...... 89 96Antitank defense:Airborne rifle company.. 377 362Front-line company . . . 13, 286 12, 285Reserve company ..... 306 301Rifle platoon ....... 115 111Rifle squad ........ 50 45Weapons platoon ..... 150 160Weapons squad ...... 90 96Approach march (see alsomovement to contact):Rifle dompany ...... 18 16Rifle platoon ....... 116-121 112Weapons platoon ..... 152 161Weapons squad ...... 91-92 96Artillery .......... 181, app. IV 194, 419Assault:Airborne rifle company.(See Airborne assault.)Night attack ....... 224 231Rifle company ...... 191 209Rifle platoon ....... 129 134Rifle squad ........ 71 76Assault fire ........... 72 78Assault landing ........ 391 374Assembly aids (airborne riflecompany) . ....... . 394, 397 377, 378Assembly area:Airborne rifle company.. 393-394,397 376, 377Rifle company 37, 303 35,300Rifle platoon 122 118River crossing ...... 228 235Weapons platoon ..... 153 161540

Pafagraph PageAssistant platoon sergeant .. 111 110As skirmishers ........ 56 55Attack:Airborne rifle company:Assault ....... 405 385Conduct ....... 404 382Organization ..... 380 365Preparations ..... 378-388 363Reorganization . . . 406 385Reserve company . . . 408 386Separated personnel . 400 380Reserve company:Committed .. ..... 199 216Initial position ... . 195 214Missions ....... 197 215Reconnaissance ... . 198 216Successive reservepositions ...... 196 215Rifle company:Assault ........ 191,224 209, 231Conduct ....... 189 205In woods ....... 241-244 245Movement to line ofdeparture ..... 188 205Night attack ..... 200-225 217Pursuit ........ 194 212Reorganization ... . 192, 224 211, 231River line ...... 226-240 234Rifle platoon:Assault ........ 129 134Conduct ....... 128 131Movement across lineof departure .... 127 131Preparations ..... 122-126 118Reorganization ... . 130 136Support platoon . . . 131,280 137,279Rifle squad:Assault ........ 71 76Conduct ....... 70 72541

Attack-Continued Paragraph PageRifle squad-ContinuedConnecting files . . . 53 48Connecting groups . . 75 81Duties ........ 41, 65-67 41, 66Flank patrols ..... 74 81Flank guard . . . 54 52Movement across lineof departure . ... 69 72Preparations ..... 61-68 61Reorganization .... 73 81Support squad ... . 76 82Weapons platoon:Displacement ..... 162 171Firing positions . . 157 166Preparations .... . 153-159 161Reorganization ... . 163 172Supporting fires . . 161 171Weapons squad:Displacement ..... 102 103Firing positions . . . 100, 160-163 102, 170Preparations ..... 93-99 97Reorganization .... 103 103Supporting fires . . . 101 102Attack position:Night attack ....... 212 224Rifle company ....... 38 38River crossing ...... 228, 234 235, 242Attack, special operations ... 266 262Automatic rifle ........ 6 5Avenues of approach ..... 269 265Bayonet .... 5 3Boundaries .......... 178, 276 192, 274Briefing for airborne attack.. 383 369Bugler . ..... 11, 346 10, 336Burial of dead . ........ 359 352Carbine .......... . 5 3Challenge and password . . . . 220 229Characteristics of infantry . . . 3 2542

ParagraphPageClothing and equipment .... 356 348Column:March .......... App. II 393Platoon .......... 120; app. II 114; 393Route and tactical ... . 18 16Squad .......... 56; app. II 55, 393Combat formations ...... 120; app. II 114; 393Combat outpost ........ 320-323 315Command group, company. .. 4 2Command post:In attack ......... 185 202In defense:Front-line company 284 284Reserve company . 305 301Rifle platoon ..... 138 149Communication:Airborne rifle company . 399 379Attack in woods ..... 243 247Night attack ....... 222 230Night withdrawal ..... 340 331Rifle company:Communication coordination....... 349 342Equipment ...... 347 338In attack ....... 187 204Orders ........ 350 343Personnel ...... 346 336Use of communication . 348 338Rifle platoon ....... 112 111River crossing ...... 240 245Communication sergeant . . . 11,346 10, 336Company:Clerk .......... . 11 10Headquarters ...... 4, 10-11 2, 8Messengers . . . . . ... 11, 346, 348 10,336, 338Records .......... 351 344Concealment .......... 70, 269 72, 265Connecting files ....... . 53 48543

ParagraphPageConnecting groups:Rifle company ....... 183 201Rifle platoon ....... 128 131Rifle squad ........ 75 81Continuation of attack ..... 407 386Control:March objectives; .... . 19 18Phase lines ........ 19 18Rifle company:In attack ....... 190 206In infiltration ... . 263 257In woods ....... 243 247Rifle platoon ....... 112 111Weapons platoon:57-mm rifle section . 145 15760-mm mortar section. 145 157Control point (airborne) ... . 395 377Counterattack ......... 298 298Cover and concealment ... . 70,269 72, 265Covering force ......... 335, 341 328, 332Cover position ......... 7 7Crew-served weapons:Automatic rifle ...... 6 5Caliber .50 machine gun .. 6 5Light machine gun ... . 6 560-mm mortar ...... 6 557-mm rifle ........ 6 5Rocket launcher ..... 6 5Critical terrain features ... . 269 265Defense:Airborne rifle company . 409 386Antiairborne ...... . 313-315 309Front-line company:Antitank ....... 286 285Boundaries ...... 276 274Command post ... . 284 284Company order . .. 273; app. I 273; 388Conduct ....... 289 288544

Defense-Continued Paragraph PageFront-line company-ContinuedDepth ........ 275 274Employment ..... 267 263Fire plan ....... 282 282Frontage ....... 274 274Limiting points . . . 277 275Local security ... . 324 318Mission ........ 270 268Night dispositions . 288 287Observation posts . 283, 292 283, 292Organization of ground 285 284Relief ........ 290 291Reverse slope ..... 291-293 292Support platoon . . . 280 279Troop leading procedure....... 272 269In woods ......... 312 308On a river line ....... 311 307On a wide front ...... 309 303Perimeter ......... 310 304Reserve rifle company:Antitank ....... 306 301Assembly area ... . 303 300Command post ... . 305 301Conduct ....... 307 302Counterattacking . . 298 298Missions ....... 295-300 297Observation posts . . 304 301Organization of ground 302 300Weapons platoon . . . 301 299Rifle platoon:Command post ... . 138 149Conduct ....... 140 151Distribution of squads 136 146Fire plan ...... 137 147Frontage and depth . 135,279 145, 277Order ........ 134 144Organization of ground 139 150Security ....... 141 152545

Defense-Continued Paragraph PageRifle platoon-ContinuedTactical employmentTroop-leading procedure132 141.......Rifle squad:133 142Conduct ....... 82 89Firing positions . . 79 87Mission ....... 78 85Order ........ 80 88Organization ofposition ...... 81 89Security ....... 83 91Weapons platoon:Conduct ....... 170 182Leaders ....... 168 179Occupation of positions 169 180Orders ....... 1 167 177Sectors of fire .... 166 176Selection of positions. 165 175Tactical employment . 164 174Target areas ..... 166 176'Weapons squad:Conduct ....... 109 107Firing positions . . . 106 105Mission ... ... . 105 105Order . ........ 107 106Organization ofposition ...... 108 106Defense, principles of ..... 268,314 263,309Delaying action ........ 331, 343-344 326, 334Depth in defense . . . . . . 135, 275 145, 274Diamond, squad ........ 56; app. II 55; 393Displacement:60-mm mortar section inattack .........57-mm rifle section in162 171attack ......... 162 171Weapons squad ...... 102 103Drivers ........... . 143, 367 155,356546

Paragraph PageDuties:Administrative group . . . 11, 352 10, 345Aid men ......... 111,362 110, 354Company commander . . . 10, 352, 359 8, 345, 352Company headquarters . 11 10Rifle platoon:Aid man ....... 111 110Assistant platoonsergeant ...... 111 110Messengers ..... 111 110Platoon leader ... . 111 110Platoon sergeant . . . 111 110Rifle squad:Assistant squad leader 41, 58, 66 41, 58, 68Squad leader ..... 41, 58, 65 41, 58,66Squad members . . . 67 68Weapons platoon:Headquarters .... 143, 168 155, 179Section and squadleaders ...... 144 155Weapons squad:Leaders ....... 85 94Echelon, right (left) ...... 120; app. II 114; 393Emplacement, weapons .... App. V 433Equipment (airborne riflecompany) .......... 373 358Equipment, communication.(See Communication.)Estimate of situation:Company commander , . . 173 185Platoon leader ...... 124 119Evacuation of wounded .... 363 354Executive officer, company.. . 11 10Field exercises ........ App. VII 471Fields of fire .......... 269 265Fire and maneuver ....... 3,46, 70 2, 44, 72Fire, conduct of:60-mm mortar section... 146 158853696 0--49 -- 547

I'aragraph PageFire, conduct of-Continued57-mm rifle section .... 146 158Light machine gun team . 86 95Rocket launcher team... 86 95Fire control .......... 43 41Fire discipline ........ 44 42Fire distribution ....... 45 42Fire plan:Rifle company ...... 282 282Rifle platoon ....... 137 147Fires, supporting ....... 181; app. IV 194; 419Firing positions:Light machine gun team 7, 97-100, 7, 100, 102106, 160-163 105, 17060-mm mortar section... 7, 157 7, 16657-mm rifle section .... 7, 157 7, 166Rifle squad ....... 79 87Rocket launcher team . . . 7, 97 7, 100First sergeant ........ 11 10Flank guard:Rifle company ...... 28 27Rifle platoon ....... 118 114Rifle squad ........ 54 52Flank security:Advance guard ...... 26 24On raids ......... 256 254Rifle platoon ....... 128 131Flexibility . ......... 268 263Flight manifest ........ 385 370Food and water ..... ... 354 347Foot marches ......... . 20 20Formations (see also Combatformations, app. II):TRifle company:Movement to contact . 18 16Night attack ..... 210 222River crossing .... 232 241Woods ........ 243 247Rifle platoon ....... 120 114548

Paragraph PageFormations-ContinuedRifle squad ....... . 56 55Support of advance guard. 22, 23, 26, 31 20, 23, 24, 29Frontages:In defense ........ 135, 274, 145,274279,309 277,303Fuel ............. 355 348General outpost ........Grenade:319 314Hand ........... 5 3Rifle . ..........Ground, organization of:5 3Front-line company . . . 285 284Reserve company ..... 302 300Hasty defense ........ 287 286Heavy weapons company . . . App. IV 419Identification (airborne) . . . 396 378Illuminated night attack . . . . 203, 225 218, 233Illuminating devices ...... 211 224Individual weapons:Bayonet ....... ... 5 3Carbine .......... 5 3Hand grenade ....... 5 3Pistol . .......... 5 3Rifle . .......... 5 3Rifle grenade ........ 5 3Sniper's rifle ....... 5 3Infantry-tank team ...... 181 194Infiltration .......... 263-265 257.Key terrain .......... 268 263Kitchen, company ...... . 354 347Limiting points ........ 277 275Limit of advance ....... 217 228Line of departure (see alsoPoint of departure):Rifle company . . . . .. 177, 188,213 191,205, 225549

ParagraphPageLine of departure-ContinuedRifle platoon ....... 127 131Rifle squad ........ 64, 69 64, 72Line of deployment ....... 216 228Line, platoon . . . . . . ... 120; app. II 114; 393Listening post ......... 324 318Litter bearers ......... 363 354Loading (airborne) ...... 384,387-388 370, 371Local security ......... 324 318Machine gun:Light ........... 6 5Caliber .50 ........ 6 5Maneuver, scheme of . . . . .. 175 189Marches:Foot ........... 20 20Motor .......... 29-34 29March objectives ....... 19 18March outpost:Rifle platoon ....... 119 114Rifle squad ........ 55 52Marshalling camp ....... 382 368Medical platoon ........ 363 354Medical service:Evacuation ........ 363 354Orders .......... . 364 355Personnel and duties . .. 361-362 353Sanitation ........ 365 355Messengers:Rifle company ...... 11, 346 10, 336Rifle platoon ....... 111 110Weapons platoon ..... 143 155Mess location ......... 354 347.Mission:Front-line company ... . 270 268Infiltration forces ..... 263 257Reserve company ..... 197, 295-300 215, 297Rifle company ...... 2 1Support platoon ...... 131 137Mortar, 60-mm ....... . 6 5550

Paragraph. PageMortar company, heavy . . . . 181; app. IV 194; 419Motorized detachment .... . 34 31Motor maintenance:Drivers .......... 367 356Higher echelon ...... 368 356Responsibility ...... 366 355Motor marches. (See Marches.)Movement at night:Covered ......... . 36 35Uncovered ....... . 35 32Movement to contact:Classification ...... . 16 15Covered ......... 16 15Definition ........ 15 15Phases .......... 17 16Rifle company . . . . .. 15,35 15, 32Rifle platoon:Actions when contactis established .... 121 116Advance party .... 117 112Combat formations . . 120; app. II 114; 393Flank guard ..... 118 114March outpost . . . . 119 114,Rifle squad ........ 51 45Uncovered ........ 16 15Weapons platoon ..... 151-152 160Weapons squad ...... 91-92 96Mutual support ........ 268 263Night attack:Considerations in planning:Attack positions . . 212 224Communication . . . 222 230Company order .... 223 230Formations ..... 210 222Identification .... 220 229Illumination devices . 211 224Limit of advance... 217 228Line or point of departure...... 213 225551

Night attack-Continued Paragraph PageConsiderations in planning-ContinuedManeuver ...... 221 230Platoon release point. 215 225Probable line of depployment...... 216 228Routes to objective. . 214 225Secrecy measures . 219 229Time of attack ... . 209 221Rifle company:Characteristics ... . 202 217Conduct ....... 224 231Control ........ 208 220Illuminated .... . 225 233Plan of attack ..... 207 219Purpose ...... . 201 217Reconnaissance ... . 206 219Supported or unsupported..... 204,205 219Types ........ 203 218Night dispositions in defense . 288 287Objectives .......... 19, 174,403 18, 188, 381Observation and fields of fire. 269, 283 265,'283Observation post (see alsoDefense):Front-line company . . . 173, 283, 292 185, 283,292Reserve company ..... 304 301Rifle platoon ....... 138 149Obstacles ........... 269 265Off-carrier position ...... 7 7Orderly ....... .... 11,346 10,336Orders:Battalion:For a raid ...... 249 251In attack ..... ... 172 184Rifle company ....... 173 185For retrograde movement........ 333 326552

Orders-Continued Paragraph PageRifle company-ContinuedIn a raid ...... . 249 251In attack . . . ... . 123; app. I 118; 388In defense . . . . . . 273; app. I 273; 388In night attack .... 223 230In river crossing . . . 233 241Rifle platoon .... . . 134 144Rifle squad ....... . 68, 80 70, 88Weapons platoon ... . 94, 159, 167 98, 168, 177Weapons squad ..... . 94, 99,107 98, 101, 106Orders, operations ...... App. I 388Organization:Airborne rifle company .. 372 358Combat outpost ...... 321 316For a raid ....... . 251 252Rifle company ...... . . 4 2Rifle platoon .... .. ·.4, 110 2, 110Rifle squad ....... . 40 41Weapons platoon:60-mm mortar section. 4, 142 2, 15457-mm rifle section . . 4, 142 2,154Weapons squad ...... 84 94Organization in depth ..... 268 263Organization of ground ... . 81, 108 89, 106139, 285, 302 150, 284, 300Outguard .......... . 83 91Outposts ........... 317-323 311Parking diagram (airborne) . 386 371Password. (See Challenge andpassword.)Patrols ........... . 74, 83, 256 81, 91, 254Perimeter defense ....... 310 304Personnel:Communication ...... 346 336Medical ......... . 362 354Mess ........... 352 345Supply ......... . 352 345Phase lines .......... 19 18553

ParagraphPagePistol ............. 5 3Platoon column. (See Column,platoon.)Platoon leader .... .. ... 111 110Platoon line .......... 120; app. II 114; 393Platoon release point ..... 215 225Platoon sergeant . . . . . .. 111 110Platoons of heavy weaponscompany .......... 181; app. IV 194; 419Point of advance guard .... 22 20Point of departure ...... 69, 127, 72, 131177, 188, 213 191,205, 225Position, organization of:Reverse slope ....... 292 292Rifle squad ........ 81 89Weapons squad ...... 108 106Positions:Alternate ......... 7 7Attack .......... 38 38Cover ........... 7 7Off-carrier ........ 7 7Primary ......... 7 7Supplementary ...... 7 7Positions and duties of:Assistant squad leader . . 41, 66 41,68Squad leader ....... 41, 65, 85, 41, 66, 94144, 168 155, 179Primary fiiing position ... . 7 7Principles of defense ..... 268 263Pursuit ............ 194 221Radio ............ . 347 338Radiotelephone operators . . . 11,346 10,336Raids:Characteristics ...... 247 250Defined .......... 245 250Purpose ......... 246 250Supported ........ 249-260 251Types ........... 248 250Unsupported ........ 261 256554

Paragraph PageRallying points ........ 255 254Range estimation ....... 87 95Rations ............ 354 347Rear guard .......... 327 322Rear party .......... 327 322Rear point .......... 327 322Reconnaissance:Airborne rifle company.. 381, 401 367, 380Night attack ....... 206 219Raid ........... 250 251Reserve company ..... 198 216Rifle company ....... 173, 272 185, 269Rifle platoon ....... 124, 133 119; 142River line attack ..... 227 235Records, company ...... . 3651 344Rehearsal for a raid ...... 258 255Relief in defense ........ 290 291Reorganization:Airborne rifle company . 392,402, 406 376, 380, 385Rifle company ...... . 192, 224 211, 231Rifle platoon ....... 130 136Rifle squad ........ 73 81Weapons platoon ..... 163 172Weapons squad ...... 103 103Reserve company ...... . 195-199 214Retirement .......... 330 326Retrograde movements:Daylight withdrawals . 329, 342 325, 332Defined .......... 328 324Delaying actions ..... 331,343,344 326, 334, 335Night withdrawals ... . 334-341 327Retirement ........ 330 326Reverse slope ......... 291-293 292Rifle ............. 5 3Rifle, 57-mm ........ . 6 5Rifle company, airborne. (SeeAirborne rifle company.)Rifle company:As advance guard . . .. 27, 32 27,30555

Paragraph PageRifle company-ContinuedAs flank guard ...... 28 27As motorized detachment . 34 31As part of the main body. 21 20Attack preparations . . . 171-173 184In attack. (See Attack.)In defense:Employment ..... 267 263Principles of defense . 268-269 263Terrain study ... . 269 265Organization ....... 4Rifle platoon: ·2Ammunition supply . . . 113 111Antiaircraft defense . . . 114 111Antitank defense .... 115 111As support ........ 131, 280 137, 279Control and communication 112 111Duties .......... 111 110In attack. (See Attack.)In defense. (See Defense.)Movement to contact. (SeeMovement to contact.)Organization ...... . 4, 110 2, 110Rifle, sniper's ......... 5 3Rifle squad:Ammunition supply . . 48 45Antiaircraft security . . . 49 45Antitank defense ..... 50 45Connecting files ...... 53 48Duties .......... 41, 65-66 41, 66Fire control ....... 43 41Fire discipline ...... 44 42Fire distribution ..... 45 42Flank guard ....... 54 52Formations ........ 56;'app. It 55; 393In attack. (See Attack.)In defense. (See Defense.)March outpost .... . . 55 52Movement to contact . . . 51 45556

ParagraphPageRifle squad-ContinuedOrganization ....... 40 41Point of advance guard . 22, 24-25 20,24Security ......... 59 58Support ......... 96 99Target designation ... . 42 41River line. (See Attack anddefense.)Road blocks .......... 325 320Rocket launcher ........ 6 5Rolls ............. 358 352Route column ......... 18 16Sanitation .......... .Security:365 355Airborne rifle company.. 398 379In assembly area ..... 39 40In attack ......... 59, 131, 183 58, 137, 201In defense ........ 317-327 311Local ........... 141, 324 152, 318Night withdrawal ... . 338 329Of advance guard .... 26 24Perimeter defense ... . 310 304River crossing ......Security missions, rifle company:238 244Assembly area outposts 318 311Combat outpost .....Defense of rear installations320-323 315.......... 326 322General outpost ..... 319 314Local security ...... 141, 324 152, 318Rear guard ........ 327 322Roadblocks and defense ofobstacles ........ 325 320Sentinel post ......... 324 318Sergeant:Communication ...... 11, 346 10, 336Rifle platoon ....... 111 110Weapons platoon ..... 143 155557

Paragraph PageShock action ......... 3 2Signal communication. (Seecommunication.)Signal equipment ...... . 347 338Signals ............ 347, 348; 338; 413app. IIISkirmishers .......... 56 55Snipers ............ 47 45Sniper's rifle ......... 5 3Squad column. (See Column,squad.)Squad diamond. (See Diamond,squad.)Supplementary firing position.Supply:7 7Airborne rifle company . 374 359Rifle company:Administrative groupduties .......Ammunition and explosives352 345........ 357 349Clothing and equipment 356 348Food and water . . . 354 347Fuel ......... 355 348Miscellaneous administration...... 359 352Orders ........ 360 353Rolls ......... 358 352Transportation ... . 353 347Supply discipline .......Support of-352 345Advance guard . . . . .. 22-23, 26 20, 24Rear guard ........ 327 322Rifle company ....... 131, 179, 137, 194,Supporting arms (airborne190,280 206,279rifle company) ....... 375 361Supporting fires (see App. IV):Heavy mortar company.. 181 194558

Paragraph PageSupporting fires-Continued 'Heavy weapons company . 181 194Rifle company ...... 70, 190 72, 206Tanks .......... 181 194Weapons platoon ...... 161 171Weapons squad ...... 101 102Switchboards ......... 347 338Tactical column ........ 18 16Tactical employment:Light machine gun team . 96 99Rifle company ...... 9, 132, 267 8, 141, 263Rifle platoon ....... 96, 132 99, 141Rocket launcher team. .. 96 99Weapons platoon:In attack ....... 156 165In defense ...... 164 174Tank company, heavy ..... 181; app. IV 194; 419Target areas:60-mm mortar section . 166 17657-mm rifle section ... . 166 176Target designation ...... 42 41Targets:Light machine gun section 98 12160-mm mortar section . . 158 16857-mm rifle section ... . 158 168Rocket launcher section.. 98 121Terrain study ........ -. 269 265Training program ...... App. VI 451Transportation ....... . 8, 353 7, 347Troop leading procedure:Rifle company:In attack ...... 173 185In defense ...... 272 269Rifle platoon:In attack ...... 124 119In defense ...... 133 142Rifle squad ........ 63 63Weapons platoon ... . 155 163Weapons squad ...... 95 98559

~."¢: Paragraph PageVee, platoon .... or. , ;' app. II 114; 393Water ......... 354 347Weapons emplacements ... . App. V 433Weapons platoon:Ammunition supply . . . 148 159Antiaircraft security . . . 149 160Antitank defense ..... 150 160Conduct of fire ...... 146 158Control .......... 145 157Duties of personnel ... . 143-144 155In attack (see also Attack) 180 194In defense (see alsoDefense) . . . . . ... 301 299Movement to contact. (SeeMovement to contact.)Observation ....... 147 158Organization ....... 4, 142 2, 154Weapons squad: *Ammunition supply . . . 88 96Antiaircraft security . . . 89 96Antitank defense ..... 90 96Conduct of fire ...... 86 95Duties of leaders ..... 85 94In attack. (See Attack.)In defense. (See Defense.)Organization ....... 84 94Range estimation ..... 87 95Wedge, platoon ........ 120; app. II 114; 393Withdrawal:Daylight ........ . 342 332Defined ........ '.. 329 325From action ....... 329 325From combat outpost . .. 323 318In a raid ......... 257 254Night .......... 334-341 327Zones of action ........ 178 192560* U. S. WoI NTIN OMFFNG ICE: 0-1949